2015 Mitsubishi Lancer 104439 PDF

BK0210300US.
book 1 ページ２０１４年４月８日　火曜日　午前１０時４６分
Introduction Throughout this manual the words WARNING and CAUTION

appear.
N09200102097
These are reminders to be especially careful. Failure to follow the
Thank you for buying a MITSUBISHI LANCER. instructions could result in personal injury or damage to your vehi-
cle.
We are confident you will enjoy your vehicle. It has been engineered
for optimum performance, durability and comfort. By thoroughly
reading this Owner’s Manual, you will gain an understanding of the
many features that are included in the LANCER. The Owner’s Manual Indicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or death if
contains descriptions and illustrations that will assist in the operation instructions are not followed.
and maintenance of your vehicle.
Your Authorized Mitsubishi Motors Dealer will be happy to assist you Points out hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor
with any further questions you may have regarding the operation of personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
your vehicle.
Please note that this manual applies to all LANCER models and You will see another important symbol:
explains all features including options. Some features explained in this NOTE Gives helpful information.
manual may not be installed on your vehicle.
Please leave this Owner’s Manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. WARNING
The next owner will appreciate having access to the information con-  Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
tained here. nents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
This manual includes instructions for standard and optional equipment certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
available at the time of printing. Mitsubishi Motors Corporation nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of Califor-
nia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and to
make additions or improvements in its product without assuming any
obligation to install these on previously manufactured products.
©2014 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation Printed in Japan

BK0210300US.book 1 ページ２０１４年４月８日　火曜日　午前１０時４６分
Table of contents
Overview 1
Quick index 2
General information 3
Seat and restraint systems 4
Features and controls 5
Driving safety 6
Comfort controls 7
For emergencies 8
Vehicle care and maintenance 9
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10
Specifications 11
Alphabetical index 12
Instruments and controls (Driver’s area)
1 Instruments and controls (Driver’s area)

N00100202498
Except for RALLIART
Instrument cluster P.5-108 Sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter

Multi-information meter switch P.5-111 (if so equipped) P.5-66
Combination headlights and dimmer

switch P.5-147
Turn signal lever P.5-152 Wiper and washer switch
Front fog light switch (if so equipped) P.5-154
P.5-153
Cruise control switches (if so
equipped) P.5-97
Steering wheel audio remote
control switches (if so equipped)
P.5-161
Ignition switch P.5-53
Headlight leveling switch
(if so equipped) P.5-152 Supplemental restraint system - air-
Active stability control (ASC) bag (for driver’s seat) P.4-21
OFF switch (if so equipped) Horn switch P.5-159
P.5-94
Fuses P.9-29 Steering wheel tilt lock lever

P.5-50
Supplemental restraint system - driver’s knee airbag

P.4-21
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) P.5-159
Engine hood release lever P.9-3
1-1 Overview
Instruments and controls (Driver’s area)
RALLIART 1
Instrument cluster P.5-108
Sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter
Multi-information meter switch P.5-111 P.5-76
Combination headlights and dimmer switch

P.5-147
Turn signal lever P.5-152 Wiper and washer switch
Front fog light switch P.5-153 P.5-154
Cruise control switches

Steering wheel audio remote control P.5-97
switches P.5-161
Ignition switch P.5-53
Headlight leveling switch

(if so equipped) P.5-152
Active stability control (ASC) OFF Supplemental restraint system -
switch P.5-94 airbag (for driver’s seat) P.4-21
Horn switch P.5-159
Fuses P.9-29 Steering wheel tilt lock lever P.5-50
Supplemental restraint system - driver’s knee airbag

P.4-21
Engine hood release lever P.9-3 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface P.5-159
Overview 1-2
Instruments and controls
1 Instruments and controls

N00100202502
Except for RALLIART Supplemental restraint system - airbag (for front

Gearshift or selector lever P.5-59, 5-61 passenger’s seat) P.4-21
Vents P.7-2
Glove compart-
ment P.5-188
USB input ter-
minal (if so
equipped)
P.5-181
Parking brake lever
P.5-48 Drive mode-selector (if so equipped) P.5-84
Trunk lid release lever
P.5-39
Cup holder (for front seats) P.5-190
Fuel tank filler door

release lever P.3-4 Heated seat switch (if so equipped) P.4-5
Floor console box (if so equipped) P.5-189

12 V power outlet (if so equipped) Tissue holder (if so equipped) P.5-189
P.5-184
1-3 Overview
Instruments and controls
RALLIART
Gearshift lever P.5-70
Supplemental restraint system - airbag (for 1
front passenger’s seat) P.4-21
Vents P.7-2
Glove compart-
ment
P.5-188
USB input terminal
P.5-181
Parking brake lever

P.5-48 ACD control mode
Trunk lid release lever Cup holder (for front switch P.5-82
P.5-39 seats) P.5-190
Fuel tank filler door Heated seat switch

release lever P.3-4 (if so equipped)
P.4-5
Floor console box P.5-189

Tissue holder P.5-189
Twin Clutch SST control mode switch
P.5-75
12 V power outlet P.5-184
Overview 1-4
Center panel
1 Center panel
N00100701207
Type 1 Type 2
Audio (if so equipped) P.7-29 DISPLAY AUDIO (if so equipped)

DISPLAY AUDIO (if so equipped) Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System (if so equipped)
Refer to the separated owner’s manual Refer to the separated owner’s manual
Front passenger seat belt warn- Front passenger seat belt warn-
Hazard warning flasher switch ing light P.4-12 Hazard warning flasher switch ing light P.4-12
P.5-153 P.5-153
Passenger’s airbag
Passenger’s airbag off Electric rear window Electric rear window
off indicator P.4-26
indicator P.4-26 defogger switch defogger switch
P.5-158 P.5-158
Heater (if so equipped) Air conditioning

P.7-4 P.7-17, 7-22
Air conditioning (if so equipped)
P.7-7, 7-12, 7-17, 7-22
Auxiliary Audio connecter (RCA) (if so 12 V power outlet P.5-184 Front console box
equipped) P.7-53 P.5-189
12 V power outlet
P.5-184
Front console tray P.5-189
1-5 Overview
Interior
Interior 1
N00100302242
Electric remote-con-
Dome light (Front)/Reading lights (if so
trolled outside mirror Sunroof switch (if so
equipped) P.5-186, 9-36, 9-46
Window lock switch P.5-46 switch P.5-52 equipped) P.5-46
Power window switches Power door lock switch

P.5-44 P.5-37
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface microphone (if so equipped) P.5-159
Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor Inside rearview mirror

(for front seats) P.4-12 P.5-50
Seat belts P.4-8
Sun visors P.5-184

Vanity mirror P.5-184
Bottle holder (for front seat) P.5-191
Front seats P.4-3
Supplemental restraint system - side airbag

Head restraints P.4-6 (for front seats, if so equipped) P.4-33
Overview 1-6
Interior
1
Supplemental restraint system - curtain airbag (if so equipped) P.4-33
Coat hook (if so equipped) P.5-192

Dome light (Rear, if so equipped) P.5-186, 9-36, 9-47
Assist grip P.5-191
Rear seat P.4-5
Tether anchors for child restraint system Cup holder (for rear seat, if so equipped) P.5-191
P.4-17
Arm rest (if so equipped) P.4-6
1-7 Overview
Trunk area
Trunk area 1
N00100500413
Inside emergency trunk lid release lever

Trunk area light P.9-36, 9-48 P.5-41
Spare tire P.8-7
AWC control fluid reservoir

(RALLIART) P.9-12
Jack P.8-5
Tools P.8-5
Overview 1-8
Outside (Front)
1 Outside (Front)
N00100602492
Except for RALLIART Sunroof (if so equipped) P.5-46 Locking and unlocking P.5-35
Keyless entry system
Windshield wiper and washer (if so equipped) P.5-7
P.5-154 F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand
Advanced Security Transmitter)
Engine compartment P.9-5 (if so equipped) P.5-12
Engine hood P.9-3
Fuel tank filler

P.3-4
Outside rearview mirrors P.5-52

Side turn signal lights (if so equipped)
P.5-152, 9-34
Side turn signal lights (if so equipped) P.5-152, 9-34
Front fog lights (if so equipped) P.5-153, 9-34, 9-41
[Except for vehicles with high intensity discharge headlights type] [For vehicles with high intensity discharge headlights type]
Front turn signal lights P.5-152, 9-34, 9-40 Front turn signal lights P.5-152, 9-34, 9-40
Front side-marker and park-

Front side-marker and parking
ing lights P.5-147, 9-34, 9-40
lights P.5-147, 9-34, 9-39
Headlights, low beam
P.5-147, 9-34, 9-36
Headlights, low/high beam
Daytime running lights (if
Headlights, high beam P.5-147, 9-34, 9-39
so equipped) P.9-34, 9-38 Daytime running lights P.9-34, 9-38
P.5-147, 9-34, 9-37
1-9 Overview
Outside (Front)
RALLIART
Sunroof (if so equipped) P.5-46
Locking and unlocking P.5-35 1
Windshield wiper and washer (if so equipped) P.5-7
P.5-154 F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand
Advanced Security Transmitter)
(if so equipped) P.5-12
Engine compartment P.9-5
Engine hood P.9-3
Fuel tank filler P.3-4
Outside rearview mirrors P.5-52

Side turn signal lights P.5-152, 9-34
Front fog lights P.5-153, 9-34, 9-42
[Except for vehicles with high intensity discharge headlights type] [For vehicles with high intensity discharge headlights type]
Front turn signal lights P.5-152, 9-34, 9-40 Front turn signal lights P.5-152, 9-34, 9-40
Front side-marker and parking Front side-marker and park-

lights P.5-147, 9-34, 9-39 ing lights P.5-147, 9-34, 9-40
Headlights, low beam
P.5-147, 9-34, 9-36 Headlights, low/high beam
Daytime running lights (if so P.5-147, 9-34, 9-39
Headlights, high beam equipped) P.9-34, 9-38 Daytime running lights P.9-34, 9-38
P.5-147, 9-34, 9-37
Overview 1-10
Outside (Rear)
1 Outside (Rear)
N00100602362
Except for RALLIART
Antenna P.7-62 Tire inflation pressure P.9-21

Changing tires P.8-6
Tire rotation P.9-23
Wheel covers (if so equipped) P.8-11
High-mounted stop light P.9-34 Tire chains P.9-24
Tire pressure monitoring system P.5-102
Trunk lid P.5-39
Rear-view camera
(if so equipped)
P.5-106
Trunk lid OPEN switch

(if so equipped) P.5-14 Rear side-marker lights P.5-147, 9-34, 9-44
License plate lights

P.5-147, 9-34, 9-45 Rear turn-signal lights P.5-152, 9-34, 9-44
Back-up lights
P.9-34, 9-44
Tail and stop lights P.5-147, 9-34, 9-44
Tail lights P.5-147, 9-34, 9-44
1-11 Overview
Outside (Rear)
RALLIART 1
Antenna P.7-62
Tire inflation pressure P.9-21
Changing tires P.8-6
Tire rotation P.9-23
High-mounted stop light P.9-34 Tire chains P.9-24
Tire pressure monitoring system P.5-102
Trunk lid P.5-39
Rear-view camera
(if so equipped)
P.5-106
Trunk lid OPEN switch

(if so equipped) Rear side-marker lights P.5-147, 9-34, 9-44
P.5-14
License plate lights

P. 5-147, 9-34, 9-45 Rear turn-signal lights P.5-152, 9-34, 9-44
Back-up lights
P.9-34, 9-44
Tail lights P.5-147, 9-34, 9-44 Tail and stop lights P.5-147, 9-34, 9-44
Overview 1-12
If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

2
N00200702191
NOTE
 For information regarding warning displays in the multi-information display, refer to “Multi-information display indicators” on page 5-110.
 These warning lights will come on for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to “ON”.
Warning light Do this Ref. page
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your P.5-145
choice for assistance.
Charging system warning light
 If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the parking brake is
fully released.
 If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake, stop and check the
or brake fluid level. P.5-144
 If the brake fluid level is correct, there may be a system malfunction. Avoid
Brake warning light hard braking and high speeds, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance.
 Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, have
the engine system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
or repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. If the vehicle is not driv-
able, contact emergency roadside assistance at 1-888-648-7820 (for vehi- P.5-144
Engine malfunction indicator cles sold in U.S.A.) or 1-888-576-4878 (for vehicles sold in Canada), an
(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, or local towing company for assis-
light”) tance.
Quick index 2-1


Warning light Do this Ref. page
 When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning
2 and only the ordinary braking system is functioning.
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.
P.5-92,
Test the system as described on page 5-92.
5-92
 If the light does not go out after the test, or if it comes on again, we recom-
Anti-lock braking system warning light mend that you have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.
 Immediately have the airbag and the pre-tensioner seat belt system checked P.4-14,
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. 4-27
SRS warning light

 If the warning light comes on, you should stop and adjust the tires to the
proper inflation pressure as soon as possible.
(See “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-21.)
Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few
minutes of driving.
P.5-103
 If the warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated, the system is not operating properly. If the sys-
Tire pressure monitoring system warning light tem returns to normal, the warning light will go off. If the warning light
does not go off, have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
2-2 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

2
N00200900838
Problem Do this Ref. Page

Cannot turn the key. When using a key to start the engine
(When using a key to start the Will not turn from “LOCK” to “ACC”.
engine) Turn the key while turning the steering wheel in either direction.
Will not turn from “ACC” to “LOCK”.
Vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT) or Twin Clutch SST: P.5-54,
Check the position of the selector lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever (Twin Clutch SST). 5-55
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever (Twin
Clutch SST) is set to the “P” (PARK) position.
Vehicles with manual transaxle:
Place the key at the “ACC” position. Push the key in and turn it.
(When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the engine
the engine) Will not turn from “LOCK (PUSH OFF)” to “ACC”.
Push the ignition switch again, turn the steering wheel in both directions and then turn
the ignition switch.
Will not turn from “ACC” to “LOCK”.
P.5-12
Vehicles with CVT or Twin Clutch SST:
Check whether the selector lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever (Twin Clutch SST) is set to
the “P” (PARK) position.
Vehicles with manual transaxle:
Place the ignition switch at the “ACC” position. Push the ignition switch in and turn it.
The F.A.S.T.-key does not operate.
(for vehicles equipped with the Use the emergency key to lock and unlock the doors and start the engine. P.5-23
F.A.S.T.-key)
Quick index 2-3


Problem Do this Ref. Page
Cannot shift the selector lever (CVT)
2 or the gearshift lever (Twin Clutch Shift the selector lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever (Twin Clutch SST) while pressing
SST) from the “P” (PARK) position. the brake pedal. P.5-61, 5-70
(for vehicles with CVT or Twin Check that the ignition key or ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
Clutch SST)
The windows are fogged up.
P.7-6, 7-12,
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” or “ ” position.
7-17,
2. Turn on the blower. 7-22, 7-27
The engine does not start.

The lights do not come on.
P.8-2,
The lights are dim. Have the battery checked. Recharge or replace as needed.
9-14
The horn does not honk.
The horn sound is weak.
2-4 Quick index


Problem Do this Ref. page
The engine coolant temperature dis-
play “ ” in the multi-information
2
display is flashing.
Steam comes out of the engine com-
partment.
Type 1
The engine is overheated.

P.8-4
Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Type 2
1. Slowly press down on the accelerator pedal to get your vehicle moving again. For
vehicle equipped with the Electronically controlled 4WD system, set the drive mode-
If your vehicle becomes stuck in selector to the “4WD AUTO” or “4WD LOCK” position and then slowly press down
P.8-14
sand, mud or snow on the accelerator pedal to get your vehicle moving.
2. If there is nothing to stop your tires from slipping, rock your vehicle back and forth to
free it.
WARNING
 When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that no one is near the vehicle. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to
suddenly lurch forward or backward, possibly injuring bystanders.
 Avoid revving the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating and transaxle failure.
If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking attempts, have a towing service pull the vehicle out.
Quick index 2-5


Problem Do this Ref. page
The brakes are not functioning prop-
2 erly after driving through water.
Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly pressing the brake pedal. P.6-5
The CVT makes no engine speed to

vehicle speed ratio change when There may be a problem in the CVT.
accelerating. The initial movement of If the or warning lights on the multi-information display will not turn off, or if P.5-69
the vehicle is slow when the vehicle they are coming on frequently, please have the vehicle checked at your nearest Mitsubi-
starts moving. shi Motors dealer.
(for vehicles with CVT)
Twin Clutch SST does not shift.
Vehicle cannot move.
Acceleration is slow.
The vehicle does not creep. The temperature of the Twin Clutch SST fluid is high, a safety device in the Twin Clutch
P.5-72, 5-81,
A large shock is felt when shifting. SST has been activated due to a possible malfunction in the Twin Clutch SST, or there is
5-144
Shifting occurs at higher engine a possible malfunction in the engine electronic control module.
speed.
Response is slow.
(for vehicles with Twin Clutch SST)
A tire is punctured.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat and level.
P.8-6
2. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
2-6 Quick index

General information
3
Fuel selection ...................................................................................3-2
Filling the fuel tank ..........................................................................3-4
Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ....................................3-5
Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts .....................................................3-6
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ...............................3-7
Fuel selection
oline to minimize fuel-injector fouling and If the premium grade unleaded gasoline num-
Fuel selection minimize intake-valve deposits. Detergent ber of 91 [(MON+RON)/2] or higher is not
N00301000866
gasoline helps keep your engine in tune and available on journey, etc., regular unleaded
Your vehicle is designed to use unleaded gas- your emission-control system working prop- gasoline having an octane number of 87
3 oline only. It is equipped with a fuel filler erly. [(MON+RON)/2] can be used temporarily as
tube especially designed to accept only a an emergency measure.
small diameter unleaded gasoline dispensing
nozzle.
Octane requirement MON: Motor Octane Number
RON: Research Octane Number
WARNING Except for RALLIART
 Gasoline is highly flammable and explo- Oxygenated gasoline
sive. You could be burned, seriously
injured or killed when handling it. When- Your vehicle is designed to operate on
unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane Gasoline sold at some service stations con-
ever you refuel your vehicle, stop the
number of 87 [(MON+RON)/2], or 91 RON. tains oxygenates such as ethanol, although
engine and keep flames, sparks, and
smoking materials away from the vehicle.
the oxygenates may not be identified by those
Always handle fuel in well-ventilated out- names. Oxygenates are required in some
RALLIART areas of the country. Such fuel can be used in
door areas.
your vehicle.
Your vehicle is designed to operate on pre-
CAUTION mium grade unleaded gasoline having a mini-
Ethanol (Gasohol)
 Using leaded gasoline in your vehicle will mum octane number of 93 [(MON+RON)/2]
damage the engine, catalytic converter, and or higher for optimum performance. In case
the oxygen sensors. Also, using leaded gaso- premium grade unleaded gasoline 93 A mixture of up to 10 % ethanol (grain alco-
line is illegal, and will void your warranty [(MON+RON)/2] is not available, unleaded hol) and 90 % unleaded gasoline may be used
coverage of the engine, catalytic converter, gasoline number of 91 [(MON+RON)/2] can in your vehicle, provided the octane number
and oxygen sensors. be used. However, the performance level is is at least as high as that recommended for
reduced. unleaded gasoline.
In order to maintain exhaust system durabil-
Gasoline detergent additives ity, premium unleaded gasoline having an
octane number of at least 91
In the United States, fuel suppliers are [(MON+RON)/2] must be used.
required by law to add detergents to their gas-
3-2 General information
Fuel selection
Use of gasolines blended with MMT may
Methanol adversely affect performance, and cause the
NOTE
 Poor-quality gasoline can cause problems
malfunction indicator on your instrument
Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline con- such as poor starting, stalling during idling,
panel to come on. If this happens, contact an
abnormal engine noise, and poor accelera-
taining methanol (wood alcohol). Using this authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a tion. If you experience any of these prob- 3
type of alcohol could adversely affect the repair facility of your choice for assistance. lems, try using a different brand of gasoline.
vehicle’s performance and damage critical If the engine malfunction indicator (“SER-
parts of the vehicle’s fuel system. VICE ENGINE SOON” or “CHECK
Sulfur in gasoline ENGINE”) flashes, have the vehicle
inspected as soon as possible by the nearest
Reformulated gasoline Your vehicle may have been designed to sat- authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
isfy California’s low-emission regulations repair facility of your choice.
Many areas of the country require the use of based on clean-burning low-sulfur gasoline.  Repeatedly driving short distances at low
cleaner burning fuel referred to as “Reformu- Gasoline sold in parts of the country other speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel
lated Gasoline”. than California is allowed to have a higher system and engine, resulting in poor starting
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates sulfur content. Using such gasoline could and poor acceleration. If these problems
and is specially blended to reduce vehicle occur, you are advised to add a detergent
adversely affect the vehicle’s catalytic con-
emissions and improve air quality. additive to the gasoline when you refuel the
verter and cause the engine malfunction indi-
vehicle. The additive will remove the depos-
Mitsubishi Motors Corporation strongly sup- cator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or its, thereby returning the engine to a normal
ports the use of reformulated gasoline. Prop- “CHECK ENGINE”) to come on. Illumina- condition. Be sure to use a Mitsubishi
erly blended reformulated gasoline has no tion of this indicator while you are using Motors Genuine cleaning additive. Using an
adverse effect on vehicle performance or the high-sulfur gasoline does not necessarily unsuitable additive could make the engine
durability of the engine and fuel system. mean the vehicle’s emission-control system is malfunction. For details, please contact the
malfunctioning. Your authorized Mitsubishi nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
MMT (methylcyclopentadienyl Motors dealer may suggest you try using a
different, lower-sulfur brand of unleaded gas-
manganese tricarbonyl) oline to determine whether the problem is
fuel-related.
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasolines
to increase the octane number.
Mitsubishi Motors Corporation recommends
using gasolines without MMT.
General information 3-3

Filling the fuel tank

3. Open the fuel tank filler pipe by slowly
Filling the fuel tank WARNING turning the cap counterclockwise.
N00301100900  Keep the doors and windows closed while
refueling the vehicle. If they were open,
WARNING fuel vapor could get into the cabin.
3  Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
sive. You could be burned, seriously
injured or killed when handling it. When
Fuel tank capacity
refueling your vehicle, always turn the
engine off and keep away from flames, Front-wheel drive vehicles: 15.5 gal (59.0 L)
sparks, and smoking materials. Always All-wheel drive vehicles: 14.5 gal (55.0 L)
handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor
areas.
 Before removing the fuel cap, be sure to Refueling
get rid of your body’s static electricity by A- Remove
touching a metal part of the car or fuel 1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine. B- Close
pump. Any static electricity on your body 2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear
could create a spark that ignites fuel driver side of your vehicle.
vapor. The fuel tank filler door can be opened WARNING
 Perform the whole refueling process from inside the vehicle with the fuel tank  Since the fuel system may be under pres-
(opening the fuel tank filler door, remov- filler door release lever located at the left sure, remove the fuel tank filler cap
ing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself. Do not side of the driver’s seat. slowly. This relieves any pressure or vac-
let any other person come near the fuel uum that might have built up in the fuel
tank filler. If you allowed a person to help tank. If the cap is venting vapor or if you
you and that person was carrying static hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
electricity, fuel vapor could be ignited. before removing the cap. Otherwise, fuel
 Do not move away from the fuel tank filler may spray out, injuring you or others.
until refueling is finished. If you moved
away and did something else (for example,
4. While filling with fuel, store the cap in the
sitting on a seat) part-way through the
cap holder located on the inside of the fuel
refueling process, you could pick up a
fresh charge of static electricity. tank filler door.
 Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel
contains toxic substances.

Modifications to and racing of your vehicle

7. To close, turn the fuel tank filler cap
slowly clockwise until you hear clicking Modifications to and racing
sounds, then gently push the fuel tank of your vehicle
filler door closed. N00301600048
This vehicle should not be modified with 3

WARNING non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts. Mit-
 Make sure the fuel cap is securely closed. subishi Motors designs and manufactures
If the fuel cap is loose, fuel could leak, high quality vehicles with an emphasis on
resulting in a fire.
safety and durability. Modifications using
non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts may
affect the performance, safety and/or durabil-
5. To fill with fuel correctly depends mainly CAUTION ity of your vehicle, and may violate applica-
on correct handling of the fuel filler noz-  If you need to replace the fuel tank filler cap, ble state and/or federal regulations.
zle. Do not tilt the nozzle. Insert the noz- use only the cap specified for your model
vehicle. DAMAGE OR PERFORMANCE PROB-
zle in the tank port as far as it will go.
LEMS RESULTING FROM MODIFICA-
CAUTION NOTE TIONS TO OR RACING OF YOUR
 Your vehicle can only be operated using VEHICLE ARE NOT COVERED
 If the fuel tank filler cap is not tight while
unleaded gasoline. Serious engine and cata- UNDER WARRANTY.
driving, the engine malfunction indicator
lytic converter damage will result if leaded (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check
gasoline is used. Examples of modifications to your vehicle
engine light”) may come on when the
that can cause damage or performance prob-
onboard diagnostic (OBD) system performs
6. When the nozzle stops automatically, do a self check. lems include the following:
not attempt to add more fuel. Always tighten the fuel tank filler cap until
you hear clicking sounds.
 Failure to use Mitsubishi Motors genuine
The indicator will go off after driving several parts
CAUTION  Failure to use required fuel and fluids
times. If the indicator does not go off, con-
 To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not  Failure to use proper size tires and wheels
tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
“top-off” the fuel tank. Spilled fuel could
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as  Modification of the fuel, intake, exhaust,
discolor, stain, or crack the vehicle’s paint-
soon as possible. emission, suspension, engine, drive train
work. If fuel spills on the paintwork, wipe it
off with a soft cloth. or electrical wiring systems

Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts

 Modification of any onboard com-  Using a cellular phone or radio set inside ine parts will affect the driving safety of your
puter/control module, including repro- the vehicle without an external antenna Mitsubishi-vehicle.
gramming, or replacing/adding chips to may cause electrical system interference,
any onboard computer/control module which could lead to unsafe vehicle opera-
Modification/alterations to the
3 tion.
electrical or fuel systems
Review the Warranty and Maintenance Man-  Tires and wheels which do not meet spec-
ual for further details regarding warranty cov- ifications must not be used. N00301800040
erage. Refer to the “Specifications” section for Mitsubishi Motors manufactures high quality
information regarding wheel and tire vehicles with an emphasis on safety. It is
Installation of accessories sizes. important to consult an authorized Mitsubishi
N00301700182
Motors dealer before installation of any
accessory which may involve modification of
WARNING
CAUTION  If you choose to use a cellular phone while
the electrical or fuel systems.
 Before any electrical or electronic accesso- driving, you must not allow that usage to
ries are installed, consult an authorized Mit- distract you in the safe operation of your CAUTION
subishi Motors dealer. vehicle. Anything, including cellular  Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
phone usage, that distracts you from the Motors dealer concerning any such acces-
 The installation of accessories, optional safe operation of your vehicle increases sory fitment or modification.
parts, etc., should only be carried out your risk of an accident. If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or
Refer to and follow all state and local laws improper installation methods are used (pro-
within the limits prescribed by law in the
in your area regarding cellular phone tective fuses not included, etc.), electronic
driving area and in accordance with the usage while driving. devices may be adversely affected, resulting
guidelines and warnings contained within
in a fire, vehicle damage, or other accident.
the documents accompanying this vehicle.
Only Mitsubishi Motors approved acces-
Important point!
sories should be fitted to your vehicle.
 Improper installation of electrical parts Mitsubishi Motors genuine
could cause fire. Refer to the “Modifica- Due to the large number of accessory and parts
tion/alterations to the electrical or fuel replacement parts provided by different man-
N00301400105
systems” section within this owner’s manufacturers in the market, it is not always pos-
sible for an authorized Mitsubishi Motors Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are
ual. designed and manufactured to meet high stan-
dealer to check whether the attachment or
installation of non-Mitsubishi Motors genu- dards of performance, and are recommended
for all of your maintenance needs. Also avail-
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements

able from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer are
a wide variety of accessories to personalize
your new vehicle. Each Mitsubishi vehicle
has a selection of Mitsubishi Motors autho-
rized accessories to choose from to tailor your 3
new vehicle to your own personal preference.
Your Mitsubishi Motors dealer’s Parts Man-
ager has information on various audio sys-
tems, protection items, as well as interior and
exterior accessories available for your spe-
cific model.
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
N00300100017
Certain components of this vehicle, such as

airbag modules, seat belt pretensioners, and
button cell batteries, may contain perchlorate
materials.
Special handling may apply. For additional
information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardous-
waste/perchlorate.

Seat and restraint systems
Seats .................................................................................................4-2 4
Seats and restraint systems ..............................................................4-2
Front seats ........................................................................................4-3
Rear seats .........................................................................................4-5
Head restraints .................................................................................4-6
Seat belts ..........................................................................................4-8
Seat belt use during pregnancy ......................................................4-13
Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems ..........................4-13
Child restraint systems ...................................................................4-14
Maintenance and inspection of seat belts ......................................4-21
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag .............................4-21
Seats
Seats
N00408400479
 Arm rest (if so equipped)  P.4-6 gers. The seats, head restraints, and door
1 - Front seats locks also are safety equipment, which must
be used correctly.
 To adjust the seat forward or backward  Seats and restraint systems
P.4-3 N00401600182 Always check the following before you drive:
 To adjust the seatback  P.4-4
Your vehicle has seat belts and other features
 To adjust the seat height (Driver’s side  That everyone in your vehicle is properly
that help protect you and your passengers in
only, if so equipped)  P.4-4 wearing their seat belt.
an accident.
 Heated seats (if so equipped)  P.4-5  That infants and small children are prop-
Seat belts are the most important safety
device. When worn properly, seat belts can erly secured in appropriate child restraint
2 - Rear seats reduce the chance of serious injury or death systems in the rear seat.
in various types of crashes. For added protec-  That all doors are fully closed and locked.
 Folding the seatbacks forward (if so tion during a severe frontal collision, your  That seatbacks are upright, with head
equipped)  P.4-5 vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System restraints properly adjusted.
(SRS) with airbags for the driver and passen-
4-2 Seat and restraint systems

Front seats
Safety equipment cannot prevent injury or
death in all motor vehicle accidents. You can
WARNING To adjust the seat forward or
help reduce the risk of injury or death, how-  To reduce the risk to the driver of serious backward
injury or death during deployment of the
ever, by following the instructions in this N00401900244
driver’s airbag, always properly wear the
manual. seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the
back as possible while maintaining a posi- seat forward or backward to the desired posi-
tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock the 4
Front seats tion that still enables you to fully apply the
pedals, easily control the steering wheel, seat in place.
N00401800315
and safely operate the vehicle.
Position the driver’s seat as far back as possi-  To reduce the risk to the front passenger
Except for RECARO seat
ble while maintaining a position that still of serious injury or death during deploy-
enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily ment of the passenger’s airbag, always
control the steering wheel and safely operate properly wear the seat belt and adjust the
the vehicle. front passenger’s seat as far back as possi-
ble.
 Always place children 12 years old and
Except for RECARO seat under in the rear seat and use appropriate
RECARO seat child restraint systems. RECARO seat
CAUTION
 Make sure that the seat is adjusted by an
adult. If it is adjusted by a child, an unex-
pected accident might occur.
 Do not place a cushion or the like between
your back and the seatback while driving. WARNING
The effectiveness of the head restraints will  To make sure that the seat is securely
be reduced in the event of an accident.
WARNING  When sliding the seats, be careful not to
locked, try to move it forward or back-
 Do not attempt to adjust the seat while ward without using the adjusting lever.
catch your hand or leg.
driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-
 When sliding or reclining the seat rearward,
trol and result in an accident.
pay careful attention to the rear seat passen-
 After adjusting the seat, make sure that gers.
the seat is securely locked into position.
Seat and restraint systems 4-3

Front seats
To adjust the seatback RECARO seat WARNING

N00402000297  To reduce the risk of serious injury or
Adjust the seatback angle by turning the dial. death in the event of an accident or sud-
Except for RECARO seat den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
the upright position while the vehicle is in
motion.
4 To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly, Seat belt performance during an accident
gently pull the seatback lock lever up, then can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
lean backward to a comfortable position and are reclined. The more a seatback is
release the lever. The seatback will lock in reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
place. mance will be adversely affected. If the
seat belt is not properly positioned against
the body during an accident, there is
increased risk you will slide under the belt
and receive serious injury or death.
1- To move to forward direction

2- To recline backward
To adjust the seat height
(Driver’s side only, if so
equipped)
N00402100184
Operate the lever repeatedly to raise or lower

the seat.
CAUTION
 The reclining mechanism used in the seat-
back is spring loaded, and will cause the
seatback to return quickly to the vertical
position when the lock lever is operated.
When pulling the lever, sit close to the seat-
back or hold the seatback with your hand to
control its return motion.

Rear seats
3- Heater low (to keep the seat warm)
CAUTION
The indicator light (A) will illuminate while  When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine,
the heater is on. kerosene, gasoline, alcohol, or other organic
solvents; doing so can cause damage not
only to the surface of the seat, but also to the
WARNING heater.
 Persons who are unable to feel tempera-  If water or any other liquid is spilled on the
4
ture change or skin pain due to age, ill- seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before
ness, injury, medication, alcohol use, attempting to use the heater. Turn the heater
fatigue or other physical conditions or off immediately if it appears to be malfunc-
who have sensitive skin may suffer burns tioning during use.
1- Raise when using the heated seat even at low
2- Lower temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns,
people with such conditions must use care Rear seats
when using the heated seat. N00402500162
Heated seats (if so equipped)

N00435600336 Folding the seatbacks forward
CAUTION
The heated seats can be operated when the (if so equipped)
 Switch off the seat heaters when not in use.
ignition switch is in the “ON” position. Operate the heaters at high for quick heating. N00402900195
After the seat has become warm, set the

The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to
heater to low to keep it warm. Slight varia-
tions in the seat temperature may be felt
provide additional luggage compartment
while using the heated seats. This is caused space.
by the operation of the heater’s internal ther- Push the left and/or right release buttons (A),
mostat and does not indicate a malfunction. and fold the rear seatbacks forward. Confirm
 Do not place heavy objects on the seat or that the seatback locks securely when it is
stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects returned.
into the seat.
 Do not place a blanket, cushion, or other
insulating material on the seat while using
the heater; doing so can cause the heater ele-
1- Heater high (for quick heating) ment to overheat.
2- Heater off
Head restraints
NOTE Head restraints

 If the seatbacks are returned using too much N00404300539
force, this may cause the center seat belt to
lock up. If the seat belt locks up, pull the seat
belt once with force and let it retract all the
N00409400030
way.
4 Padded head restraints for the seats can
reduce the risk of a whiplash injury if your
Arm rest (if so equipped) vehicle is hit from the rear.
N00403000294
The head restraints are equipped in the illus-
trated position.
Tilt the arm rest down for use as shown. To maximize the effectiveness of your head
WARNING The arm rest includes a cup holder. (Refer to restraint, adjust the head restraint to the
 Do not allow anyone to ride in the luggage “Cup holder” on page 5-190.) proper position. For the driver and front pas-
compartment while the vehicle is in
senger, adjust the seatbacks to the upright
motion. People who are not properly
seated and restrained can be seriously position before adjusting the head restraints.
injured or killed in an accident. Sit back against the seatback with your head
 After returning the rear seatbacks to their close to the head restraint.
upright positions, make sure that the seat-
backs lock in place and are firmly secured.
Also check to be sure that the rear seat
belts are in front of the seatbacks, and not
caught behind the seatbacks.
CAUTION
 In the cargo area, do not load the luggage
higher than the top of the seats and make
sure that the luggage is firmly secured.
Restricted rear vision or flying objects enter-
ing the passenger compartment during sud-
den braking can result in a serious accident
and injury.

Head restraints
should raise the restraint to the highest locked
WARNING position.
 In order to minimize the risk of a neck
injury due to a rear impact, the head  To raise the restraint, pull it straight up.
restraint must be adjusted to the proper  To lower the restraint, push down on it
position before vehicle operation. For the
while pressing the lock knob (A) in the
driver and front passenger, the seatbacks
must be adjusted to the upright position
direction shown by the arrow. 4
before adjusting the head restraints. The  After adjusting the height, push down on
driver should never adjust the seat while the restraint to make sure it is locked in
the vehicle is in motion. position.
 Driving without the head restraints in
place can cause you and your passengers
serious injury or death in an accident. To WARNING
reduce the risk of injury in an accident,  To help minimize the risk of neck injury in
always make sure the head restraints are the event of an accident, the head
installed and properly positioned when restraints must be properly installed and
the seat is occupied. positioned to proper height before vehicle
 Never place a cushion or similar device on operation.
the seatback. This can adversely affect
head restraint performance by increasing
the distance between your head and the
restraint.
To install
First check that the head restraint is facing in

Adjustment of the head restraint the right direction as shown in the previous
To remove
illustration, and then insert it into the seat-
height
back. Push the head restraint down while
Press the lock knob (A) in the direction pressing the lock knob (A) until the restraint
To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, shown by the arrows. Then pull the head locks into place.
adjust the head restraint height so that the restraint up and out of the seatback.
center of the restraint is at your eye level
when seated. Any person too tall for the
restraint to reach their eye level when seated

Seat belts
CAUTION
 Check that the lock knob (A) is extended out
as shown in the illustration. Then pull the
head restraint up to make sure that it is
locked in place and will not come out of the
seatback.
4
WARNING
RECARO seat  In order to minimize the risk of a neck
N00409500044 injury due to a rear impact, the driver and
RECARO seats are equipped with padded front passenger seatbacks must be
adjusted to the upright position before
head restraints integrated with the seatbacks.
vehicle operation. The driver should never
These head restraints can reduce the risk of a
adjust the seat while the vehicle is in
whiplash injury if your vehicle is hit from the motion.
CAUTION rear.  Never place a cushion or similar device on
The head restraints are equipped in the illus- the seatback. This can adversely affect
 The shape and size of the head restraint dif-
fers according to the seat. Always use the trated position. head restraint performance by increasing
correct head restraint provided for the seat To maximize the effectiveness of your head the distance between your head and the
and do not install the head restraint in the restraint, adjust your seatback to the upright restraint.
wrong direction. position and sit back against the seatback
with your head close to the head restraint.
Seat belts
N00406000439
Seat belts are installed in your vehicle to help

reduce the risk of injury to the driver and pas-

Seat belts
senger in the event of an accident. Always
use the provided seat belts.
WARNING WARNING
 To reduce the risk to a front seat passen-  Any child who is too small to properly
Carefully review the following information
ger of serious injury or death from a wear a seat belt must be properly
for proper seat belt usage.
deploying airbag, make sure the passenger restrained in an appropriate child
always wears the seat belt properly, restraint system. Children 12 years old
WARNING remains seated all the way back and and under should be seated only in the
4
 To help reduce the risk of injury or death upright in their seat, and moves the seat as rear seat to reduce their risk of serious
in an accident, seat belts and child far back as possible. Refer to “Supplemen- injury or death in an accident, especially
restraint systems must always be used. tal Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” on from the deployment of a front passenger
Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page page 4-21 for additional information. airbag.
4-14 for additional information.  Never hold an infant or child in your arms  Infants MUST be placed in a rear-facing
 Never use one seat belt for more than one or on your lap when riding in this vehicle child safety seat and positioned in the rear
person. even when you are wearing your seat belt. seat.
 Never carry more people in your vehicle Never place any part of the seat belt you  In the event of an accident, all seat belt
than there are seat belts. are wearing around an infant or child. assemblies, including retractors and
Failure to follow these simple instructions attachment hardware, should be inspected
 Always adjust the seat belt for a snug fit.
creates a risk of serious injury or death to by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
 Always place the shoulder belt over your
your child in the event of an accident or dealer to determine whether replacement
shoulder and across your chest. Never put
sudden stop. is necessary.
it behind you or under your arm.
 Children 12 years old and under should
 Always wear the lap belt as low as possible
always ride in the rear seat and be prop-
across your hips, not around your waist.
erly restrained. This reduces their risk of Seat belt instructions
 Never modify or alter the seat belts in serious injury or death in an accident, N00406201470
your vehicle. especially due to a deploying front passen- All seats are equipped with a seat belt which
 To reduce the risk to the driver of serious ger airbag. Refer to “Child restraint sys- uses one combined lap-and-shoulder belt with
injury or death during deployment of the tems” on page 4-14 for additional
driver’s airbag, always properly wear the an emergency locking retractor.
information.
seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far
back as possible while maintaining a posi-
This system is designed to provide both com-
tion that still enables you to fully apply the fort and safety. It permits full extension and
pedals, easily control the steering wheel, automatic retraction of the belts during nor-
and safely operate the vehicle. mal vehicle operation. A sensing device
inside the belt retractor is designed to lock the
retractor in the event of a sudden change in
the vehicle’s motion.
Seat belts
3. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding
NOTE WARNING the latch plate. Push the latch plate into
 For instructions on installing a child restraint  To reduce the risk of serious injury or
the buckle until you hear a “click”. Pull
system using a seat belt, refer to “Installing a death in the event of an accident or sud-
up on the belt to be sure the latch plate is
child restraint system using the seat belt” on den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
page 4-19. the upright position while the vehicle is in locked securely in the buckle.
motion.
4 Seat belt performance during an accident
1. Occupants should always sit back in their
can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
seats with their backs against the upright are reclined. The more a seatback is
seatback. To reduce the risk of serious reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
injury or death during deployment of the mance will be adversely affected. If the
airbag, adjust the driver’s seat as far back seat belt is not properly positioned against
as possible while maintaining a position the body during an accident, there is
that still enables you to fully apply the increased risk you will slide under the belt
pedals, easily control the steering wheel, and receive serious injury or death.
and safely operate the vehicle. The front
passenger seat should also be moved as 2. Grasp the latch plate and slide it up the
far back as possible. Refer to “Supple- webbing so that it easily pulls across your NOTE
mental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” body.  If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled
on page 4-21. Also refer to “To adjust the out, pull it once with force and let it retract
seat forward or backward” on page 4-3. all the way.
Then, pull the belt out slowly once again.
4. The lap part of the belt must always be

worn low and snug across the hips. Pull
up on the shoulder portion of the belt to
take up any slack in the lap belt.

Seat belts
Warning display type 2
WARNING
 Be sure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted when worn. Twisted webbing may
adversely affect seat belt performance.
5. To release the belt, press the button on the

buckle and allow the belt to retract. 4
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it A tone and warning light are used to remind
out and check for kinks or twists in the the driver to fasten the seat belt.
webbing. Then make sure it remains If the ignition switch is set to the “ON” posi-
untwisted as it retracts. tion without the driver’s seat belt being fas-
tened, a warning light will come on and a
NOTE tone will sound for approximately 6 seconds
 With the exception of the seat belt for the
Driver’s seat belt to remind you to fasten your seat belt.
driver, the seat belts in all other seating posi- reminder/warning light and If you then drive with the seat belt unfastened
tions are equipped with an Automatic Lock- display for longer than a minute from when the igni-
ing Retractor (ALR) function. If you pull the
N00418400300
tion switch was turned on, the warning light
seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retrac- will come on and blink repeatedly and the
Warning light
tor will switch to its ALR child restraint tone will sound intermittently.
installation function (see page 4-19). The warning light and the tone will stop after
When the ALR function has been activated,
approximately 90 seconds.
the seat belt will only retract. If this happens,
If you then repeatedly stop and start your
let the belt fully retract, then pull the seat
belt back out, repeating steps 1 through 4. Warning display type 1 vehicle with the seat belt unfastened, the
warning light/display and tone will remind
you to fasten your seat belt every time the
WARNING vehicle starts moving. You will also be
 Be sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and
reminded to fasten your seat belt in this way
is worn as low as possible across the hips, when you remove your seat belt while driv-
not around the waist. Failure to follow this ing. The warning light and the tone go off
instruction will increase the risk of serious when the seat belt is fastened.
injury or death in the event of an accident.

Seat belts
When the key is turned to the “ON” position,
WARNING this indicator normally comes on and goes off
Anchor down Anchor up
 In order to reduce the risk of serious
a few seconds later.
injury or death in an accident, always
The light comes on when a person sits on the
wear your own seat belt. Do not allow any-
one to ride in your vehicle unless he or she front passenger seat but does not fasten the
is also seated and wearing a seat belt. seat belt. It goes off when the seat belt is sub-
4 Children should additionally be restrained sequently fastened.
in a secure child restraint system.
WARNING
 Do not install any accessory or sticker that
NOTE makes the light difficult to see.
 At the same time, “FASTEN SEAT BELT”
will be displayed on the information screen WARNING
in the multi-information display.  Always adjust the shoulder belt anchor so
Adjustable seat belt shoulder that the shoulder belt is positioned across
anchor (front seats) the center of your shoulder without touch-
ing your neck. The shoulder belt should
Front passenger seat belt warn- N00406300315
not be able to fall off your shoulder. Fail-
ing light To move the anchor down, press the lock ure to follow this instruction can adversely
N00418300165
knob (A) and slide the anchor down to the affect seat belt performance and increase
desired position. the risk of serious injury or death in the
The front passenger seat belt warning light is To move the anchor up, slide the anchor up to event of an accident.
located in the instrument panel. the desired position.  Adjust the shoulder belt anchor only when
the vehicle is not in motion.
 Make sure the anchor is securely locked in
position after adjusting it.
Seat belt extender

N00406701215
When your seat belt, even fully extended, is

not long enough, a seat belt extender must be

Seat belt use during pregnancy

obtained. The extender may be used for either or killed in an accident if they do not wear The seat belt pre-tensioners are located within
of the front seats. seat belts. the seat belt retractors (A). When activated,
the pre-tensioners quickly draw back seat belt
WARNING webbing and increase seat belt performance.
 To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death to pregnant women and unborn
children in an accident, pregnant women
4
should always wear a seat belt. The lap
portion of the seat belt should be worn
snug and low across the hips and below
the rounding. Consult your doctor if you
have any additional questions or concerns.
WARNING Seat belt pre-tensioner and

 The extender should only be used if the force limiter systems The seat belt pre-tensioner system includes
existing belt is not long enough. Anyone N00417700609
the following components:
who can use the standard seat belt should The driver’s and front passenger’s seats each
not use an extender. Unnecessary use of an have a seat belt equipped with a pre-tensioner
extender can adversely affect seat belt
system.
performance in an accident.
 When not required, the extender must be
removed and stowed. Pre-tensioner system
The driver and front passenger seat belts are

Seat belt use during preg- equipped with a seat belt pre-tensioner sys-
nancy tem. In a moderate-to-severe frontal or side
N00406800121
collision, the pre-tensioner system operates
simultaneously with the deployment of the
Seat belts work for everyone, including preg- 1- SRS warning light
front airbags or side airbags and curtain air-
nant women. Like all occupants, pregnant 2- Front impact sensors
bags.
women are more likely to be seriously injured 3- Seat belt pre-tensioners

Child restraint systems

4- Airbag control unit Child restraint systems specifically designed
5- Side impact sensors
WARNING for infants and small children are offered by
 The seat belt pre-tensioner system is
several manufacturers. Choose only a child
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness designed to work only once. After the seat
restraint system with a label certifying that it
of the electronic parts of the system whenever belt pre-tensioners have been activated,
they will not work again. They must complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
the ignition switch is in the “ON” or Standard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Motor Vehicle
promptly be replaced and the entire seat
4 “START” position. These include all of the
belt pre-tensioner system inspected by an Restraint Systems and Booster Seats Safety
items listed above and all related wiring. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Regulations (RSSR). Look for the manufac-
The pre-tensioner seat belt system will oper- turer’s statement of compliance on the box
ate only when the ignition switch is in the and child restraint system itself.
“ON” or “START” position.
When the seat belt pre-tensioners activate,
SRS warning The child restraint system should be appropri-
N00408700094
some smoke is released and a loud noise will ate for your child’s weight and height, and
be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care This warning tells you if there is a problem should properly fit your vehicle’s seat.
should be taken not to intentionally inhale it, involving the SRS airbags and the pre-ten- For detail information, refer to the instruction
as it may cause some temporary irritation to sioner seat belts. Refer to “SRS warning” on manual accompanying the child restraint sys-
people with respiratory problems. page 4-27. tem.
The pre-tensioners activate in the event of a
moderate-to-severe frontal or side impact, Force limiter system Guidelines for child restraint
even if the seat belt is not being worn. The
seat belt pre-tensioners may not activate in
N00408900113
system selection
In the event of an accident, the seat belt force
certain types of collisions, even though the
limiter system will help reduce the force
vehicle may appear to be severely damaged. All children should be properly restrained in
applied to the driver and front seat passenger.
Such non-activation does not mean some- a restraint device that offers the maximum
thing is wrong with the seat belt pre-tensioner protection for their size and age.
system, but rather that the collision forces Child restraint systems Be sure to check local, state, or provincial
were not severe enough or not of the type to N00407101766 requirements for child size and age that may
activate the system. When transporting infants or small children vary from the recommendations listed below.
in your vehicle, an appropriate child restraint
 Children less than 1 year old and who
system must always be used. This is required
weigh 22 pounds (10 kg) or less MUST
by law in the U.S. and Canada.
ride in a rear-facing child safety seat that
MUST ONLY be used in the rear seat.


 Children older than 1 year of age and who
weigh less than 40 pounds (18 kg) or who
WARNING
 Any child who is too large to use a child
are less than 40 inches (100 cm) tall must
restraint system should ride in the rear
be in a forward-facing restraint used only
seat and wear the lap and shoulder belt
in the rear seat. properly. The shoulder belt must be posi-
 Children who weigh more than 40 pounds tioned over the shoulder and across the
(18 kg) or who are more than 40 inches chest, not across their neck, and with the 4
(100 cm) tall, regardless of age, should lap belt positioned low on the child’s hips,
use a suitable child seat or a booster seat not across their stomach. If necessary, a
in the rear seat until the vehicle’s booster seat should be used to help achieve
lap/shoulder belt fits them properly. a proper seat belt fit. Follow the booster
seat manufacturer’s instructions. Only use
a booster seat that is certified as comply- WARNING
WARNING ing with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety  Your vehicle is also equipped with a front
 All children must be seated in the rear Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Sys- passenger airbag.
seat, and properly restrained. tems and Booster Seats Safety Regula- Never put REAR-FACING CHILD
Accident statistics show that children of tions. RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT
all sizes and ages are safer when properly  Never hold an infant or child in your arms RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas-
restrained in the rear seat, rather than in or on your lap when riding in this vehicle, senger seat. This places the infant too
the front seat. even when you are wearing your seat belt. close to the passenger airbag. During
Never place any part of the seat belt you deployment of the airbag, the infant can
are wearing around an infant or child. be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing
Failure to follow these simple instructions child restraint systems or infant restraint
creates a risk of serious injury or death to systems must only be used in the rear seat.
your child in the event of an accident or
sudden stop.

Airbag WARNING NOTE

 It is important to use an approved rear-  Before purchasing a child restraint system,
facing infant restraint until the infant is try installing it in the rear seat to make sure
one year old (unless the infant outgrows there is a good fit. Because of the location of
the seat sooner). This allows the infant’s the seat belt buckles and the shape of the seat
neck and spine to develop enough to sup- cushion, it may be difficult to securely install
4 port the weight of their head in the event some manufacturer’s child restraint systems.
of an accident. If the child restraint system can be pulled
 When installing a child restraint system, forward or to either side easily on the seat
follow the instructions provided by the cushion after the seat belt has been tightened,
manufacturer and follow the directions in choose another manufacturer’s child restraint
this manual. Failure to do so can result in system.
WARNING serious injury or death to your child in an Depending on the seating position in the
 FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT accident or sudden stop. vehicle and the child restraint system that
SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat  After installation, push and pull the child you have, the child restraint system can be
whenever possible. If they must be used in restraint system back and forth, and side attached using one of the following two
the front passenger seat, move the seat to to side, to see that it is firmly secured. If methods:
the most rearward position and make sure the child restraint system is not installed • To the lower anchorage in the rear seat
the child stays in the child restraint sys- securely, it may cause injury to the child ONLY if the child restraint system is com-
tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow or other occupants in the event of an acci- patible with the LATCH system (See page
these instructions could result in serious dent or sudden stop. 4-17).
injury or death to the child.  When not in use, keep your child restraint • To the seat belt (See page 4-19).
system secured with the seat belt, or
remove it from the vehicle, in order to pre-
vent it from being thrown around inside
the vehicle during an accident.

Installing a child restraint sys- Tether anchor locations Examples of child restraint sys-
tem using the LATCH (Lower N00418900129 tems compatible with the LATCH
Anchors and Tethers for chil- Your vehicle has 3 attachment points on the system
rear shelf, located behind the top of your rear
dren) system
N00419000185
seat. These are for securing a child restraint
N00418800131
system tether strap to each of the 3 rear seat- 4
ing positions in your vehicle.
Lower anchor locations
The outboard seating positions in the rear seat

of your vehicle are equipped with lower
anchors for attaching child restraint systems
compatible with the LATCH system.
A- Rear-facing child restraint system

B- Front-facing child restraint system
C- Child restraint system lower anchor
connectors
D- Tether strap (These are only examples.)
Using the LATCH system

N00419100157
1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap,

remove the head restraint from the loca-
NOTE tion where you wish to install the child
 The symbols on the seatback show the loca- restraint system.
tion of the lower anchor points.


2. Push the anchor connectors (A) on the 4. Latch the tether strap hook (F) of the child
child restraint system into the slits (B) in
NOTE restraint system to the anchor (G) as illus-
 In order to secure a child restraint system
accordance with the instructions provided trated below (4) and tighten the top tether
compatible with the LATCH system, use the
by the child restraint system manufac- strap so it is securely fastened.
lower anchor points in the outboard positions
turer. Remember, the lower anchors (E) of the rear seat. It is not necessary to use the
provided with your vehicle are designed vehicle’s seat belt. The vehicle’s seat belt,
4 to secure suitable child restraint systems however, MUST be used to secure a child
compatible with the LATCH system in the restraint system in the center position of the
rear seat only. rear seat.
WARNING
 If there is any foreign material in or
around the lower anchors, remove it
before installing the child restraint sys-
tem. Also, make sure the seat belt is away
from, not looped through or otherwise 5. Push and pull the child restraint system in
interfering with, the child restraint sys-
all directions to be sure it is firmly
tem. If foreign matter is not removed
secured.
and/or the seat belt interferes with the
A- Connector D- Vehicle seat cush- child restraint system, the child restraint
system will not be secured properly, could WARNING
ion
detach and move forward in the event of  Child restraint system tether anchors are
B- Slit E- Lower anchor designed only to withstand loads from cor-
sudden braking or an accident, and could
C- Vehicle seatback result in injury to the child or other vehi- rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under
cle occupants. no circumstances are they to be used for
 When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust adult seat belts, or harnesses, or for
the seat where the child restraint system is attaching other items or equipment to the
installed. vehicle.
3. Open the cover for the tether anchor by

pulling it back with your hand as illus-
trated below (3).

Installing a child restraint sys- WARNING

tem using the seat belt (with  When you install a child restraint system
using the seat belt, always make sure the
emergency/automatic locking retractor has been switched to the ALR
mechanism) child restraint installation function. The
ALR function will keep the child restraint
N00407301508
system tightly secured to the seat. 4
With the exception of the driver, the seat belt
Failure to convert the retractor to the
in all other seating positions can be converted ALR function may allow the child
from normal Emergency Locking Retractor restraint system to move forward during
(ELR) mode to Automatic Locking Retractor sudden braking or an accident, resulting
(ALR) mode. This means that when you pull in serious injury or death to the child or
3. To activate the ALR child restraint instal-
the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the other occupants.
lation function, slowly pull the shoulder
retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint
part of the belt all the way out of the
installation function. Always use the ALR
retractor until it stops. Then let the belt
child restraint installation function when you Installation
feed back into the retractor.
install a child restraint system using the seat
belt. 1. Place the child restraint system on the seat
where you wish to install it.
Children 12 years old and under should To help assure proper fitting of the child
always be restrained in the rear seat, when- restraint system, always remove the head
ever possible, although the front passenger restraint.
seat belt can also be converted to ALR mode. 2. Route the seat belt through the child
restraint system according to the instruc-
tions provided by the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer. Then insert the seat
belt latch plate into the buckle. Make sure
you hear a “click” when you insert the
latch plate into the buckle.


4. After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If 6. Open the cover from the tether anchor 8. Before putting your child in the restraint,
the belt is in the ALR function, you will installation point by pulling it back with push and pull the restraint in all directions
not be able to pull it out. If the webbing your hand as illustrated below (6). to be sure it is firmly secured. Do this
can be pulled out from retractor, the ALR 7. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the before each use. If the child restraint sys-
function has not been activated and you child restraint system to the tether anchor tem is not firmly secure, repeat steps 1
will need to repeat steps 3 and 4. (B) as illustrated below (7) and tighten the through 7.
4 5. After confirming that the belt is locked, top tether strap so it is securely fastened. 9. To remove a child restraint system from
grab the shoulder part of the belt near the the vehicle and deactivate the ALR mode,
buckle and pull up to remove any slack remove the child from the restraint.
from the lap part of the belt allowing the Unlatch the buckle. Then remove the belt
slack to feed into the retractor. Remember, from the restraint and let the belt fully
if the lap belt portion is not tight, the child retract.
restraint system will not be secure. It may 10. Reinstall the head restraint.
help to put your weight on the child Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-6.
restraint system and/or push on its seat-
back while pulling up on the belt (see
illustration).
Children who have outgrown
child restraint systems
N00407601644
WARNING Children who have outgrown a child restraint

 Child restraint system tether anchors are system should be seated in the rear seat and
designed only to withstand loads from cor- wear the seat belt. If the shoulder belt crosses
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under their face or neck, and/or the lap belt crosses
no circumstances are they to be used for
their stomach, a commercially available
adult seat belts, or harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the
booster seat must be used, to raise the child so
vehicle. that the shoulder belt crosses their shoulder
and the lap belt remains positioned low
across their hips. The booster seat should fit
If your child restraint system requires the use the vehicle seat and have a label certifying
of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in compliance with Federal Motor Vehicle
accordance with the following procedures. Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint

Maintenance and inspection of seat belts

Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regula- dye the belts. The color may rub off and the
tions. webbing strength may be affected. Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem (SRS) - airbag
Regularly check your seat belt buckles and
WARNING their release mechanisms for positive engage-
N00407701805
 Any child who is too small to properly This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
ment and release of the latch plate. Check the
Restraint System (SRS), which includes air-
wear a seat belt must be properly
restrained in an appropriate child
retractors for automatic locking when in the
bags for the driver and passengers.
4
restraint system, to reduce their risk of Automatic Locking Retractor function.
serious injury or death in an accident. The SRS front airbags are designed to supple-
The entire seat belt assembly should be
 A child should never be left unattended in, ment the primary protection of the driver and
or unsupervised, around your vehicle.
replaced if the webbing shows any obvious
front passenger seat belt systems by provid-
When you leave the vehicle always take cuts, tears, increase in thickness in any sec-
ing those occupants with protection against
the child out as well. tion of the webbing from broken fibers, or
head and chest injuries in certain moderate to
 Children can die from heat stroke if left or severe fading from sunlight. All of these con-
severe frontal collisions.
trapped inside the vehicle, especially on ditions indicate a weakening of the belt,
The SRS front airbags, together with sensors
hot days. which may adversely affect seat belt perfor-
at the front of the vehicle and sensors
 Keep your vehicle locked and the trunk lid mance in an accident.
closed when not in use. Keep your vehicle
attached to the front seats, form an advanced
keys away from children. airbag system.
 Never allow children to play in the trunk
WARNING
 Do not attempt to repair or replace any The SRS driver’s knee airbag is designed to
of your vehicle.
part of the seat belt assemblies. This work supplement the primary protection of the
should be done by an authorized driver’s seat belt system. It can reduce the
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Failure to have forward movement of the driver’s lower legs
Maintenance and inspection an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer and provide increased overall body protection
perform the work could reduce the effec-
of seat belts tiveness of the belts and could result in a
in certain moderate to severe frontal colli-
N00407000221 sions.
serious injury or death in an accident.
The seat belt webbing may be cleaned with The SRS side airbags (if so equipped) and the
mild soap or detergent solution. Do not use an curtain airbags (if so equipped) are also
organic solvent. Allow the belts to dry in the designed to supplement the seat belts. The
shade. Do not allow them to retract until com- SRS side airbags provide the driver and front
pletely dry. Do not attempt to bleach or re- passenger with protection against chest inju-
ries by deploying the bag on the side

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

impacted in moderate to severe side impact
collisions. The SRS curtain airbags provide
WARNING WARNING
• Seat belts help keep the driver and pas- • Airbags inflate very quickly and with
the driver and passengers on the front seat
sengers properly positioned. This great force. If the driver and front pas-
and rear outboard seat with protection against
reduces the risk of injury in all collisions, senger are not properly seated and
head injuries by deploying a bag on the side and reduces the risk of serious injuries or restrained, the airbag may not provide
impacted in moderate to severe side impact death when the airbags inflate. the proper protection and can cause seri-
4 collisions. During sudden braking just before a col- ous injuries or death when it inflates.
lision, an unrestrained or improperly • To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
The SRS airbags are NOT a substitute for use restrained driver or passengers can move injury or death due to a deploying
of the seat belts. For maximum protection in forward into direct contact with, or driver’s airbag, always properly wear
all types of accidents, seat belts must within close proximity to, the airbag your seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat
ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or when it begins to inflate. as far back as possible, maintaining a
rides in this vehicle (with infants and small The beginning stage of airbag inflation is position that still allows the driver to
children in an appropriate child restraint sys- the most forceful and can cause serious have good control of the steering wheel,
tem in the rear seat, and older children buck- injuries or death if the occupant comes in brake, accelerator, and other vehicle con-
contact with the airbag at this time. trols.
led in the rear seat). Refer to “Child restraint
• Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in • To reduce the risk to the front passenger
systems” on page 4-14.
rollovers, rear impact collisions, and in of serious injury or death from a deploy-
lower-speed frontal collisions, because ing passenger’s airbag, make sure the
WARNING the airbags are not designed to inflate in passenger always wears the seat belt
 IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS those situations. properly, remains seated upright and all
WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLY • Seat belts reduce the risk of being the way back in the seat, and positions
EVEN WITH AN AIRBAG. thrown from your vehicle in a collision or the seat as far back as possible.
rollover. • Seat all infants and children in the rear
 IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP- seat, properly restrained in an appropri-
ERLY SEATED. ate child restraint system.
• A driver or front passenger sitting too  Airbags inflate very quickly and with
close to the steering wheel or instrument great force. Do not sit on the edge of the
panel during airbag deployment can be seat or sit with your lower legs too close to
seriously injured or killed. the instrument panel, or lean your head or
chest close to the steering wheel or the
instrument panel.
 Do not put your feet or legs on or against
the instrument panel.

Airbag
WARNING WARNING WARNING

 Infants and small children should never  NEVER put REAR-FACING CHILD  FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
ride unrestrained, or lean against the RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat
instrument panel. They should never ride RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas- whenever possible. If they must be used in
held in your arms or on your lap. They senger seat. This places the infant too the front passenger seat, move the seat to
can be seriously injured or killed in an close to the passenger airbag. During the most rearward position and make sure
accident, especially when the airbags deployment of the airbag, the infant can the child stays in the child restraint sys-
inflate. Infants and children should be be seriously injured or killed. tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow
properly seated in the rear seat in an Rear-facing child restraint systems or these instructions could result in serious
appropriate child restraint system. Refer infant restraint systems must only be used injury or death to the child.
to “Child restraint systems” on page 4-14. in the rear seat.


8- Seat belt buckle switches (vehicles When airbags deploy, some smoke is released
WARNING with turbocharger only) accompanied by a loud noise. The smoke is
 Older children should be seated in the
9- Passenger’s seat weight sensors not harmful, but do not intentionally inhale
rear seat with their seat belt properly
10- Airbag control unit the smoke as it may cause temporary irrita-
worn, and with an appropriate booster
seat if needed. tion to people with respiratory problems.
Refer to “Children who have outgrown
4 child restraint systems” on page 4-20.
After deployment, the airbags will quickly
deflate, so quickly that some people may not
even realize the airbags inflated.
Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver
How the Supplemental from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,
Restraint System works and does not prevent people from leaving the
N00407800506 vehicle.
The SRS includes the following components:
CAUTION
11- Side airbag modules  Airbags inflate very quickly and with great
12- Curtain airbag modules force. In certain situations, contact with an
13- Side impact sensors inflating airbag may cause small cuts, abra-
sions, and bruises. Refer to “Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” on page
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness 4-21.
of the electronic parts of the system whenever
the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“START” position. These include all of the Event Data Recording
items listed above and all related wiring. N00418600230
1- Driver’s airbag The airbags will operate only when the igni- This vehicle is equipped with an event data
2- SRS warning light tion switch is in the “ON” or “START” posi- recorder (EDR).
3- Passenger’s airbag off indicator tion. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
4- Passenger’s front airbag certain crash or near crash-like situations,
5- Front impact sensors When the impact sensors detect a front or such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
6- Driver’s knee airbag side impact sufficient to deploy the airbag(s), road obstacle, data that will assist in under-
7- Driver’s seat position sensor the appropriate airbag(s) will be deployed. standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.


The EDR is designed to record data related to To read data recorded by an EDR, special
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
WARNING
• Do not recline the seatback more than
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
necessary when driving.
less. vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
• Do not place metallic objects or luggage
law enforcement, that have the special equip-
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record under the front seat.
ment, can read the information if they have
such data as: access to the vehicle or the EDR.
 If the vehicle is involved in a severe
impact, have the SRS sensor inspected by
4
 How various systems in your vehicle were an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
operating; Driver’s seat position sensor soon as possible.
 Whether or not the driver and passenger N00417900164
safety belts were buckled/fastened; The driver’s seat position sensor is attached Passenger’s seat weight sensors
 How far (if at all) the driver was depress- to the seat rail and provides the airbag control N00418000247
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; unit with information on the seat’s fore-aft The passenger’s seat weight sensors are
and, position. The airbag control unit controls attached to the seat rails and provide the air-
 How fast the vehicle was traveling. deployment of the driver’s front airbag in bag control unit with information regarding
accordance with the information it receives the weight on the front passenger seat. The
These data can help provide a better under- from this sensor. airbag control unit controls deployment of the
standing of the circumstances in which If there is a problem involving the driver’s passenger’s front airbag in accordance with
crashes and injuries occur. seat position sensor, the SRS warning in the the information it receives from this sensor.
instrument panel will come on. Refer to “SRS The passenger’s front airbag will not deploy
NOTE warning” on page 4-27. in an impact when the weight on the seat is
 EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only sensed to be less than approximately 66
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data WARNING pounds (30 kg). In this case, the passenger’s
are recorded by the EDR under normal driv- airbag off indicator will come on.
 If the SRS warning comes on, have the
ing conditions and no personal data (e.g., Refer to “Passenger’s airbag off indicator” on
vehicle inspected by an authorized Mit-
name, gender, age, and crash location) are
subishi Motors dealer as soon as possible. page 4-26.
recorded. However, other parties, such as
 Please observe the following instructions If there is a problem involving the passen-
law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying
to ensure that the driver’s seat position ger’s seat weight sensors, the SRS warning in
data routinely acquired during a crash inves- sensor can operate correctly. the instrument panel will come on. Refer to
tigation. • Adjust the seat to the correct position, “SRS warning” page 4-27.
and sit well back against the seatback.
Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3.

WARNING WARNING
 If any of the following conditions occur, • Do not place luggage or other objects on
you should immediately have your vehicle the seat.
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi • Do not use a seat cover or a cushion.
Motors dealer as soon as possible: • Do not modify or replace the seat and
4 • The SRS warning does not initially come
on when the ignition switch is turned to
seat belt.
• Do not place luggage or other objects
the “ON” or “START” position. under the seat.
• The SRS warning does not go out after • Do not place the floor mat on the seat
several seconds. rails.
• The SRS warning comes on while you are • Do not expose the sensors to liquids or
driving. vapors. The indicator normally comes on when the
 To ensure that the passenger’s seat weight • Do not subject the sensors to shock. ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
sensors can correctly sense the weight • Do not allow rear-seat occupants to push and goes out a few seconds later.
being applied to the seat, observe the fol- the front passenger seat with their feet or In the following situations, the indicator will
lowing instructions. Failure to follow these force the front passenger seat upward. stay on to show that the passenger’s front air-
instructions can adversely affect the per-
• Do not allow rear-seat occupants to grasp bag is not operational.
formance of the passenger’s airbag sys-
the front passenger’s seatback or put
tem. their arms around it.  The passenger’s seat weight sensors sense
• Adjust the seat to the correct position,
• When attaching a child restraint system a weight of less than approximately 66
and sit well back against the seatback. in the rear seat, make sure it does not
Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3. pounds (30 kg) on the front passenger
interfere with the front seat. seat.
• Do not recline the seatback more than  If the vehicle is involved in a severe
necessary.  The front passenger’s seat is not occupied.
impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by
• Never have more than one person (adult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
or child) sitting on the seat. When the weight applied to the front passen-
soon as possible.
• Do not place anything between the seat ger seat is sensed to be approximately 66
and the floor console. pounds (30 kg) or greater, the indicator goes
• Do not hang anything on the front pas- Passenger’s airbag off indicator out to show that the passenger’s front airbag
senger’s seatback. N00418100277 is operational.
• Do not remove the head restraints. The passenger’s airbag off indicator is
• When attaching a child restraint system, located in the instrument panel.
secure it firmly.


WARNING WARNING
 If any of the following conditions occur,  If any of the following conditions occur,
you should immediately have the airbag there may be a problem with the SRS air-
system in your vehicle inspected by an bags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, and
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as they may not function properly in a colli-
soon as possible: sion or may suddenly activate without a
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator collision: 4
comes on when an adult is sitting on the • Even when the ignition switch is in ON,
front passenger seat. the SRS warning light does not come on
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does or it remains on.
not come on when the front passenger’s • The SRS warning light and/or the warn-
seat is not occupied. ing display comes on while driving.
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-ten-
not come on when the ignition switch is sioners are designed to help reduce the
The system checks itself every time the igni-
turned to the “ON” position. risk of serious injury or death in certain
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator collisions.
The SRS warning light will come on for sev- If either of the above conditions occurs,
comes on and goes out repeatedly.
eral seconds and then go out. This is normal immediately have your vehicle checked by
 Do not attach any accessory to your vehi-
cle that makes the passenger’s airbag off and means the system is working properly. an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
indicator difficult or impossible to see. If there is a problem involving one or more of
You must be able to see the passenger’s the SRS components, the warning light will
airbag off indicator and verify the status come on and stay on. At the same time, the Driver’s and passenger’s front
of the passenger’s airbag system. warning display will appear on the informa-
tion screen in the multi information display. airbag system
N00407900318
The SRS warning light/display is shared by
SRS warning light/display the SRS airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner The driver’s airbag is located under the pad-
N00408301619 system. ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel.
Warning light The front passenger’s airbag is contained in
the instrument panel above the glove com-
partment. The driver’s airbag and the front
passenger’s airbag are designed to deploy at
the same time. However, the front passen-
ger’s airbag does not deploy when the front


passenger seat is not occupied or when the
weight sensor in the front passenger seat
senses a weight on the seat of less than
approximately 66 pounds (30 kg).
Driver
Front passenger
Driver’s knee airbag system

N00404500010
The driver’s knee airbag is located under the

steering wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is
designed to deploy at the same time as the
driver’s front airbag.

Deployment of front airbags

N00408000521
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when…
Head-on collision with a solid wall at speeds of Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded 4
approx. 15 mph (25 km/h) or higher area between the arrows
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag another stationary vehicle, a pole or a guard
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a will deploy if the impact to the vehicle’s main rail).
moderate to severe frontal impact. A typical structure is above a specific threshold level. The beginning stage of airbag inflation is the
condition is shown in the illustration to the The threshold level is approximately 15 mph most forceful, and can cause serious injuries
left. (25 km/h) for a frontal collision straight into a or death if you are too close to the deploying
solid flat wall that does not bend or deform. If airbag. Accordingly, it is important that you
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are the impact to the vehicle’s main structure is always wear the available seat belt.
designed to deploy only in certain moderate below this threshold level, the front airbags
to severe frontal collisions within the shaded and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy. This
area between the arrows in the illustration to threshold level may also be higher if the vehi-
the right. cle hits something that absorbs the impact,
either by bending or moving (for example,

SC00000500-2.fm 30 ページ２０１４年４月１６日　水曜日　午前９時３４分
The front airbags and driver’s Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow The front airbags and driver’s
knee airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY objects knee airbag ARE NOT
when … DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when
…
In certain types of front collisions, the front
4 airbags and driver’s knee airbag may not The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are
deploy, even if the deformation of the body Collision where the vehicle slides under the rear not designed to deploy in situations where
seems to be large, because the vehicle’s body body of a truck they cannot provide protection to the occu-
structure is designed to absorb the impact and pants.
deform in order to help protect the occupants. Some typical situations are shown in the
Some typical situations where the front air- illustrations.
bags and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy
are shown in the illustrations. Because the front airbags and driver’s knee
Oblique frontal impact
airbag do not protect the occupants in all
Because the front airbags and driver’s knee types of collisions, be sure to always wear
airbag do not protect the occupant in all types your seat belts properly.
of frontal collisions, be sure to always wear
your seat belts properly.

SC00000500-2.fm 31 ページ２０１４年４月１６日　水曜日　午前９時３４分

carriage impact). Some typical situations are
Rear end collision to your vehicle Collision with an elevated median/island or
shown in the illustrations.
curb
Because the front airbags and driver’s knee
airbag may deploy in certain types of unex-
pected impacts, as shown in the illustrations,
Side collision to your vehicle
and these unexpected impacts can move you 4
out of position, it is important to always wear
your seat belts properly. When worn properly, Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole
seat belts can help maintain your distance
from the airbags and driver’s knee airbag
when they begin to inflate. The beginning
stage of airbag inflation is the most forceful
and can cause serious injury or death if you
are close to the deploying airbag. Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the
Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
ground
The front airbags and driver’s

knee airbag MAY DEPLOY when
…
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag

may deploy if the underside of the vehicle
suffers a moderate to severe impact (under-

WARNING WARNING WARNING

 Do not attach anything to the steering  Do not attach additional keys or accesso-  Do not place objects, such as packages or
wheel’s padded cover, such as trim mate- ries (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to the pets, between the airbags and the driver
rial, badges, etc. These could strike and ignition key. Such objects could prevent or the front passenger. Such objects can
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates. the driver’s knee airbag from inflating adversely affect airbag performance, or
normally or could be propelled to cause cause serious injury or death when the
4  Do not set anything on, or attach anything
to, the instrument panel above the glove serious injury if the airbag inflates. airbag deploys.
compartment. Such items could strike and  Do not attach accessories to the lower por-  Immediately after airbag inflation, some
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates. tion of the driver’s side instrument panel. parts of the airbag system will be hot. Do
Such objects could prevent the driver’s not touch them. You could be burned.
knee airbag from inflating normally or  The airbag system is designed to work
could be propelled to cause serious injury only once. After the airbags deploy, they
if the airbag inflates. will not work again. They must promptly
be replaced and the entire airbag system
must be inspected by an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer.
WARNING
 Do not attach accessories to, or put them
in front of, the windshield. They could
restrict the airbag inflation, or strike and WARNING
injure an occupant, when the airbag  Do not attempt to remove, install, disas-
inflates. semble or repair the SRS airbags.


A label is attached to the seatbacks in vehi-
Side airbag system (if so equipped) cles with side airbags.
N00408100405
The side airbags (A) are contained in the

driver and front passenger seatbacks.
The side airbag is designed to inflate only on
the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even 4
with no passenger in the front seat.
Except for RECARO seats

RECARO seat
WARNING
 The side airbag and curtain airbag can
cause serious injury or death to anyone
too close to the airbag when it deploys. To
RECARO seats reduce the risk of injury from a deploying
side airbag and curtain airbags, all occu-
pants must be properly restrained and
Curtain airbag system (if so seated well back, upright, and in the mid-
dle of the seat. Do not lean against the
equipped) door.
N00419201230
The curtain airbags are contained in the front

and rear pillars and roof side rail. The curtain
airbag is designed to inflate only on the side
of the vehicle that is impacted, even with no
passenger in the front seat.

WARNING WARNING
 In order to reduce the risk of injury from  Front-facing child restraint systems
a deploying side airbag, do not allow any should also be used ONLY in the rear seat.
rear seat passengers to hold onto the back If a front-facing child restraint system
of either front seat. Special care should be must be used in the front passenger seat,
taken with children. move the seat as far back as possible, and
4  Do not place any objects near or around make sure that the child stays in the child
the front of either front seatback. Such restraint system, properly restrained and
objects can interfere with proper side air- away from the door.
bag deployment and cause injury during  Do not allow a child to lean against or sit
deployment of the side airbag. close to the passenger door, even if the
 Do not place stickers, labels or additional child is seated in a child restraint system.
trim on the back of either front seat. They WARNING The child’s head should also not lean
can interfere with proper side airbag  Do not put a hanger or any heavy or against or be close to the section of the
deployment. pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur- seatback where the side airbag and cur-
 Do not install seat covers or re-cover seats tain airbag was activated, any such item tain airbag are located. It is dangerous if
that have side airbags. Covers can inter- could be propelled away with great force the side airbag and curtain airbag
fere with proper side airbag deployment and could prevent the curtain airbag from deploys. Failure to follow all of these
and adversely affect side airbag perfor- inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly instructions could lead to serious injury or
mance. on the coat hook (without using a hanger). death to the child.
 Do not attach a microphone (A) or any Make sure there are no heavy or sharp  Work done on or in the vicinity of the side
other object around the part where the objects in the pockets of clothes that you airbag and curtain airbag system compo-
curtain airbag (B) deploys, such as on the hang on the coat hook. nents should be done only by an autho-
windshield, side door glass or front and  Never install a rear-facing child restraint rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Improper
rear pillars and roof side rail. When the system in the front passenger seat. Rear- work methods can cause accidental side
curtain airbag inflate, the microphone or facing child restraint systems MUST airbag and curtain airbag deployment, or
other object may be hurled with great ONLY be used in the rear seat. render a side airbag and curtain airbag
force or the curtain airbag may not inflate inoperable. Either of these situations can
correctly, resulting in death or serious result in serious injury or death.
injury.


your safety and the safety of all occupants, be
Deployment of side airbag and sure to always wear your seat belts properly. Side impact in an area away from the passenger
curtain airbag compartment
N00408200507
The side airbag and curtain airbag
The side airbag and curtain airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY when …
ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY 4
In certain types of side collisions, the side air-
when … bag and curtain airbag may not deploy, even Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle colli-
A side airbag and curtain airbag are designed if the deformation of the body seems to be sion with the side of vehicle
to deploy when the vehicle suffers a moderate large, because the vehicle’s body structure is
to severe side impact to the middle of the pas- designed to absorb the impact and to deform
senger compartment. in order to help protect the occupants. Some
The typical situation is shown in the illustra- typical situations where the side airbag and
tion. curtain airbag may not deploy are shown in
the illustrations. Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow
object
Moderate to severe impact to the middle of the Because the side airbags and curtain airbags
vehicle body’s side structure do not protect the occupant in all types of side
collisions, be sure to always wear your seat
belts properly.
The seat belts in your vehicle are your pri-

mary means of protection in an accident. The
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) side
airbags and curtain airbags are designed to
provide additional protection. Therefore, for

Oblique side impact Head-on collision SRS servicing

N00408500672
WARNING
 Any maintenance performed on or near
4 the components of the SRS should be per-
formed only by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer. Do not permit anyone else
Rear end collision
to do any service, inspection, maintenance
Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
or repair on any SRS components or wir-
ing. Similarly, no part of the SRS should
ever be handled, removed or disposed by
anyone except an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
Improper work methods on the SRS com-
ponents or wiring could result in an acci-
dental airbag deployment or could make
The side airbag and curtain airbag the SRS inoperable. Either of these situa-
ARE NOT DESIGNED TO tions could result in serious injury or
death.
DEPLOY when …
 Do not modify your steering wheel or any
other SRS component or related vehicle
The side airbag and curtain airbag are not part. For example, replacement of the
designed to deploy in situations where they steering wheel, or modifications to the
cannot provide protection to the occupants. front bumper or body structure can
Typical situations where the side airbags and adversely affect SRS performance and
curtain airbags cannot provide protection are may lead to injury.
shown in the illustrations below.  If your vehicle has received any damage,
you should have the SRS inspected by an
Because the side airbags and curtain airbags authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
do not protect the occupants in all types of make sure it is in proper working order.
collisions, be sure to always wear your seat
belts properly.


[For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico]
WARNING NOTE To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
 Do not modify your front seats, center pil- • Steering wheel
Caribbean, Inc.
lar or center console. Such modifications • Instrument panel
can adversely affect SRS performance and call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:
may lead to injury. [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.] Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Caribbean,
Also, if you discover any tear or open To contact Mitsubishi Motors North Inc.
seam in the seat fabric near the side air- America, Inc. Customer Service Department 4
bag, have the seat inspected by an autho- call 1-888-648-7820 or write to: P.O. Box 192216
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Mitsubishi Motors North America, SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
 If you find a crack in or damage to the Inc.
front pillar, rear pillar, or roof side rail Customer Relations Department [For vehicles sold in Guam]
where the curtain airbag is located, have To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.
P. O. Box 6400
the SRS inspected by an authorized Mit-
Cypress, CA 90630-0064 call (671) 649-3673 or write to:
subishi Motors dealer.
Triple J Enterprises, Inc.
[For vehicles sold in Canada] P.O. Box 6066
To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of TAMUNING
NOTE
Canada, Inc. GUAM 96931
 When you transfer ownership of the vehicle
to another person, we urge you to alert the call 1-888-576-4878 or write to:
new owner that it is equipped with the SRS Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, [For vehicles sold in Saipan]
and refer that owner to the applicable sec- Inc. To contact Triple J Motors
tions in this owner’s manual. Customer Relations Department call (670) 234-7133 or write to:
 If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle, P.O. Box 41009 Triple J Motors
we urge you to first take it to an authorized 4141 Dixie Road P.O. Box 500487
Mitsubishi Motors dealer so that the SRS can Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9 SAIPAN, MP96950-0487
be made safe for disposal.
 If any of the following parts needs to be
modified for use by a handicapped person,
the advanced airbag system will be greatly
affected. Please consult an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer for assistance.
• Driver’s seat
• Front passenger seat
• Front seat belt


[For vehicles sold in American
Samoa]
To contact Pacific Marketing Inc.
call 684 (699) 9140 or write to:
Pacific Marketing, Inc.
P.O. Box 698
4 PAGO PAGO,
AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799
Warning labels *- Located in the passenger’s side as well.

N00408600341
Occupant restraint warning labels for the SRS

are located in the vehicle as shown in the
illustration.

Features and controls
Break-in recommendations ..............................................................5-3 All-wheel driving operation ..........................................................5-86

Keys .................................................................................................5-3 Cautions on handling of all-wheel drive vehicles .........................5-87
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ........................5-4 Limited-slip differential (if so equipped) .......................................5-88 5
Keyless entry system (if so equipped) ..............................................5-7 Service brake .................................................................................5-89
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter Brake assist system ........................................................................5-90
(F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped) ..................................................5-12 Hill start assist (vehicles with Twin Clutch SST) ..........................5-90
Door locks ......................................................................................5-35 Anti-lock braking system ..............................................................5-91
Power door locks ...........................................................................5-37 Active Stability Control (ASC) (if so equipped) ............................5-94
“Child safety locks” for rear door ..................................................5-39 Power steering system ...................................................................5-96
Trunk lid ........................................................................................5-39 Cruise control (if so equipped) .......................................................5-97
Inside emergency trunk lid release ................................................5-41 Tire pressure monitoring system .................................................5-102
Theft-alarm system ........................................................................5-42 Rear-view camera (if so equipped)...............................................5-106
Power windows ..............................................................................5-44 Instrument cluster ........................................................................5-108
Sunroof (if so equipped) .................................................................5-46 Multi-information display ........................................................... 5-110
Parking brake .................................................................................5-48 Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display
Steering wheel tilt lock lever .........................................................5-50 list ...........................................................................................5-131
Inside day/night rearview mirror ...................................................5-50 Indicators .....................................................................................5-143
Outside rearview mirrors ...............................................................5-52 Warning lights ..............................................................................5-144
Ignition switch ...............................................................................5-53 Information screen display ..........................................................5-145
Steering wheel lock ........................................................................5-55 Combination headlights and dimmer switch ...............................5-147
Starting and stopping the engine ....................................................5-55 Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped)...................................5-152
Turbocharger operation (if so equipped) ........................................5-59 Turn signal lever ..........................................................................5-152
Manual transaxle (if so equipped) ..................................................5-59 Hazard warning flasher switch ....................................................5-153
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)..........5-61 Front fog light switch (if so equipped) .........................................5-153
Twin Clutch SST (Sportronic Shift Transmission) Wiper and washer switch .............................................................5-154
(if so equipped) ..........................................................................5-70 Electric rear window defogger switch .........................................5-158
ACD (Active center differential system) (if so equipped)..............5-82 Horn switch .................................................................................5-159
Electronically controlled 4WD system (if so equipped).................5-84 Link System (if so equipped) .......................................................5-159
Features and controls
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) .................................... 5-159

USB input terminal (if so equipped) ............................................ 5-181
5 Sun visors .................................................................................... 5-184
12 V power outlet ........................................................................ 5-184
Interior lights ............................................................................... 5-185
Storage spaces ............................................................................. 5-187
Cup holder ................................................................................... 5-190
Bottle holder ................................................................................ 5-191
Assist grip .................................................................................... 5-191
Coat hook (if so equipped) ........................................................... 5-192
Break-in recommendations
Break-in recommendations Keys

N00508700297 N00508800559
Advanced automobile manufacturing tech-

niques permit you to operate your new vehi- Type 1
cle without requiring a long break-in period
of low-speed driving. Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.
However, you can add to the future perfor-
mance and economy of your vehicle by
Keep one in a safe place as a spare key. 5
observing the following precautions during
the first 300 miles (500 km).
Drive your vehicle at moderate speeds during 1- Key for the electronic immobilizer and
the break-in period. keyless entry system
2- Key number plate
 Avoid revving the engine. For vehicles
with turbocharger, do not exceed 5,000
rpm for the first 600 miles (1,000 km). Type 3
 Avoid rough driving such as fast starts,
sudden acceleration, prolonged high- Two Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-
speed driving and sudden braking. These ter (F.A.S.T.-key) and two emergency keys
would have a detrimental effect on the 1- Key for the electronic immobilizer are provided.
engine and also cause increased fuel and 2- Key number plate Keep one F.A.S.T.-key and one emergency
oil consumption, which could result in key in a safe place together as a set of spare
malfunction of the engine components. Be keys.
particularly careful to avoid full accelera- Type 2
tion while in low gear.
 Do not overload the vehicle. Observe the Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.
seating capacity (See “Cargo load precau- Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.
tions” on page 6-10).
 Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing.
Features and controls 5-3

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)
NOTE Electronic immobilizer

• Keep away from devices that produce mag-
netism, such as audio systems, computers
(Anti-theft starting system)
N00509101804
and televisions.
• Keep away from devices that emit strong [For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand
electromagnetic waves, such as cellular Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
phones, wireless devices and high fre- key)]
5 quency equipment (including medical
devices).
For information on operations for vehicles
equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
• Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners. rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
• Do not leave the key where it may be “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
1- Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-
exposed to high temperature or high humid- (F.A.S.T.-key)”: “Electronic immobilizer
ter (F.A.S.T.-key) ity.
(with electronic immobilizer and keyless (Anti-theft starting system)” on page 5-28.
 If you lose your key, to prevent the theft of
entry system function) the vehicle immediately contact an autho- [Except for vehicles equipped with the Free-
2- Emergency key rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
hand Advanced Security Transmitter
3- Key number plate If you notify an authorized Mitsubishi
(F.A.S.T.-key)]
Motors dealer of the key number, they can
make a new key. The key number is stamped The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
NOTE on the key number plate. Keep the key num- nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
ber plate in a safe place separate from the theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
 The key is a precision electronic device with
a built-in signal transmitter. Please observe key itself. bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
the following in order to prevent damage.  No keys other than those registered in attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
• Do not leave where it may be exposed to advance can be used to start the engine. achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
heat caused by direct sunlight, such as on Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft a key “registered” to the immobilizer system.
top of the dashboard. starting system)” on page 5-4. All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s
• Do not take the remote control transmitter
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)”: “Electronic
apart. electronics.
immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on
• Do not excessively bend the key or subject
page 5-28.
it to strong impacts.
• Keep the remote control transmitter dry.
• Keep away from magnetic objects such as
key holders.
5-4 Features and controls

NOTE NOTE WARNING

 Do not attach additional keys or accessories  Do not make any alterations or additions
to the ignition key. Such objects could pre- B to the immobilizer system. Alterations or
vent the driver’s knee airbag from inflating additions could cause failure of the immo-
normally. Refer to “Deployment of front air- bilizer.
bags” on page 4-29.
 In the following cases, the vehicle may not
be able to recognize the registered ID code
from the key. This means the engine will not
Replacement keys 5
start even when the key is turned to the
“START” position. Only keys that have been programmed to the
• When the key contacts a key ring or other C vehicle’s electronics can be used to start the
metallic or magnetic object (Type A) vehicle.
• When the key grip contacts metal of
another key (Type B) If you lose the key, you can order a key from
• When the key contacts or is close to other your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by
immobilizer keys (including keys of other referring to the key number.
vehicles) (Type C) To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the
 In cases like the above, move the offending vehicle keys must be changed.
object(s) away from the key and turn the key  The key may not operate properly when it is
Take your vehicle and all remaining keys to
back to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. near an object or facility that emits strong
electromagnetic waves. your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
Then try to start the engine again. If the have your ID code changed.
engine does not start, contact an authorized  Electronic immobilizer is not compatible
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. with commercially available remote starting
systems. Use of commercially available Additional keys
A remote starting systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security pro-
tection. To add a key, you need to register the ID code
 A system failure is suspected when the igni- to the vehicle.
tion switch is turned to the “START” posi- Registering the ID code can be done by your
tion, and the engine does not start. In such a authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it
case, contact an authorized Mitsubishi can be done by yourself (except for vehicles
Motors dealer. sold in Canada).


For you to register the ID code yourself, fol- 3. Within 30 seconds of turning the first key
low the “Customer key programming” proce- to the “LOCK” position, insert the second
NOTE
 It is not possible to register a key if:
dure below. valid key into the ignition and turn it to
• the immobilizer display goes off during the
If you choose to have your authorized Mit- the “ON” position. About 10 seconds
procedure
subishi Motors dealer register the ID code, later, the immobilizer display will start to
• the immobilizer display does not come on
take your vehicle and all remaining keys to blink.
within 30 seconds after turning the ignition
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. 4. When the immobilizer display starts switch to the “ON” position with a blank
blinking, turn the second valid key to the
5 “LOCK” position and remove it. Within
immobilizer key
NOTE  The procedure will be terminated automati-
 You are provided with two keys, but you
30 seconds after doing so, insert a blank cally if:
may register up to eight keys. immobilizer key into the ignition switch • a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
and turn it to the “ON” position. Perform from the moment when the first key is
this operation no more than 30 seconds turned to the “LOCK” position to the
after the immobilizer display starts blink- moment when the second key is turned to
Customer key programming ing. When registration of the ID code is the “ON” position
(Except for vehicles sold in complete, the immobilizer display will • a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
Canada) come on for 3 seconds then go off. If an from the moment when the second key is
turned to the “LOCK” position to the
N00562201136 error occurs, the immobilizer display will
moment when the blank immobilizer key is
You can program new keys to the system if go off during the procedure.
turned to the “ON” position
you have two valid (already registered) keys  To use the new remote control transmitters, it
and blank (not registered) immobilizer key is necessary to register the key with both the
(specially cut for your vehicle at your Mit- electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
subishi Motors dealer) by doing the follow- tem.
ing: Also refer to “Keyless entry system: Cus-
5. If you wish to register another key, per- tomer remote control transmitter program-
1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition form the process again from step 1. ming” on page 5-9.
switch and turn the key to the “ON” posi-
tion for 5 seconds. NOTE General information
2. Turn the key to the “LOCK” position and  Perform the operation when the interrupt dis-
remove the first key. play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis- Your electronic immobilizer operates on a
play screen may prevent you from seeing the radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-
immobilizer display.
cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi-

Keyless entry system (if so equipped)

cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada
Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This
To unlock the doors
N00543301095
device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules
and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the
standard(s). driver’s door only.
Operation is subject to the following two con- Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK
ditions. button one more time to unlock all the doors.
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
 This device may not cause harmful inter- The turn signal lights will also blink twice. 5
ference. Except for vehicles with the rear seat arm
 This device must accept any interference rest, the front side-marker and parking lights
received, including interference that may 1- LOCK ( ) button will also turn on for about 30 seconds.
cause undesired operation. 2- UNLOCK ( ) button Refer to “Welcome light” on page 5-151.
3- Trunk ( ) button
CAUTION 4- PANIC button
NOTE
 Changes or modifications not expressly  The door unlock function can be set so that
5- Indicator light
approved by the manufacturer for compli- all doors unlock when the UNLOCK button
ance could void the user’s authority to oper- (2) is pressed once.
ate the equipment. Refer to “Setting of door unlock function” on
To lock the doors page 5-9.
N00542700024
Keyless entry system (if so Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the
doors. To open the trunk lid
equipped) The turn signal lights will also blink once. N00543400015
N00509000763
Press the trunk button (3) twice within about
Press the remote control transmitter buttons NOTE 5 seconds and the trunk lid will be opened.
to lock or unlock the doors and to open the  If you press the LOCK button (1) twice The trunk lid must be closed manually after it
trunk lid. quickly, the horn will sound once. has been opened.
It can also help you signal for attention by
setting off the panic alarm.

Answerback function Number Number of Condition

N00543501084
of Condition chimes To lock To unlock
chimes
Setting of the horn, turn signal lights and Two chimes One flash No flash
buzzer of the keyless entry system answer- The horn will sound if the
Four Three chimes No flash Two flashes
back function can be changed as required. LOCK button is pressed twice
chimes
This is done with the key removed from the quickly. Four chimes Two flashes One flash
ignition switch. Five chimes No flash One flash
5 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- Six chimes Two flashes No flash
NOTE bination headlights and dimmer switch to Seven
 The answerback function does not operate No flash No flash
the “OFF” position. chimes
when the key is in the ignition switch or any
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-
doors is opened.
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
during this time. 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and bination headlights and dimmer switch to
Horn deactivation/reactivation LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of the “OFF” position.
pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3. 3. Press the UNLOCK button (2) for 4 to 10
The horn answerback function can be set to seconds and press the LOCK button (1)
the following three conditions. during this time.
Each time the horn answerback function is Changing the setting of the turn
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and
set, a chime will sound to tell you the condi- signal lights answerback function LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
tion of the answerback function. pressing the LOCK button in step 3.
The turn signal lights answerback function
Number can be set to the following seven conditions.
of Condition Each time the turn signal lights answerback
Buzzer deactivation/reactivation
chimes function is set, a chime will sound to tell you
the condition of the answerback function. The buzzer answerback function can be
One
The horn will not sound. turned ON or OFF as required.
chime
Number of Condition
Two
The horn will sound. chimes To lock To unlock
chimes
One chime One flash Two flashes


1. Press the PANIC button (4) for more than
Setting of door unlock function 1 second.
Additional remote control
N00543601131
2. The headlights will blink on and off and transmitters
The door unlock function can be set to the the horn will sound intermittently for N00543900010
following two conditions. about 3 minutes. To add a remote control transmitter, you must
Each time the door unlock function is set, a 3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on already have one registered remote control
chime will sound to tell you the condition of the remote control transmitter. transmitter.
the door unlock function. Registering the ID code can be done by your-
self or by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
5
Number of Replacement remote control
Condition dealer. For you to register the ID code your-
chimes transmitters self, follow the “Customer remote control
N00543800019
One chime All doors unlock transmitter programming” procedure below.
Only remote control transmitters pro- If you choose to have your authorized Mit-
Two chimes Driver’s door unlock only
grammed with the vehicle’s electronics can subishi Motors dealer register the ID code,
lock or unlock all doors. take your vehicle and all remaining keys to
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- If you lose the remote control transmitter, you
bination headlights and dimmer switch to can order a remote control transmitter from
the “OFF” position. your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by NOTE
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- referring to the key number.  You are provided with two remote control
transmitters, but you may register up to eight
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) To prevent vehicle theft, the ID codes for all
remote control transmitters.
during this time. the remote control transmitters except the one
4. Release in sequence the LOCK and for the lost key must be programmed again.
UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of Take your vehicle and all the remaining
pressing the LOCK button in step 3. remote control transmitters to your authorized Customer remote control trans-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have your ID mitter programming
codes programmed again.
Using the panic alarm N00544001129
N00543700018
You can program new remote control trans-
mitters to the system if you have one valid
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
(already registered) remote control transmit-
ened, you may activate the alarm to call atten-
ter by doing the following:
tion as follows:


1. Have available all (current and new) 6. If no ID code of a remote control trans-
remote control transmitters you wish to mitter is registered within 60 seconds
NOTE
 If you lose your remote control transmitter,
register. after step 4, the registration mode is can-
please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
2. With a valid (already registered) remote celed and the normal mode returns.
Motors dealer for a replacement.
control transmitter, press the UNLOCK
 If you wish to obtain an additional remote
button (2) for 4 to 10 seconds. Then press
and hold the LOCK button (1).
NOTE control transmitter, please contact an autho-
 For verification purposes, try to lock and rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. A maximum
3. Within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK
5 button, release the LOCK and UNLOCK
unlock the doors after the registration is of eight remote control transmitters can be
programmed for your vehicle.
completed.
buttons in sequence.  The indicator light (5) comes on each time a  To use the new remote control transmitters, it
At this time, ID codes for all remote con- button is pressed. is necessary to register the key with both the
trol transmitters except for the transmitter  The keyless entry system does not work if electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
used in steps 2 and 3 are erased and the tem.
the key is in the ignition switch.
answerback function (door is locked and Also refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
 The remote control transmitter can be used
theft starting system): Customer key pro-
unlocked) informs you that the registra- from about 40 feet (12 m) away. However,
gramming” on page 5-6.
tion mode has been activated. this distance may change if your vehicle is
4. Within 60 seconds after step 3, complete near a TV transmitting tower, a power sta-
the following ID code registration operation, or a radio station. General information
tion using the next remote control trans-  If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed when N00546101111
mitter you wish to register within 4 all doors are locked and no doors are opened
within about 30 seconds, the doors will auto-
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
seconds. frequency subject to Federal Communica-
matically re-lock.
i. Press both the LOCK and UNLOCK tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles
 If the following conditions are observed after
buttons for 2 seconds. sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules
pressing the buttons on the remote control
ii. Release both the LOCK and UNLOCK transmitter, the battery in the remote control (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device
buttons for 1 second. transmitter may need to be replaced. complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and
iii. Press the UNLOCK button. • The doors cannot be locked or unlocked. Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan-
The answerback function informs you • The trunk lid cannot be opened. dard(s).
that the ID code registration of the • The panic alarm cannot be operated. Operation is subject to the following two con-
transmitter is completed. • The indicator light (5) is dim or does not ditions.
5. To register the ID codes of additional come on.
remote control transmitters, repeat step 4  This device may not cause harmful inter-
within 60 seconds after step 4. ference.


 This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
 Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper- 5
ate the equipment.
Procedure for replacing the NOTE

4. Remove the old battery.
5. Install a new battery with the +side (A)
remote control transmitter bat-  Be sure to perform the procedure with the
down.
tery Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the Mitsubi-
N00544100077
shi mark is not facing you when you open the
remote control transmitter case, the buttons + side
1. Before replacing the battery, remove static
may come out.
electricity from your body by touching a
metal grounded object.
2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you, 3. Remove the remote control transmitter
insert the cloth-covered tip of a flat blade from the remote control transmitter case. - side
screwdriver into the notch in the remote Then, open the remote control transmitter
control transmitter case and use it to open using the method described in step 2. Coin type battery
the case. CR1620
6. Close the remote control transmitter

firmly.
7. Place the remote control transmitter in the
remote control transmitter case, then
securely close the remote control trans-
mitter case.

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

8. Check the keyless entry system to see that system” on page 5-30.
it works.
The F.A.S.T.-key must be carried by the
NOTE driver. The F.A.S.T.-key is required for
 You may purchase a replacement battery at vehicle operations such as locking and
an electric appliance store. unlocking the doors, opening the trunk
 Your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer lid, and starting the engine. When leaving
can replace the battery for you if you prefer. the vehicle, make sure you are carrying
5 the F.A.S.T.-key and then lock the vehi-
cle.
CAUTION
 When the remote control transmitter case is
opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc. WARNING
out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-  Individuals who use implantable pace-
nents. makers or implantable cardioverter-defi- A- External transmitter
brillators should keep away from the
B- Internal transmitter
external and internal transmitters. The
Free-hand Advanced Secu- electromagnetic waves used in the
F.A.S.T.-key may affect the operation of
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.- implantable pacemakers and implantable WARNING
key) (if so equipped) cardioverter-defibrillators.  Individuals using other electrical medical
apparatuses besides implantable pace-
N00503100052
makers and implantable cardioverter-
The Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit- defibrillators should check with the manu-
facturer of the apparatus to confirm the
ter (F.A.S.T.-key) enables the doors to be
effect of the electromagnetic waves used
locked and unlocked, the trunk lid to be by the F.A.S.T.-key. The electromagnetic
opened, and the engine to be started simply waves may affect the operations of the
by carrying it. electro-medical apparatus.
The F.A.S.T.-key can also be used as the
remote control transmitter of the keyless
entry system.
Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)”: “Keyless entry


The operations possible with the F.A.S.T.- when the ID codes of the vehicle and
key can be modified as stated below.
NOTE F.A.S.T.-key match.
Use the emergency key in such circum-
(Keyless entry operations are possible.)
stances.
For details, contact an authorized Mitsubi-
Refer to “To operate using the emergency
shi Motors dealer. key” on page 5-23.
• Enabling only the locking and unlocking  The F.A.S.T.-key is constantly performing
of the doors and the opening of the trunk reception operations in its communication
lid
• Enabling only the starting of the engine
with the vehicle. This means that the battery
is always running down, regardless of how
5
• Deactivating the F.A.S.T.-key often the F.A.S.T.-key is used. The battery
life is about 1 to 3 years, depending on the
usage conditions.
NOTE  Since the F.A.S.T.-key is constantly perform-
 The F.A.S.T.-key uses weak electromagnetic ing reception operations, the reception of
waves. strong electromagnetic waves can accelerate
In cases such as the following, operation the running down of the battery. Do not place NOTE
may be improper or unstable. near electrical appliances such as televisions  When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key has run
• The vehicle is near a facility that emits or computers. down or there are strong electromagnetic
strong electromagnetic waves, such as a TV waves or noise in the area, the operating
transmitting tower, a power station, a radio range could decrease or operations could
station or an airport Operating range of the become unstable.
• The key is carried together with other com- F.A.S.T.-key
munication devices such as cellular phones N00503200112
or radios, or electrical appliances such as
computers
When a person enters the operating range of Operating range for locking and
• The F.A.S.T.-key touches or is covered by a
the F.A.S.T.-key while carrying the F.A.S.T.- unlocking the doors and for open-
metal object key and presses the driver’s or front passen- ing the trunk lid
• A keyless entry system is being used ger’s door lock/unlock switch or the trunk lid
nearby OPEN switch, verification of the ID code is
The operating range is within about 2.3 feet
• The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is run down performed.
(70 cm) of the driver’s and front passenger’s
• The vehicle is in a location with strong The F.A.S.T.-key enables the doors to be
door lock/unlock switches, and the center of
electromagnetic waves or noise locked and unlocked, the trunk lid to be
the trunk lid.
opened and the engine to be started only

Operating range for starting the To operate using the F.A.S.T.-

engine key
N00503300025
N00503401241
The operating range is the interior of the

vehicle. To lock the doors
5 While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, press the

driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock
switch (A) within the operating range to lock
*: Front of the vehicle all the doors.
The turn signal lights will blink once and the
: Operating range
buzzer will sound once.
Also refer to “Door locks” and “Power door

NOTE locks” on pages 5-35 and 5-37 respectively.
 Only the F.A.S.T.-key that is detectable by
the doors and the trunk lid can lock and
*: Front of the vehicle
unlock the doors and open the trunk lid.
 The system may not operate if the F.A.S.T.- : Operating range
key is too close to the windshield, door win-
dows or trunk lid.
 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within about 2.3 NOTE
feet (70 cm) of the driver’s or front passen-  Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operat-
ger’s door lock/unlock switch and center of ing range, it may not be possible to start the
the trunk lid, the system may not operate if engine if the key is in a storage space such as
the key is close to the ground or in a high the glove compartment, on top of the instru-
position. ment panel, or in the door pocket or trunk
 If the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating compartment.
range, even a person not carrying the  Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is outside the vehi-
F.A.S.T.-key can lock and unlock the doors cle, it may be possible to start the engine if NOTE
or open the trunk lid by pressing the driver’s the key is too close to a door or door win-  In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.-
or front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch dow. key does not operate.
or the trunk lid OPEN switch.

NOTE NOTE
• There is a F.A.S.T.-key in the passenger  If the doors are unlocked when all doors are
compartment locked and no doors are opened within about
• A door is open or ajar 30 seconds, the doors will automatically re-
• The ignition switch is in a position other lock.
than “LOCK”  In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.-
• The emergency key is inserted into the igni- key does not operate.
tion switch • A door is open or ajar 5
 When the vehicle is locked, the theft-alarm • The ignition switch is in a position other
system prepares to enter the armed stage. than “LOCK”
Refer to “Theft-alarm system” for further • The emergency key is inserted into the igni-
details on page 5-42. tion switch
NOTE  The amount of time after unlocking until the
 Settings can be changed so that all doors are vehicle re-locks automatically can be
To unlock the doors unlocked automatically by one press of the adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi
driver’s door lock/unlock switch (A). Motors dealer for details.
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key within the Refer to “Setting of door unlock function” on  Function settings can be modified as stated
operating range, you can unlock the doors by pages 5-9 and 5-32. below.
F.A.S.T-key operation. See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. Press the front passenger’s door lock/unlock for details.
The turn signal lights will blink twice and the switch (A) to unlock all the doors. • Activating the operation confirmation func-
buzzer will sound twice. tion (blink of the turn signal lights) only
Also refer to “Door locks” and “Power door during locking, or only during unlocking.
locks” on pages 5-35 and 5-37 respectively. • Deactivating the operation confirmation
function (blink of the turn signal lights) and
Press the driver’s door lock/unlock switch buzzer.
(A) to unlock only the driver’s door. • Modifying the number of blink in the oper-
Within about 2 seconds, press the driver’s ation confirmation function (blink of the
turn signal lights).
door lock/unlock switch (A) one more time to
• Making the buzzer sound when the
unlock all the doors.
F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger
compartment when all the doors are closed.


used to start the engine. (Electronic immobi-
To open the trunk lid ACC
lizer function)
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, the ignition
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key within the switch can be turned to start the engine. Allows operation of electrical accessories
operating range to open the trunk lid, press with the engine off.
and hold down the OPEN switch (A) until the
trunk lid opens. ON
5 Also refer to “Trunk lid” on pages 5-39
respectively. The engine runs and all electrical accessories
can be used.
START
Engages the starter. Release the ignition

switch when the engine starts. The ignition
switch returns automatically to the “ON”
position.
LOCK (PUSH OFF)
The position where the steering wheel is NOTE

locked.  Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code
NOTE which the F.A.S.T.-key sends must match the
 The F.A.S.T.-key does not operate when the LOCK (PUSH ON) one registered to the immobilizer computer.
trunk lid is open. (Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft
When the ID code verification inside the starting system)” on page 5-28.)
vehicle produces a match, the ignition switch
Ignition switch can be turned.
N00513500059
To prevent vehicle theft, no F.A.S.T.-keys

other than those registered in advance can be

NOTE NOTE
 If the ignition switch is not turned to the  To turn the ignition switch from the “LOCK
“LOCK (PUSH OFF)” position when the (PUSH OFF)” position to the “ACC” posi-
engine is not running, the ID code cannot be tion, push the ignition switch again, turn the
verified and the engine will not start even if steering wheel in both directions and then
the ignition switch is turned to the “START” turn the ignition switch.
position. If this happens, fully return the  The ignition switch cannot be turned unless
ignition switch to the “LOCK (PUSH OFF)”
position, and start the engine again.
the F.A.S.T.-key is inside the vehicle.
Refer to “Operating range for starting the
5
engine” on page 5-14.
To turn from “LOCK (PUSH
OFF)” to “ACC” NOTE
N00513600021
To turn from “ACC” to “LOCK”
N00513700051  For vehicle with CVT or Twin Clutch SST,
Turn slowly after pressing the ignition switch. the ignition switch cannot be turned to the
For vehicles with manual transaxle “LOCK” position unless the selector lever
(CVT) or the gearshift lever (Twin Clutch
Slowly turn the ignition switch to the SST) is in the “P” (PARK) position.
“LOCK” position while pressing it.
For vehicles with continuously variable CAUTION

transmission (CVT) or Twin Clutch SST  If the engine is stopped while driving, the
(sportronic shift transmission) power brake booster will stop functioning
and greater effort for braking will be
First, set the selector lever (CVT) or the gear- required. Also, the power steering system
shift lever (Twin Clutch SST) to the “P” will not function and it will require greater
(PARK) position, and then slowly turn the effort to manually steer the vehicle.
A- Steering wheel locked ignition switch to the “LOCK” position while  Do not leave the ignition switch in the “ON”
B- Steering wheel lock released pressing it. position for a long time when the engine is
not running. Doing so could lead to a dead
battery.
 Do not turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position when the engine is run-
ning. It will damage the starter motor.

Warning activation Type 1 Type 1

N00503500160
Someone may be carrying a
F.A.S.T.-key with a different Refer to “Key lock-in pre-
With the F.A.S.T.-key, warnings are given ID code, or the F.A.S.T.-key vention system” on page
through buzzers and displays on the informa- Type 2 Type 2
may not be within the oper- 5-19.
tion screen in the multi-information display ating range
in order to prevent mistaken operations or
vehicle theft.
5 When a warning operates, be sure to check Type 1 Type 1
the vehicle and the F.A.S.T.-key. A warning is
also displayed if there is a problem in the Refer to “F.A.S.T.-key take-
Refer to “Door ajar preven-
F.A.S.T.-key. out monitoring system” on
Type 2 Type 2 tion system” on page 5-19.
If the following warning displays, contact an page 5-18.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Type 1 Type 1 Type 1
Refer to “Ignition switch

There is a problem in the The battery of the F.A.S.T.-
turn-off reminder system” on
Type 2 F.A.S.T.-key Type 2 key is run down Type 2
page 5-20.
If the following warning display, the display  A door cannot be locked even when the
F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring
goes off if corrective action is taken. driver’s or front passenger’s door
lock/unlock switch is pressed. system
 The ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key and the N00559801141
vehicle cannot be verified Type1


Type 2
Key lock-in prevention system Door ajar prevention system
N00559900103 N00560000104
Type 1 Type 1
When the ignition switch is in a position

other than the “LOCK (PUSH OFF)”, if the 5
door(s) are opened, the F.A.S.T. - key is Type 2 Type 2
removed from the passenger compartment,
and then the door(s) are closed, the warning
display is displayed and the buzzer sounds 4
times as a warning since it’s impossible to
verify the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key and
vehicle.
When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK
NOTE (PUSH OFF)” position, the F.A.S.T.-key is (PUSH OFF)” position, and someone tries to
left in the passenger compartment, all the lock the vehicle by pressing the driver’s or
 The F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring system
does not function if the F.A.S.T.-key is doors are closed, and someone tries to lock front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch
removed through a window without opening the vehicle by pressing the driver’s or front while one of the doors is not fully closed, the
a door. This setting can be changed. passenger’s door lock/unlock switch, the warning display is displayed and the buzzer
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer warning display is displayed and the buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds as a warning, and
for details. sounds for about 3 seconds as a warning, and the doors cannot be locked.
 The warning may display even if the the doors cannot be locked.
F.A.S.T.-key is in the operating range for If all the doors are manually locked and
starting the engine. The surrounding envi- closed while the ignition switch is in the
ronment or electromagnetic waves may “LOCK (PUSH OFF)” position and the
make it impossible to verify the ID codes of
F.A.S.T.-key is left in the car, the doors will
the F.A.S.T.-key and vehicle.
automatically unlock and a buzzer will sound
for about 3 seconds.

Ignition switch turn-off reminder Steering wheel lock CAUTION

system N00514300025  If your vehicle needs to be towed, turn the
N00560100105 ignition switch to the “ACC” position to
Type 1 unlock the steering wheel.
NOTE
5  If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft
lock may sometimes make it difficult to turn
the ignition switch from “LOCK” to “ACC”
Type 2 position. Firmly turn the steering wheel to
the left or to the right as you turn the ignition
switch.
To lock Starting
N00514601302
When the ignition switch is in a position
Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi-
other than “LOCK (PUSH OFF)”, all the
tion. Tips for starting
doors are closed, and someone tries to lock
Turn the steering wheel until it is locked.
the vehicle by pressing the driver’s or front  Do not operate the starter motor for longer
passenger’s door lock/unlock switch, the than 15 seconds as this could run the bat-
warning display is displayed and the buzzer To unlock tery down or damage the starter motor. If
sounds for about 3 seconds as a warning, and the engine does not start, turn the ignition
the doors cannot be locked. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” posi- switch back to the “LOCK” position, wait
tion while moving the steering wheel slightly. a few seconds, and then try again. Trying
repeatedly with the engine or starter
CAUTION motor still turning will damage the starter
 Carry the key with you when leaving the mechanism.
vehicle.


 If the engine will not start because the bat-
tery is weak or discharged, refer to
CAUTION NOTE
 Do not push-start the vehicle.  For models equipped with a manual trans-
“Jump-starting the engine” on page 8-2
 Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive axle, the starter will not operate unless the
for instructions.
at high speeds until the engine has had a clutch pedal is fully depressed (Clutch inter-
 A longer warm up period will only con- lock). This is a safety feature.
chance to warm up.
sume extra fuel. The engine is warmed up
 Release the ignition switch as soon as the
enough for driving when the bar graph of engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor
the engine coolant temperature display 4. On vehicles with manual transaxle, place
starts to move. Refer to “Interrupt display
will be damaged. the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) 5
screen (With ignition switch in the “ON” position.
position)” on page 5-119. On vehicles with continuously variable
Starting the engine transmission (CVT) or Twin Clutch SST,
 On vehicles equipped with the Twin
Clutch SST, the following may occur after make sure the selector lever (CVT) or the
Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni- gearshift lever (Twin Clutch SST) is in the
the engine is started, but they do not indi-
cally controlled fuel injection system. This is “P” (PARK) position.
cate an abnormality.
a system that automatically controls fuel
• You may hear operational sounds of the
Twin Clutch SST and you may feel
injection. There is no need to depress the NOTE
accelerator pedal when starting the engine.  On vehicles with CVT, the starter will not
vibration in the vehicle body.
The starter motor should not be run for more operate unless the selector lever is in the “P”
• If you shift the gearshift lever into the
than 15 seconds at a time. (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
“N” (NEUTRAL) position and depress
To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds On vehicles with Twin Clutch SST, the
the accelerator pedal, increases in the starter will not operate unless the gearshift
between attempts to restart the engine.
engine speed will be limited. lever is in the “P” (PARK) position or the
1. Make sure all occupants are properly gearshift lever is in the “N” (NEUTRAL)
position with the brake pedal depressed.
WARNING seated with seat belts fastened.
For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P”
 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly 2. Press and hold the brake pedal down with
(PARK) position so that the wheels are
ventilated area any longer than is needed your right foot.
locked.
to move your vehicle out of the area. Car- 3. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way
bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and down (manual transaxle).
extremely poisonous, could build up and
cause serious injury or death.


5. While pushing the ignition switch from 2. While depressing the brake pedal on vehi-
Startability of continuously variable
“LOCK” (PUSH OFF) to “LOCK” cles equipped with continuously variable
transmission (CVT) vehicles or Twin
(PUSH ON), set the ignition switch to the transmission (CVT) or Twin Clutch SST
Clutch SST vehicles at extremely cold
“ON” position and confirm that all warn- or the clutch pedal on the vehicles
ambient temperature
ing lights and warning displays are oper- equipped with manual transaxle, press the
ating properly. accelerator pedal halfway and hold it When the ambient temperature is -4°F
6. Without pressing the accelerator pedal, there, then crank the engine. Release the (-20°C) or lower on vehicles with CVT, or
slowly turn the ignition switch to the accelerator pedal, immediately after the
5 “START” position to start the engine. engine starts.
-22°F (-30°C) or lower on vehicles with Twin
Clutch SST, it may not be possible to start
Release the ignition switch when the 3. If the engine still will not start, the engine from a standstill even with the selector lever
engine starts. could be flooded with too much gasoline. (CVT) or the gearshift lever (Twin Clutch
While depressing the brake pedal on vehi- SST) in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R”
cles equipped with CVT or Twin Clutch (REVERSE) position.
NOTE SST or the clutch pedal on the vehicles
 Minor noises may be heard on engine start- This phenomenon occurs because the trans-
equipped with manual transaxle, push the axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does
up. These will disappear as the engine warms
up. accelerator pedal all the way down and not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place
hold it there, then crank the engine for 5 the selector lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever
to 6 seconds. Return the ignition switch to (Twin Clutch SST) in the “P” (PARK) posi-
When the engine is hard to start
the “LOCK” position and release the tion and let the engine idle for at least 10 min-
After several attempts, you may experience accelerator pedal. Wait a few seconds, and utes.
that the engine still does not start. then crank the engine again for 5 to 6 sec- The transaxle will warm up, and you will be
onds while depressing the brake pedal or able to drive normally.
1. Make sure that all electric devices, such the clutch pedal, but do not push the Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
as lights, air conditioning blower and rear accelerator pedal. Release the ignition key operation.
window defogger, are turned off. if the engine starts. If the engine fails to
start, repeat these procedures. If the
engine still will not start, contact your
local Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
facility of your choice for assistance.

To operate using the emergency NOTE Ignition switch

key  Only use the emergency key in an emer- N00529301222
N00514800020
gency. When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key To prevent vehicle theft, only the emergency
has run down, replace the battery as soon as key with the pre-registered F.A.S.T.-key
possible and use it as a F.A.S.T.-key again. inserted can start the engine. (Electronic
Emergency key  After using the emergency key, be sure to
N00515200148
immobilizer function)
reinsert it into the F.A.S.T.-key.
The emergency key is built into the F.A.S.T.- 5
key. To lock or unlock the driver’s door with
When the F.A.S.T.-key cannot be used, such the emergency key
as when the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key or the
vehicle has run down, the emergency key can Turn the emergency key toward the front of
be used to lock and unlock the driver’s door the vehicle to lock the door. After checking
and to start the engine. that the door is locked, turn the emergency
key back to the center and remove it.
To use the emergency key (1), unlock the lock
knob (2) and remove it from the F.A.S.T.-key
(3).
LOCK
The engine is off and the steering wheel is

locked. The emergency key can be inserted
and removed only when the ignition switch is
in this position.
1- Insert or remove the emergency key ACC

2- Lock
3- Unlock The electrical accessories can be used with
the engine off.

ON To turn from “ACC” to “LOCK”
The engine will start only by using the emer- 1. [For vehicles with manual transaxle]
gency key with the F.A.S.T.-key inserted. It is Push the emergency key in at the “ACC”
possible to use all electrical accessories with position and keep it depressed until it is
only the emergency key. turned to the “LOCK” position, and
remove.
5 START [For vehicles with continuously variable
transmission (CVT) or Twin Clutch SST]
Engages the starter. Release the emergency First, set the selector lever (CVT) or the
key when the engine starts. The ignition gearshift lever (Twin Clutch SST) to the
switch returns automatically to the “ON” 3. Insert the emergency key into the ignition “P” (PARK) position, and then slowly
position. switch, and slowly push and turn. turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position while pressing it.
NOTE
 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code
which the F.A.S.T.-key sends must match the
one registered to the immobilizer computer.
(Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft
starting system)” on page 5-28.)
To turn from “LOCK” to “ACC”
1. Remove the emergency key from the

F.A.S.T.-key. NOTE
 When the ignition switch cannot be turned NOTE
Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-23.
from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”  For vehicles with CVT or Twin Clutch SST,
2. While pushing the lock release buttons
position, turn the ignition switch while turn- the emergency key cannot be removed unless
(A), remove the cover of the ignition the selector lever (CVT) or the gearshift
ing the steering wheel in both directions.
switch. lever (Twin Clutch SST) is set to the “P”
(PARK) position.


2. Install the cover of the ignition switch. Steering wheel lock
3. Reinsert the emergency key into the
NOTE
 If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft
F.A.S.T.-key.
lock may sometimes make it difficult to turn
the emergency key from “LOCK” to “ACC”.
NOTE Firmly turn the steering wheel to the left or
 Always install the cover of the ignition to the right as you turn the emergency key.
switch when not using the emergency key.
Not doing so could cause damage if foreign Starting 5
material such as dust gets into the keyhole of
the ignition switch. Tips for starting
 Do not operate the starter motor continu-

CAUTION ously for longer than 15 seconds as this
 Do not turn the ignition switch to the LOCK To lock could run the battery down or damage the
position while the vehicle is moving. This starter motor. If the engine does not start,
will cause the steering wheel to lock, making
Turn the emergency key to the “LOCK” posi- turn the emergency key back to the
it impossible to operate the vehicle. tion. “LOCK” position, wait a few seconds,
 If the engine is stopped while driving, the Turn the steering wheel until it is locked. and then try again. Trying repeatedly with
power brake booster will stop functioning the engine or starter motor still turning
and greater effort for braking will be To unlock will damage the starter mechanism.
required. Also, the power steering system  If the engine will not start because the bat-
will not function and it will require greater Turn the emergency key to the “ACC” posi- tery is weak or discharged, refer to
effort to manually steer the vehicle. tion while moving the steering wheel slightly. “Jump-starting the engine” on page 8-2
 Do not leave the ignition switch in the “ON” for instructions.
position for a long time when the engine is
not running. The battery will run down.
CAUTION  A longer warm up period will only con-
 Remove the emergency key when leaving the sume extra fuel. The engine is warmed up
 Do not turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position when the engine is run- vehicle. enough for driving when the bar graph of
ning. It will damage the starter motor.  If your vehicle needs to be towed, turn the the engine coolant temperature display
emergency key to the “ACC” position to starts to move. Refer to “Interrupt display
unlock the steering wheel. screen (With ignition switch in the “ON”
position)” on page 5-119.


 On vehicles equipped with the Twin Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni-
Clutch SST, the following may occur after cally controlled fuel injection system. This is
the engine is started, but they do not indi- a system that automatically controls the fuel
cate an abnormality. injection. There is no need to depress the
• You may hear operational sounds of the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.
Twin Clutch SST and you may feel The starter motor should not be run for more
vibration in the vehicle body. than 15 seconds at a time.
• If you shift the gearshift lever into the To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
5 “N” (NEUTRAL) position and depress between attempts to restart the engine.
the accelerator pedal, increases in the
engine speed will be limited. 1. Make sure all occupants are properly
seated with seat belts fastened.
4. Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the emergency
WARNING key.
(A), remove the cover of the ignition
 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly switch.
ventilated area any longer than is needed
to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and
extremely poisonous, could build up and
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION
 Do not push-start the vehicle.
 Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive
at high speeds until the engine has had a 5. Press and hold the brake pedal down with
chance to warm up.
your right foot.
 Release the emergency key as soon as the 3. Insert the emergency key into the ignition
6. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way
engine starts. It will damage the starter switch.
motor.
down (manual transaxle).
Starting the engine


8. Turn the emergency key with the
NOTE F.A.S.T.-key to the “ON” position and
NOTE
 For models equipped with a manual trans-  When using the emergency key to start the
make certain that all warning lights and
axle, the starter will not operate unless the engine, first remove the key from the key
warning displays are functioning properly
clutch pedal is fully depressed (Clutch inter- holder. If the emergency key is attached to a
lock). This is a safety feature. before starting the engine. key holder (key ring), it may become impos-
9. Turn the emergency key with the sible to insert the keyless operation key into
F.A.S.T.-key to the “START” position the emergency key, and it may prevent the
7. On vehicles with manual transaxle, place without pressing the accelerator pedal.
the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) Release the emergency key with the
engine from being started.
5
position. F.A.S.T.-key when the engine starts. When the engine is hard to start
On vehicles with CVT or Twin Clutch 10. Remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the emer-
SST, make sure the selector lever (CVT) gency key. After several attempts, you may experience
or the gearshift lever (Twin Clutch SST) that the engine still does not start.
is in the “P” (PARK) position.
NOTE 1. Make sure that all electric devices, such
NOTE  Minor noises may be heard on engine start- as lights, air conditioning blower and rear
up. These will disappear as the engine warms window defogger, are turned off.
 On vehicles with continuously variable
up. 2. While depressing the brake pedal on vehi-
transmission (CVT) or Twin Clutch SST, the
starter will not operate unless the selector cles equipped with continuously variable
lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever (Twin transmission (CVT) or Twin Clutch SST
Clutch SST) is in the “P” (PARK) position or WARNING or the clutch pedal on the vehicles
the selector lever (CVT) or the gearshift  Make sure to remove the F.A.S.T.-key equipped with manual transaxle, press the
lever (Twin Clutch SST) is in the “N” (NEU- from the emergency key after the engine is accelerator pedal halfway and hold it
TRAL) position with the brake pedal started.
there, then crank the engine. Release the
depressed. If not removed, the F.A.S.T.-key could fall
to the floor, which may interfere with
accelerator pedal, immediately after the
For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P”
(PARK) position so that the wheels are pedal operation. engine starts.
locked. Furthermore, the F.A.S.T.-key could pre-
vent the driver’s knee airbag from inflat-
ing normally or could be propelled to
cause serious injury if the airbag inflates.


3. If the engine still will not start, the engine Clutch SST) in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R”
Replacement F.A.S.T.-key
could be flooded with too much gasoline. (REVERSE) position.
N00561000039
While depressing the brake pedal on vehi- This phenomenon occurs because the trans-
cles equipped with CVT or Twin Clutch axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does Only the F.A.S.T.-keys that have been pro-
SST or the clutch pedal on the vehicles not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place grammed to the vehicle’s electronics can be
equipped with manual transaxle, push the the selector lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever used to start the vehicle.
accelerator pedal all the way down and (Twin Clutch SST) in the “P” (PARK) posi-
If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order a
hold it there, then crank the engine for 5 tion and let the engine idle for at least 10 min-
5 to 6 seconds. Return the ignition switch to utes.
F.A.S.T.-key from your authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer by referring to the key number.
the “LOCK” position and release the The transaxle will warm up, and you will be
To prevent vehicle theft, the ID codes for all
accelerator pedal. Wait a few seconds, and able to drive normally.
the F.A.S.T.-keys except the one for the lost
then crank the engine again for 5 to 6 sec- Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
F.A.S.T. -key must be programmed again.
onds while depressing the brake pedal or operation.
Take your vehicle and all the remaining
the clutch pedal, but do not push the
F.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized Mitsubishi
accelerator pedal. Release the ignition key
if the engine starts. If the engine fails to
Electronic immobilizer (Anti- Motors dealer to have your ID codes pro-
theft starting system) grammed again.
start, repeat these procedures. If the
engine still will not start, contact your N00529600101
local Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig- Additional F.A.S.T.-key
facility of your choice for assistance. nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle N00561100030
theft. The purpose of the system is to immo- To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have
Startability of continuously variable bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is two registered F.A.S.T.-keys. You need to
transmission (CVT) vehicles or Twin attempted. A valid start attempt can only be register the ID code to the vehicle.
Clutch SST vehicles at extremely cold achieved (subject to certain conditions) using Registering the ID code can be done by your
ambient temperature a F.A.S.T.-Key “registered” to the immobi- authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it
lizer system. can be done by yourself (except for vehicles
When the ambient temperature is -4 °F All of the keys provided with your new vehi- sold in Canada).
(-20 °C) or lower on vehicles with CVT, or cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s For you to register the ID code yourself, fol-
-22 °F (-30 °C) or lower on vehicles with electronics. low the “Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
Twin Clutch SST, it may not be possible to ming” procedure below.
start from a standstill even with the selector If you choose to have your authorized Mit-
lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever (Twin subishi Motors dealer register the ID code,


take your vehicle and all remaining F.A.S.T.- 1. Remove the emergency key from the
keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors F.A.S.T.-key. Refer to “Emergency key”
dealer. on page 5-23.
NOTE (A), remove the cover of the ignition
 You are provided with two F.A.S.T.-keys, but
switch.
you may register up to four F.A.S.T.-keys.
You can obtain blank F.A.S.T.-keys specially
cut for your vehicle from your Mitsubishi
5
Motors dealer.
5. Turn the emergency key with the

Customer F.A.S.T.-key program- F.A.S.T.-key to the “ON” position for 5
ming (Except for vehicles sold in seconds.
Canada) 6. Turn the emergency key with the
N00561200073
F.A.S.T.-key to the “LOCK” position.
Within 30 seconds after doing so, remove
You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to the
3. Insert the emergency key into the ignition the F.A.S.T.-key from the emergency key,
system if you have two valid (already regis-
switch. insert the second valid F.A.S.T.-key into
tered) F.A.S.T.-keys, blank (not registered)
the emergency key and turn it to the “ON”
F.A.S.T.-key and emergency key (specially
position. About 10 seconds later, the
cut for your vehicle at your Mitsubishi
immobilizer display will start to blink.
Motors dealer).
To use the new F.A.S.T.-key, it is necessary to
register the key with both the electronic
immobilizer and keyless entry system.
Also refer to “Keyless entry system: Cus-
tomer F.A.S.T.-key programming” on page
5-33.
For F.A.S.T.-key programming, follow the

procedures below. 4. Insert the first valid F.A.S.T.-key into the
emergency key.


7. When the immobilizer display starts
blinking, turn the second valid F.A.S.T.-
NOTE
• the immobilizer display does not come on
key to the “LOCK” position and remove
within 30 seconds after turning the ignition
it. Within 30 seconds after doing so, insert
switch to the “ON” position with a blank
a blank F.A.S.T.-key into the emergency F.A.S.T.-key
key and turn it to the “ON” position. Per-  The procedure will be terminated automati-
form this operation no more than 30 sec- cally if:
onds after the immobilizer display starts
5 blinking. When registration of the ID
• a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
from the moment when the first F.A.S.T.-
code is complete, the immobilizer display key is turned to the “LOCK” position to the
will come on for 3 seconds then go off. If moment when the second F.A.S.T.-key is
an error occurs, the immobilizer display turned to the “ON” position 1- LOCK ( ) button
will go off during the procedure. • a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses 2- UNLOCK ( ) button
from the moment when the second
F.A.S.T.-key is turned to the “LOCK” posi- 3- Trunk ( ) button
tion to the moment when the blank 4- PANIC ( ) button
F.A.S.T.-key is turned to the “ON” position
5- Indicator light
 To use the new remote control transmitters, it
is necessary to register the key with both the
electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
8. If you wish to register another F.A.S.T.- tem. To lock the doors
N00544200036
key, repeat the process from step 1. Also refer to “Keyless entry system: Cus-
tomer F.A.S.T.-key programming” on page Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the
5-33. doors.
NOTE The turn signal lights will also blink once.
 Perform the operation when the interrupt dis-
play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis-
play screen may prevent you from seeing the N00515500141 NOTE
immobilizer display. Press the remote control transmitter buttons  If you press the LOCK button (1) twice
 It is not possible to register a F.A.S.T.-key if: to lock or unlock the doors and to open the quickly, the horn will sound once.
• the immobilizer display goes off during the trunk lid.
procedure It can also help you signal for attention by
setting off the panic alarm.


back function can be changed as required. 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
To unlock the doors
This is done with the key removed from the bination headlights and dimmer switch to
N00544301106
ignition switch. the “OFF” position.
Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the 3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-
driver’s door only. Within about 2 seconds, onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)
press the UNLOCK button one more time to NOTE
 The answerback function does not operate
during this time.
unlock all the doors. 4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and
when the key is in the ignition switch or any
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
The turn signal lights will also blink twice.
door is opened.
pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3.
5
Except for vehicles with the rear seat arm
rest, the front side-marker and parking lights Horn deactivation/reactivation
will also turn on for about 30 seconds. Changing the setting of the turn signal
The horn answerback function can be set to lights answerback function
Refer to “Welcome light” on page 5-151. the following three conditions.
The turn signal lights answerback function
NOTE Each time the horn answerback function is can be set to the following seven conditions.
 The door unlock function can be set so that set, a chime will sound to tell you the condi-
all doors unlock when the UNLOCK button tion of the answerback function. Each time the turn signal lights answerback
(2) is pressed once. Refer to “Setting of door function is set, a chime will sound to tell you
unlock function” on page 5-32. Number of the condition of the answerback function.
Condition
chimes
One chime The horn will not sound. Number of Condition
To open the trunk lid chimes To lock To unlock
N00544400012
Two chimes The horn will sound.
The horn will sound if the One chime One flash Two flashes
Press the trunk button (3) twice within about
5 seconds and the trunk lid will be opened. Four chimes LOCK button is pressed Two chimes One flash No flash
The trunk lid must be closed manually after it twice quickly.
Three chimes No flash Two flashes
has been opened.
Four chimes Two flashes One flash
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position. If you started the engine with the Five chimes No flash One flash
Answerback function
N00544501065
key, remove the key from the ignition Six chimes Two flashes No flash
switch.
Setting of the horn, turn signal lights and Seven
No flash No flash
buzzer of the keyless entry system answer- chimes


1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
Replacement F.A.S.T.-keys
position. If you started the engine with the position. If you started the engine with the
N00561300029
key, remove the key from the ignition key, remove the key from the ignition
switch. switch. Only a F.A.S.T.-key, which has been pro-
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- grammed into the vehicle’s electronics, can
bination headlights and dimmer switch to bination headlights and dimmer switch to lock and unlock all the doors, and start the
the “OFF” position. the “OFF” position. engine.
3. Press the UNLOCK button (2) for 4 to 10 3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order a
5 seconds and press the LOCK button (1) onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) F.A.S.T.-key from your authorized Mitsubishi
during this time. during this time. Motors dealer by referring to the key number.
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and 4. Release in sequence the LOCK and To prevent vehicle theft, the ID codes for all
LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of the F.A.S.T.-keys except the one for the lost
pressing the LOCK button in step 3. pressing the LOCK button in step 3. F.A.S.T.-key must be programmed again.
Take your vehicle and all the remaining
F.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized Mitsubishi
Buzzer deactivation/reactivation Using the panic alarm Motors dealer to have your ID codes pro-
N00544700015
grammed again.
The buzzer answerback function can be
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
turned ON or OFF as required.
ened, you can activate the alarm to call atten-
Additional F.A.S.T.-keys
tion as follows:
Setting of door unlock function N00561400020
N00544601112 1. Press the PANIC button (4) for more than To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have
1 second. two registered F.A.S.T.-keys.
The door unlock function can be set to the
2. The headlights will blink on and off and Registering the ID code can be done by your
following two conditions.
the horn will sound intermittently for authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it
Each time the door unlock function is set, a
about 3 minutes. can be done by yourself (except for vehicles
chime will sound to tell you the condition of
3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on sold in Canada). For you to register the ID
the door unlock function.
the remote control transmitter. code yourself, follow the “Customer
F.A.S.T.-key programming” procedure below.
Number of
Condition If you choose to have your authorized Mit-
chimes
subishi Motors dealer register the ID code,
One chime All doors unlock take your vehicle and all remaining F.A.S.T.-
Two chimes Driver’s door unlock only


keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors 2. While pushing the lock release buttons
dealer. (A), remove the cover of the ignition
switch.
NOTE
 You are provided with two F.A.S.T.-keys, but
you may register up to four F.A.S.T.-keys.
5
Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
ming (Except for vehicles sold in
Canada) 5. Turn the emergency key with F.A.S.T.-
N00561501116
key to the “ON” position. (Perform the
You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to the following procedure within 30 seconds)
system if you have two valid (already regis- 3. Insert the emergency key into the ignition 6. Remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the emer-
tered) F.A.S.T.-keys, blank (not registered) switch. gency key.
F.A.S.T.-key and emergency key (specially 7. With the first valid F.A.S.T.-key, press the
cut for your vehicle at your Mitsubishi UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds and
Motors dealer). press the LOCK button during this time.
To use the new F.A.S.T.-key, it is necessary to 8. Release in sequence the LOCK and
register the key with both the electronic UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
immobilizer and keyless entry system. pressing the LOCK button in step 7. (Per-
Also refer to “Electronic immobilizer: Cus- form the following procedure within 30
tomer F.A.S.T.-key programming” on page seconds)
5-29. 9. With the second valid F.A.S.T.-key, press
the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds
For F.A.S.T.-key programming, follow the
and press the LOCK button during this
procedures below.
4. Insert the valid F.A.S.T.-key into the time.
1. Remove the emergency key from the emergency key.
F.A.S.T.-key. Refer to “Emergency key”
on page 5-23.


10. Release in sequence the LOCK and  This device may not cause harmful inter-
UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
NOTE ference.
• The doors cannot be locked or unlocked.
pressing the LOCK button in step 9, and  This device must accept any interference
• The trunk lid cannot be opened.
the immobilizer display will blink on the received, including interference that may
• The panic alarm cannot be operated.
information screen in the multi-informa- cause undesired operation.
• The indicator light (5) is dim or does not
tion display. (Perform the following pro-
come on.
cedure within 60 seconds)
11. Press the LOCK button twice with the
 If you lose your F.A.S.T.-key, please contact CAUTION
5 blank F.A.S.T.-key and the immobilizer
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for a  Changes or modifications not expressly
replacement. approved by the manufacturer for compli-
display will come on for 30 seconds on  If you wish to obtain an additional F.A.S.T.- ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
the information screen in the multi-infor- key, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi ate the equipment.
mation display. Motors dealer. A maximum of four F.A.S.T.-
12. This completes the registration of the key can be programmed for your vehicle.
F.A.S.T.-key.  To use the new remote control transmitters, it Procedure for replacing the
is necessary to register the key with both the
electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
remote control transmitter battery
NOTE tem. N00561700081
 The indicator light (5) comes on each time a Also refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti- 1. Before replacing the battery, remove static
button is pressed. theft starting system): Customer F.A.S.T.- electricity from your body by touching a
 The keyless entry system does not work if key programming” on page 5-29. metal grounded object.
the key is in the ignition switch. 2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,
 The F.A.S.T.-key can be used from about 40 insert the cloth-covered tip of a flat blade
feet (12 m) away. However, this distance
General information
N00561601074
screwdriver into the notch in the remote
may change if your vehicle is near a TV control transmitter case and use it to open
transmitting tower, a power station, or a Your F.A.S.T.-key operates on a radio fre- the case.
radio station. quency subject to Federal Communications
 If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed when Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold
all doors are locked and no doors are opened in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For
within about 30 seconds, the doors will auto- vehicles sold in Canada). This device com-
matically re-lock.
plies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry
 If the following conditions are observed after
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
pressing the buttons on the remote control
Operation is subject to the following two con-
transmitter, the battery in the remote control
transmitter may need to be replaced. ditions.

Door locks
5. Close the remote control transmitter case
firmly.
WARNING
• Locked doors can help prevent outsiders
6. Check the keyless entry system to see that
from gaining access to your vehicle when
it works.
you slow or come to a stop.
 Lock your vehicle whenever you leave it.
NOTE Children who get into unlocked vehicles
 You may purchase a replacement battery at may not be able to get out. Children
an electric appliance store. trapped inside vehicles can quickly be
overcome by heat and suffer serious
5
 Your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
can replace the battery for you if you prefer. injury or death due to heat stroke.
 Never leave children unattended inside a
vehicle. In addition to the risk of heat
NOTE stroke, children can activate switches and
 Be sure to perform the procedure with the
CAUTION controls, resulting in an injury or fatal
Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the Mitsubi-  When the remote control transmitter case is accident.
shi mark is not facing you when you open the opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.
remote control transmitter case, the transmit- out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-
nents.
ter may come out. NOTE
 When locking or unlocking with the key,
only the driver’s door will be locked or
3. Remove the old battery.
4. Install a new battery with the +side (A)
Door locks unlocked.
N00509200491 To lock or unlock all doors, use the power
up. door lock switches, the keyless entry system,
+ side WARNING the F.A.S.T-key or the remote control trans-
 Make sure all doors are tightly closed and mitter of the F.A.S.T.-key.
locked while driving. Refer to “Power door locks” on page 5-37,
“Keyless entry system” on page 5-7 and
• Locked doors, in combination with the
5-30, and “To operate using the F.A.S.T.-
- side use of seat belts, can help reduce the risk
key” on page 5-14.
of ejection in an accident.
 In vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,
• Locked doors can help keep passengers,
the driver’s door can be locked and unlocked
especially small children, from opening
Coin type bat- using the emergency key.
doors and falling out of moving vehicles.
tery CR2032 Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-23.

Door locks
2. Be sure the keys are not inside the vehi-
To lock or unlock the front To lock or unlock the door from cle. Close the door.
doors with the key the inside
Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to Move the lock knob to the lock position to
lock the door. After checking that the door is lock the door.
locked, turn the key back to the center and All doors should be kept locked while driv-
remove it. ing.
5
Key reminder system

N00549600178
When a key was used to start the

1- Insert or remove the key 1- Lock engine
2- Lock 2- Unlock
3- Unlock Type 1
The driver’s door can be unlocked without
using the lock knob by pulling on the inside
door handle.
To lock the door without using

the key
1. Move the inside lock knob to the locked
position.

Power door locks

Type 2
Ignition switch return reminder Power door locks
system N00509300564
N00503800121
NOTE
 When locking or unlocking with the key on
When the F.A.S.T.-key was used to
the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will
If the ignition switch is turned off and the
start the engine lock or unlock.
driver’s door is opened with the key in the Type 1
 Repeated continuous operation between lock 5
ignition switch, the key reminder buzzer will and unlock could activate the power door
locking systems built-in protection circuit
sound intermittently to remind you to remove
and prevent the system from operating. If
the key.
this occurs, wait about 1 minute before oper-
The warning display will be displayed on the ating the inside lock knob or the key.
information screen in the multi-information
display.
Type 2
Lock out protection
N00517300039
When you push the lock knob forward or lock

the door with the power door lock switch in
both of the following conditions, the lock
knob will automatically return to the If the driver’s door is opened while the igni-
unlocked position. tion switch is in a position other than
“LOCK” (PUSH OFF), the ignition switch
 The key is in the ignition switch or the return reminder buzzer will sound intermit-
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” tently to remind you to return the ignition
position. switch to the “LOCK” (PUSH OFF) position.
 Driver’s door or front passenger door is The warning display will be displayed on the
opened. information screen in the multi-information
display.

Power door locks
To lock and unlock the doors Using the key To unlock the doors
N00517701131
You can select either the function to unlock

Using the power door lock switch the doors using the ignition switch position
or the function to unlock the doors using the
selector lever {continuously variable trans-
mission (CVT)} position or the gearshift
5 lever (Twin Clutch SST) position.
These functions are not activated when the
vehicle is shipped from the factory. To acti-
vate or deactivate these functions, please
contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
1- Insert or remove the emergency key. dealer.
2- Lock
3- Unlock
1- Lock Using the ignition switch position
2- Unlock Turn the key in the driver’s door lock once in
the unlocking direction, and the driver’s door All doors will unlock when the ignition
will be unlocked. switch is turned to the “LOCK” position.
All of the doors can be locked or unlocked by
pressing the power door lock switch on the
driver’s or the front passenger’s door. Using the selector lever {continu-
ously variable transmission
(CVT)} position or the gearshift
lever (Twin Clutch SST) position
All doors will unlock when the selector lever

(CVT) or the gearshift lever (Twin Clutch
SST) is moved to the “P” (PARK) position
with the ignition switch in the “ON” position.

“Child safety locks” for rear door

door can be opened using the inside door han-
Vehicles with CVT “Child safety locks” for rear dle.
door
N00509400190
WARNING
 Always keep the doors tightly closed and
locked when driving. An unlocked door
may be accidentally opened by a passen-
ger, especially by a child who could fall
out. Also, if the doors are not locked, there
5
is a greater risk of someone being thrown
from the vehicle in an accident.
Vehicles with Twin

Clutch SST
Trunk lid
N00509501198
1- To lock
2- To release WARNING
 It is dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
Child safety locks help prevent rear passen- open since carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
gers, especially children, from opening the enter the cabin. CO is an invisible, odor-
rear door using the inside door handle. less gas that can cause unconsciousness
A lock lever for the child safety lock is pro- and even death.
vided on each rear door.  Do not allow children to have access to the
trunk, either by climbing into the trunk
When the lever is in the lock position (1), the
from outside or through the inside of the
rear door cannot be opened using the inside vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when
door handle. your vehicle is unattended. If trapped in
To open the rear door when the child safety the trunk, it is possible to escape from the
lock lever is in the lock position, pull the out- trunk by using the inside emergency trunk
side door handle. release lever. (See “Inside emergency
When the lever is in the release position (2), trunk lid release” on page 5-41.)
the child safety lock is released and the rear

Trunk lid
CAUTION Using the remote control transmitter CAUTION

 Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when (Vehicles with keyless entry system or  Do not use the trunk lid release lever while
loading and unloading luggage. Heat from F.A.S.T.-key) the vehicle is moving. If the trunk lid is
the exhaust could lead to burns. opened, objects in the trunk could fall onto
Press the trunk button (Vehicles with keyless the road and cause an accident.
entry system or F.A.S.T.-key) or OPEN
switch (Vehicles with F.A.S.T.-key). (See
To open
5 “Keyless entry system” on page 5-7, 5-30 or NOTE
“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter  The trunk area light comes on when the trunk
(F.A.S.T.-key)” on page 5-12.) lid is opened, and goes out when it is closed.
Operation from outside the vehicle  The trunk area light remains illuminated for
The trunk lid will pop up to slightly. Lift it to a certain period and then goes off automati-
Using the key (Vehicles with key cylin- open the trunk. cally. Refer to “Interior light auto-cutout
function (dome light and other lights)” on
der)
page 5-187.
Operation from inside the vehicle
Insert the key and turn it clockwise.
The trunk lid will pop up slightly. Lift it to To close

open the trunk.
Pull the trunk lid downward as illustrated.
Gently slam the trunk lid from the outside so
Pull the trunk lid release lever, located to the

left of the driver’s seat, up to open the trunk.

Inside emergency trunk lid release

that it is completely closed. Always ensure
the trunk lid is securely closed.
NOTE
• Do not tie string, etc., around the gas struts.
• Do not hang any object on the gas struts.
You and your family should familiarize your-

selves with the location and operation of the
Inside emergency trunk lid emergency trunk lid release lever. Children
CAUTION should be taught not to play in or around
release vehicles.
 Be careful to prevent catching anyone’s fin- N00509800165
gers when closing the trunk lid.
The emergency trunk lid release is designed
 Before starting the vehicle, be sure to con-
to provide a way to open the trunk lid from
WARNING
firm that the trunk lid is closed. If the trunk  Children should never be left unsuper-
lid opens while driving the vehicle, objects
inside the trunk. It was developed to help pre-
vised in or around vehicles.
stored in the trunk could fall out onto the vent death and serious injuries to children
 Unsupervised children could lock them-
road. who might become locked inside a vehicle
selves in an open vehicle or trunk.
trunk.
 People trapped inside a vehicle or trunk,
even if only for a short period of time, can
NOTE The emergency trunk lid release lever (see
quickly die from suffocation or heat
illustration) is mounted on the trunk lid.
 Gas struts (A) are installed in the locations stroke, especially on hot days. Interior
illustrated to support the trunk lid. Please temperatures in vehicles can rise in min-
The lever glows in the dark after exposure to
observe the following in order to prevent utes.
sunlight.
damage or faulty operation.  Keep your vehicle doors locked and the
• Do not touch, push or pull the gas struts trunk lid closed when not in use. Keep
when closing the trunk lid. your vehicle keys away from children.
• Do not attach any plastic material, tape,
etc., to the gas struts.

Theft-alarm system
To open the trunk from the inside, move the provides both audible and visual alarm sig- At this time, the theft-alarm indicator (A)
lever (A) in the direction of the arrow on the nals. on the audio panel flashes for confirma-
lever. Push up on the trunk lid to open the tion.
trunk and climb out. CAUTION
 Do not modify or add parts to the theft-alarm
system. Doing so could cause the theft-alarm
to malfunction.
5
Armed stage
N00510301183
Park the vehicle and stop the engine. Arm the

system as described below.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” 4. The system has entered the armed stage
position. after about 20 seconds, when the theft-
CAUTION Also, if a key was used to start the engine, alarm indicator (A) flashing becomes
 When loading the trunk, place your things so remove the key from the ignition switch. slower.
that they will not touch the emergency trunk 2. Make sure that the trunk lid and engine The theft-alarm indicator (A) continues to
lid release lever when you close the trunk. hood are closed. flash while the system is in the armed
Otherwise you could damage the lever and 3. Lock all doors by either the remote con- stage.
make it unusable. trol transmitter or the F.A.S.T.-key.
NOTE
Arm the system and leave
 If the engine hood or the trunk lid is open,
Theft-alarm system the theft-alarm indicator (A) illuminates and
the system cannot enter the armed stage. The
N00510200185
system enters the armed stage about 20 sec-
The theft-alarm system is designed to provide onds after the engine hood or the trunk lid is
protection from unauthorized entry into the closed.
vehicle. This system is operated in three  The system will be disarmed if, while the
stages: the first is the “armed” stage, the sec- theft-alarm indicator (A) is illuminated, all
ond is the “alarm” stage, and third is the “dis- doors are unlocked by remote control trans-
armed” stage. If triggered, the system mitter or the F.A.S.T.-key.

Theft-alarm system
Type 2
NOTE Horn sounds!
 The system will be disarmed if, while the Headlights blink on and off!
theft-alarm indicator is illuminated, the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
 The system will not be armed if a door or the
trunk lid or the engine hood is not com-
pletely closed. If this happens, rearm the sys-
tem as described above. Alarm deactivation 5
Alarm stage The alarm can be deactivated in the following
N00510401197 ways.
The alarm will be activated if any of the fol- NOTE  By using the remote control transmitter or
lowing occur while the vehicle is parked and  The alarm will continue to operate for 3 min- the F.A.S.T.-key to lock or unlock the
the system is armed. utes. At the end of that period, the alarm will
door.
automatically shut off to save battery power.
 Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
 One of the doors is opened without using The system will then be rearmed until the
proper disarming step is taken. tion.
the remote control transmitter or the
F.A.S.T.-key.  The alarm will resume if unauthorized
 The engine hood or the trunk lid is actions are taken again, even if the alarm has Disarmed stage
opened. stopped.
N00510501169
 While the alarm is operating, a warning is
displayed on the information screen in the The system will be disarmed if the following
Type of alarm multi-information display. operation is performed.
Type 1  The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

When the alarm is activated:
position.
1. The headlights blink on and off for 3 min-  All doors are unlocked by the remote con-
utes. trol transmitter or the F.A.S.T.-key.
After 3 minutes the headlights automati-
cally shut off.
2. The horn will sound intermittently for 3
minutes.

Power windows
2. Arm the system as explained in “Armed
Disarm...by remote control transmitter or
stage”.
NOTE
F.A.S.T.-key  Never try to operate the main switch and sub
3. Make sure that the theft-alarm indicator
switch in different directions at the same
comes on and flashes for approximately
time. This will freeze the window in posi-
20 seconds. tion.
4. Wait a few seconds and then unlock the  Operating the power windows repeatedly
driver’s side door by using the inside door with the engine stopped will run down the
lock knob and open the door.
5 5. Check to be sure that the horn sounds
battery. Use the window switches only while
the engine is running.
intermittently and the headlights blink on
and off when a door is opened.
6. Disarm the system by unlocking all doors WARNING
NOTE by the remote control transmitter or the  Before operating the power windows,
 If the UNLOCK button is pressed when all F.A.S.T.-key. make sure that nothing can be trapped
doors are closed and no door is opened (head, hands, fingers, etc.) in the window.
within approximately 30 seconds, re-arming  Never leave the vehicle with the key in the
will automatically occur. Power windows ignition switch.
 The amount of time after unlocking until the N00510800367
 Never leave a child alone in the vehicle.
vehicle relocks automatically can be
adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer for details.
 Once the system has been disarmed, it can- Main switch
not be rearmed except by repeating the arm-
ing procedure. The main switch located on the driver’s door
can be used to operate all door windows.
A window can be opened or closed by operat-
Testing the theft-alarm system ing the corresponding switch.
N00510601128 Press the switch down to open the window,
Use the following procedure to test the sys- and pull up the switch to close it.
tem: 1- Open (down) If the driver’s door window switch is fully
2- Close (up) pressed down/pulled up, the driver’s door
1. Lower the driver’s window. window automatically opens/closes com-
pletely.

Power windows
If you want to stop the window movement,
operate the switch lightly in the reverse direc-
Sub switch Safety mechanism (Driver’s
tion. door window only)
N00528800092
If a hand or head is trapped, for safety the

door window is automatically lowered a little.
After the door window is lowered, pull up the
switch again to close the door window.
5
WARNING
 If the safety mechanism is activated three
or more times successively, the safety
mechanism will be temporarily cancelled.
1- Close (up) If a hand or head subsequently gets
1- Driver’s door window switch 2- Open (down) trapped, a serious injury can result.
2- Front passenger door window switch
3- Left rear door window switch Each sub switch can be used for its own pas-
4- Right rear door window switch senger door window, unless the driver’s win- CAUTION
5- Window lock switch dow lock switch is activated.  The safety mechanism is deactivated just
before the door window closes. This allows
the door window to close completely. There-
Timer function fore be especially careful that fingers are not
trapped in the door window opening.
The power windows can be run up or down  The safety mechanism is deactivated while
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi- the switch is pressed. Therefore be especially
careful that fingers are not trapped in the
tion.
door window opening.
The door windows can be opened or closed
 Do not deliberately trap your hands or head
for a 30 second period after the ignition in order to activate the safety mechanism.
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” Your hand or head could be trapped and per-
position. However, once the driver’s door or sonal injury could result.
the front passenger’s door is opened, the
power windows cannot be operated.

Sunroof (if so equipped)

will open or close only the driver’s door win- rear door windows down or partially opened.
NOTE dow. To unlock the switch, press it again. This is a normal occurrence that can be mini-
 The safety mechanism can be activated if the
mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
driving conditions or other circumstances
door windows open, open the front door win-
cause the door window to be subjected to a
physical shock similar to that caused by dows as well as the rear door windows to
trapped hand or head. minimize the condition.
 If the safety mechanism is activated 3 or
5 more times consecutively, the safety mecha-
nism is deactivated and normal closing of the
N00511000656
door window will be aborted.
Use the following method to return to normal
operation. WARNING
1. If the door window is open, repeatedly  Do not stick your head, hands or anything
pull up the power window switch to fully else in the sunroof opening.
close the door window. 1- Lock
 Before operating the sunroof, make sure
2. With fully closing the window, release 2- Unlock
that nothing can be trapped (head, hands,
the switch and then pull up the switch fingers, etc.).
again for about 1 second.  Never leave a child (or other person who is
WARNING incapable of safely operating the sunroof
 Before driving with a child in the vehicle, switch) alone in the vehicle.
Lock switch be sure to lock the window switch to make
it inoperative. Children tampering with
N00549000127
the switch could easily trap their hands or The sunroof can be opened and closed with
When this switch is in the lock mode, the heads in the window. the ignition switch in the “ON” position.
main switch for passenger door window and
the sub switch cannot be used to open or
close the door window, and the main switch
What to do if you hear wind
buffeting when driving
N00551400014
Wind buffeting can be described as the per-

ception of pressure on the ears or a booming
or rumbling sound. Your vehicle may exhibit
wind buffeting when driving with one or both

To close Safety mechanism
Press the switch (3), the sunroof automati- If a hand or head is trapped in the closing
cally closes. sunroof opening, the safety mechanism will
To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch. cause the sunroof to re-open automatically.
The opened sunroof will become operational
again after a few seconds.
To tilt up If the safety mechanism is activated 5 or 5
more times consecutively, normal closing of
When the switch (2) is pressed, the rear edge the sunroof will be aborted.
of sunroof raises for ventilation. As an emergency measure, the sunroof can be
closed in small increments until it is com-
To open To tilt down pletely closed by repeatedly pressing the
switch (2).
Press the switch (1), the sunroof automati- After performing the emergency measure,
Press the switch (3).
cally opens and the sunroof will stop several consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
centimeters this side of the full open position. dealer.
Press the switch (1) again, and the sunroof Timer function
will be fully open. NOTE
To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch. The sunroof can be operated when the igni-  The safety mechanism can be activated if the
tion switch is in the “ON” position. The sun- driving conditions or other circumstances
NOTE roof can be opened or closed for a 30 seconds cause the sunroof to be subjected to a physi-
 The sunroof stops just before reaching the period after the ignition switch is turned to cal shock similar to that caused by a trapped
the “ACC” or “LOCK”. However, once the hand or head.
fully open position. If the vehicle is driven
with the sunroof in this position, wind buf- driver’s door or the front passenger’s door is
feting is lower than with the sunroof fully opened, the sunroof cannot be operated until
open. the ignition switch is turned on again. CAUTION
 The safety mechanism is deactivated just
before the sunroof closes. This allows the
sunroof to close completely. Therefore be
especially careful that fingers are not trapped
in the sunroof opening.

Parking brake
CAUTION CAUTION NOTE

 The safety mechanism is deactivated while  Be careful that hands are not trapped when  Be sure to close the sunroof completely
the switch (2) is pressed. Therefore be espe- closing the sunshade. when washing the vehicle or when leaving
cially careful that fingers are not trapped in the vehicle.
the sunroof opening.  Do not put any wax on the weatherstrip
 Do not deliberately trap your hands or head NOTE (black rubber) around the sunroof opening. If
in order to activate the safety mechanism.  Be sure to tilt down the sunroof before clos- it is waxed, the weatherstrip cannot maintain
5 Personal injury and malfunction of the sun-
roof could result.
ing the sunshade. a weatherproof seal with the sunroof.
 After washing the vehicle or after rain be
 When leaving the vehicle unattended, be
sure to close the sunroof and without the sure to wipe off any water that is on the sun-
roof before operating it.
Sunshade ignition key.
 Operating the sunroof repeatedly with the
 Do not try to operate the sunroof if it is fro-
zen closed (after snowfall or during extreme engine turned off will run down the battery.
The sunshade can be opened or closed manu-
cold). Operate the sunroof only while the engine is
ally while the sunroof is closed. running.
When the sunroof is opened, the sunshade  Do not sit on or place heavy luggage on the
sunroof or roof opening edge.
will also open automatically.
 Do not apply any force that may cause dam- Parking brake
age to the sunroof.
N00511400298
 Release the switch when the sunroof has
reached a completely open or completely To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
closed position. plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,
 If the sunroof does not operate when the sun- and then move the gearshift lever to 1st (on a
roof switch is operated, release the switch uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a downhill) posi-
and check whether something is trapped by tion, for vehicles with a manual transaxle, set
the sunroof. If nothing is trapped, have the the selector lever {continuously variable
sunroof checked at an authorized Mitsubishi transmission (CVT)} or the gearshift lever
Motors dealer. (Twin Clutch SST) to “P” (PARK) position
 Be careful when tilting up the sunroof if a ski for vehicles with CVT or Twin Clutch SST.
carrier or a roof carrier is installed. Depend-
ing on the model of ski carrier or roof carrier,
CAUTION the sunroof may contact the carrier when the
 Do not attempt to close the sunshade when sunroof is tilted up.
the sunroof is opened.

Parking brake
To apply To release CAUTION

 Before driving, be sure that the parking
brake is fully released and brake warning
light is off.
If you drive without the parking brake fully
released, the warning display will appear on
the information screen in the multi-informa-
tion display.
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
5
parking brake, the brakes will be overheated,
resulting in ineffective braking and possible
brake failure.
Warning light
1- Pull the lever up without pushing the 1- Pull the lever up slightly.
button at the end of hand grip. 2- Push and hold the button at the end of
When the parking brake is set and the the hand grip.
ignition switch is in the “ON” position, 3- Push the lever downward.
the brake warning light in the instru-
ment cluster will come on.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking
Before driving, be sure to release the brake and turn the front wheels toward the
parking brake. curb on a downhill grade, away from the curb
on an uphill grade.

Steering wheel tilt lock lever
Steering wheel tilt lock lever WARNING Inside day/night rearview

N00511500215  Do not attempt to adjust the steering
wheel while driving. This can be danger-
mirror
To adjust the steering wheel height, release N00548601080
ous.
the tilt lock lever while holding the steering Adjust the inside rearview mirror only after
 When releasing the tilt lock lever {moving
wheel by hand, and raise or lower the steering it to the position (2)}, be sure to hold the making any seat adjustments so as to have a
wheel to the desired height. steering wheel firmly. Otherwise, the clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
After adjustment, securely lock the lever by
5 pulling it upward.
steering wheel may slip down too sud-
denly.
WARNING
 Do not attempt to adjust the inside rear-
Type 1 view mirror while driving. This can be
dangerous.
Be sure to adjust the mirror before driv-
ing.
Type 1
Type 2
Type 2
1- Locked
2- Released
WARNING
 After adjusting, make sure the lock lever
is secured in the locked (1) position.
Adjust the inside mirror to maximize the
view through the rear window.

Inside day/night rearview mirror
To adjust the vertical mirror

position
It is possible to move the mirror up and down

to adjust its position.
1- Daytime position
2- Night position
To reduce the glare
Type 1
The day/night knob (A) at the bottom of the

mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to
To adjust the mirror position reduce the glare from the headlights of vehi-
cles behind you during night driving.
It is possible to move the mirror up/down and
left/right to adjust its position.

Outside rearview mirrors
Type 2 Outside rearview mirrors To adjust the mirror position

N00512201245
When the headlights of the vehicles behind The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted
Adjust the outside rearview mirrors only after when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
you are very bright, the reflection factor of making any seat adjustments so you have a
the rearview mirror is automatically changed “ACC” position.
clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
to reduce the glare. Move the lever (A) to the same side as the
mirror you wish to adjust.
5 WARNING
 Do not attempt to adjust the outside rear-
view mirrors while driving. This can be
dangerous.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driv-
ing.
 Your passenger’s side mirror is convex.
The objects you see in the mirror will look
smaller and farther away than they
appear in a regular flat mirror.
Do not use this mirror to estimate the dis-
tance of vehicles following you when
Normally, use the automatic mode. When the changing lanes. L- Left outside mirror adjustment
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi- R- Right outside mirror adjustment
tion, the reflection factor of the mirror is
automatically changed.
Press the switch (B) to adjust the mirror posi-
tion.
NOTE
 Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner 1- Up
on the sensor (1), as reduced sensitivity 2- Down
could result. 3- Right
4- Left

Ignition switch
The indicator light (A) will illuminate while
NOTE the defogger is on.
Manual transaxle CVT or Twin Clutch
 After adjusting, return the lever to the SST
The heater will be turned off automatically in
“•”(off) position (C).
about 20 minutes.
To fold the mirror

The outside mirror can be folded in toward 5
the side window to prevent damage when
parking in tight locations.
LOCK
The engine is off and the steering wheel is

locked. The key can be inserted and removed
only when the switch is in this position.
Ignition switch
N00512400615
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]

ACC
For information on operations for vehicles
equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, refer to Allows operation of electrical accessories
“F.A.S.T.-key: Ignition switch” on page 5-16. with the engine off.
Heated mirror (if so equipped)
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
N00549300175
F.A.S.T.-key]
ON
When the rear window defogger switch is
pressed with the engine running, the outside The engine runs and all accessories can be
rearview mirrors are defogged or defrosted. used.
Current will flow through the heater element
inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost or
condensation.

Ignition switch
Clutch SST) to the “P” (PARK) position, and
START NOTE then turn the key to the “LOCK” position and
• The time until the power cuts out can be
remove it.
Engages the starter. After the engine starts, changed to about 60 minutes.
release the key and it will return automati- • The ACC power auto-cutout function can
be deactivated. CVT or Twin Clutch SST
cally to the “ON” position.
For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
5 NOTE
 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code To remove the key
which the transponder inside the key sends N00550900184
must match the one registered to the immobi- For vehicles with a manual transaxle, when
lizer computer. removing the key, push the key in at the
(Refer to “Electronic immobilizer” on page “ACC” position and keep it depressed until it
5-4.)
is turned to the “LOCK” position, and
remove.
NOTE
ACC power auto-cutout func-  For vehicles with a CVT or Twin Clutch
Manual transaxle SST, the key cannot be removed unless the
tion selector lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever
N00539601097 (Twin Clutch SST) is set to the “P” (PARK)
After about 30 minutes has elapsed with the position, which allows the ignition switch to
ignition switch in the “ACC” position, the turn to the “LOCK” position.
function automatically cuts out the power for
the audio system and other electric devices
that can be operated with that position. CAUTION
When the ignition switch is turned from the  Do not remove the ignition key from the
“ACC” position, the power is supplied again ignition switch while driving. The steering
to those devices. wheel will lock, causing loss of control.
For vehicles with a continuously variable
transmission (CVT) or Twin Clutch SST,
NOTE when removing the key, first set the selector
 It is possible to modify functions as follows: lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever (Twin

Steering wheel lock
CAUTION NOTE
 If the engine is turned off while driving, the  If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft
power brake booster will stop functioning lock may sometimes make it difficult to turn
and braking efficiency will be reduced. Also, the key from “LOCK” position to “ACC”
the power steering system will not function position. Firmly turn the steering wheel to
and it will require greater effort to manually the left or to the right as you turn the key.
steer the vehicle.
 Do not leave the key in the “ON” position for
a long time when the engine is not running.
5
This will cause the battery to run down.
Starting and stopping the
 Do not turn the key to the “START” position engine
when the engine is running. It will damage N00542100060
the starter motor.
To lock Tips for starting
Steering wheel lock Remove the key at the “LOCK” position.
N00512500195
 Do not operate the starter motor continu-
Turn the steering wheel until it is locked. ously for longer than 15 seconds as this
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] could run the battery down or damage the
For information on operations for vehicles starter motor. If the engine does not start,
equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, refer to To unlock
turn the ignition switch back to the
“F.A.S.T.-key: Steering wheel lock” on page “LOCK” position, wait a few seconds,
5-20. Turn the key to the “ACC” position while and then try again. Trying repeatedly with
moving the steering wheel slightly. the engine or starter motor still turning
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
will damage the starter mechanism.
F.A.S.T.-key]
CAUTION  If the engine will not start because the bat-
 Remove the key when leaving the vehicle. tery is weak or discharged, refer to
“Jump-starting the engine” (on page 8-2)
for instructions.
 [Except for vehicles equipped with the
turbocharger]

Starting and stopping the engine

The engine is warmed up enough for driv- There is usually no need to depress the accel-
ing when the bar graph of engine coolant
WARNING erator pedal when starting the engine.
 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
temperature display starts to move. A lon- The starter should not be run for more than
ventilated area any longer than is needed
ger warm up period will only consume 15seconds at a time.
to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
extra fuel. bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
 [For vehicles equipped with the turbo- extremely poisonous, could build up and between attempts to restart the engine.
charger] cause serious injury or death.
The engine is warmed up enough for driv-
5 ing when the bar graph of engine coolant 1. Make sure all occupants are properly
temperature display starts to move. Driv- CAUTION seated with seat belts fastened
ing before the bar graph moves may cause 2. Insert the ignition key.
 Do not push-start the vehicle.
deterioration of turbocharger performance 3. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
 Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive
and driveability. A longer warm up period at high speeds until the engine has had a
4. Press and hold the brake pedal down with
will only consume extra fuel. chance to warm up. your right foot.
 On vehicles equipped with the Twin  Release the ignition switch as soon as the 5. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way
Clutch SST, the following may occur after engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor down (manual transaxle).
the engine is started, but they do not indi- will be damaged.
cate an abnormality. NOTE
• You may hear operational sounds of the  For models equipped with a manual trans-
Twin Clutch SST and you may feel Starting the engine axle, the starter will not operate unless the
vibration in the vehicle body. N00542201169 clutch pedal is fully depressed (Clutch inter-
• If you shift the gearshift lever into the lock). This is a safety feature.
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
“N” (NEUTRAL) position and depress key.]
the accelerator pedal, increases in the For information on operation for vehicles 6. On vehicles with manual transaxle, place
engine speed will be limited. equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, refer to the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)
“F.A.S.T.-key: Starting the engine” on page position.
5-20. On vehicles with continuously variable
[Except for vehicles equipped with the transmission (CVT) or Twin Clutch SST,
F.A.S.T.-key.] make sure the selector lever (CVT) or
Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni- gearshift lever (Twin Clutch SST) is in the
cally controlled fuel injection system, which “P” (PARK) position.
automatically controls the release of fuel.


1. Make sure that all electric devices, such
NOTE Startability of continuously vari-
as lights, air conditioning blower and rear
 On vehicles with CVT, the starter will not
window defogger, are turned off. able transmission (CVT) vehicles
operate unless the selector lever is in the “P” or Twin Clutch SST vehicles at
2. While depressing the brake pedal on vehi-
(PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
On vehicles with Twin Clutch SST, the cles equipped with continuously variable extremely cold ambient tempera-
starter will not operate unless the gearshift transmission (CVT) or Twin Clutch SST ture
lever is in the “P” (PARK) position or the or the clutch pedal on the vehicles
equipped with manual transaxle, press the
gearshift lever is in the “N” (NEUTRAL)
position with the brake pedal depressed. accelerator pedal halfway and hold it
When the ambient temperature is -4 °F 5
(-20 °C) or lower on vehicles with CVT, or
For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P” there, then crank the engine. Release the
(PARK) position so that the wheels are
-22 °F (-30 °C) or lower on vehicles with
accelerator pedal, immediately after the Twin Clutch SST, it may not be possible to
locked. engine starts. start from a standstill even with the selector
3. If the engine still will not start, the engine lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever (Twin
7. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi- could be flooded with too much gasoline. Clutch SST) in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R”
tion and make certain that all warning While depressing the brake pedal on vehi- (REVERSE) position.
lights are functioning properly before cles equipped with CVT or Twin Clutch This phenomenon occurs because the trans-
starting the engine. SST or the clutch pedal on the vehicles axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does
8. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” equipped with manual transaxle, push the not indicate a problem. If it occurs, place the
position without pressing the accelerator accelerator pedal all the way down and selector lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever
pedal. Release the key when the engine hold it there, then crank the engine for 5 (Twin Clutch SST) in the “P” (PARK) posi-
starts. to 6 seconds. Return the ignition switch to tion and let the engine idle for at least 10 min-
the “LOCK” position and release the utes.
accelerator pedal. Wait a few seconds, and
NOTE then crank the engine again for 5 to 6 sec-
The transaxle will warm up, and you will be
 Minor noises may be heard on engine start- able to start normally.
onds while depressing the brake pedal or Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
up. These will disappear as the engine warms the clutch pedal, but do not push the
up. operation.
accelerator pedal. Release the ignition key
if the engine starts. If the engine fails to
start, repeat these procedures. If the Idle speed in high altitude area
When the engine is hard to start engine still will not start, contact your N00547600015
local Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair At high altitude locations, the idle speed may
After several attempts, you may experience facility of your choice for assistance. be higher. This is done in order to stabilize
that the engine still does not start.

the idle speed when the power steering sys-
tem and other systems operate. It does not
NOTE NOTE
 For vehicles with Twin Clutch SST, the  For vehicles with Twin Clutch SST, if the
indicate a malfunction.
engine will stop and the vehicle power will temperature inside the engine compartment
turn off approximately 1 second after the is high, the cooling fans (A) will continue to
Stopping the engine ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”; operate for some time even if the engine is
N00542300088 position. stopped.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. Therefore, the operation sound of the cooling
The reason for this is that, in the time from
5 2. Fully engage the parking brake while when the ignition switch is turned to the
fans may be heard even after the engine is
stopped. This sound is normal and does not
depressing the brake pedal. “LOCK” position until the engine stops, the indicate a malfunction.
3. For vehicles with a manual transaxle, turn gears inside the Twin Clutch SST disengage After operating for a period of time, the cool-
the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi- so that the engine will start smoothly the ing fans will stop automatically.
tion to stop the engine, and then move the next time it is started.
gearshift lever to the 1st (on a uphill) or Two clutches installed in the Twin Clutch
“R” (Reverse) (on a downhill) position. SST alternately engage and disengage to
For vehicles with continuously variable achieve smooth shifting.
transmission (CVT) or Twin Clutch SST, In addition, the gear on the side with the free
clutch is engaged, therefore, quick shifting is
place the selector lever (CVT) or the gear-
performed.
shift lever (Twin Clutch SST) in the “P” If the engine was stopped with the gear
(PARK) position, and then turn the igni- engaged like this, it would provide resistance
tion switch to the “LOCK” position to the next time the engine is started. Therefore,
stop the engine. the gear disengages in the approximately 1-
second period until the engine stops.
 For vehicles with Twin Clutch SST, do not
operate the gearshift lever or the accelerator
pedal for approximately 1 second until the
engine stops.

Turbocharger operation (if so equipped)
Turbocharger operation (if so

equipped)
N00537300051
CAUTION
 Do not run the engine at high speeds (for
example, by revving it or by accelerating
rapidly) immediately after starting it.
5
 Do not stop the engine immediately after
high-speed or uphill driving. First allow the
1- Air compressor
engine to idle to give the turbocharger a
chance to cool down.
2- Compressed air NOTE
 Engine oil must be properly maintained to
3- Cylinder  During cold weather, shifting may be diffi-
avoid engine and/or turbocharger damage. 4- Turbo fin cult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed
To better protect your engine and turbo- 5- Turbine up. This is normal and not harmful to the
charger, use fully synthetic engine oil. 6- Exhaust gas transaxle.
Turbocharger Manual transaxle (if so To start

equipped)
The turbocharger increases engine power by N00512700113
Press the clutch pedal all the way down and
pushing large amounts of air into the engine’s shift into 1st or “R” (Reverse) position. Then
cylinders. The finned parts inside the turbo- The shift pattern below is shown on the gear- gradually release the clutch pedal while
charger turn at extremely high speeds and are shift lever. Press the clutch pedal all the way depressing the accelerator pedal.
subjected to extremely high temperatures. down while shifting gears.
They are lubricated by engine oil and cooled CAUTION
by engine oil and coolant. If the engine oil is  Do not move the gearshift lever into reverse
not replaced at the specified intervals, the while the vehicle is moving forward; doing
bearings may seize or emit abnormal noise. so will damage the transaxle.

Manual transaxle (if so equipped)
CAUTION Changing gears while the vehi- Upshifting

 Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal cle is moving N00512900131
because this will cause premature clutch N00548101027 For the best fuel economy and performance in
wear or damage.
Always use care to change the gear with the using your manual transaxle, upshift as listed
 Do not coast in the “N” (Neutral) position
vehicle speed matched to the engine speed. below.
(illegal in many states).
 Do not use the gearshift lever as a handrest, Proper shifting will improve fuel economy
At low altitude locations, shift at the vehicle
and prolong engine life.
5 because this can result in premature wear of
the transaxle shift forks. Avoid shifting down at high speed, as this
speeds listed. Upshifting earlier during cruise
conditions (relatively steady speeds) will
may cause excessive engine speed (the
improve your fuel economy.
tachometer needle into the red zone) and
NOTE damage the engine.
Upshift speeds
 If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the Shift point
clutch pedal a second time; the shift will then Acceleration Cruise
be easier.
NOTE
 The gearshift indicator shows recommended 1st gear to 15 mph 15 mph
 To shift into reverse from 5th gear, move the 2nd gear (24 km/h) (24 km/h)
gearshift points for fuel-efficient driving. It
gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position,
and then shift it into reverse. shows a “ ” when an upshift is recom- 2nd gear to 28 mph 19 mph
mended, and it shows a “ ” when a down-
3rd gear (45 km/h) (31 km/h)
shift is recommended. 3rd gear to 36 mph 33 mph
Proper shift points 4th gear (58 km/h) (53 km/h)
N00537400049
4th gear to 45 mph 45 mph
Always use care to change the gear with the 5th gear (72 km/h) (72 km/h)
vehicle speed matched to the engine speed.
Proper shifting will improve fuel economy At high altitude locations, upshift as listed
and prolong engine life. below.
CAUTION Shift point Upshift speeds

 Avoid downshifting that may cause the 1st gear to 2nd gear 15 mph (24 km/h)
tachometer pointer to enter the red zone.
This puts the engine at risk of being dam- 2nd gear to 3rd gear 25 mph (40 km/h)
aged. 3rd gear to 4th gear 40 mph (64 km/h)

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)

Shift point Upshift speeds driving conditions. This helps achieve
Driving precautions smooth driving and excellent fuel efficiency.
4th gear to 5th gear 45 mph (72 km/h) N00513100215
Also you can manually shift up and shift
The table below shows the maximum recom- down the transmission. Refer to “Sports
Downshifting mended driving speed for in each gear. Do mode” on page 5-66.
N00513000096
not drive near or at these speeds for pro-
longed periods of time.
It is recommended that you downshift to a DRIVING UPHILL
lower gear when needed to maintain the
Maximum possible driving speed
5
desired speed, according to the table. The transmission prevents unnecessary
Avoid downshifting at too high a speed. The upshifts even when the accelerator pedal is
engine may suffer damage. Shift Maximum possible driving released and ensures smooth driving.
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake points speed
life, shift down to 2nd or 1st when descend-
ing a steep hill. 1st gear 31 mph (50 km/h) DRIVING DOWNHILL
Downshifting is also important to avoid “lug- 2nd gear 62 mph (100 km/h)
ging” the engine at too low a speed, such as 3rd gear 87 mph (140 km/h) According to the conditions, the transmission
when turning a corner or when driving up a will automatically shift to a lower gear ratio
steep hill. 4th gear 121 mph (195 km/h)
to achieve stronger engine braking. This may
help reduce your need to use the service
Do not use the gearshift lever as a handrest. brake.
Recommended downshifting speed
This can result in premature wear of the
transaxle shift forks.
Downshifting speed Shift point Selector lever operation
N00513800384
Under 20 mph Shift down from cur- Continuously variable As an additional safety precaution, models
(32 km/h) rent gear to 2nd gear.
transmission (CVT) (if so equipped with a continuously variable trans-
20 to 30 mph (32 to Shift down from cur- mission have a shift-lock device that holds
48 km/h) rent gear to 3rd gear. equipped)
the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position.
N00513200229
To move the selector lever from the “P”
The CVT will automatically and continuously (PARK) position to another position, follow
change its gear ratio depending on road and the steps below.


1. Press and hold the brake pedal down.
2. Move the selector lever to the desired
WARNING
 Always depress the brake pedal when
position.
shifting the selector lever into a selector
position from the “P” (PARK) or “N”
NOTE (NEUTRAL) position.
 The selector lever cannot be moved from “P” When beginning to drive, do not shift the
(PARK) to another position if the ignition selector lever from the “P” (PARK) or
5 switch is at the “LOCK” or “ACC” position, “N” (NEUTRAL) position while depress-
ing the accelerator pedal. Doing so is dan-
or the key has been removed, or if the brake
pedal is not pressed and held down. gerous because the vehicle will “jump”
forward or backward.
Except for vehicles with manual

NOTE
gate  To ensure proper transmission operation,
stop at each detent position when shifting.
The CVT has 2 forward selector positions After shifting, check the position in the
and 1 reverse selector position. multi-information display.
The CVT selects an optimum ratio automati-  If the brake pedal is not depressed and held,
cally when the selector lever is in the “D” the shift-lock device activates to prevent the
(DRIVE) or “L” (LOW) position, depending selector lever from being moved from the
on the speed of the vehicle and the position of “P” (PARK) position.
the accelerator pedal.  For a shift indicated by in the illustration,
The selector lever has 5 positions. With the brake pedal depressed, depress the brake pedal before moving the
set the selector lever in the gate to selector lever. If you attempt to move the
selector lever before depressing the brake
operate.
pedal, the selector lever will be immovable.
Set the selector lever in the gate to
operate.
Vehicles with manual gate
The CVT has 2 forward selector positions

and 1 reverse selector position.


The CVT selects an optimum ratio automati-
cally when the selector lever is in the “D”
NOTE
 To ensure proper transmission operation,
(DRIVE) position, depending on the speed of
stop at each detent position when shifting.
the vehicle and the position of the accelerator
After shifting, check the position in the
pedal. multi-information display.
The selector lever (A) has 2 gates; the main  If the brake pedal is not depressed and held,
gate (B) and the manual gate (C). the shift-lock device activates to prevent the
selector lever from being moved from the
“P” (PARK) position.
5
 For a shift indicated by in the illustration,
depress the brake pedal before moving the
With the brake pedal depressed, selector lever. If you attempt to move the
selector lever before depressing the brake
set the selector lever in the gate to
pedal, the selector lever will be immovable.
operate.
Set the selector lever in the gate to
operate. When the selector lever cannot be
shifted from the “P” (PARK) posi-
WARNING tion
NOTE  Always depress the brake pedal when N00563100021
 In the main gate, the selector lever has 4 shifting the selector lever into a selector When the selector lever cannot be shifted
positions. position from the “P” (PARK) or “N” from the “P” (PARK) position to another
 For information on manual gate operation, (NEUTRAL) position. position while the brake pedal is pressed and
please refer to “Sports mode” on page 5-66. When beginning to drive, do not shift the held down with the ignition switch at the
selector lever from the “P” (PARK) or “ON” position, the battery may be flat or the
“N” (NEUTRAL) position while depress-
shift-lock mechanism may be malfunction-
gerous because the vehicle will “jump”
ing.
forward or backward. Immediately have your vehicle checked by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice.
If you need to move the vehicle, shift the
selector lever as follows.


1. Make sure the parking brake is fully 6. Insert a screwdriver in the shift-lock
applied. release hole (B). Shift the selector lever to
Warning display
N00514000194
2. Stop the engine if it is running. the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while
3. Insert a screwdriver with a cloth over its pressing the screwdriver down. Type 1
tip into the notch (A) of the cover. Pry
gently as shown to remove the cover. or
Type 2
5
or
When the warning display or the warn-

ing display appears on the information
screen in the multi-information display while
you are driving, there could be a malfunction
in the CVT.
4. Depress the brake pedal with the right

Selector lever position display
N00513900402 CAUTION
foot.  If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the selector lever position is driving, the warning display or the
position.
shown on the multi-information display. warning display will appear on the informa-
tion screen in the multi-information display.
NOTE In this case, immediately park your vehicle
 For vehicles with the Free-hand Advanced in a safe place and follow these procedures:
Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), turn the
ignition switch to the “ACC” position with
[When warning display is showing]
the emergency key if the vehicle battery is
The continuously variable transmission
flat.
(CVT) fluid is overheating. The engine con-
trol may activate to lower the CVT fluid tem-
perature, causing the engine revolutions and
vehicle speed to decrease. In this case, take
one of the following procedures:

CAUTION “R” REVERSE WARNING

• Slow down your vehicle.  To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
• Stop your vehicle in a safe place, put the Move the lever to this position only after the stopped on a slope, the engine should be
selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position, vehicle has come to a complete stop. started in the “P” (PARK) position, not in
and open the engine hood with the engine “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
running to allow the engine to cool down.  To prevent rolling, always keep your foot
CAUTION on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in
After a while, confirm that the warning
display is no longer showing. It is safe to
 Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R”
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
“N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift-
ing into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
5
continue driving if the display is no longer motion. If the lever is shifted into the “P” tion.
showing. If the warning display remains or (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while
flashes frequently, have your vehicle the vehicle is in motion, the transmission
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi may be damaged. “D” DRIVE
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice.
This position is used for most city and high-
[When warning display is showing] “N” NEUTRAL way driving. The transmission will automati-
It may be that there is something unusual cally and continuously change its gear ratio
happening in the CVT, causing a safety depending on road and driving conditions.
device to activate. Have your vehicle
At this position, the transmission is disen-
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi gaged. It is the same as the neutral position on
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your a manual transaxle and should be used when CAUTION
choice as soon as possible. the vehicle is not moving for an extended  To prevent transmission damage, never shift
length of time during driving, such as in a into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R”
traffic jam. (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
Selector lever positions motion.
N00514200372
WARNING
“P” PARK  Never move the selector lever to the “N”
“L” LOW (except for vehicles with
(NEUTRAL) position while driving since
you could accidentally slip it into the “P” manual gate)
This position locks the transmission to pre- (PARK) or “R”(REVERSE) position,
vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can damaging the transmission. This position is for driving up very steep hills
be started from the “PARK” position. and for engine braking at low speeds when
driving down steep hills.

WARNING NOTE CAUTION

 This position can be used for maximum  For vehicles equipped with the sportronic  Upward shifts do not take place automati-
engine braking. steering wheel paddle shifter, sports mode cally in sports mode. The driver must make
Be very careful not to shift into “L” can be operated even when the selector lever upward shifts in accordance with prevailing
(LOW) suddenly. Sudden engine braking is in the main gate (2). road conditions, making sure the engine rpm
may cause the tires to skid. To return to “D” (DRIVE) operation, pull the remains below the red zone on the tachome-
Select this position according to the road sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter on ter.
5 conditions and vehicle speed. the +(UP) side for longer than 2 seconds, or
park the vehicle to change the selector lever
 By rapidly moving the selector lever or spor-
tronic steering wheel paddle shifter to the “-
position indicator to “D” (DRIVE) and (SHIFT DOWN)” side twice, it is possible to
return to “D” (DRIVE) operation. skip one shift range (i.e., 3rd to 1st or 4th to
Sports mode (if so equipped)
2nd). Since sudden engine braking or accel-
N00514400417
eration can cause a loss of traction, down-
SHIFT UP SHIFT shifts must be made carefully in accordance
Vehicles with manual gate DOWN with the vehicle’s speed.
 On vehicles with a sportronic steering wheel
paddle shifter, shift ranges may not change
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in when the lateral paddle shifters are operated
SHIFT
motion, sports mode is selected by pushing DOWN at the same time.
the selector lever from the “D” (DRIVE)
position into the manual gate (1). To return to SHIFT
“D” (DRIVE) operation, push the selector UP NOTE
lever back into the main gate (2).  Shift ranges can only be selected in a for-
In sports mode, rapid shifting is possible sim- ward direction from 1st to 6th. To reverse or
+ (SHIFT UP)
ply by operating the selector lever or spor- park the vehicle, move the selector lever to
Transmission shifts up once by each opera-
tronic steering wheel paddle shifter. the “R” or “P” position.
tion.
Unlike the manual transaxle, sports mode
allows shifting with the accelerator pedal
- (SHIFT DOWN)
depressed.
Transmission shifts down once by each
operation.


Unlike the manual transaxle, sports mode Transmission shifts down once by each
NOTE allows shifting with the accelerator pedal operation.
 To maintain good running performance, the
depressed.
transmission may refuse to perform an
upshift when the selector lever or sportronic CAUTION
steering wheel paddle shifter is moved to the NOTE  Upward shifts do not take place automati-
“+(SHIFT UP)” position at certain vehicle  To return to “D” (DRIVE) operation, pull the cally in sports mode. The driver must make
speeds. Also, to prevent over-revving of the sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter on upward shifts in accordance with prevailing
engine, the transmission may refuse to per-
form a downshift when the shift lever or
the +(UP) side for longer than 2 seconds, or
park the vehicle to change the selector lever
road conditions, making sure the engine rpm
remains below the red zone on the tachome-
5
sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter is position indicator to “D” (DRIVE) and ter.
moved to the “- (SHIFT DOWN)” position at return to “D” (DRIVE) operation.  By rapidly moving the sportronic steering
certain vehicle speeds. When this happens, a  When the sportronic steering wheel paddle wheel paddle shifter to the “- (SHIFT
buzzer sounds to indicate that a downshift is shifter is operated with the selector lever in DOWN)” side twice, it is possible to skip
not going to take place. the “L” (LOW) position, gear is not shifted one shift range (i.e., 3rd to 1st or 4th to 2nd).
 Move the selector lever gently between the because the selectable shift range is limited. Since sudden engine braking or acceleration
manual and main gates and between posi- can cause a loss of traction, downshifts must
tions in the manual gate. And do not operate be made carefully in accordance with the
sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter vio- vehicle’s speed.
lently. Excessive force could damage the  Shift ranges may not change when the lateral
selector lever or sportronic steering wheel paddle shifters are operated at the same time.
SHIFT DOWN
paddle shifter.
Except for vehicles with manual NOTE

SHIFT UP  Shift ranges can only be selected in a for-
gate
ward direction from 1st to 6th. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the selector lever to
While driving with the selector lever in the the “R” or “P” position.
“D” (DRIVE), sports mode can be selected
by pulling one of the sportronic steering + (SHIFT UP)
wheel shifters toward you. Transmission shifts up once by each opera-
In sports mode, rapid shifting is possible sim- tion.
ply by operating the sportronic steering wheel
paddle shifter. - (SHIFT DOWN)

NOTE Operation of the CVT

 To maintain good running performance, the N00514500287
transmission may refuse to perform an

upshift when the sportronic steering wheel CAUTION
paddle shifter is moved to the “+(SHIFT  Before selecting a position with the engine
UP)” position at certain vehicle speeds. running and the vehicle stationary, fully
Also, to prevent over-revving of the engine, depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi-
5 the transmission may refuse to perform a
downshift when the sportronic steering
cle from creeping.
Do not release the brakes until you are ready
wheel paddle shifter is moved to the “- to drive away. The vehicle will begin to
(SHIFT DOWN)” position at certain vehicle move as soon as the CVT is engaged, espe-
speeds. When this happens, a buzzer sounds cially when the engine speed is high (fast
to indicate that a downshift is not going to NOTE idle or air conditioning on).
take place.  While driving in sports mode, the sports  Depress the brake pedal with the right foot.
 Do not operate sportronic steering wheel mode display may change to show “D” and Using the left foot could cause driver move-
paddle shifter violently. Excessive force shifting in sports mode may no longer be ment delay in case of an emergency.
could damage the sportronic steering wheel possible.  To prevent sudden acceleration, never run
paddle shifter. This indicates that controls to drive in the the engine at high rpms when shifting from
“D” position are operating normally in order the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
Sports mode display to lower the temperature of the continuously tion.
variable transmission (CVT) fluid; it does  Operating the accelerator pedal while the
N00538800154
not indicate a malfunction. Once the temper- other foot is resting on the brake pedal will
In sports mode, the currently selected shift ature of the continuously variable transmis- affect braking efficiency and may cause pre-
range is displayed on the information screen sion (CVT) fluid drops, shifting in the sports mature wear of brake pads.
in the multi-information display. mode will be possible again.  Use the selector lever in the correct shift
position in accordance with driving condi-
tions.
Never coast downhill backward in the driv-
ing shift position { “D” (DRIVE), “L”
(LOW) or sports mode} or coast forward in
the “R” (REVERSE) position.
Engine stopping and increased brake pedal
and steering effort could lead to an accident.


For longer waiting periods with the engine
CAUTION running, the selector lever should be placed in
NOTE
 Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal  On a slope, be sure to apply the parking
the “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
pressed when the vehicle is stationary. brake before moving the selector lever to the
This can damage the CVT. “P” (PARK) position. If you move the selec-
Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal CAUTION tor lever to the “P” (PARK) position before
while holding down the brake pedal with the  To avoid transmission overheating, never try applying the parking brake, it may be diffi-
selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position, to keep your vehicle stationary on a hill by cult to disengage the selector lever from the
the engine revolutions may not rise as high
as when performing the same operation with
using the accelerator pedal. Always apply
the parking brake and/or service brake.
“P” (PARK) position when next you drive
the vehicle, requiring application of a strong
5
the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL)  Unexpected acceleration may occur if the force to the selector lever to move from the
position. selector lever is in a position other than “P” “P” (PARK) position.
(PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL).
Passing acceleration Before driving off from a stop, make sure
N00514900063
that the selector lever is in “D” (DRIVE) When the CVT makes no speed
position or “Sports mode” position.
To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) change
N00515300194
position (when passing another vehicle) push
the accelerator to the floor if it is safe to do so If the CVT does not shift while driving, or
Parking
in traffic conditions. The CVT will automati- your vehicle does not pick up enough speed
N00515100062
cally downshift. when starting on an uphill slope, there may be
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com- something unusual happening in the transmis-
plete stop, fully engage the parking brake, sion, causing a safety device to activate. Have
NOTE and then move the selector lever to the “P” your vehicle checked at an authorized Mit-
 In sports mode, downshifts do not take place (PARK) position.
when the accelerator is depressed all the way
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
If you are going to leave the vehicle unat- your choice as soon as possible.
to the floor.
tended, always switch off the engine and
carry the key. 1. If your vehicle has difficulty moving
uphill, shift the selector lever into “L”
Waiting (LOW) position (except for vehicles with
N00515000074
sport mode) or 2nd shift range of the
For short waiting periods, such as at traffic sports mode.
lights, the vehicle can be left in selector lever This method might not work depending
position and held stationary with the service on the type of transmission malfunction.
brake.
Twin Clutch SST (Sportronic Shift Transmission) (if so equipped)

2. Once the vehicle is moving on a level Manual shift  P.5-76
road, move the selector lever back to “D”
(DRIVE) position.
Gearshift lever operation
N00539800050
NOTE As an additional safety precaution, models

 When the warning display or the equipped with a Twin Clutch SST have a
warning display appears on the information shift-lock device that holds the gearshift lever
5 screen in the multi-information display, there in the “P” (PARK) position. To move the
could be a malfunction in the CVT. Refer to gearshift lever from the “P” (PARK) position
“Continuously variable transmission (CVT): to another position, follow the steps below.
Warning display” on page 5-64.
1. Press and hold the brake pedal down. NOTE
2. Move the gearshift lever to the desired  In the main shift gate, the gearshift lever has
Twin Clutch SST (Spor- position. 4 positions.
tronic Shift Transmission) (if  For information on manual shift gate opera-
so equipped)
NOTE tion, please refer to “Manual shift” on page
5-76.
 The gearshift lever cannot be moved from
N00539700059
“P” (PARK) to another position if the igni-
tion switch is at the “LOCK” or “ACC” posi-
The Twin Clutch SST is a transmission that,
tion, or the key has been removed, or if the
through integrated control of the engine and
brake pedal is not pressed and held down.
transmission, is able to achieve both the
smooth shifting of an automatic transaxle and
the acceleration and fuel economy close to a The Twin Clutch SST has 6 forward gears
manual transaxle. In addition, the control and 1 reverse gear.
mode can be selected from two types to suit The individual gears are selected automati-
the driving conditions. cally, depending on the position of the gear-
Together with manual shifting, the transmis- shift lever, the speed of the vehicle and the
sion is capable of responding to a variety of position of the accelerator pedal.
driving circumstances. The gearshift lever (A) has 2 gates; the main
shift gate (B) and the manual shift gate (C).
Twin Clutch SST control mode P.5-74

WARNING Gearshift lever position display

 If the pull-ring is always pulled up when N00539900064
using the gearshift lever, the gearshift When the ignition switch is turned to the
lever may be accidentally shifted into the
“ON” position, the gearshift lever position is
“P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position.
shown on the multi-information display.
Do not pull up the pull-ring when making
shifts shown by in the illustration.
 Always depress the brake pedal when 5
shifting the gearshift lever into another
position from the “P” (PARK) or “N”
(NEUTRAL) position.
When beginning to drive, do not shift the
gearshift lever from the “P” (PARK) or
“N” (NEUTRAL) position while depress-
gerous because the vehicle will “jump”
The pull-ring (D) must be pulled
forward or backward.
up while the brake pedal is
depressed to move the gearshift
lever. In addition, when the vehicle is driven with
NOTE the gearshift lever in the “D” (DRIVE) posi-
The gearshift lever will move tion, the forward gear number is shown.
 For a shift indicated by in the illustration,
without pulling up the pull-ring depress the brake pedal before moving the
(D). gearshift lever. If you attempt to move the
The pull-ring (D) must be pulled gearshift lever before depressing the brake
up to move the gearshift lever. pedal, the gearshift lever will be immovable.
through
 Do not accelerate immediately after moving
the gearshift lever. It may take some time for
the transmission to shift to the selected gear.
 When the gearshift lever is operated when
the Twin Clutch SST fluid temperature is
low, the time required to shift to the selected
gear may be longer than usual.

When the gearshift lever position If the gearshift lever position dis- When the warning display or the warn-
display blinks play is not showing ing display appears on the information screen
N00562500028
in the multi-information display while you
are driving, take the following measures.
When the gearshift lever is placed in the “R” There may be a problem in the Twin Clutch
(REVERSE) position, the gearshift lever SST.
position display on the multi-information dis- If this occurs, the safety device operates and When warning display is show-
play may blink and the vehicle will not move prevents the vehicle from moving. Therefore, ing
5 because the gears in the transmission have perform the following procedure. N00543100096
not engaged. The temperature of the Twin Clutch SST fluid

If this occurs, perform the following proce- 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop
is high.
dure. the engine.
If this occurs, take one of the following mea-
2. Restart the engine.
sures.
1. Depress the brake pedal with your right
foot and place the gearshift lever in the If the gearshift lever position display is  Reduce the vehicle speed.
“N” (NEUTRAL) position. shown and the vehicle can move after this  Stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the
2. Place the gearshift lever in the “R” procedure is performed, there is no malfunc- gearshift lever in the “P” (PARK) posi-
(REVERSE) position, and confirm that tion. tion, and then open the engine hood with
the gearshift lever position display stops If the gearshift lever position display is not the engine running to cool the engine.
blinking. shown and the vehicle cannot move, or if this
3. Repeat 1 and 2 above if the gearshift lever problem occurs repeatedly, have the vehicle
After a while, check that the warning dis-
position display continues to blink. checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as play has gone out.
If the display goes out, the vehicle can be
soon as possible.
WARNING driven normally.
 To avoid unintended vehicle movement, If the warning display remains on or comes
keep brake pedal applied with your right Warning display on frequently, have the vehicle checked by an
foot and do not depress the accelerator N00540000052 authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
pedal, while the gearshift lever position repair facility of your choice.
display is blinking.
or


function as if the gearshift lever was in the If this occurs, perform the following proce-
CAUTION “N” (NEUTRAL) position. dure.
 If the warning display is shown, such as (At this time, the vehicle temporarily cannot
when the vehicle does not accelerate while be driven.) 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop
traveling even if the accelerator pedal is If this occurs, take the following measures. the engine.
depressed, the vehicle may not be able to be 2. Restart the engine.
driven normally. 1. Depress the brake pedal and stop the vehi-
For safety, pay attention to your surround- cle in a safe place. If the warning display goes out, there is no
ings when driving the vehicle. 2. Place the gearshift lever in the “P” abnormal condition.
5
(PARK) position, and then open the However, if the warning display remains on
engine hood with the engine running to or comes on frequently, have the vehicle
NOTE cool the engine. checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
 If the vehicle is continuously driven on hilly
3. After a while, check that the warning dealer or a repair facility of your choice as
roads or in an aggressive manner involving
high engine rpm, sudden acceleration and/or display has gone out, and then stop the soon as possible.
deceleration, the vehicle transmission may engine if the warning display has gone
vibrate. out. CAUTION
This vibration is to alert the driver that the 4. If the engine can be restarted, the vehicle
Twin Clutch SST fluid temperature has risen.  If the warning display is shown, such as
can be driven normally. when the vehicle does not accelerate while
It does not indicate a malfunction.
If this occurs, perform the same measures for traveling even if the accelerator pedal is
If the warning display remains on or comes depressed, the vehicle may not be able to be
when the warning appears. If the vibra- on frequently, have the vehicle checked by an driven normally.
tion stops, the vehicle can be driven nor- authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a For safety, pay attention to your surround-
mally. repair facility of your choice. ings when driving the vehicle.
If vehicle is driven with warning dis- When warning display is show-

played
ing
If the vehicle continues to be driven after the N00543200039
warning display appears, and the tempera- A safety device in the Twin Clutch SST has
ture of the Twin Clutch SST fluid continues been activated due to a possible malfunction
to rise, the transmission protection control in the Twin Clutch SST or in the engine elec-
may operate and cause the transmission to tronic control module.


length of time during driving, such as in a
Gearshift lever positions (Main traffic jam.
CAUTION
shift gate)  Never shift into the “D” (DRIVE) position
from the “R” (REVERSE) position while the
N00540100011
WARNING vehicle is in motion.
 Never move the gearshift lever to the “N” If the lever is shifted into the “D” (DRIVE)
“P” PARK (NEUTRAL) position while driving since from the “R” (REVERSE) position while the
you could accidentally slip it into the “P” vehicle is in motion, the transmission may be
5 This position locks the transmission to pre- (PARK) or “R”(REVERSE) position and
the engine speed could rise, damaging the
damaged.
vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can
be started from the “PARK” position. transmission.
 To prevent the vehicle from rolling when NOTE
stopped on a slope, the engine should be  For information on manual shift gate opera-
“R” REVERSE started in the “P” (PARK) position. tion, please refer to “Manual shift” on page
Although the engine can be started when 5-76.
Move the lever to this position only after the the vehicle is in the “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
 When the engine is cold, upshifts occur at a
vehicle has come to a complete stop. tion, for safety reasons, do not start the
higher vehicle speed than when the engine is
engine in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
warm.
 Always keep your foot on the brake pedal This control is performed to quickly warm
CAUTION when the vehicle is in “N” (NEUTRAL) up the engine. It does not indicate a malfunc-
 Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R” position, or when shifting into or out of tion. After the vehicle has been driven for a
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in “N” (NEUTRAL) position, to prevent roll- while, upshifts will occur at the regular
motion. If the lever is shifted into the “P” ing. engine speeds.
(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while
the vehicle is in motion, the transmission
may be damaged. “D” DRIVE Twin Clutch SST control mode
N00540200070
This position is used for most city and high-
“N” NEUTRAL Select the control mode from the following
way driving. Engine shifting and braking are
two types to suit the driving conditions.
done automatically as needed, depending on
At this position, the transmission is disen- road conditions.
gaged. It is the same as the neutral position on
a manual transaxle and should be used when
the vehicle is not moving for an extended


Twin NOTE Twin Clutch SST control mode
Clutch  When continuously driving on closed circuit switch
Characteristic
SST con- tracks or at other locations where the engine N00540300068
trol mode is operated at high speeds and under a heavy
When the ignition switch is set to the “ON”
Control mode for normal driv- load, the Twin Clutch SST fluid temperature
will have a tendency to rise.
position, operate the Twin Clutch SST control
Normal ing on local roads, freeways, mode switch (A) to change the control mode.
In this case, if the temperature rises too high,
(Control and the like.
mode when Smooth shifting is performed the warning display will appear on the 5
engine is at low engine speeds for eco- information screen in the multi-information
started) nomical driving with good display to alert the driver.
ride quality. If the warning display appears, be sure to
Control mode for driving on refer to “Warning display” on page 5-72and
follow the appropriate measures.
mountain roads, roads with
 The Twin Clutch SST control mode can be
uphill and downhill slopes,
selected both when “D” range operation is
and freeways with long down- selected and when manual shifting is
hill slopes where engine brak- selected.
ing is necessary.  If you select “Sport” mode while the engine
Compared to “Normal” mode, is cold, the transmission may shift up at dif-
Sport
shifting occurs at higher ferent speeds compared to that when the When the engine is started, the control mode
engine speeds and is quicker. engine is warm. is automatically set to the “Normal” mode.
In addition, quick downshift- This is simply the operation of the control Use the following procedures to change the
ing is possible when the accel- system to warm the engine quickly. It does control mode.
erator pedal is depressed for not indicate a malfunction.
quick acceleration or when the  For slippery road surfaces, such as roads To shift from “Normal” mode to “Sport”
brakes are applied. with accumulated snow, “Normal” mode is mode
recommended for smooth shifting at low
engine speeds. While the vehicle is stopped or being driven,
push the Twin Clutch SST control mode
switch forward.


Shifting can be performed even while the
To shift from “Sport” mode to “Normal”
accelerator pedal is depressed.
mode
This allows the driver to enjoy sporty driving,
While the vehicle is stopped or being driven, such as quick cornering, by nimbly down-
push the Twin Clutch SST control mode shifting to reduce vehicle speed just before
switch rearward. entering a curve.
5 NOTE CAUTION
 If the Twin Clutch SST control mode switch  When manually shifting while the vehicle is
is continuously pressed after a control mode being driven, select the correct shift position
has been selected, an erroneous operation to control the engine speed so that the
prevention function operates and the control tachometer indicator does not enter the red
mode is automatically set to the “Normal” zone.
mode.
Manual shift  Sudden engine braking and rapid accelera-
N00540500031
If you would like to select a control mode tion can cause the vehicle to skid. Shift down
again, return the ignition switch to the Using the gearshift lever (A) or the sportronic according to road conditions and vehicle
“ACC” or “LOCK” position and restart the steering wheel shifters (B), shifting can be speed.
engine. Then, push the Twin Clutch SST performed manually.  If both the left and right sportronic steering
control mode switch. wheel shifters are operated at the same time,
the transmission may not change gears.
Twin Clutch SST control mode

display NOTE
N00540400043
 Only the forward gears 1 to 6 can be
selected.
When the ignition switch is set to the “ON” To reverse or park, place the gearshift lever
position, the currently selected control mode in the “R” (REVERSE) or “P” (PARK) posi-
is displayed on the multi-information display. tion.
 During manual shifting, downshifting will be
performed automatically when the vehicle
slows down and the transmission will down-
shift to 1st gear before the vehicle stops.

NOTE NOTE
 If the gearshift lever or sportronic steering  After manual shifting is selected using the
wheel shifters are operated repeatedly, the gearshift lever, shifting up and down can also
transmission will also shift repeatedly. be performed using the sportronic steering
 In order to ensure driving performance, wheel shifters.
upshifting may not occur depending on the
vehicle speed even if the gearshift lever or Returning to “D” range operation
sportronic steering wheel shifters are oper-
ated. In addition, in order to prevent exces- Move the gearshift lever toward the front pas-
5
sive engine speed, the buzzer sounds and senger’s seat to return to automated shifting.
downshifting may not occur depending on
the vehicle speed even if the gearshift lever
or sportronic steering wheel shifters are Shifting up and shifting down
operated.
 When driving in an aggressive manner Each time the gearshift lever is pulled rear-
involving high engine rpm, sudden accelera- ward, the transmission shifts up 1 gear.
tion and/or deceleration, the Twin Clutch In addition, each time the gearshift lever is
SST could take longer to shift due to higher pushed forward, the transmission shifts down
fluid temperatures.
1 gear.
Shifting using the gearshift lever

N00540600032
SHIFT DOWN
Selecting manual shifting
NOTE
While the vehicle is stopped or being driven,  When the gearshift lever is moved to the “D”
move the gearshift lever from the “D” SHIFT UP (DRIVE) position from the manual shift
(DRIVE) position in the main shift gate gate, it may automatically select a gear dif-
toward the driver’s seat to select manual ferent from the gear selected during manual
shifting depending on vehicle speed or driv-
shifting.
ing conditions.

Shifting using the sportronic steer- NOTE

ing wheel shifters  After manual shifting is selected using the
N00540700033 sportronic steering wheel shifters, shifting up
and down can also be performed using the
Selecting manual shifting gearshift lever.
While the vehicle is stopped or being driven

Returning to “D” range operation
with the gearshift lever in the “D” (DRIVE)
5 position, manual shifting can be selected by When the gearshift lever is in the “D”
pulling one of the sportronic steering wheel (DRIVE) position, pull the +(SHIFT UP)
shifters toward you. sportronic steering wheel shifter toward you
for 2 seconds or more to return to “D” range
Shifting down operation.
- (SHIFT DOWN) + (SHIFT UP)
Each time the - (SHIFT DOWN) sportronic
steering wheel shifter is pulled, the transmis-
sion shifts down 1 gear.
NOTE
 If manual shifting is selected using the spor-
Shifting up
tronic steering wheel shifters when the gear-
Each time the +(SHIFT UP) sportronic steer- shift lever is in the “D” (DRIVE) position,
the transmission will automatically return to
ing wheel shifter is pulled, the transmission
“D” range operation before the vehicle stops.
shifts up 1 gear.

NOTE Operation of the Twin Clutch CAUTION

 When the transmission returns to “D” range SST  Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal
operation from manual shifting, it may auto- N00540800021
pressed when the vehicle is stationary.
matically shift up or down from the gear This can cause sudden acceleration and dam-
selected using manual shifting depending on CAUTION age the Twin Clutch SST.
the vehicle speed or driving conditions. Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal
 Before selecting a position with the engine
 If manual shifting is selected using the spor- while holding down the brake pedal with the
running and the vehicle stationary, fully
tronic steering wheel shifters, “D” range
operation will again be selected by moving
depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi-
gearshift lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position,
the engine revolutions may not rise as high
5
cle from creeping.
the gearshift lever from the “D” (DRIVE) as when performing the same operation with
Do not release the brakes until you are ready
position toward the driver’s seat, then return the gearshift lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL)
to drive away. The vehicle will begin to
it toward the front passenger’s seat. position.
move as soon as the Twin Clutch SST is
engaged.
Manual shift display  Depress the brake pedal with the right foot. Passing acceleration
N00543000040 Using the left foot could cause driver move- N00540900019
ment delay in case of an emergency.
In manual shift, the currently selected gear is To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE)
 To prevent sudden acceleration, never run
displayed on the multi-information display. position (when passing another vehicle) push
the engine at high rpms when shifting from
the accelerator to the floor if it is safe to do so
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
tion. in traffic conditions. The Twin Clutch SST
 Operating the accelerator pedal while the will automatically downshift.
through other foot is resting on the brake pedal will
affect braking efficiency, may cause prema- NOTE
ture wear of brake pads and may cause  In manual shift, downshifts do not take place
engine damage. when the accelerator is depressed all the way
 Use the gearshift lever in the correct shift to the floor.
position in accordance with driving condi-
tions.
Never coast downhill backward in the driv-
ing shift position { “D” (DRIVE) or manual
shifting} or coast forward in the “R”
(REVERSE) position.
Engine stopping and increased brake pedal
and steering effort could lead to an accident.


lever position and held stationary with the
Uphill/downhill driving CAUTION service brake.
N00541600039 • If the vehicle is continuously driven at low
For longer waiting periods with the engine
speeds using the tendency of the vehicle to
DRIVING UPHILL running, place the gearshift lever in the “N”
creep forward, the vehicle will vibrate or
(NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking
The Twin Clutch SST may not upshift to a the warning display will appear on the brake, while holding the vehicle stationary
higher shift position if the computer deter- information screen in the multi-information with the service brake.
mines the current speed cannot be maintained display to alert the driver that the Twin
Prior to moving off after having stopped the
5 once a higher shift position is engaged. Clutch SST fluid temperature has risen.
vehicle, make sure that the gearshift lever is
For smoother vehicle performance, if you After that, if the Twin Clutch SST fluid
temperature rises even higher, the transmis- in “D” (DRIVE) position or manual shift
release the throttle while climbing a steep position.
sion protection control will operate.
grade, the Twin Clutch SST may not upshift.
If this occurs, the vehicle may suddenly
This is normal, as the computer is temporarily
preventing shifting. After reaching the top of
reverse as if the gearshift lever was in the CAUTION
“N” (NEUTRAL) position and cause an
the hill, normal shift function will resume.  Do not rev the engine unnecessarily while
accident.
the vehicle is stationary. Unexpected acceler-
If the warning display appears or the ation may occur if the gearshift lever is in a
CAUTION transmission protection control operates, position other than “P” (PARK) or “N”
 Do not use the tendency of the vehicle to refer to “When warning display is (NEUTRAL).
creep forward in order to drive at low speeds  Do not keep the vehicle in a stopped position
showing” on page 5-72.
up hills. on an uphill slope by depressing the acceler-
The transmission may be damaged and an ator pedal instead of the brake pedal.
accident may occur due to the following con-
DRIVING DOWNHILL
The transmission may be damaged and an
ditions. accident may occur due to the following con-
When traveling down steep grades, the com-
• The Twin Clutch SST fluid temperature ditions.
puter may automatically select a lower shift
will rise and can cause transmission dam- • The Twin Clutch SST fluid temperature
age.
position. This function assists engine braking
will rise and can cause transmission dam-
efforts, reducing the need for using the ser- age.
vice brakes.
Waiting
N00541000033
For short waiting periods, such as at traffic

lights, the vehicle can be left in gearshift


Refer to “Engine malfunction indicator
CAUTION What to do if the following occur
(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check
• If the vehicle is kept in a stopped position with the Twin Clutch SST engine light”)” on page 5-144 and follow the
by depressing the accelerator pedal instead N00541201087
appropriate measures.
of the brake pedal, the vehicle will vibrate
If there is a malfunction in the Twin Clutch
or the warning display will appear on SST or engine electronic control module, the When the gearshift lever position display
the information screen in the multi-infor- following may occur. is not showing
mation display to alert the driver that the
Twin Clutch SST fluid temperature has  Twin Clutch SST does not shift. A safety device in the Twin Clutch SST has 5
risen.  Vehicle cannot move. been activated due to a possible malfunction
After that, if the Twin Clutch SST fluid  Twin Clutch SST acceleration is slow. in the Twin Clutch SST.
temperature rises even higher, the transmis-
 Vehicle does not creep.
sion protection control will operate. Refer to “If the gearshift lever position dis-
 “Shift shock” is large.
If this occurs, the vehicle may suddenly play is not showing” on page 5-72 and follow
reverse as if the gearshift lever was in the  Shifting occurs at higher engine speed.
the appropriate measures.
“N” (NEUTRAL) position and cause an  Response is slow.
accident.
If any of these occurs, perform the following When warning display is showing or
If the warning display appears or the when no warning is showing in the multi-
procedure.
transmission protection control operates, information display
refer to “When warning display is When warning display is showing
showing” on page 5-72. A safety device in the Twin Clutch SST has
The temperature of Twin Clutch SST fluid is been activated due to a possible malfunction
high. in the Twin Clutch SST or in the engine elec-
Parking tronic control module.
N00541100018
Refer to “Warning display” on page 5-72 and
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com- follow the appropriate measures. Perform the following procedure.
plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,
and then move the gearshift lever to the “P” When the engine malfunction indicator 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop
(PARK) position. (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check the engine.
engine light”) comes on or blinking 2. Restart the engine.
There could be a malfunction in the engine If the vehicle moves and accelerates normally
electronic control module. after this procedure is performed, there is no
malfunction in the transmission.

ACD (Active center differential system) (if so equipped)

However, if the vehicle does not move or ACD control
accelerate normally, or if this problem occurs
CAUTION Operation
 Do not over-rely on the ACD. Even the ACD
mode
repeatedly, have the vehicle checked by an
cannot prevent the natural laws of physics Normally, use this control
from acting on the vehicle. This system, like TARMAC mode. Use this mode for
repair facility of your choice as soon as possi- any other system, has limits and cannot help
ble. paved roads.
you to maintain traction and control of the
vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driv- Use this control mode when
driving on somewhat slip-
5 CAUTION ing can lead to accidents. It is the driver’s
responsibility to drive carefully. This means GRAVEL pery road surfaces, such as
 When the Twin Clutch SST fluid tempera-
ture is high, the engine idle speed when the
taking into account the traffic, road and envi- wet road surfaces and gravel
ronmental conditions. roads.
vehicle is stopped may increase or the vehi-
cle will have a weak tendency to creep.  Be sure to use tires that are the same speci-
Use this control mode when
After that, if the Twin Clutch SST fluid tem- fied size, type, and brand, and have no differ-
ence in the amount of wear for all four
driving on slippery road sur-
SNOW
perature rises even higher, the warning wheels. Otherwise, the ACD may not work faces, such as snow-covered
display will appear. properly. roads.
NOTE ACD control mode switch

ACD (Active center differ-
 If the parking brake lever is pulled up while
ential system) (if so equipped) the vehicle is moving, the center differential When the ignition switch is set to the “ON”
N00538500034
is designed to switch to a free state condition position, operate the AWC switch to change
which will allow the rear wheel to lock eas- the control mode.
The ACD is a system that improves accelera-
ier.
tion performance and straight-ahead stability Each time the switch is pushed, the control
by regulating the differential limiting action mode changes in the order “TARMAC” 
and power drive distribution of the center dif- “GRAVEL”  “SNOW”  “TARMAC”.
ferential. ACD control mode
N00545400048
Select the control mode from the following

three types to suit the driving conditions.

ACD (Active center differential system) (if so equipped)

In addition, when the control mode is
changed, the selected mode appears on the
interrupt display screen of the information
screen in the multi-information display.
The control mode display will appear on the
information screen for a few seconds, and
then the original screen will return.
5
CAUTION
 The ACD control mode display may flash
under aggressive driving conditions.
At this time, ACD control is temporarily sus-
NOTE pended in order to protect the ACD device,
CAUTION
 The control mode can be changed while the but this will not affect normal driving.  The system may be malfunctioning.
vehicle is moving. After the vehicle is driven for a while, if the Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
 The selected control mode is stored in mem- ACD control mode display remains on, the engine.
ory even if the engine is stopped. ACD control will start operating again. Restart the engine and check whether the
However, if a battery terminal is discon-
warning display goes out.
nected, the control mode stored in memory
will be erased and the control mode will be If the warning display goes out, there is
set to the “TARMAC” mode. ACD warning display
no abnormal condition. If the warning
N00545700041
display does not go out or appears fre-
When there is a malfunction in the system, quently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle
ACD control mode display the warning display will appear on the immediately, but we recommend you to have
information screen in the multi-information your vehicle inspected.
display.
In addition, the ACD control mode display in
section (A) will go out at the same time.
Example: “TARMAC” mode is selected.
The currently selected control mode is dis-

played on the multi-information display.

Electronically controlled 4WD system (if so equipped)
NOTE Drive mode Function

 If the ambient temperature drops and the vis- The default mode.
cosity of the AWC control fluid increases, This mode is for automati-
the warning may be displayed. cally controlling the distribu-
At this time, ACD control is temporarily sus- 4WD AUTO
tion of driving torque to all
pended, but this will not affect normal driv- four wheels according to the
ing.
driving conditions.
5 After the vehicle is driven for a while, if the
engine is restarted after the AWC control This mode is for driving in
fluid warms up or the ambient temperature slippery conditions such as
increases, the ACD control will start operat- on snow-covered roads or
ing again if the warning display goes out. sand. 1- 2WD
The large amount of driving 2- 4WD AUTO
4WD LOCK 3- 4WD LOCK
torque that is applied to the
Electronically controlled rear tires enables getting out
of slippery areas and power- The drive mode is displayed as an interrupt
4WD system (if so equipped) ful driving is possible across display on the information screen in the
N00548300019
all ranges. multi-information display when the drive
The electronically controlled 4WD system is mode is switched.
an all-wheel drive system that allows one of 4-wheel drive operation requires special driv- After a few seconds, the information screen
three drive modes to be selected with a ing skills. returns from the drive mode display to the
switch, in accordance with the driving condi- Carefully read the “All-wheel driving opera- previous screen.
tions. tion” section on page 5-86 and take care to
drive safely. Display
The following drive modes are available. Drive mode
Type 1 Type 2
Drive mode Function
Drive mode-selector
N00548400010 2WD
This mode is for economical The drive mode can be selected by pressing
driving on normal dry roads the switch while the ignition switch is in the
2WD
and freeways. “ON” position. 4WD AUTO
Driving in front-wheel drive.

Electronically controlled 4WD system (if so equipped)

Display Type 2
Drive mode CAUTION
Type 1 Type 2  If the selected drive mode indicator is blink-
ing, the vehicle switches automatically to
4WD LOCK front-wheel drive in order to protect the
Normally the indicator illuminates when the drive-system components, and drive mode
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi- selection is no longer possible with the drive
tion, and then the drive mode is displayed a mode-selector.
CAUTION
 Do not operate the drive mode-selector with
few seconds after the engine is started.
The status of each drive mode display is as
The warning display is also displayed in the
5
the front wheels spinning on a snowy road or follows. display.
in similar conditions. The vehicle could Reduce speed, and if the indicator goes out
lunge in an unexpected direction. after driving a while, resume driving as
Drive mode indicator before. If the indicator continues blinking for
 Driving on dry, paved roads in “4WD
LOCK” mode causes increased fuel con- Drive mode “4WD” indi- “LOCK” more than about 5 minutes, have the vehicle
sumption, noise, and premature tire wear. cator indicator inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
 Do not drive with the tires spinning in dealer or a repair facility of your choice as
2WD OFF OFF soon as possible.
“2WD” mode.
Doing so could generate heat in the drive- 4WD AUTO ON OFF
system components. 4WD LOCK ON ON Type 1 Type 2
NOTE
 The drive mode can be switched while driv-
ing or stopped.
Drive mode indicator

N00549400017
Type 1

All-wheel driving operation

traction when driving on slippery, wet or
CAUTION All-wheel driving operation snow-covered roads and when moving out of
 The warning display on the information N00530600169
mud.
screen in the multi-information display, a
These vehicles, however, are not designed
problem has occurred with the electronically
controlled 4WD system and the safety device
For vehicles with full-time 4WD for off-road use, and are unsuitable for
has activated. Have an inspection made by driving on bumpy ground that may cause
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a Full-time 4WD vehicles are propelled by excessive strain. Electronically controlled
4WD system vehicles should be driven only
5 repair facility of your choice as soon as pos-
sible.
engine power distributed constantly and
under the same conditions as are suitable for
appropriately to all 4 wheels.
Not only does this ensure enhanced handling ordinary front-wheel drive vehicles.
Type 1 Type 2 on dry, paved roads but also permits better
traction when driving on slippery, wet or Turning sharp corners
snow-covered roads and when moving out of
mud. When turning a sharp corner in “4WD
These vehicles, however, are not designed LOCK” position at low speed, a slight differ-
for off-road use, and are unsuitable for ence in steering may be experienced similar
driving on bumpy ground that may cause to feeling as if the brakes were applied. This
excessive strain. Full-time 4WD vehicles is called tight corner braking and results from
CAUTION should be driven only under the same condi- each of the four tires being at a different dis-
 Always use tires of the same size, type, and tions as are suitable for ordinary front-wheel tance from the corner. The phenomenon is
brand that have no wear differences. Using drive vehicles. typical of 4-wheel drive vehicles. If this
tires that differ in size, type, brand, or wear
occurs, either straighten out the steering
amount may activate the protection of the
drive-system components, causing the drive For vehicles with electronically wheel, or change to “2WD” or “4WD
mode in “4WD AUTO” mode to lock or the controlled 4WD system AUTO” mode.
“4WD” and “LOCK” indicators to blink
alternately. On snowy or icy roads
Electronically controlled 4WD system vehi-
cles are propelled by engine power distrib-
uted constantly and appropriately to all 4 Set the drive mode-selector to “4WD AUTO”
wheels. or “4WD LOCK” in accordance with the road
Not only does this ensure enhanced handling conditions, and then gradually depress the
on dry, paved roads but also permits better accelerator pedal for a smooth start.

Cautions on handling of all-wheel drive vehicles
NOTE CAUTION Climbing/descending sharp grades

 The use of snow tires is recommended. • The “ ” warning display or the “ ”
 Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, warning display appear on the information Your vehicle may not provide sufficient hill
avoid sudden braking, and use engine brak- screen in the multi-information display. climbing ability and engine braking on steep
ing (downshifting). Refer to “Warning display” on page 5-64. slopes. Avoid driving on steep slopes even
though the vehicle is a 4-wheel drive vehicle.
CAUTION WARNING 5
 Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration,  When attempting to rock your vehicle out
Cautions on handling of all-
and sharp turning. Skidding occurs and con- of a stuck position, be sure that the area wheel drive vehicles
trol of the vehicle could be lost. around the vehicle is clear of people and N00530800190
physical objects. The rocking motion may
cause the vehicle to suddenly launch for-
Moving out of mud ward/backward, causing injury or dam-
Tires and wheels
age to nearby people or objects.
Since driving torque can be applied to all four
Set the drive mode-selector to “4WD LOCK”
wheels, the performance of the vehicle when
and then gradually depress the accelerator
pedal for a smooth start.
NOTE operating in all-wheel drive is greatly
 Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration affected by the condition of the tires.
Keep the pressure on the accelerator pedal as
and sharp turning; such operations could
constant as possible, and drive at low speed. Pay close attention to the tires.
result in the vehicle becoming stuck.
 If the vehicle becomes stuck in muddy roads,
CAUTION it can often be moved with a rocking motion.  Install specified tires on all wheels. Refer
 If any of the following conditions occur, fol- Move the selector lever alternately between to “Tires and wheels” on page 11-5.
low these procedures: “D” (DRIVE) and “R” (REVERSE) posi-  Be sure to fit all four tires and wheels of
tions, while pressing lightly on the accelera- the same size and type.
• The engine coolant temperature display
tor pedal. When replacement of any of the tires or
appears on the information screen in the
wheels is necessary, replace all of them.
multi-information display or the engine
power drops suddenly.  All tires should be rotated whenever the
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4. wear difference between the front and rear
tires is recognizable.

Limited-slip differential (if so equipped)

Good vehicle performance cannot be
expected if there is a difference in wear
Towing Jacking up a all-wheel drive
between tires. Refer to “Tire rotation” on vehicles
page 9-23.
 Check the tire inflation pressure regularly. WARNING

 Do not start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on the jack.
5 CAUTION The jack could slip out of position and
 Always use tires of the same size, same type, result in an accident.
and same brand, and which have no wear dif-
ferences. Using tires that differ in size, type,
brands or the degree of wear, will increase
the differential oil temperature, resulting in Limited-slip differential (if so
possible damage to the driving system. Fur- equipped)
ther, the drive train will be subjected to
N00517400069
excessive loading, possibly leading to oil
leakage, component seizure, or other serious A limited-slip differential is applied for rear
problems. wheel differential. The features of this lim-
CAUTION ited-slip differential are described below:
 Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with the
front or rear wheels on the ground (Type A Just as with a conventional differential, the
or Type B) as illustrated. This could result in wheel on one side is allowed to turn at a dif-
damage to the drivetrain, or unstable towing. ferent speed from the wheel on the other side
If you tow all-wheel drive vehicles, use Type when the vehicle is cornering. The difference
C or Type D equipment. between the limited-slip differential and a
 [For vehicle equipped with the Electronically conventional differential is that if the wheel
controlled 4WD system] on one side of the vehicle loses traction, a
Even in “2WD” mode, the vehicle cannot be
greater amount of torque is applied to the
towed with the front or the rear wheels on
the ground.
wheel on the other side to improve traction.

Service brake
erly, the rest of the brake system will still
NOTE WARNING work, but the vehicle will not slow down as
 Even if there is a difference in the amount of  Do not leave any objects near the brake
quickly.
traction the wheels can get, if both of them pedal or let a floor mat slide under it;
You will know this has happened if you find
are spinning, the limited-slip differential will doing so could prevent the full pedal
not be effective. stroke that would be necessary in an you need to depress the brake pedal down
emergency. Make sure that the pedal can further, or harder when slowing down or stop-
be operated freely at all times. Make sure ping, or if the brake warning light and the
CAUTION warning display in the multi-information dis-
the floor mat is securely held in place.
play come on.
5
 Never start the engine while one of the front
or rear wheels is jacked up and the other in
contact with the ground; doing so may cause CAUTION WARNING
the vehicle to jump forward.  It is important not to drive the vehicle with  Never coast downhill with the engine OFF.
 Continuously attempting to extract the vehi- your foot resting on the brake pedal when Keep the engine running whenever your
cle from snow, mud, etc. while using high braking is not required. This practice can vehicle is in motion. If you turn off the
engine rpm may damage the limited-slip dif- result in very high brake temperatures, pre- engine while driving, the power brake
ferential. mature pad and lining wear, and possible booster will stop working and your brakes
 Using a compact spare wheel will adversely damage to the brakes. will not work as well.
affect the limited-slip differential; replace  If the power assist is lost or if either brake
the compact spare wheel with a standard size hydraulic system stops working properly,
wheel as soon as possible. Power brakes take your vehicle to an authorized Mit-
N00517600377 subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice immediately.
Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes
Service brake for more braking force with minimal brake
N00517500262 pedal effort.
Your brakes are designed to operate at full
Brake pad wear alarm
Brake pedal capacity, even if the power assist is lost.
N00532500087
If the power assist is lost, the effort needed to The disc brakes have an alarm that makes a
press the brake pedal is greater. metallic squeal when the brake pads have
Overuse of the brake can cause poor brake
If you should loose the power assist for some worn down enough to need service. If you
response and premature wear of the brake
reason, the brakes will still work. hear this sound, have the brake pads replaced
pads and linings.
If the power brake unit or either of the two at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
When driving down a long or steep hill, use
brake hydraulic systems stops working prop- a repair facility of your choice.
engine braking by downshifting.

Brake assist system
WARNING NOTE CAUTION

 Driving with worn brake pads will make it  The brake assist system may become opera-  Do not overly rely on the hill start assist to
harder to stop, and can cause an accident. tional when the brake pedal is fully prevent backwards movement of the vehicle.
depressed even if it has not been depressed Under certain circumstances, even when hill
suddenly. start assist is activated, the vehicle may
 When the brake assist system is in use while move backwards if the brake pedal is not suf-
Brake assist system driving, you may feel as if the depressed ficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heavily
5 loaded, or if the road is very steep or slip-
N00567300076
brake pedal is soft, the pedal moves in small
The brake assist system is a device assisting motions in conjunction with the operation pery.
drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal noise, or the vehicle body and the steering  The hill start assist is not designed to keep
firmly such as in emergency stop situations wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake the vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopes
and provides greater braking force. assist system is operating normally and does for more than 2 seconds.
not indicate faulty operation. Continue to  When facing uphill, do not rely on using the
If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the depress the brake pedal. hill start assist to maintain a stopped position
brakes will be applied with more force than  You may hear an operation noise when the as an alternative to depressing the brake
usual. brake pedal is suddenly or fully depressed pedal.
while stationary. This does not indicate a Doing so could cause an accident.
malfunction and the brake assist system is  Do not turn the ignition switch to the
CAUTION operating normally. “LOCK” or “ACC” position while the hill
 The brake assist system is not a device start assist is operating. The hill start assist
designed to exercise braking force greater could stop operating, which could result in
than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a Hill start assist (vehicles an accident.
sufficient distance between vehicles in front with Twin Clutch SST)
of you without relying too much on the brake N00562600032
assist system.
The hill start assist makes it easy to start off To operate
on a steep uphill slope by preventing the N00562700062
vehicle from moving backwards. It keeps the 1. Stop the vehicle completely using the
NOTE brake pedal.
braking force for about 2 seconds when you
 Once the brake assist system is operational, 2. Release the brake pedal and the hill start
it maintains great braking force even if the move your foot from the brake pedal to the
accelerator pedal. assist will maintain the braking force
brake pedal is lightly released.
To stop its operation, completely remove
applied while stopping for approximately
your foot from the brake pedal. 2 seconds.

Anti-lock braking system

3. Depress the accelerator pedal and the hill Warning display
start assist gradually will decrease the
Driving hints
braking force as the vehicle starts moving.  When using the anti-lock brakes (sudden
braking), steering is slightly different
NOTE from normal driving conditions. Use the
 The hill start assist is activated when all of steering wheel carefully.
the following conditions are met.
 Always keep a safe distance from the
• The engine is running. CAUTION vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehi- 5
(The hill start assist will not be activated  If the warning is displayed, the hill start cle is equipped with the anti-lock braking
while the engine is starting or immediately assist will not operate. Start off carefully.
after the engine is started.) system, leave a greater braking distance
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the when:
• The gearshift lever is in any position other engine. Restart the engine and check whether
than “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL). • Driving on gravel or snow-covered
the display/indicator goes out, in which case
• The vehicle is completely stationary, with roads.
the hill start assist is again working normally.
the brake pedal depressed. If they remain displayed or reappear fre-
• Driving on uneven road surfaces.
• The parking brake is released. quently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle  Operation of anti-lock braking system is
 The hill start assist will not operate if the immediately, but the vehicle should be not restricted to situations where brakes
accelerator pedal is depressed before the inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi are applied suddenly. This system may
brake pedal is released. Motors dealer or a repair facility of your also prevent the wheels from locking
 The hill start assist also operates when choice as soon as possible. when you drive over manholes, steel
reversing on an uphill slope. roadwork plates, road markings, or any
uneven road surface.
Anti-lock braking system  When the anti-lock braking system is in
Warning display N00517900309
use, you may feel the brake pedal vibrat-
N00562800063 ing and hear a unique sound. You may
The anti-lock braking system helps prevent
If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys- also feel as if the pedal resists being
the wheels from locking up when braking.
tem, the following display/indicator will turn pressed.
This helps you keep control of your vehicle
on. In this situation, simply hold the brake
and its direction.
pedal down firmly. Do not pump the
brake, which will result in reduced
- ASC indicator braking performance.

CAUTION Anti-lock braking system warn- CAUTION

 The anti-lock braking system cannot prevent ing light / display  Any of the following warning light/display
accidents. It is your responsibility to take N00531600573
behavior indicates that the anti-lock braking
safety precautions and to drive carefully. system is not functioning and only the stan-
Warning light
 To prevent failure of the anti-lock braking dard brake system is working. (The standard
system, be sure all four wheels and tires are brake system will still work properly.) If this
the same size and the same type. happens, take your vehicle to an authorized
5  Never install a limited slip differential as the
ABS may not function normally.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice as soon as possible.
Warning display type 1 • When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer. position, the warning light does not come
on or it remains on and does not go off
• The warning light comes on while driving
NOTE • The warning display appears while driving
 After your vehicle is driven a short distance
after starting the engine, you will hear the Warning display type 2
sound coming from the engine compartment. If the warning light / display
These are the normal sounds the anti-lock
braking system makes when performing a
comes on while driving
N00531700503
self-check. It does not indicate a malfunc-
tion.
 The anti-lock braking system can be used If only the anti-lock braking sys-
after the vehicle has reached a speed over
If there is a malfunction in the system, the tem warning light / display comes
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stops
working when the vehicle slows below
anti-lock braking system warning light will on
approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). come on and the warning display will appear
on the information screen in the multi-infor-  Avoid hard braking and high-speed driv-
mation display. ing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Under normal conditions, the anti-lock brak- Test the system by restarting the engine
ing system warning light only comes on when and driving at a speed of about 12 mph
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” (20 km/h) or higher.
position and goes off a few seconds later. If the warning light / display then remain
off during driving, there is no problem.


However, if the warning light / display do Warning display type 2 anti-lock braking system, be careful not to
not disappear, or if they come on again damage the wheel speed sensors (A) or the
when the vehicle is driven, have the vehi- cables located at each wheel.
cle checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or repair facility of your
Front
choice as soon as possible.
If the anti-lock braking system 5

warning light / display and brake
warning light / display come on at
the same time
The anti-lock braking system and brake force
Warning light distribution function may not work, so hard
braking could make the vehicle unstable.
Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an Rear
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or repair
Warning display type 1 facility of your choice.
NOTE
 The anti-lock braking system warning light
and brake warning light illuminate at the
same time and the warning displays appear
alternately on the information screen in the
multi-information display.
After driving on icy roads

N00529200022
After driving on snow or icy roads, remove

any snow and ice which may have been left
around the wheels. On vehicles that have an
Active Stability Control (ASC) (if so equipped)

provides sufficient driving force and steering
Active Stability Control CAUTION performance as the vehicle turns while press-
(ASC) (if so equipped)  Do not install any aftermarket limited slip
differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC
ing the acceleration pedal.
N00559100118
may stop functioning properly.
The Active Stability Control (ASC) takes
CAUTION
 When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy
overall control of the anti-lock braking sys-
tem, traction control function and skid control
NOTE road, be sure to install snow tires and drive
5 function to help maintain the vehicle’s control  An operation noise may be emitted from the the vehicle at moderate speeds.
engine compartment in the following situa-
and traction. Please read this section in con-
tions. The sound is associated with checking
junction with the page on the anti-lock brak-
ing system, traction control function and skid
the operations of the ASC. At this time, you Skid control function
may feel a shock from the brake pedal if you N00559300035
control function. depress it. These do not indicate a malfunc-
tion. The skid control function is designed to help
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)  P.5-91 • When the ignition switch is set to the “ON” the driver maintain control of the vehicle on
Traction control function  P.5-94 position. slippery roads or during rapid steering
Skid control function  P.5-94 • When the vehicle is driven for a while after maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine
the engine is turned on. output and the brake on each wheel.
CAUTION  When the ASC is activated, you may feel a
vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin-
 Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC
ing sound from the engine compartment.
NOTE
cannot prevent the natural laws of physics  The skid control function operates at speeds
from acting on the vehicle. This system, like This indicates that the system is operating
of about 9 mph (15 km/h) or higher.
any other system, has limits and cannot help normally. It does not indicate a malfunction.
you to maintain traction and control of the  When the anti-lock braking system warning
vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driv- light is illuminated, the ASC is not active.
ing can lead to accidents. It is the driver’s “ASC OFF” switch
responsibility to drive carefully, This means N00559400179
taking into account the traffic, road and envi- Traction control function The ASC is automatically activated when the
ronmental conditions. N00559200034 ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
 Be sure to use the same specified type and tion. You can deactivate the system by press-
size of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, the
On slippery surfaces, the traction control
function prevents the drive wheels from spin- ing down the “ASC OFF” switch for 3
ASC may not work properly.
ning excessive, thus helping the vehicle to seconds or longer.
start moving from a stopped condition. It also

Active Stability Control (ASC) (if so equipped)

When the ASC is deactivated, the dis- NOTE CAUTION
play/indicator will turn on. To reactivate the  When moving out of mud, sand or fresh  When display/indicator blinks, ASC is
ASC, momentarily press the “ASC OFF” snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not
operating, which means that the road is slip-
switch ; the display/indicator is turned off. allow the engine speed to increase. In such
pery or that your vehicle’s wheels are begin-
situations, temporarily turning off ASC with
ning to slip. If this happens, drive slower.
the “ASC OFF” switch will make it easier to
 If the temperature in the braking system con-
move out your vehicle.
tinues to increase due to continuous brake
 If you continue to press the “ASC OFF”
switch after the ASC is turned off, the “mis- control on a slippery road surface, the 5
taken operation protection function” will display/indicator will blink. To prevent the
activate and the ASC will turn back on. brake system from overheating, the brake
control of the traction control function will
be temporarily suspended. The engine con-
ASC operation display or ASC trol of the traction control function and nor-
OFF display mal brake operation will not be affected.
N00559500183 Park your vehicle in a safe place. When the
temperature in the braking system has come
ASC operation display/ASC indicator
- down, the display/indicator will be
CAUTION The display/indicator will blink when
turned off and the traction control function
 For safety reasons, the “ASC OFF” switch the ASC is operating.
will start operating again.
should be operated when your vehicle is ASC OFF display/ASC OFF indicator
-
stopped. This display/incicator will turn on
 Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in when the ASC is turned off with the
“ASC OFF” switch.
NOTE
normal circumstances.
 The display/indicator may come on when
you start the engine. This means that the bat-
NOTE NOTE tery voltage momentarily dropped when the
engine was started. It does not indicate a
 Using the “ASC OFF” switch turns off both  The combination of items shown on the dis-
malfunction, provided that the display goes
the skid control function and the traction play varies depending on the vehicle model.
out immediately.
control function.
 When a spare tire has been put on your vehi-
cle, the gripping ability of the tire will be
lower, making it more likely that the dis-
play/indicator will blink.

Power steering system
ASC warning display CAUTION Power steering system

N00559500196  The system may be malfunctioning. N00518000310
If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys- Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
The power steering system operates while the
engine.
tem, the following display/indicator will turn engine is running. It helps reduce the effort
Restart the engine and check whether the dis-
on. needed to turn the steering wheel.
play/indicator goes out. If they go out, there
is no abnormal condition. If they do not go The power steering system has mechanical
- ASC indicator steering capability in case the power assist is
5 out or if they turn on frequently, it is not nec-
essary to stop the vehicle immediately, but lost. If the power assist is lost for some rea-
- ASC OFF display/ASC OFF indicator you should have your vehicle inspected by son, you will still be able to steer your vehi-
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a cle, but you will notice it takes much more
repair facility of your choice as soon as pos- effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehi-
sible. cle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice.
Towing
N00546300015
WARNING
CAUTION  Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is
Warning display type 2 moving. Stopping the engine would make
 When towing the vehicle with only the front
the steering wheel extremely hard to turn,
wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the
possibly resulting in an accident.
ground, do not place the ignition switch in
the “ON” position. Placing the ignition
switch in the “ON” position could cause the
ASC to operate, resulting in an accident. Hydraulic power steering sys-
Note that the correct towing method depends
on the transmission type and the vehicle’s
tem (HPS) (if so equipped)
NOTE drive configuration. N00547100052
 The combination of items shown on the dis- For details, refer to “Towing” on page 8-12.
play varies depending on the vehicle model. CAUTION
 Do not leave the steering wheel turned all the
way in one direction. This can cause damage
to the power steering system.

Cruise control (if so equipped)

Type 2
Electric power steering system CAUTION
(EPS) (if so equipped)  For safety reasons, the cruise control system
should be set to the “OFF” position by press-
N00547200053
ing the “ON OFF” switch (A) when you are
not using the cruise control system.
NOTE  Do not use cruise control when driving con-
 During repeated full-lock turning of the ditions will not allow you to stay at the same
If there is a malfunction in the system, the
steering wheel (for example, while you are
manoeuvring the vehicle into a parking
warning display will appear on the informa-
speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snowy, wet, slippery or
5
space), a protection function may be acti- tion screen in the multi-information display. on a steep downhill slope.
vated to prevent overheating of the power  On vehicles with manual transaxle, do not
steering system. This function will make the CAUTION move the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral)
steering wheel gradually harder to turn. In position while driving at a set speed without
 If the warning display appears while the
this event, limit your turning of the steering depressing the clutch pedal. The engine will
engine is running, have the vehicle inspected
wheel for a while. When the system has run too fast and might be damaged.
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
cooled down, the steering effort will return
a repair facility of your choice as soon as
to normal.
possible. It may become harder to turn the
 If you turn the steering wheel while the vehi- steering wheel. NOTE
cle is stationary with the headlights on, the
 Cruise control may not be able to keep your
headlights may become dim. This behavior
speed on uphills or downhills.
is not abnormal. The headlights will return to
their original brightness after a short while. Cruise control (if so equipped)  Your speed may drop on a steep uphill. You
may have to use the accelerator pedal if you
N00518300528
want to stay at your set speed.
Cruise control is an automatic speed control  Your speed may increase to more than the set
Electronic power steering system speed on a steep downhill. You must use the
system. It lets you keep the same driving
warning display speed. Cruise control can be activated at brake to control your speed.
about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. It is espe-
Type 1 cially useful for freeway driving. Cruise con-
trol does not work at speeds below about 25
mph (40 km/h).

Cruise control switches D- “CANCEL” switch To activate

N00518400343
To terminate constant-speed driving. 1. Lightly press the “ON OFF” switch (A).
Type 1
NOTE Type 1
 When operating the cruise control switches,
correctly press each cruise control switch.
5 The cruise control may be turned off auto-
matically if two or more of the cruise control
switches are pressed at the same time.
Type 2
Type 2
Cruise control indicator

N00550100245
This indicator will come on when the cruise

control “ON OFF” switch (A) is pressed to
turn on the cruise control system.
A- “ON OFF” switch
NOTE
To activate and deactivate the cruise control  If the cruise control is on when the ignition
function. switch is turned to “OFF” position, cruise
control will turn on automatically and the
B- “COAST SET” switch “CRUISE” control indicator will illuminate
the next time you start the engine.
To reduce the set speed and to set the speed of  If the battery voltage is insufficient, the
constant-speed driving. memory data for the cruise control will be
erased. As a result, the “CRUISE” control
indicator may not come on when you restart
C- “ACC RES” switch
the engine. If this happens, press the “ON
OFF” switch once again to activate the cruise
To increase the set speed and to resume to the
control.
previous set speed.


2. Confirm that the Twin Clutch SST control To increase the speed in small amounts, press
mode is set to “Normal” (on vehicles with
NOTE the “ACC RES” switch (C) for less than 1
 The speed when you released the “COAST
Twin Clutch SST). second and release it. Every time you press
SET” switch will be set as the cruising
Refer to “Twin Clutch SST control mode” the “ACC RES” switch (C), the speed will
speed.
on page 5-74. increase by approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
NOTE Accelerator pedal

To increase the set speed
 The cruising speed cannot be set when the
Twin Clutch SST control mode is set to N00518500331 5
“Sport” mode. There are 2 ways to increase the set speed. Use the accelerator pedal to reach your
desired speed. Press the “COAST SET”
switch (B) and release the switch momen-
3. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired “ACC RES” switch tarily to set a new desired cruising speed.
speed, then press and release the “COAST
SET” switch (B) when the “CRUISE” If you press and hold down the “ACC RES”
indicator light is illuminated. The vehicle switch (C), the speed will gradually increase. Type 1
will then maintain the desired speed. When you reach your desired speed, release
Type 1 the switch. Your cruising speed is now set.
Type 1
Type 2
Type 2
Type 2
To decrease the set speed

N00518600260
There are 2 ways to reduce the set speed.


reached, press the “COAST SET” switch (B)
“COAST SET” switch
and release the switch momentarily to set a
Press and hold the “COAST SET” switch (B), new desired cruise speed.
the speed will slow down (coast) gradually.
When you reach your desired speed, release Type 1
the “COAST SET” switch. Your cruising
speed is now set.
5
Type 1
Type 2
To temporarily decrease the speed
Apply the brakes to decrease the speed. To

Type 2
return to the previously set speed, press the
“ACC RES” switch (C). Refer to “To resume
the set speed” on page 5-102.
To temporarily increase or
decrease the speed
N00518700128
To decrease the speed in small amounts, press
the “COAST SET” switch (B) for less than 1
second and release it. Every time you press To temporarily increase the speed
the “COAST SET” switch (B), the speed will
decrease by approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Press the accelerator pedal as you would nor-
mally. When you release the pedal, you will
return to your set speed.
Brake pedal
Press the brake pedal (which disengages the
cruise control) and when the desired speed is


Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)”
Type 1 Type 1
on page 5-94.
WARNING
 On vehicles with continuously variable
although the cruise control will be disen-
Type 2 Type 2 gaged when shifting to the “N” (NEU-
TRAL) position, never move the selector
5
lever (CVT) or the gearshift lever (Twin
Clutch SST) to the “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
tion while driving.
You would have no engine braking and
this could cause a serious accident.
The cruise control will be turned off automat- Also, the set speed driving may be deacti-
ically in the following conditions: vated as follow:
To deactivate
N00518800493
 When you depress the clutch pedal (on  When the engine speed rises and
The cruise control can be turned off as fol- vehicles with manual transaxle). approaches the tachometer’s red zone (the
lows:  Your speed slows to about 10 mph (15 red-colored part of the tachometer dial).
km/h) or more below the set speed
 Press the “ON OFF” switch (A). (Cruise because of an uphill, etc.
control will be turned off.)  Your speed slows to about 25 mph (40 CAUTION
 Press the “CANCEL” switch (D). km/h) or less.  When the set speed driving is deactivated
 Depress the brake pedal or lightly tap it. automatically in any situation other than
 When the Twin Clutch SST control mode
those listed above, there may be a system
is set to “Sport” mode (on vehicles with
malfunction.
Twin Clutch SST). Press the “ON OFF” switch to turn off the
Refer to “Twin Clutch SST control mode” cruise control and have your vehicle
on page 5-74. inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
 When the active stability control (ASC) Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
starts operating (if so equipped). choice.

Tire pressure monitoring system
To resume the set speed Tire pressure monitoring NOTE

N00518900263
system  The tire pressure monitoring system is not a
substitute for regularly checking tire infla-
If the cruise control is deactivated by any of N00530201494
tion pressures.
the conditions described in “To deactivate”
The tire pressure monitoring system uses tire Be sure to check the tire inflation pressures
on page 5-101, you can return to the previ-
inflation pressure sensors (A) on the wheels as described in “Tires” on page 9-17.
ously set speed by pressing the “ACC RES”
to monitor the tire inflation pressures. The  The tire inflation pressure sensor (A) is
switch (C) while driving at a speed of approx-
5 imately 25 mph (40 km/h) or greater.
system only indicates when a tire is signifi- installed in the illustrated location.
• On vehicles with Type 1 sensor which has
cantly under-inflated.
the metallic air valve (B), replace grommet
Type 1 (C) with a new one when the tire is
replaced.
• On vehicles with Type 2 sensor which has
the rubber air valve (D), replace rubber
valve (D) with new one when the tire is
replaced.
For details, please contact your authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Type 2
Type 1
WARNING
 The spare wheel does not have a tire infla-
tion pressure sensor.
However, you must repeat the speed setting When the spare tire is used, the tire pres-
procedure under either of the following con- sure monitoring system will not work
ditions: properly.
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
 The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” dealer as soon as possible to replace or
position. repair the original tire.
 The cruise control is turned OFF.
 “CRUISE” indicator light is turned off.

SC00000600-3.fm 103 ページ２０１４年４月１６日　水曜日　午前９時３８分
NOTE NOTE CAUTION

 In addition, the warning display is displayed  If a malfunction is detected in the tire pres-
Type 2 on the information screen in the multi-infor- sure monitoring system, the tire pressure
mation display. monitoring system warning light will blink
Type 1 for approximately 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. The warning light
will issue further warnings each time the
engine is restarted as long as the malfunction
exists.
5
Check to see whether the warning light goes
off after few minutes driving.
Type 2
If it then goes off during driving, there is no
Tire pressure monitoring sys- problem.
tem warning light/display However, if the warning light does not go
N00532700122 off, or if it blinks again when the engine is
restarted, have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
system may be preventing the monitoring of
CAUTION the tire pressure. For safety reasons, when
When the ignition switch is turned to the the warning light appears while driving,
 If the tire pressure monitoring system warn-
“ON” position, the tire pressure monitoring ing light does not illuminate when the igni- avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and
system warning light normally illuminates tion switch is turned to the “ON” position, it high-speed driving.
and goes off a few seconds later. means that the tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem is not working properly. Have the sys-
If one or more of the vehicle tires (except for tem inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi NOTE
the spare tire) is significantly under-inflated, Motors dealer.  In addition, the warning display is displayed
the warning light will remain illuminated In such situations, a malfunctioning of the on the information screen in the multi-infor-
while the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi- system may be preventing the monitoring of mation display.
tion. the tire pressure. Avoid sudden braking,
Refer to “If the warning light/display illumi- sharp turning and high-speed driving.
nates while driving” on page 5-104 and take
the necessary measures.

SC00000600-3.fm 104 ページ２０１４年４月１６日　水曜日　午前９時３８分

nificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
NOTE overheat and can lead to tire failure. allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-
Type 1 erly.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-
cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
If the warning light/display illu-
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s minates while driving
responsibility to maintain correct tire pres- N00532800439
5 Type 2
sure, even if under-inflation has not reached 1. If the tire pressure monitoring system
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS warning light illuminates, avoid hard
low tire pressure telltale. braking, sharp steering maneuvers and
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a high speeds. You should stop and adjust
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the tires to the proper inflation pressure as
the system is not operating properly. The soon as possible. Adjust the spare tire at
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), TPMS malfunction indicator is combined the same time. Refer to “Tires” on page
should be checked monthly when cold and with the low tire pressure telltale. 9-17.
inflated to the inflation pressure recom- When the system detects a malfunction, the
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the telltale will flash for approximately one min- NOTE
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. ute and then remain continuously illuminated.  In addition, the warning display is displayed
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size This sequence will continue upon subsequent on the information screen in the multi-infor-
than the size indicated on the vehicle placard mation display.
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
or tire inflation pressure label, you should  When inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
exists.
determine the proper tire inflation pressure sure, do not apply excessive force to the
When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
for those tires.) valve stem to avoid breakage.
nated, the system may not be able to detect or
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has  After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
signal low tire pressure as intended. sure, always reinstall the valve cap on the
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety valve stem.
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire of reasons, including the installation of Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could
pressure telltale when one or more of your replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the get into the valve, resulting in damage to the
tires is significantly under-inflated. vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function- tire inflation pressure sensor.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure tell- ing properly. Always check the TPMS mal-  Do not use metal valve caps, which may
tale illuminates, you should stop and check function telltale after replacing one or more cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that and damage of the tire inflation pressure sen-
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a sig- sors.


 A window tint that affects the radio wave
NOTE NOTE signals is installed.
 Once adjustments have been made, the warn-  To avoid the risk of damage to the tire infla-
ing light will go off after a few minutes of tion pressure sensors, have any punctured
driving. tire repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi NOTE
Motors dealer. If the tire repair is not done by  Tire inflation pressures vary with the ambi-
2. If the tire pressure monitoring system an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is ent temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to
warning light remains illuminated after not covered by your warranty. large variations in ambient temperature, the
you have been driving for about 20 min-
utes after you adjust the tire inflation pres-
 Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair prod-
uct on any tire. Such a spray could damage
tire inflation pressures may be under-inflated
(causing the warning light/display to come
5
sure, one or more of the tires may have a the tire inflation pressure sensors. Have any on) when the ambient temperature is rela-
puncture. Inspect the tire and if it has a puncture repaired by an authorized Mitsubi- tively low. If the warning light/display
shi Motors dealer. comes on, adjust the tire inflation pressure.
puncture, have it repaired by an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as
possible. The tire pressure monitoring system may not
work normally in the following circum- Whenever the tires and wheels
WARNING stances: are replaced with new ones
N00532900179
 If the warning light/display illuminates  A wireless facility or device using the
while you are driving, avoid hard braking, If new wheels with new tire inflation pressure
same frequency is near the vehicle.
sharp steering maneuvers and high sensors are installed, their ID codes must be
speeds. Driving with an under-inflated tire
 Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders
programmed into the tire pressure monitoring
adversely affects vehicle performance and and/or on the wheels.
system. Have tire and wheel replacement per-
can result in an accident.  The tire inflation pressure sensor’s battery
formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
is dead.
dealer to avoid the risk of damaging the tire
 Wheels other than Mitsubishi genuine
inflation pressure sensors. If the wheel
CAUTION wheels are being used.
replacement is not done by an authorized
 If a tire has a puncture, replace that tire with  Wheels that are not fitted with tire infla-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is not covered by
the spare tire. Driving on a punctured tire tion pressure sensors are being used.
your warranty.
could lead to an accident.  Wheels whose ID codes are not memo-
 The warning light/display may not illuminate rized by the vehicle are used.
immediately in the event of a tire blowout or  Compact spare tire is fitted on a road
rapid leak. wheel.

Rear-view camera (if so equipped)
CAUTION Rear-view camera (if so Location of rear-view camera

 The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent
equipped)
the proper fit of the tire inflation pressure The rear-view camera (A) is built-in to the
N00546201154
sensors, resulting in air leakage or damage to
trunk lid.
the sensors.
When the gearshift lever or the selector lever
is in the “R” (REVERSE) position with the
ignition switch in the “ON” position, the rear-
5 General information view image will be displayed on the screen of
N00533001259
the Mitsubishi Multi-Communication Sys-
Your tire pressure monitoring system oper- tem or the DISPLAY AUDIO in the center
ates on a radio frequency subject to Federal panel.
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules When the gearshift lever or the selector lever
(For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry is shifted out of the “R” (REVERSE) posi-
Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). tion, the rear-view image will go off. A
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC
Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt WARNING
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two con-
 Never rely solely on the rear-view camera CAUTION
to clear the area behind your vehicle.  If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image
ditions. Always check visually behind and all cannot be obtained. As necessary, rinse the
around your vehicle for persons, animals, lens with clean water and gently wipe with a
 This device may not cause harmful inter- obstructions or other vehicles. Failure to clean, soft cloth.
ference. do so can result in vehicle damage, serious
 To avoid damaging the camera;
 This device must accept any interference injury or death.
• Do not rub the cover excessively or polish
received, including interference that may  The rear-view camera is an aid system for
it by using an abrasive compound.
cause undesired operation. backing up, but it is not a substitute for
• Do not disassemble the camera.
your visual confirmation.
• Do not splash hot water directly on the lens.
 The view on the screen is limited, and
CAUTION objects outside the view, such as under the • Do not spray the camera and its surround-
 Changes or modifications not expressly bumper or around either corner of the ings with high-pressure water.
approved by the manufacturer for compli- bumper end, cannot be seen on the screen. • Make sure that the trunk lid is securely
ance could void the user’s authority to oper- closed when backing up.
ate the equipment.

Rear-view camera (if so equipped)
Reference lines on the screen CAUTION Case 2

 The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle
Reference lines and upper surface of the rear lens. As a result, images and distances shown
on the screen are not exact.
bumper (A) are displayed on the screen.
 Actual distance may be different from dis-
 Red line (B) indicates approximately 20 tance indicated by the lines on the screen,
inches (50 cm) behind the rear bumper. depending on the loading condition of the
 Two Green lines (C) indicate approxi-
vehicle and road surface condition.
The reference lines for distance and vehicle A- Actual objects 5
mately 8 inches (20 cm) outside of the width are based on a level, flat road surface. B- Objects shown on the screen
vehicle body. In the following cases, objects shown on the
 Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate dis- screen will appear to be farther off than they
tance from the rear bumper. actually are. CAUTION
• When the rear of the vehicle is weighed  The reference lines for distance and vehicle
down with the weight of passengers and width are intended to indicate the distance to
luggage in the vehicle. (Case 1) a flat object such as a level, flat road surface.
• When there is an upward slope at the back. They may not indicate correct distance
(Case 2) depending on the shape of an obstacle.
For example, when there is an object behind
the vehicle that has upper sections projecting
Case 1 in the direction of the vehicle, the reference
lines on the screen will indicate that point A
is the farthest point and point B is the closest
point to the vehicle. In reality, point A and B
are actually the same distance from the vehi-
1: Approximately at the rear edge of the cle, and point C is farther off than point A
and B.
rear bumper
2: Approximately 39 inches (100 cm)
A- Actual objects
3: Approximately 79 inches (200 cm) B- Objects shown on the screen

Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster Type 1

N00519000333
NOTE Type 2
 Monitor brightness is adjusted automatically
1- Tachometer P.5-108
by sensors.
2- Multi-information display P.5-110
 On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi-
Communication System, it is possible to
Information screen display list
change the display language of the screen. P.5-132
For details, please refer to the separate 3- Speedometer P.5-108
owner’s manual. 4- Rheostat meter illumination button
 Under certain circumstances, it may become P.5-109
difficult to see an image on the screen, even
when the system is functioning correctly.
• In a dark area, such as at night. Speedometer
• When water drops or condensation are on
the lens.
N00519100190
Tachometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in
• When sun light or headlights shine directly N00519200276
into the lens.

miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour
The tachometer shows engine revolutions per
(km/h).
minute. This allows the driver to determine
the most efficient shift position (manual
transaxle), selector position {continuously
variable transmission (CVT)} or shift posi-

Instrument cluster
tion (Twin Clutch SST) and engine speed 2- Rheostat illumination button
combinations.
NOTE
 You can adjust to 8 different levels respec-
This gauge also assists in evaluating engine
tively for when the tail lights are illuminated
performance.
and when they are not.
 If the vehicle is equipped with the automatic
light control, when the light switch is in a
position other than the “OFF” position, the
meter illumination switches automatically to
the adjusted brightness, depending on the
5
brightness outside the vehicle.
 The brightness level of the instruments is
stored in memory when the ignition switch is
turned off.
 If you press and hold the button for longer
than about 1 second when the parking lights
are illuminated, the brightness level changes
to the maximum level. Pressing and holding
CAUTION the button for longer than about 1 second
 The red zone indicates an engine speed again returns the brightness level to the pre-
beyond the range of safe operation. vious level.
 Select the correct shift position (manual
transaxle), selector position (CVT) or gear-
shift position (Twin Clutch SST) to control
the engine speed so that the tachometer indi-
cator does not enter the red zone.
Rheostat meter illumination

button
N00554900137
Each time you press this button, there is a

sound and the brightness of the instruments 1- Brightness display
changes.
Multi-information display
N00555001305
The multi-information display displays warnings, the odometer, trip odometer, service reminder, engine coolant temperature, fuel remaining, out-
side temperature, Twin Clutch SST control mode, ACD control mode, gearshift lever position, selector lever position, all-wheel drive operation
status, average and momentary fuel consumption, driving range, average speed, instrument brightness, etc.
It is also possible to change elements such as the language and units used on the multi-information display.
5
With ignition switch is “OFF” With ignition switch is “ON” position {Continuously With ignition switch is “ON” position
position variable transmission (CVT), Twin Clutch SST} (Manual transaxle)
Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2
1- 3- Door ajar warning display screen (With 6- Information screen (With ignition
Warning display screen (With igni-
ignition switch in the “OFF” position) switch in the “ON” position) P.5-116
tion switch in the “OFF” position)
P.5-114 Interrupt display screen (With ignition
P.5-111
4- Warning display screen (With igni- switch in the “ON” position) P.5-119
2- Information screen (With ignition
tion switch in the “ON” position) 7- Outside temperature display screen
switch in the “OFF” position) P.5-112
P.5-116 P.5-120
Interrupt display screen (With ignition
5- Active stability control (ASC) OFF dis- 8- Fuel remaining display screen P.
switch in the “OFF” position) P.5-113
play screen (if so equipped) P.5-116 5-121

9- Engine coolant temperature display (if It is also possible to change elements such as
so equipped) P.5-116
NOTE the language and units used on the multi-
 The display screen is different depending on
10- Twin Clutch SST control mode display information display by operating the multi-
whether the ignition switch in the “OFF” or
screen (Twin Clutch SST) P.5-76 “ON” position.
information meter switch.
11- Selector lever position display screen Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
(CVT) P.5-64 switch in the “OFF” position)” on page
Gearshift lever position display screen 5-112.
(Twin Clutch SST) P.5-71
12- Drive mode indicator display screen
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition
switch in the “OFF” position)” on page
5
(CVT) (if so equipped) 5-132.
 P.5-115 Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
switch turned from “OFF” to “ON” posi-
ACD control mode display screen
tion)” on page 5-115.
(Twin Clutch SST) P.5-82
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
13- ECO mode indicator (if so equipped) switch in the “ON” position)” on page 5-116.
P.5-121 Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition
14- Gearshift indicator display screen (if so switch in the “ON” position)” on page 5-135.
equipped) P.5-60
Multi-information meter switch Warning display screen
NOTE N00555100136 (With ignition switch in the
 The fuel units, temperature units, display
language, and other settings can be changed. The multi-information meter switch is a but- “OFF” position)
Refer to “Changing the function settings ton marked “INFO” on the left side of the N00555200137
(With ignition switch in the “ON” position)” dash. If you press the multi-information meter
on page 5-123. Each time the multi-information meter switch switch and return from the warning display
is operated, a sound is emitted and the multi-
information display changes between infor- screen to the previous screen, the warning
mation such as warnings, odometer, trip is displayed.
odometer, service reminder, engine coolant Refer to “Returning to the display screen
temperature (Type 1), average and momen- from before the warning display” on page
tary fuel consumption, driving range, and 5-113.
average speed and ACD control mode display This mark is also displayed if there is another
(if so equipped). warning other than the one displayed. When

the cause of the warning display is elimi-
Type 1 Odometer/Trip odometer
nated, the warning goes out automatically. N00555400100
Each time you lightly press the multi-infor-

When there is no
NOTE warning display
mation meter switch, the display screen
 When the warning is displayed, the warn-
changes as follows:
ing display screen can be redisplayed on the
information screen. When there is a Odometer/Trip odometer  Odome-
5 Refer to “Information screen (With ignition warning display ter/Trip odometer  Service reminder
switch in the “OFF” position)” on page  Redisplay of a warning display screen 
5-112. Odometer/Trip odometer .
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition Type 2
switch in the “ON” position)” on page 5-116. Odometer
When there is no Shows the total distance traveled.
warning display
Information screen (With igni-
tion switch in the “OFF” posi- Trip odometer
When there is a
tion) warning display Shows the distance traveled between two
N00555300112 points.
Each time you lightly press the multi-infor-
mation meter switch, the display screen Usage examples for trip odometer , trip
changes in the following order. 1- Odometer (Type 1), Trip odometer odometer :
2- Odometer (Type 1), Trip odometer
3- Service reminder
4- Redisplay of a warning display screen

It is possible to measure two currently
traveled distances, from home using trip
NOTE
 Both trip odometers and can count
odometer and from a particular point Type 1 up to 9999.9 miles/kilometers.
on the way using trip odometer . When a trip odometer goes past 9999.9
To reset the trip odometer: miles/kilometers, it returns to 0.0 miles/kilo-
To return the display to 0, hold down the meters.
multi-information meter switch for about  When the battery is disconnected, the memo-
2 seconds or more. Only the currently dis- ries of trip odometer displays and 5
played value will be reset. are cleared, and their displays return to “0.0
Example: miles/kilometers”.
Type 2
If trip odometer is displayed, only trip
odometer will be reset. Service reminder
N00555500039
Shows the distance and number of months

until the next periodic inspection.
Refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-121.
Interrupt display screen (With

ignition switch in the “OFF”
position)
N00559600155
NOTE
When there is information to be announced,
 If there is no warning display, the switching
such as a key reminder, the buzzer sounds and
sequence is: Odometer/Trip odometer
switches to the warning display screen. Refer
 Odometer/Trip odometer  service to the appropriate page and take the necessary
reminder Odometer/Trip odometer . measures.
When the cause of the warning display is
eliminated, the warning display goes out
automatically.

Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
Type 1
switch in the “OFF” position)” on page switch in the “OFF” position)” on page
5-132. 5-112.
Type 1
Door ajar warning display
(With ignition switch in the
Type 2 “OFF” position)
5 N00559700130
Type 2 If any of the doors or the trunk lid is not com-

pletely closed, the open door or open trunk lid
warning is displayed.
Type 1
1- Information generated
2- Cause eliminated NOTE
 Warning display screens with a “ ” or
Returning to the display screen “ ” mark displayed in the upper right of the Type 2
screen can be switched. If you want to switch
from before the warning display
the display, press the multi-information
meter switch as follows.
Even if the cause of the warning display is
“ ” : Press lightly.
not eliminated, you can return to the screen
that was displayed before the warning dis- “ ” : Press for about 2 seconds or more. 1- Doors and trunk lid are closed
play. 2- Doors or trunk lid is open (driver’s door
If you press the multi-information meter Redisplay of a warning display screen is open in this example)
switch, the display screen switches to the
screen display from before the warning and When the warning is displayed, if you
the warning (A) is displayed. lightly press the multi-information meter
switch a few times, the warning display
screen you switched from is redisplayed.

Information screen (With igni- System check screen Service reminder

tion switch turned from “OFF”
When the ignition switch is turned to the When the time for periodic inspection arrives,
to “ON” position)
“ON” position, the system check screen is the warning display is displayed for a few
N00555800133
displayed for about 4 seconds. If there is no seconds after the screen that is initially dis-
When the ignition switch is turned to the fault, information screen (when the ignition played when the ignition switch is turned
“ON” position, the display screen changes in switch is “ON”) is displayed. “ON”. Refer to “Service reminder” on page
the following order. If there is a fault, the screen changes to warn- 5-121. 5
ing display. Refer to “Warning display list Type 1
Type 1 (when the ignition switch is “ON” position)”
on page 5-135.
Type 1 Type 2
Type 2
Type 2
Drive mode indicator display

1- Screen when the ignition switch is
“OFF” NOTE screen (if so equipped)
N00555900046
2- System check screen  The system check screen display varies
3- Screen when the ignition switch is depending on your equipment. Shows the 4WD drive status.
“ON” Refer to “Drive mode-selector” on page 5-84.

ACD control mode display “Active stability control (ASC) Type 1

screen (if so equipped) OFF” display screen (if so
N00545900027 equipped)
N00556100074 When there is no warning display
The operation status of the ACD control
mode is displayed. This is displayed when the Active stability
Refer to “ACD control mode” on page 5-82. control (ASC) is turned “OFF” with the
5 “ASC OFF” switch.
Warning display screen Also, if an abnormal condition is occurred in When there is a
the ASC while driving, the “ASC OFF” dis-
(With ignition switch in the play illuminates. Type 2
warning display
“ON” position) Refer to “ASC OFF switch” on page 5-94.

N00555200140
This is displayed when you press the multi- When there is no warning display
Information screen (With igni-
information meter switch and switch the
warning display screen. tion switch in the “ON” posi-
This mark is also displayed if there is another tion)
warning other than the one displayed. N00556200176
When there is a
When the cause of the warning display is Each time you lightly press the multi-infor- warning display
eliminated, the warning goes out automat- mation meter switch, the display screen
ically. changes in the following order. 1- Odometer (Type 1)/Trip odometer
2- Odometer (Type 1)/Trip odometer
NOTE 3- Service reminder
 When the warning is displayed, the warn- 4- Engine coolant temperature display
ing display screen can be redisplayed on the (Type 1)
information screen. 5- Driving range display (Type 1)
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition 6- Average speed display, average fuel
switch in the “OFF” position)” on page consumption display, momentary fuel
5-112 or “Information screen (With ignition consumption display (Type 1)
switch in the “ON” position)” on page 5-116. 7- Driving range display, momentary fuel
consumption display (Type 2)
8- Average fuel consumption display, Service reminder
momentary fuel consumption display
NOTE
 The driving range is determined based on the
(Type 2)
Shows the distance and number of months fuel consumption data. This may vary
9- Average speed display, momentary fuel depending on the driving conditions and hab-
consumption display (Type 2) until the next periodic inspection.
Refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-121. its. Treat the distance displayed as just a
10- Function setting screen rough guideline.
11- Redisplay of a warning display screen  When you refuel, the driving range display is
Engine coolant temperature dis- automatically updated.
5
NOTE play However, if you only add a small amount of
 While driving, the function setting screen is fuel, the correct value will not be displayed.
Fill to a full tank whenever possible.
not displayed even if you operate the multi- Shows the engine coolant temperature.
information meter switch. Always park the  When your vehicle is stopped on an
vehicle in a safe place before operating. If the coolant becomes hot, “ ” will blink. extremely steep hill, the driving range value
Refer to “Changing the function settings Pay careful attention to the engine coolant may change. This is due to the movement of
(With ignition switch in the “ON” position)” temperature display while you are driving. fuel in the tank and does not indicate any
on page 5-123. problem.
 The display setting can be changed to the
 When there is information to be announced, CAUTION preferred units (miles or km).
such as a system fault, the tone sounds and
the screen display is changed.  If the engine is overheating, “ ” will blink. Refer to “Changing the function settings
Refer to “Interrupt display screen (With igni- In this case, the bar graph is on the red zone. (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)”
tion switch in the “ON” position)” on page Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place on page 5-123.
5-119. and take the required measures. Refer to
“Engine overheating” on page 8-4.
Odometer/Trip odometer Average speed display

Driving range display
The operation method is the same as when This displays the average speed from the last
the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position. Shows the approximate driving range (how reset to the present.
For further details, refer to “Odometer/Trip many more miles or kilometers you can There are 2 types of mode settings as follows.
odometer” on page 5-112. drive) with the current fuel level. When this For details on how to change the average
driving range falls below 30 miles (50 km), “- speed display setting, refer to “Changing the
--” is displayed. function settings (With ignition switch in the
Refuel as soon as possible. “ON” position)” on page 5-123.

Manual reset mode NOTE Manual reset mode

 “---” is displayed when the average speed
 When the average speed is being dis- cannot be measured.  When the average fuel consumption is
played, if you hold down the multi-infor-  The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset being displayed, if you hold down the
mation meter switch, the average speed mode”. multi-information meter switch, the aver-
displayed at that time is reset.  The display setting can be changed to the age fuel consumption displayed at that
 When the ignition switch is turned to the preferred units (mph or km/h). time is reset.
5 “ON” position from the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position, the mode setting
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch in the “ON” position)”
 When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position from the “ACC” or
changes automatically from manual to on page 5-123. “LOCK” position, the mode setting
auto.  The average speed display memories for auto changes automatically from manual to
Switching to auto occurs automatically. If reset mode and manual reset mode are erased auto.
switching to manual mode is done, how- if the battery is disconnected. Switching to auto occurs automatically. If
ever, the data from the last reset is dis- switching to manual mode is done, how-
played. Average fuel consumption display ever, the data from the last reset is dis-
played.
Auto reset mode This displays the average fuel consumption
from the last reset to the present. Auto reset mode
 When the average speed is being dis- There are 2 types of mode settings as follows.
played, if you hold down the multi-infor- For details on how to change the average fuel  When the average fuel consumption is
mation meter switch, these calculations consumption display setting, refer to “Chang- being displayed, if you hold down the
will be reset to zero. ing the function settings (With ignition switch multi-information meter switch, these cal-
 When the ignition switch has been set to in the “ON” position)” on page 5-123. culations will be reset to zero.
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position for about  When the ignition switch has been set to
The “ ” mark in the momentary fuel gauge
4 hours or more, the average speed dis- the “ACC” or “LOCK” position for about
shows the average fuel consumption. (Type
play will automatically reset. 4 hours or more, the average speed dis-
2)
play will automatically reset.
NOTE
 The average speed display and the average
fuel consumption display can be reset sepa-
rately in both auto reset mode and manual
reset mode.

When the momentary fuel consumption sur-
NOTE passes the average fuel consumption, the
Interrupt display screen (With
 The average speed display and the average
momentary fuel consumption is displayed ignition switch in the “ON”
fuel consumption display can be reset sepa-
rately in both auto reset mode and manual
with a green bar graph. (Type 2) position)
reset mode. Be conscious of maintaining the momentary N00556300135
 “---” is displayed when the average fuel con- fuel consumption above the average fuel con-
sumption cannot be measured. sumption, it can help you drive with the better Warning display
fuel consumption.
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
mode”.
5
When there is information to be announced,
 Average fuel consumption may vary depend NOTE such as a system fault, a tone sounds and the
on the driving conditions (road conditions,  When the momentary fuel consumption can- information screen is switched to the warning
how you drive, etc.) The actual fuel con- not be measured, a bar graph is not shown.
sumption may differ from the fuel consump-
display screen.
 The display setting can be changed to the Refer to the warning list and take the neces-
tion displayed, so treat the fuel consumption
preferred units {mpg (US), mpg (UK), L/100 sary measures. Refer to “Warning display list
displayed as just a rough guideline.
km or km/L}.
 The average fuel consumption display mem- (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)”
ories for auto reset mode and manual reset on page 5-135.
mode are erased if the battery is discon- on page 5-123. When the cause of the warning display is
nected.
 It is possible to cancel the green bar graph. eliminated, the warning display goes out
 The display setting can be changed to the Refer to “Changing the function settings automatically.
preferred units {mpg (US), mpg (UK), L/100 (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)”
km or km/L}. on page 5-123. Returning to the display screen from
(With ignition switch in the “ON” position)” before the warning display
on page 5-123.
Function setting screen Even if the cause of the warning display is
not eliminated, you can return to the screen
that was displayed before the warning dis-
Momentary fuel consumption dis- The “Display language”, “Temperature unit”,
play.
play “Fuel consumption unit”, and “Average fuel
consumption and speed reset method” set- If you press the multi-information meter
tings can be modified as desired. switch, the display screen switches to the
While driving, the momentary fuel consump- For further details, refer to “Changing the
tion is shown with a bar graph. screen display from before the warning and
function settings (With ignition switch in the
“ON” position)” on page 5-123. the warning (A) is displayed.

switch a few times, the warning display
Type 1
screen you switched from is redisplayed.
Outside temperature display
screen
N00556500094
Other interrupt displays
Shows the temperature outside the vehicle.
The operation status of each system is dis-
Type 2 played on the information screen. NOTE
5 For further details, refer to the appropriate  The display setting can be changed to the
page in the warning display list. preferred units (°F or °C).
Refer to “Other interrupt displays (With igni- Refer to “Changing the function settings
tion switch in the “ON” position)” on page
on page 5-123.
5-141.
 Depending on factors such as the driving
conditions, the displayed temperature may
Selector lever position display vary from the actual outside temperature.
NOTE screen {continuously variable
 Warning display screens with a “ ” or transmission (CVT)} Twin Clutch SST control mode
N00556400048
“ ” mark displayed in the upper right of the
Shows the position of the selector lever.
display screen (Twin Clutch
screen can be switched. If you want to switch
the display, press the multi-information Refer to “Selector lever operation” on page SST)
meter switch as follows. 5-61. N00545100029
“ ”: Press lightly. The operation status of the Twin Clutch SST

Gearshift lever position display control mode is displayed. Refer to “Twin
“ ”: Press for about 2 seconds or more.
Clutch SST control mode” on page 5-74.
screen (Twin Clutch SST)
N00545800055
Redisplay of a warning display Shows the position of the gearshift lever.

ACD control mode display
screen Refer to “Gearshift lever operation” on page screen (if so equipped)
5-70. N00545900030
When the warning is displayed, if you The operation status of the ACD control
lightly press the multi-information meter mode is displayed.

Refer to “ACD control mode” on page 5-82.
NOTE Type 1
 It may take several seconds to stabilize the
ECO mode indicator (if so display after refilling the tank.
equipped)  If fuel is added with the ignition switch in
the “ON” position, the remaining fuel dis-
N00568700019
play may indicate an incorrect fuel level.
This indicator will be displayed when fuel- Type 2
efficient driving is achieved. 5
Fuel tank filler door mark
Fuel remaining display screen
N00556600125
The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank
filler door is located on the left side of the
Shows the amount of fuel remaining.
vehicle. (Refer to “Filling the fuel tank” on
page 3-4.)
Type 1 Type 2
NOTE
Fuel remaining warning display  On hills or curves, the display may be incor-
rect due to the movement of fuel in the tank.
When the fuel level runs low, the information
screen changes to the interrupt display of the
fuel remaining warning display and the mark Service reminder
(B) on the fuel remaining display flashes N00556700168
slowly. If this warning display appears, refuel
Displays the approximate time until the next
as soon as possible.
recommended periodic inspection. “---” is
displayed when the inspection time has
CAUTION arrived.
 Running out of gas could damage the cata-
lytic converter. If the warning display
appears, refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
 Except for vehicles with Twin Clutch SST,
shows the time until the periodic inspection
every 6 months (7,500 miles or 12,000 km).

2. This informs you that a periodic inspec-
NOTE To reset
tion is due. Contact an authorized Mit-
 For vehicles with Twin Clutch SST, the ser-
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
vice reminder time can be modified by an The “---” display can be reset while the igni-
of your choice to have the system
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, to tion switch is in the “OFF” position. When
adjust for severe usage, etc. Refer to “Severe checked.
the display is reset, the time until the next
maintenance schedule” in your vehicle’s
At that time, when the ignition switch is periodic inspection is displayed and the warn-
Warranty and Maintenance Manual. For fur-
switched from the “OFF” position to the ing display is no longer displayed when the
5 ther information, please contact your autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. “ON” position, the warning display is dis- ignition switch is switched from the “OFF”
played for a few seconds on the informa- position to the “ON” position.
Type 1 tion screen.
1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-
Type 1
tion meter switch, the information screen
changes to the service reminder display
screen.
Type 2
Type 2 Type 1
1. Shows the time until the next periodic

inspection. Type 2
NOTE 3. After your vehicle is inspected at an

 Shows the distance in units of 100 miles (100
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it
km) and the time in units of 1 month. displays the time until the next periodic
inspection.

2. Press and hold the multi-information sound 4 times to inform you that a door is
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
CAUTION ajar.
 The customer is responsible for making sure
more) to display “ ” and make it flash. The buzzer will not sound if only the trunk lid
that regular inspections and maintenance and
(If there is no operation for about 10 sec- is open.
periodic inspections and maintenance are
onds with this indicator flashing, the dis- performed. Type 1
play returns to the previous screen.) Inspections and maintenance must be per-
3. With this indicator flashing, if you lightly formed to prevent accidents and malfunc-
press the multi-information meter switch, tions.
5
the screen switches from “---” to
“CLEAR”. After that, the time until the
next periodic inspection is shown. NOTE Type 2
 The “---” display cannot be reset while the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
 When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis-
Type 1
tance and a certain period of time, the dis-
play is reset and the time until the next
periodic inspection is displayed.
 If you accidentally reset the display, consult
Type 2
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for CAUTION
assistance.  Always make sure that the warning display
goes out before beginning to drive.
Door ajar warning display

(With ignition switch in the Changing the function settings
“ON” position) (With ignition switch in the
N00555700145 “ON” position)
If any of the doors or the trunk lid is not com- N00556801153
pletely closed, this displays the open door or 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place.
trunk lid.
If the speed increases to about 5 mph (8
km/h) or higher with a door ajar, a buzzer will

Fully apply the parking brake and move 3. Press and hold the multi-information 4. Select the item to change on the menu
the shift lever into the “N” position (man- meter switch (for about 2 seconds or screen and change to the desired setting.
ual transaxle), the selector lever {continu- more) to switch from the setting mode For further details on the operation meth-
ously variable transmission (CVT)} or the screen to the menu screen. ods, refer to the following sections.
gearshift lever (Twin Clutch SST) into the
“P” position. Type 1 Refer to “Changing the reset mode for
2. When you lightly press the multi-informa- average fuel consumption and average
tion meter switch, the information screen speed” on page 5-125.
5 changes to the function setting screen. Refer to “Changing the fuel consumption
Refer to “Information screen (With igni- display unit” on page 5-125.
tion switch in the “ON” position)” on Refer to “Changing the temperature unit”
page 5-116. Type 2 on page 5-126.
Refer to “Changing the display language”
on page 5-127.
Type 1 Type 2 Refer to “Operation sound setting” on
page 5-127.
Refer to “Changing the amount of time
until “REST REMINDER” is displayed”
on page 5-128.
NOTE Refer to “Changing the turn signal sound”
on page 5-129.
 To return the menu screen to the function set-
ting screen, press and hold the multi-infor- Refer to “Changing the momentary fuel
mation meter switch (for about 2 seconds or consumption display (Type 2)” on page
more). 5-129.
CAUTION  If no operations are made within about 15 Refer to “Returning to the factory set-
 For safety, stop the vehicle before operating. seconds of the menu screen being displayed, tings” on page 5-129.
While driving, even if you operate the multi- the display returns to the function setting
information meter switch, the function set- screen.
ting screen is not displayed.

3. Press and hold the multi-information • When the ignition switch has been set to
Changing the reset mode for aver-
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or the “ACC” or “LOCK” position for
age fuel consumption and average more) to switch in sequence from A or 1 about 4 hours or more, the average fuel
speed (Auto reset mode) M, 2 or P (Manual consumption display and the average
N00557000184 reset mode) A or 1 (Auto reset mode). speed display will automatically reset.
You can change the mode condition for the The setting will change to the selected
average fuel consumption and average speed mode condition.
NOTE
display to “Auto reset” or “Manual reset”.
Manual reset mode  The average speed display and average fuel 5
consumption display can be reset separately
1. Press and hold the multi-information
• If you press and hold the multi-informa- in both auto reset mode and manual reset
tion meter switch when the average fuel mode.
more) to switch from the setting mode
consumption and average speed are dis-  The average speed display memories and
screen to the menu screen. average fuel consumption memories for auto
Refer to “Changing the function settings played, these calculations will be reset to
reset mode and manual reset mode are erased
(With ignition switch in the “ON” posi- zero.
if the battery is disconnected.
tion)” on page 5-123. • When the ignition switch is turned to the
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter “ON” position from the “ACC” or
mode”.
switch to select “AVG” (average fuel con- “LOCK” position, the mode setting
sumption and average speed setting). changes automatically from manual to
auto.
Changing the fuel consumption
Type 1 Switching to auto occurs automatically.
If switching to manual mode is done, display unit
however, the data from the last reset is N00557100130
displayed. The fuel consumption display unit can be

changed. The distance, speed, and amount
Auto reset mode units are also changed to match the selected
fuel consumption unit.
Type 2 • When the average fuel consumption and
average speed are being displayed, if you 1. Press and hold the multi-information
hold down the multi-information meter meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
switch, these calculations will be reset to more) to change from the setting mode
zero. screen to the menu screen.

Refer to “Changing the function settings The distance and speed units are also changed
(With ignition switch in the “ON” posi- in the following combinations to match the
tion)” on page 5-123. selected fuel consumption unit.
Type 1 Type 2
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
switch to select “AVG UNIT” (fuel con- Distance Speed
Fuel econ-
sumption display unit setting). (driving (average
omy
range) speed)
Type 1
5 mpg (US) mile (s) mph
mpg (UK) mile (s) mph
km /L km km /h
L /100 km km km /h
Type 2
Changing the temperature unit
5. Press and hold the multi-information N00557200102
The temperature display unit can be changed.
more) to change the setting to the selected
unit. 1. Press and hold the multi-information

NOTE more) to change from the setting mode
 The display units for the driving range, the screen to the menu screen.
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or Refer to “Changing the function settings
average fuel consumption, the average speed
more) to display “AVG UNIT” (fuel con- and the momentary fuel consumption are (With ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
sumption display unit setting). changed, but the units for the indicating nee- tion)” on page 5-123.
4. Lightly press the multi-information meter dle (speedometer), the odometer and the trip 2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
switch to switch in sequence from km/L odometer will remain unchanged.
switch to select “ ” (temperature unit
 L/100 km  mpg (US)  mpg (UK)  If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
 RETURN  km/L. the unit setting is erased and is automatically
setting).
set to {mpg (US) or L/100 km}.

1. Press and hold the multi-information 5. Press and hold the multi-information
Type 1
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to change from the setting mode more) to change the setting to the selected
screen to the menu screen. language.
(With ignition switch in the “ON” posi- NOTE
tion)” on page 5-123.  If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
Type 2
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter the language setting is erased and is automat-
switch to select “LANGUAGE” (lan- ically set to ENGLISH. 5
guage setting).  If “---” is selected in the language setting, a
warning message is not displayed when there
Type 1 is a warning display or interrupt display.
Operation sound setting

3. Press and hold the multi-information N00557400104
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or You can turn off the operation sounds of the
more) to change in sequence from °F  Type 2 multi-information meter switch and rheostat
°C  °F. meter illumination button.
The setting is changed to the selected tem-
perature unit. 1. Press and hold the multi-information
NOTE more) to switch from the setting mode
 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of screen to the menu screen.
the unit setting is erased and is automatically Refer to “Changing the function settings
set to °F (°C). 3. Press and hold the multi-information (With ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or tion)” on page 5-123.
more) to display “LANGUAGE” (lan- 2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
Changing the display language guage setting). switch to select “ ” (operation sound
N00557300145 4. Lightly press the multi-information meter setting).
The language of the multi-information dis- switch to select the desired language.
play can be changed.

Type 1 Changing the amount of time until
“REST REMINDER” is displayed more) to display “ALARM” (rest time
N00557500121
setting).
The amount of time until the display appears
can be changed.
Type 1 Type 2
Type 2 1. Press and hold the multi-information
5 meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to switch from the setting mode
screen to the menu screen.
(With ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
3. Press and hold the multi-information switch to select “ALARM” (rest time set-
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or ting).
switch to select the amount of time until
more) to switch in sequence from ON the display appears.
Type 1
(operation sound on)  OFF (operation 5. Press and hold the multi-information
sound off)  ON (operation sound on). meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
The setting is changed to the selected con- more) to change the setting to the selected
dition. time.
NOTE NOTE
 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of Type 2
 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
the operation sound setting is erased and is
the unit setting is erased and is automatically
automatically set to “ON” (operation sound
set to the “OFF”.
on).
 The drive time is reset when the ignition
 The operation sound setting only deactivates
switch is in the “OFF” position.
the operation sound of the multi-information
meter switch and rheostat meter illumination
button. The warning display and other
sounds cannot be deactivated.

Changing the turn signal sound
meter switch for about 2 seconds or more
N00563500038
to switch in sequence from 1 (turn signal
It is possible to change the turn signal sound. sound 1)  2 (turn signal sound 2)  1
(turn signal sound 1).
The setting changes to the selected turn
signal sound.
to switch from the setting mode screen to
the menu screen. 5
Refer to “Changing the function settings Changing the momentary fuel con-
(With ignition switch in the “ON” posi- sumption display (Type 2)
tion)” on page 5-123. N00563600013
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter 3. Press and hold the multi-information
It is possible to change the bar graph setting
switch to select . (changing the turn of the momentary fuel consumption display.
to switch in sequence from ON (with the
signal sound) green bar graph)  OFF (without the
Type 1 meter switch for about 2 seconds or more green bar graph)  ON (with the green
to switch from the setting mode screen to bar graph).
the menu screen. The setting changes to the selected bar
Refer to “Changing the function settings graph setting.
tion)” on page 5-123. Returning to the factory settings
Type 2 2. Lightly press the multi-information meter N00557600148
switch to select . (changing the All of the function settings can be returned to
momentary fuel consumption display) their factory settings.

more) to change from the setting mode
screen to the menu screen.

switch to select “RESET” (return to the
NOTE
• Cooperative language setting: A
factory settings).
• Operation sounds: ON (Operation sound
Type 1 on)
• “REST REMINDER” display: OFF
• Turn signal sound: Turn signal sound 1
• Momentary fuel consumption with the
5 green bar graph (Type 2): ON
Type 2

more), the buzzer sounds and all of the
function settings are returned to the fac-
tory settings.
NOTE
 The factory settings are as follows.
• Average fuel consumption and average
speed reset mode: A (Auto reset)
• Fuel consumption display unit: mpg (US)
or (L/100 km)
• Temperature unit: °F (Fahrenheit) or {°C
(Centigrade)}
• Display language: ENGLISH

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

N00557700035
Indicator and warning light list

N00557800238
Type A Type B
5
1- Position indicator P.5-143 7- Tire pressure monitoring system warn- 12- ECO mode indicator (if so equipped)
2- High beam indicator P.5-143 ing light P.5-103 P.5-121
3- Charging system warning light 8- Brake warning light P.5-144 13- Engine malfunction indicator (“SER-
P.5-145 9- Cruise control indicator (if so VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check
4- Turn signal indicator/hazard warning equipped) P.5-98 engine light”) P.5-144
light P.5-143 10- Seat belt reminder/warning light 14- Active stability control (ASC) OFF
5- Front fog light indicator (if so P.4-11 indicator (if so equipped) P.5-95
equipped) P.5-143 11- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 15- Active stability control (ASC) indicator
6- Anti-lock braking system warning light warning light (if so equipped) P.5-95
P.5-92  P.4-27 16- Information screen display list
P.5-132

Information screen display list

N00557900024
When there is information to be announced, such as light reminders, the tone sounds and the screen switches to the displays shown below. Refer
to the appropriate page and take the necessary measures.
When the cause of the warning display is eliminated, the warning display goes out automatically.
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition switch in the “OFF” position)” on page 5-132.
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)” on page 5-135.
5 Refer to “Other interrupt displays (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)” on page 5-141.
NOTE
 In the following cases, a warning may be displayed on the information screen and the buzzer may sound for a few seconds, at times.
This is caused by the system picking up interference such as strong electromagnetic waves or noise, and is not a functional problem.
• An extremely strong electromagnetic wave is received from a source such as an illegal radio set, a spark from a wire, or a radar station.
• Abnormal voltage or a static electricity discharge is generated by the operation of installed electronics (including after-market parts).
If the warning display has occurred a number of times, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice and
have the system checked.
Warning display list (With ignition switch in the “OFF” position)

N00558000165
Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Cause Do this (Reference)

 You have forgotten to remove the key  Remove the key.
from the ignition switch. Refer to “Key reminder system” on
page 5-36.


 You have forgotten to turn off the lights.  Refer to “Light auto-cutout function
(headlights and other lights)” on page
5-149.
 The theft-alarm system is operating.  Refer to “Theft-alarm system” on page

5-42. 5
 After turning off the engine, an attempt  Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
was made to open the driver’s door with (PUSH OFF) position.
the ignition switch in any position other Refer to “Ignition switch return
than “LOCK” (PUSH OFF). reminder system” on page 5-37.
 An attempt was made to lock all the  Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
doors and the trunk lid with the ignition (PUSH OFF) position.
switch in any position other than Refer to “Ignition switch turn-off
“LOCK” (PUSH OFF). reminder system” on page 5-20.


 There is a fault in the F.A.S.T.-key.  Refer to “F.A.S.T.-key” on page 5-12.

Warning display list (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)

N00558101323
Screen type1 Screen type 2 Cause Do this (Reference)

 There is a fault in the electric power  Have the vehicle inspected by an autho-
steering system (EPS). rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice as soon as
possible. 5
Refer to “Electric power steering sys-
tem (EPS)” on page 5-97.


 There is a fault in the F.A.S.T.-key.  Refer to “F.A.S.T.-key” on page 5-12.
 Immobilizer is registered.  Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-

theft starting system)” on page 5-4,
5-28.


 The brake fluid level is low.  Park the vehicle in a safe place and con-
 There is a fault in the brake system. tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
for assistance.
Refer to “Brake warning display” on
page 5-145.
 There is a fault in the Anti-lock braking  Avoid sudden braking and high-speed 5
system. driving, park the vehicle in a safe place,
and take corrective measures. Refer to
“Anti-lock braking system warning
light/display” on page 5-92.
 The tire pressure in one of the tires  Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
(except spare tire) is low. tem” on page 5-102.
 There is a fault in the Tire Pressure  Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
Monitoring System. tem” on page 5-102.
 One of the doors or the trunk lid is not  Close the door or trunk lid.
completely closed. Refer to “Door ajar warning display
The open door or open trunk lid is dis- (With ignition switch in the “OFF”
played. position)” on page 5-114.


 The engine hood is open.  Close the engine hood.
Refer to “Engine hood” on page 9-3.
 The engine is overheated.  Park the vehicle in a safe place and take
5 corrective measures.
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page
8-4.
 The continuously variable transmission  Park the vehicle in a safe place and take
(CVT) fluid or the Twin Clutch SST corrective measures.
fluid temperature is increased. Refer to “Continuously variable trans-
mission (CVT)” on page 5-61.
Refer to “Twin Clutch SST” on page
5-70.
 The seat belt is not fastened when the  Fasten your seat belt properly. Refer to
ignition switch is in the “ON” position. “Driver’s seat belt reminder/warning
light and display” on page 4-11.
 There is a fault in the fuel system.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of
your choice to have the system checked.


 The vehicle is being driven with the  Release the parking brake. Refer to
parking brake still applied. “Brake warning display” on page
5-145.
 There is a fault in the engine oil circula-  Park your vehicle in a safe place as
tion system. soon as possible and contact an autho- 5
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to have the
system checked.
Refer to “Oil pressure warning display”
on page 5-146.
 There is a fault in the charging system.  Park your vehicle in a safe place as
soon as possible and contact an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assis-
tance.
Refer to “Charging system warning dis-
play” on page 5-146.
 There is a fault in the SRS airbag or the  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi
seat belt pre-tensioner system. Motors dealer or a repair facility of
your choice to have the system checked,
immediately.
Refer to “SRS warning light/display”
on page 4-27.


 There is a fault in the Active Stability  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi
Control (ASC). Motors dealer or a repair facility of
Refer to “Active Stability Control
(ASC)” on page 5-94.
 There is a fault in the ACD (Active  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi
5 Center Differential system). Motors dealer or a repair facility of
 There is a fault in the electronically your choice to have the system checked.
controlled 4WD system. Refer to “ACD (Active Center Differ-
ential system)” on page 5-82.
 Contact an authorized Mitsubishi
Refer to “Electronically controlled
4WD system” on page 5-84.
 There is a fault in the CVT.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi
 A safety device in the Twin Clutch SST your choice to have the system checked.
has been activated due to a possible Refer to “Continuously variable trans-
malfunction in the Twin Clutch SST or mission (CVT)” on page 5-61.
in the engine electronic control module. Refer to “Twin Clutch SST” on page
5-70.
 The electronically controlled 4WD sys-  Refer to “Electronically controlled
tem is hot. 4WD system” on page 5-84.


 The fuel is running low.  Refuel as soon as possible. Refer to
“Fuel remaining display screen” on
page 5-121.
 The outside temperature is 37 °F (3 °C)  Be careful driving on frozen ground.

or less.  The ground may be frozen even when 5
this warning is not displayed, so drive
carefully.
 The timing chain may be worn.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi

Other interrupt displays (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)

N00558200239
The operation status of each system is displayed on the information screen. For further details, refer to the appropriate page for each system.


Screen type 1 Screen type 2 System operation status Reference
 When “2WD” drive mode is selected with  Refer to “Electronically controlled 4WD
the drive mode selector. system” on page 5-84.
 When “4WD AUTO” mode is selected

5 with the drive mode selector.
 When “4WD LOCK” mode is selected

with the drive mode selector.
 When the Active Stability Control (ASC)  Refer to “Active Stability Control (ASC)
is operating. ”on page 5-94.
This informs you that a periodic inspection is due.
Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Do this

Have an inspection made by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. For further details,
refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-121.

Indicators
The rest time can be set.
Screen type 1 Screen type 2 Do this

Park the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, and take a rest.
Use this display as rough guide for taking rests during a long drive.
The interval from the start of your trip until this message is displayed can be set.
Refer to “Changing the function settings (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)” on
page 5-123. 5
The display and buzzer alert the driver when the set time is reached. If you continue to
drive without having a rest, the buzzer sounds about every 5 minutes to encourage you to
take a rest.
 In the following cases, the time driven is reset and the display returns to the previous
display screen. After this, when the set time is reached again, the display and buzzer
encourage you to take a rest.
• The buzzer sounds 3 times.
• The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position.
• The multi-information meter switch is held (for about 2 seconds or more).
Indicators NOTE Front fog light indicator (if so

N00519900127  If the indicator flashes faster than usual or if equipped)
the indicator stays on without flashing, check
N00520200205
for a malfunctioning turn signal light bulb or
Turn signal indicators/Hazard turn signal connection. This indicator comes on while the front fog
warning lights lights are on.
N00520000216
The arrows will flash in time with the corre- High beam indicator Position indicator
sponding exterior turn signals when the turn N00520100086
N00551300026
signal lever is used. A blue light comes on when the headlights
This indicator light illuminates while the
are on high beam.
Both arrows will flash when the hazard warn- position lights are on.
ing flasher switch is pressed.

Warning lights
Warning lights CAUTION Engine malfunction indicator

N00520300147 • When the brake warning light does not go (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON”
out even when the parking brake is
released. or “Check engine light”)
Brake warning light • When the brake warning light stays on N00520500774
N00520400467
while driving. This indicator is a part of the onboard diag-
When the ignition switch is turned to the • If the above occurs, avoid sudden braking nostic (OBD) system which monitors the
5 “ON” position, this indicator normally comes and high-speed driving. Park the vehicle in emissions, engine control system or continu-
on and goes out a few seconds later. A warn- a safe place, and contact an authorized Mit- ously variable transmission (CVT) control
ing is also displayed in the multi-information subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of system / Twin Clutch SST control system. If a
display. your choice as soon as possible.
problem is detected in one of these systems,
The warning light also illuminates after start-  The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the
this indicator illuminates or flashes. When the
ing the engine under the following condi- following manner when brake performance
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
is deteriorated.
tions: tion, this indicator normally comes on and
• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when
you press down on the brake pedal harder goes off after the engine has started.
 When the parking brake is still applied.
than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal
 When the brake fluid level is low. This indicator will come on if the fuel tank
may go all the way to the floor.
 When the brake force distribution func- filler cap is not properly tightened. If this
• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking
tion is not operating correctly. indicator comes on and stays on after refuel-
to reduce your speed and slowly apply the
parking brake. ing, stop the engine and check that the cap is
Before driving, be sure that the parking brake Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the properly tightened. (Turn the cap clockwise
is fully released and brake warning light is stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you. until you hear clicking sounds.)
off.  Do not suddenly apply the parking brake If this indicator does not go off after several
while driving. This may cause the rear seconds or lights up while driving, have the
CAUTION wheels to lock and cause an accident. system checked as soon as possible at an
 If the brake warning light and the anti-lock authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
braking system warning light are illuminated repair facility of your choice.
at the same time, the braking force distribu-
tion function will not operate, so the vehicle
may be destabilized during sudden braking
under the following conditions.

Information screen display
CAUTION NOTE Information screen display

 Driving for a long time with the engine mal-  Do not disconnect the battery cable when the N00558300025
function indicator on may cause more dam- engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE
age to the emission control system. This ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) is
could also affect fuel economy and drivabil- on.
Brake warning display
N00558400084
ity. The engine electronic control module stores
 If this indicator does not come on when the critical OBD information (especially exhaust Type 1
ignition key is turned to the “ON” position,
have the system checked at an authorized
emission data), which may be lost if the bat-
tery cable is disconnected while the engine
5
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility malfunction indicator is on. This will make it
of your choice. difficult to diagnose the cause of future prob-
 If the engine malfunction indicator comes on lems.
while the engine is running, avoid driving at
high speeds. Type 2
During vehicle operation with the indicator Charging system warning light
on, the vehicle may not accelerate when you
N00520600296
depress the accelerator pedal.
When the vehicle is stationary with the indi- This light comes on in the event of a malfunc-
cator on, you must depress the brake pedal tion in the charging system or when the igni-
more firmly than usual since the engine tion switch is turned to the “ON” position
idling speed is higher than usual and a vehi- (engine off). A warning is also displayed in This warning is displayed if the vehicle is
cle with a CVT or a Twin Clutch SST has a the multi-information display. When the being driven with the parking brake still
stronger tendency to creep forward. engine is started, the light should go out. applied. The warning light in the instrument
Check to make sure that the light has gone cluster only comes on when the parking brake
out before driving. is applied.
CAUTION CAUTION
 If the warning light stays on while the engine  If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place parking brake, the brakes will overheat,
as soon as possible and contact an authorized resulting in ineffective braking and possible
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility brake failure.
of your choice to have the system checked. If this warning is displayed while driving,
release the parking brake.

Information screen display

Type 1 Type 2
CAUTION
 If the brake warning display, brake warning
light, and the Anti-lock braking system
warning light are illuminated at the same
time, the braking force distribution function
will not operate, so the vehicle may be desta-
bilized during sudden braking. Avoid sudden
Type 2 If there is a fault in the charging system, the
5 braking and high-speed driving. Park the
vehicle in a safe place, and contact an autho-
warning display is displayed on the informa-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair tion screen in the multi-information display.
facility of your choice. The warning light in the instrument cluster
 The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the also illuminates.
following manner when brake performance
When the ignition switch is turned to the
is deteriorated. CAUTION
• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when
“ON” position, if the brake fluid is low, this  If warnings are displayed while the engine is
you press down on the brake pedal harder
warning is displayed. running, park your vehicle in a safe place as
than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal
The warning light in the instrument cluster soon as possible and contact an authorized
may go all the way to the floor.
also illuminates. • Should the brakes fail, use engine braking of your choice to have the system checked.
to reduce your speed and slowly apply the
CAUTION parking brake.
Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the
 If this warning stays on and does not go out
stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you. Oil pressure warning display
while driving, there is a danger of ineffective N00558700045
braking. If this happens, park the vehicle in a
Type 1
safe place, and contact an authorized Mit- Charging system warning dis-
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
your choice.
play
N00558600057
Type 1


Type 2
Combination headlights and
dimmer switch
N00522501762
Headlights
If the engine oil pressure drops while the
engine is running, the warning display is dis-
NOTE
5
played on the information screen in the multi-
 Do not leave the headlights and other lights
information display.
on for a long period of time when the engine
is not running. The battery will run down.
OFF All lights off
CAUTION  When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
 If the vehicle is driven while the engine oil is washed, the inside of the lens sometimes Parking, tail, front and rear side-
low, or the oil level is normal but the warn- becomes foggy. This is the same as when marker lights, license plate and
ing is displayed, the engine may overheat window glass mists up on a humid day, and instrument panel lights on
and damage may result. does not indicate a problem. When the light
is switched on, the heat will dry out the fog.
Headlights and other lights on
 If the warning is displayed while the engine
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place However, if water collects inside the light,
as soon as possible and check the engine oil have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi If your vehicle is equipped with daytime run-
level. Motors dealer or a repair facility of your ning lights, the combinations of switch opera-
 If this warning display comes on when the choice. tions and illuminated lights differ in
engine oil level is proper, have your vehicle accordance with the following conditions.
checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Type 1 [When the engine is started, and the parking
brake is released]
Rotate the switch to operate the lights.
NOTE The daytime running lights will be illumi-
 The oil pressure warning display does not nated:
show the amount of oil. The oil level must be
checked using the dipstick. The daytime running lights illumi-
OFF
nated


The daytime running lights illumi- The daytime running lights illumi-
OFF
nated nated
Parking, tail, front and rear side- The daytime running lights illumi-
marker lights, license plate and nated
instrument panel lights on AUTO Headlights and other lights turn on
Headlights and other lights on and off automatically in accor-
dance with outside light level.
5 The daytime running lights illumi-
NOTE
nated
 Once the daytime running light come on,
they do not go out until the key is turned to
Parking, tail, front and rear side-
the “LOCK” or “ACC” position. marker lights, license plate and
OFF All lights off
instrument panel lights on
Headlights and other lights turn on
[When the engine is not running, or when the Headlights and other lights on
AUTO and off automatically in accor-
engine is running but the parking brake is not dance with outside light level.
released]
Parking, tail, front and rear side- NOTE
The engine starts when the lights are off. marker lights, license plate and  Once the daytime running light come on,
instrument panel lights on they do not go out until the key is turned to
OFF All lights off the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.
Parking, tail, front and rear side-
marker lights, license plate and If your vehicle is equipped with daytime run- [When the engine is not running, or when the
instrument panel lights on ning lights, the combinations of switch opera- engine is running but the parking brake is not
tions and illuminated lights differ in released]
accordance with the following conditions.
The engine starts when the lights are off.
Type 2 [When the engine is started, and the parking
brake is released] OFF All lights off
Headlights and other lights turn on
Rotate the switch to operate the lights. The daytime running lights will be illumi- AUTO and off automatically in accor-
nated: dance with outside light level.


Parking, tail, front and rear side-  If the ignition switch is turned to “LOCK”
Light auto-cutout function or “ACC” position with the driver’s door
marker lights, license plate and
instrument panel lights on
(headlights and other lights) closed and the combination headlights
N00532601607
and dimmer switch in the “ ” or “ ”
Headlights and other lights on  If the ignition key is turned to “LOCK” or position, the lights will stay on for about 3
“ACC” position or removed from the minutes and then turn off automatically.
ignition switch and the driver’s door is
NOTE opened with the combination headlights
 The sensitivity of the automatic on/off con-
and dimmer switch in the “ ” or “ ” NOTE 5
trol can be adjusted.
position, the lights automatically turn off.  The light auto-cutout function can be deacti-
For further information, please contact your
vated.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
repair facility of your choice. [When using a key to start the engine]
dealer for details.
 Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automatic • If the driver’s door is opened after the
on/off control by affixing a sticker or label to key is removed from the ignition switch,
the windshield. a high-pitched constant tone will sound
to remind you to turn off the lights.
When you want to keep the lights
• If the driver’s door is opened with the on:
key in the ignition switch, a low-pitched
tone will sound to remind you to remove If the combination headlights and dimmer
the key. switch is turned to the “ ” or “ ” posi-
tion again after the engine is turned off, the
[When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the about 3 minutes auto-cutout function
engine] described above will not work. The lights (the
 If the lights do not turn on or off with the • If the ignition switch is turned to the parking lights, tail lights and license plate
switch in the “AUTO” position, manually “LOCK” position and the driver’s door lights) will stay on and will not turn off auto-
operate the switch and we recommend you to is opened, a high-pitched constant matically.
have your vehicle checked. buzzer will sound to remind you to turn
off the lights.
• If the ignition switch is turned to any
position other than “LOCK” and the
driver’s door is opened, a low-pitched
constant buzzer will sound to remind
you to return the ignition switch.

from the ignition switch while the lights are indicates when the headlights are on high
NOTE on, the buzzer will sound to remind you to beam.
 When the engine is started using the key, if
turn off the lights.
the driver’s door is opened and the key is
removed, the headlight reminder buzzer
intermittently emits a high-pitched sound. If When using the F.A.S.T.-key to
the key is still in the ignition the key start the engine
reminder buzzer intermittently emits a low-
5 pitched sound.
The buzzer stops when the driver’s door is If the driver’s door is opened with the ignition
closed. (A warning is also displayed in the switch in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position, or
multi-information display.) if the ignition switch is moved to the
 When the engine is started using the keyless “LOCK” position while the lights are on, the
operation function, if the driver’s door is buzzer will sound to remind you to turn off
opened and the ignition switch is in the the lights.
“LOCK” position, the headlight reminder
buzzer intermittently emits a high-pitched In either case, the lights and buzzer will turn
sound. If the ignition switch is in any posi- off automatically. Headlight flasher
tion other than “LOCK”, the ignition switch Or you can turn the combination headlights N00550000198
on reminder buzzer intermittently emits a
and dimmer switch to the “OFF” position to You can flash the high beams by pulling the
low-pitched sound.
stop the buzzer. lever gently toward you (2). The lights will
The buzzer stops when the driver’s door is
closed. (A warning is also displayed in the go back to normal when you let go. While the
multi-information display.) Dimmer (high/low beam high beam is on, you will see a blue light on
the instrument panel.
change)
N00549900155
Headlight reminder buzzer NOTE
To change the headlights from high beam to
N00549800196  You can flash the high beams by pulling the
low beam and vice versa, pull the turn signal
lever toward you, even if the combination
lever to fully toward you (1). Switch the
When using a key to start the headlights to low beam as a courtesy when-
headlights and dimmer switch is off.
engine ever there are oncoming vehicles, or when
there is traffic moving ahead of you. An illu-
If the driver’s door is opened with the key in minated blue light in the instrument cluster
the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or removed

NOTE NOTE
 If you turn the lights off with the headlights • The welcome light function can be deacti-
set to high-beam illumination, the headlights vated.
are automatically returned to their low-beam For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors
setting when the combination headlights and dealer.
dimmer switch is next turned to the “ ”
position.
Coming home light
N00547300054
5
Welcome light (for vehicles with This function turns on the headlights in the
the theft-alarm system) low beam setting for about 30 seconds after
N00563201133 the ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”
NOTE position.
This function turns on the front side-marker
 While the welcome light function is operat-
and parking lights for about 30 seconds after ing, perform one of the following operations 1. Turn the combination headlights and dim-
the UNLOCK button (A) on the remote con- to cancel the function. mer switch to the “OFF” or “AUTO”
trol transmitter is pressed when the combina- • Push the LOCK button (B) on the remote position (for vehicles equipped with the
tion headlights and dimmer switch is in the control transmitter. automatic light control).
“OFF” or “AUTO” position (for vehicles
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
equipped with the automatic light control).
position. Also, if a key was used to start
On vehicles equipped with the automatic light
the engine, remove the key from the igni-
control, the welcome light function will oper-
tion switch.
ate only when it is dark outside the vehicle.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition
switch to the “LOCK” position, pull the
turn signal lever toward you.
• Turn the combination headlights and dim-

mer switch to the “ ” or “ ” position.
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
tion.
 It is possible to modify functions as follows:
• The headlights can be set to come on in the
low beam setting.

Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped)
NOTE
 It is possible to modify functions as follows:
• The time that the headlights remain on can
be changed.
• The coming home light function can be
deactivated.
For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors
5 dealer.
Headlight leveling switch (if

4. The headlights will come on in the low so equipped)
beam setting for about 30 seconds. After
NOTE
N00537100088
 Start adjusting when the knob is at the “0”
the headlights go off, the headlights can
The direction of the headlight beam (the position (when the beam is at its highest).
be turned on again in the low beam setting
direction in which the light shines) alters  Keep the knob in the “0” position except
for about 30 seconds by pulling the turn
according to the number of people and the when using the knob to lower the headlight
signal lever toward you within 60 seconds beam angle.
of turning the ignition switch to the load in the vehicle. Lower the headlight angle
 Always return the knob to the “0” position
“LOCK” position. To turn on the head- if it is too high due to the number of people
when the load is removed and the people
lights again after 60 seconds of turning and/or the load in the vehicle so that the head- have left the vehicle.
the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi- lights’ glare does not distract the drivers of
tion, repeat the process from step 1. approaching vehicles. First set the combina-
tion headlights and dimmer switch to the
“ ” position, then turn the headlight level-
Turn signal lever
NOTE ing switch knob to lower the beam. The
N00522601545
 While the coming home light function is When changing lanes, or to making a gradual
greater the number on the headlight leveling
operating, perform one of the following turn, hold the lever in the “lane change” posi-
operations to cancel the function.
switch knob, the lower the beam will point.
Set the switch to the appropriate position so tion (1). It will return to the neutral position
• Pull the turn signal lever toward you.
that the headlight beam is level with the road. when you let go. Use the full position (2)
• Turn the combination headlights and dim-
when making a normal turn. The lever will
mer switch to the “ ” or “ ” position. return to the neutral position when the turn is
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi- complete. There may be times when the lever
tion.

Hazard warning flasher switch

does not return to the neutral position. This used when the vehicle is in motion, except for
usually happens when the steering wheel is
NOTE emergencies.
 The turn signal light 3-flash function for lane
turned only slightly. You can easily return the If you need to leave your vehicle, the flashers
changes can be deactivated.
lever by hand. will keep working after the ignition key is
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
Also, when you move the lever to (1) slightly dealer for details. removed.
then release it, the turn signal lights and indi-  You can adjust the time required to operate
cator light in the instrument cluster will flash the lever for the 3-flash function. NOTE
three times. See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details.
 If you keep the flashers on for several hours 5
with the engine turned off, the battery will
run down.
Hazard warning flasher
switch Front fog light switch (if so
N00522700217
equipped)
N00522800377
The front fog lights illuminate only when the

headlights are on low beam.
Turning the knob in the direction of the “ON”
position turns on the front fog lights as well
NOTE as the indicator in the instrument cluster. To
 A light in the instrument panel flashes to turn them off, turn the knob in the direction of
show when the front and rear turn signal the “OFF” position.
lights are working properly. The knob will return to the neutral position
If this light flashes faster than usual, check when it is released.
If you press the flasher switch, the front and
for a burned out light bulb or malfunctioning
connection.
rear turn signals will flash intermittently, and
If the panel light does not come on when the so will the hazard warning lights. This is an
lever is moved, check for a blown fuse or a emergency warning system and should not be
burned out bulb in the panel.
Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized
of your choice.

Wiper and washer switch

N00523000608
CAUTION
 If the washer is used in cold weather, the
washer fluid sprayed against the glass may
freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm
5 the glass with the defroster before using the
washer.
MIST- Misting function

NOTE Windshield wipers The wipers will operate once.
 If the headlights are switched to high beam,
N00542900013 OFF- Off
the front fog lights will go out; they will illu- INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive)
minate again when the headlights are Except for vehicle with rain sensor LO- Slow
switched back to low beam. N00569100010 HI- Fast
 If the combination headlights and dimmer The windshield wiper and washer can be
switch is rotated to the “OFF” or “ ” posi- operated with the ignition switch in the “ON”
tion while the front fog lights are illumi- or “ACC” position. To adjust intermittent intervals
nated, they will automatically turn off. They If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do N00569201034
can be turned back on again by rotating the
not operate the wipers until the ice has melted With the lever in the “INT” (speed sensitive
combination headlights and dimmer switch
and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper intermittent operation) position, the intermit-
back to “ ” position, and turning the knob motor may be damaged. tent intervals can be adjusted by turning the
in the direction of the “ON” position.
knob (A).

1- Fast MIST- Misting function

2- Slow The wipers will operate once if the wiper The wipers will operate once.
lever is raised to the “MIST” position and OFF- Off
released. This operation is useful when it is AUTO- Auto-wiper control
NOTE drizzling, etc. The wipers will continue to Rain sensor
 The speed-sensitive-operation function of operate while the lever is held in the “MIST” The wipers will automatically
the windshield wipers can be deactivated. position. operate depending on the amount
For further information, please contact your of moisture on the windshield.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a Vehicle with rain sensor LO- Slow
repair facility of your choice. N00569400013 HI- Fast
The windshield wipers can be operated with
the ignition switch in the “ON” or “ACC”
Misting function Rain sensor (if so equipped)
position.
N00569300012
If the blades are frozen to the windshield or N00569500014
The misting function can be used when the rear window, do not operate the wipers until
ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” Can only be used when the ignition switch is
the ice has melted and the blades are freed,
position. “ON” position.
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
If the lever is put in the “AUTO” position, the
rain sensor (B) will detect the extent of rain
(or snow, other moisture, dust, etc.) and the
wipers will operate automatically.


Keep the lever in the “OFF” position if the
windshield is dirty and the weather is dry.
CAUTION NOTE
If your hands get trapped, you could suffer  The wipers may automatically operate when
Wiper operation under these conditions can
injuries or the wipers could malfunction. To things such as insects or foreign objects are
scratch the windshield and damage the wip-
deactivate the rain sensor, place the lever in affixed to the windshield on top of the rain
ers. the “OFF” position. sensor or when the windshield is frozen.
Objects affixed to the windshield will stop
the wipers when the wipers cannot remove
5 NOTE them. To operate the wipers again, move the
 To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this lever to the “LO” or “HI” position. Also, the
operation of the wipers does not take place wipers may operate automatically due to
when the vehicle is stationary and the ambi- strong direct sunlight or electromagnetic
ent temperature is about 32 °F (0 °C) or wave. To stop the wipers, move the lever to
lower. the “OFF” position.
 Do not cover the sensor by affixing a sticker  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
or label to the windshield. Also, do not put dealer or a repair facility of your choice
any water-repellent coating on the wind- when replacing the windshield glass.
shield. The rain sensor would not be able to
detect the extent of rain, and the wipers To adjust the sensitivity of the rain
CAUTION might stop working normally.
sensor
 With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-  In the following cases, the rain sensor may
N00569601038
tion and the lever in the “AUTO” position, be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked
the wipers may automatically operate in the at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or With the lever in the “AUTO” (rain sensor)
situations described below. a repair facility of your choice. position, it is possible to adjust the sensitivity
• When cleaning the outside surface of the • When the wipers operate at a constant inter- of the rain sensor by turning the knob (C).
windshield, if you touch the rain sensor. val despite changes in the extent of rain.
• When cleaning the outside surface of the • When the wipers do not operate even
windshield, if you wipe with a cloth the rain though it is raining.
sensor.
• When using an automatic car wash.
• A physical shock is applied to the wind-
shield.
• A physical shock is applied to the rain sen-
sor.


(D) is turned in the “+” direction when the
C ignition switch is “ON” position.
Windshield washer
N00504601325
To turn on the windshield washer, pull the

lever toward you with the ignition switch in
either the “ON” or “ACC” position. 5
The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the
windshield by pulling the lever toward you.
“+”- Higher sensitivity to rain When the wipers are not in operation or in
“-”- Lower sensitivity to rain The wipers will operate once if the lever is
intermittent operation, by pulling the lever
raised to the “MIST” position and released
toward you, the wipers will operate several
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
times while the washer fluid is being sprayed.
NOTE “ACC” position. The wipers will continue to
Also, by releasing the lever soon after pulling
 It is possible to activate the following func- operate while the lever is held in the “MIST”
it toward you, the washer fluid will be
tions. position.
sprayed several times while the wipers are
• Automatic operation (rain droplet sensitive) operating several times. (Intelligent washer)
can be changed to intermittent operation Intelligent washer will stop operating with
D
(vehicle speed-sensitive, or at adjustable
any operation of the lever.
intervals).
For further information, please contact your
Misting function
N00569700016
Move the lever in the direction of the arrow

and release, to operate the wipers once. The wipers will operate once if the lever is
Use this function when you are driving in moved to the “AUTO” position and the knob
mist or drizzle.

Electric rear window defogger switch
NOTE NOTE
 It is possible to modify functions as follows:  If the wipers become blocked by ice or other
• Causing the wiper never to operate when deposits on the glass, the motor may still
washer fluid is sprayed. burn out even if the wiper switch is OFF. If
• Intelligent washer can be deactivated. deposits form on the windshield, park your
• The wipers can be set to operate again after vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine,
about 6 seconds. and clean the glass so that the wipers can
5 For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors operate smoothly.
 Avoid using the washer for more than 20 sec-
dealer.
onds at a time. Do not operate the washer
when the fluid reservoir is empty or the
pump may fail.
Precautions to observe when After about 20 minutes of operation, the sys-
 During cold weather, add a recommended
tem will shut off automatically.
using wipers and washers washer solution that will not freeze in the
To switch the defogger OFF before 20 min-
N00523500209 washer reservoir. Otherwise the washer may
not work or may be damaged. utes have passed, press the switch again. The
indicator light will go out and the defogger
CAUTION  Replace the wiper blades when they are
worn. Use the proper size replacement will turn off.
 If the washer is used in cold weather, the
washer fluid sprayed onto the glass might blades. If you have questions, ask your If you need the defogger for more than 20
freeze, blocking your view. In cold weather, authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. minutes, press the switch again. This will add
heat the glass with the defroster before using 20 more minutes.
the washer.
Electric rear window defog-
CAUTION
ger switch  The rear window defogger is not designed to
NOTE N00523700315
melt snow. Remove any snow manually
 Do not use the wipers when the windshield is The electric rear window defogger can be before using the rear window defogger.
dry. This could scratch the glass and wear the used when the engine is running.  Use the rear window defogger only after the
wiper blades prematurely. The indicator light (A) will come on when engine has started and is running. Be sure to
 Before using the wipers in cold weather, you press the electric rear window defogger turn the defogger switch off immediately
check to be sure that the wiper blades are not switch. Electric current will flow through the after the window is clear to save on battery
frozen to the windshield. Using the wipers power.
heating wires on the rear window to help
while the blades are frozen could cause the
wiper motor to burn out.
clear away moisture or frost.

Horn switch
CAUTION Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of

Type 2
BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.
 Do not place stickers, tape, or other items
that are attached with adhesive over the grid
wires on the rear window. Link System End User License
 When cleaning the inside rear window, use a
soft cloth and wipe lightly over the grid
Agreement
N00563801038
wires.
You have acquired a device that includes soft-
ware licensed to Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-
5
NOTE tion from JOHNSON CONTROLS Inc (the
 If your vehicle is equipped with heated mir- automotive experience business unit), and
rors, mist can also be removed from the out- their subsequent 3rd party suppliers. For a
side rearview mirrors when the rear window complete list of these 3rd party products and
defogger switch is pressed. (Refer to Link System (if so equipped) their end user license agreements, please go
“Heated mirror” on page 5-53.) N00563701095
to the following website.
The Link System control of the devices con- http://www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/fulldis-
nected via the USB input terminal or the closure.pdf
Horn switch
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface; the system allows
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so
N00523800156
the connected device to be operated by using
To honk the horn, press around the “ ” mark the switches in the vehicle or voice com- equipped)
on the steering wheel. mands.
N00563901228
See the following section for details on how
Type 1 to operate. The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allows for mak-
ing/receiving hands-free calls in the vehicle
Refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page
5-159. using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone
Refer to “USB input terminal” on page 5-181. based on the wireless communication tech-
Refer to “Listen to Audio Files on a USB nology commonly known as Bluetooth®. It
Device” on page 7-49. also allows the user to play music, saved in a
Refer to “Listen to Bluetooth Audio” on page Bluetooth® music player, from the vehicle’s
7-52. speakers.

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

The system is equipped with a voice recogni-
tion function, which allows you to make
NOTE NOTE
 If the ignition switch is left in the “ACC”  For detail of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
hands-free calls by simple switch operations
position, the accessory power will automati- refer to the following website:
and voice command operations using a
cally turn off after a certain period of time [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
defined voice tree. and you will no longer be able to use the You can access the Mitsubishi Motors North
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The accessory America website.
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can be used power comes on again if the ignition switch [For vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico]
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
5 “ACC” position.
is turned from the “ACC” position. Refer to
“ACC power auto-cutout function” on page
You can access the Mitsubishi Motors web-
site.
5-54. Please read and agree to the “Warning about
Before you can use the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot be used Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”,
face, you must pair the Bluetooth® device the websites mentioned above may connect
if the Bluetooth® device has a dead battery
you to websites other than the Mitsubishi
and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Refer to “Con- or the device power is turned off.
Motors website.
necting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and  Hands-free calls will not be possible if your http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
phone does not have service available. ucts/index.html
Bluetooth® device” on page 5-166.
 Some Bluetooth® devices are not compatible  Software updates by cellular phone/digital
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. audio device manufacturers may
 You can confirm the Link System software change/alter device connectivity.
BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.
version by pressing the HANG-UP button 3
times (press and hold 2 times and then press Steering control switch and microphone 
WARNING briefly) within 10 seconds. P.5-161
 Although the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface Voice recognition function  P.5-163
allows you to make hands-free calls, if you Useful voice commands  P.5-163
choose to use the cellular phone while Speaker enrollment function  P.5-165
driving, you must not allow yourself to be Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and
distracted from the safe operation of your
the Bluetooth® device  P.5-166
vehicle. Anything, including cellular
phone usage, that distracts you from the Operating a music player connected via Blue-
safe operation of your vehicle increases tooth®  P.5-170
your risk of an accident. How to make or receive hands-free calls 
 Refer to and comply with all state and P.5-171
local laws in your area regarding cellular Phonebook function  P.5-173
phone usage while driving.

Steering control switch and Type 2 SPEECH button

microphone  Press this button to change to voice recog-
N00564001138
nition mode.
Type 1 While the system is in voice recognition
mode, “Listening” will appear on the
audio display.
5
NOTE
 On vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi
Multi-Communication System, pressing the
SPEECH button will activate the voice rec-
ognition mode (a beep will sound when suc-
cessfully activated). To use the voice
1- Volume up button recognition of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
2- Volume down button press the PICK-UP button.
3- SPEECH button
4- PICK-UP button  If you press the button briefly while in
5- HANG-UP button voice recognition mode, it will interrupt
6- Microphone prompting and allow voice command
input.
Pressing the button longer will deactivate
Volume up button the voice recognition mode.
 Pressing this button briefly during a call
Press this button to increase the volume. will enable voice recognition and allow
voice command input.
Volume down button
PICK-UP button
Press this button to decrease the volume.  Press this button when an incoming call is
received to answer the telephone.


 If this button is pressed in the voice recog-
NOTE nition mode, the voice recognition mode
NOTE
 When not receiving incoming calls, pressing  If a cellular phone is within close proximity
will be deactivated.
the PICK-UP button on vehicles equipped of the microphone, it may distort the sound
with the Mitsubishi Multi-Communication quality. In this case, place the cellular phone
System, will activate the voice recognition of NOTE as far as possible from the microphone.
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.  When you press the SPEECH button (except
for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
5  When another call is received during a nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Communica-
call, press this button to put the first caller
tion System) to enter voice recognition mode
on hold and talk to the new caller. with a cellular phone paired to the system,
• In such circumstances, you can press the current information on the cellular phone,
button briefly to switch between callers. such as “remaining battery life,” “signal
You will switch to the first caller and the strength” or “roaming,” will be displayed on
other caller will be put on hold. the audio display.*
• To establish a three-way call in such situ- *: Some cellular phones will not send this
ations, press the SPEECH button (except information to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Com-  Call waiting and three-way calls can be used
munication System) or PICK-UP button by the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, only if it is
(for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi- possible to use those services with your cel-
Communication System) to enter voice lular phone.
recognition mode and then say “Join
calls.”
Microphone
HANG-UP button N00575800025
Your voice will be recognized by a micro-

 Press this button when an incoming call is phone in the overhead console, allowing you
received to refuse the call. to make hands-free calls with voice com-
 Press this button during a call to end the mands.
current call.
When another call is on hold, you will
switch to that call.


6. When the voice guide says “English
Voice recognition function Selecting the language
(Spanish, French or Japanese) selected,”
N00564101096
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for the language change process will be com-
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- pleted and the system will return to the
with a voice recognition function. nication System) or PICK-UP button (for main menu.
Simply say voice commands and you can per- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
form various operations and make or receive nication System). Useful voice commands
hands-free calls. 2. Say “Setup.” N00564200016 5
3. Say “Language.”
With the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, voice rec- 4. The voice guide will say “Select a lan-
ognition is possible for US English, North Help function
guage: English, Spanish, French or Japa- N00564300017
American Spanish, Canadian French and Jap- nese.” Say the desired language.
anese. The factory setting is “English.” (Example: “English”) The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped
5. The voice guide will say “English (Span- with a help function.
NOTE ish, French or Japanese) selected. Is this If you say “Help” when the system is waiting
 If the voice command that you say differs correct?” Say “Yes.” for a voice command input, the system will
from the predefined command or cannot be If you say “No,” the system will return to tell you a list of the commands that can be
recognized due to ambient noise or some Step 4. used under the circumstances.
other reason, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface
will ask you for the voice command again up NOTE Canceling
to 3 times.  The voice guide will repeat the same mes- N00564400018
 For best performance and further reduction sage twice. The first message is in the cur-
of ambient noise, the vehicle windows
There are 2 cancel functions.
rent language, and the second message is in
should be closed, lower the blower speed and the selected language.
If you are at the main menu, say “Cancel” to
refrain from conversation with your passen-  If many entries are registered in the vehicle exit from the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
gers while engaging the voice recognition phonebook, changing the language will take If you are anywhere else within the system,
function. a longer time. say “Cancel” to return to the main menu.
 Depending on the selected language, some  Changing the language deletes the mobile
functions may not be available. phonebook imported to the Bluetooth® 2.0 Confirmation function setting
interface. If you wish to use it, you will have
N00564501029
to import it again.
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped
with a confirmation function.

With the confirmation function activated, you passcode in order to use all functions of the 7. When the registration of the passcode is
are given more opportunities than normal to Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, except for recep- completed, the voice guide will say “Pass-
confirm a command when making various tion. code is enabled” and the system will
settings to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. This return to the main menu.
allows you to decrease the possibility that a Setting the passcode
setting is accidentally changed.
Use the following procedure to turn on the NOTE
The confirmation function can be turned on  Passcode will be required to access the sys-
security function by setting a passcode.
5 or off by following the steps below. tem after the next ignition cycle.
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for  It is required for a little time after engine
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for stop that the entered passcode is actually
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- recorded in the system. If the ignition switch
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for is made to “ACC” or “ON” or the engine is
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- started immediately after engine stop, there
nication System).
nication System). is a case when the entered passcode is not
2. Say “Setup.”
2. Say “Setup.” recorded in the system. At this time, please
3. Say “Passcode.” try to enter the passcode again.
3. Say “Confirmation prompts.”
4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is dis-
4. The voice guide will say “Confirmation
abled. Would you like to enable it?”
prompts are <on/off>. Would you like to Entering the passcode
Answer “Yes.”
turn confirmation prompts <off/on>.”
Answer “No” to cancel the setting of the If a passcode has been set and the security
Answer “Yes” to change the setting or
passcode and return to the main menu. function is enabled, the voice guide will say
answer “No” to keep the current setting.
5. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4- “Hands-free system is locked. State the pass-
5. The voice guide will say “Confirmation
digit passcode. Remember this passcode. code to continue” when the SPEECH button
prompts are <off/on>” and then the sys-
It will be required to use this system.” (except for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-
tem will return to the main menu.
Say a 4-digit number which you want to Communication System) or PICK-UP button
set as a passcode. (for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
Security function 6. For confirmation purposes, the voice nication System) is pressed to enter voice rec-
N00564601118 guide will say “Passcode <4-digit pass- ognition mode. Say the 4-digit passcode
It is possible to use a passcode as a security code>. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.” number to enter the passcode.
function by setting a passcode of your choice Answer “No” to return to the passcode
input in Step 5. If the entered passcode is wrong, the voice
for the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
guide will say “<4-digit passcode>, Incorrect
When the security function is turned on, it is
necessary to make a voice input of a 4-digit

passcode. Please try again.” Enter the correct 5. When the disabling of the passcode is 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
passcode. completed, the voice guide will say “Pass- shift lever (manual transaxle) in the “N”
code is disabled” and the system will (Neutral) position, or the selector lever
NOTE return to the main menu. {continuously variable transmission
 You can reenter the passcode as many times
(CVT)} or gearshift lever (Twin Clutch
SST) in the “P”(PARK) position, and then
as you want. Speaker enrollment function pull the parking brake lever.
 If you have forgotten your passcode, say N00564700011
“Cancel” to quit the voice input mode and
then check with an authorized Mitsubishi The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can use the NOTE 5
Motors dealer. speaker enrollment function to create a voice  Speaker enrollment is not possible unless the
model for one person per language. vehicle is parked. Make sure you park the
Disabling the passcode This makes it easier for the Bluetooth® 2.0 vehicle in a safe area before attempting
interface to recognise voice commands said speaker enrollment.
Use the following procedure to turn off the by you.
security function by disabling the passcode. You can turn a voice model registered with 2. Press the SPEECH button (except for
the speaker enrollment function on and off vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
NOTE whenever you want. nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
 System must be unlocked to disable the pass- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
code. nication System).
Speaker enrollment
N00564801080
3. Say “Voice training.”
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for 4. The voice guide will say “This operation
It takes about 2 to 3 minutes to complete the
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- must be performed in a quiet environment
speaker enrollment process.
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for while the vehicle is stopped. See the
To ensure the best results, run through the
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- owner’s manual for the list of required
process while in the driver’s seat, in an envi-
nication System). training phrases. Press and release the
ronment that is as quiet as possible (when
2. Say “Setup.” SPEECH button when you are ready to
there is no rain or strong winds and the vehi-
3. Say “Passcode.” begin. Press the HANG-UP button to can-
cle windows are closed). Please turn off your
4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is cel at any time.”
phone while in speaker enrollment to prevent
enabled. Would you like to disable it?” Press the SPEECH button to start the
interruption of the process.
Answer “Yes.” speaker enrollment process.
Use the following procedure for speaker
Answer “No” to cancel the disabling of enrollment.
the passcode and return to the main menu.


4. When enrollment is “enabled,” the voice
NOTE NOTE model is on; when enrollment is “dis-
 If you do not start the speaker enrollment  Completing the speaker enrollment process
abled,” the voice model is off. Say the
process within 3 minutes after pressing the will turn on the voice model automatically.
command that fits your needs.
SPEECH button, the speaker enrollment  The commands “Help” and “Cancel” will not
function will time out. Say “Retrain” to start the speaker enroll-
work in this mode.
The voice guide will say “Speaker enrollment process and recreate a new voice
ment has timed out.” The system will then model. (Refer to “Speaker enrollment” on
page 5-165.)
5 beep and the voice recognition mode will be
deactivated.
Enabling and disabling the voice
model and retraining
N00564901065 Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0
5. The voice guide will prompt for phrase 1.
You can turn a voice model registered with interface and Bluetooth® device
Repeat the corresponding phrase listed in
the speaker enrollment function on and off N00565001265
table “Enrollment commands” on page
whenever you want. Before you can make or receive hands-free
5-181.
You can also retrain the system. calls or play music using the Bluetooth® 2.0
The system will register your voice and
Use the following procedure to perform these interface function, you must pair the Blue-
then move on to the registration of the
actions.
next command. Continue the process until tooth® device and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
all phrases have been registered. 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- NOTE
NOTE nication System) or PICK-UP button (for  Pairing is required only when the device is
 To repeat the most recent voice training com- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- used for the first time. Once the device has
mand, press and release the SPEECH button. nication System). been paired with the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
 If you press the HANG-UP button anytime 2. Say “Voice training.” face, all you need is to bring the device into
during the process, the system will beep and 3. If you have completed a speaker enroll- the vehicle next time and the device will
stop the speaker enrollment process.
ment process once already, the voice connect to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface auto-
guide will say either “Enrollment is matically (if supported by the device).
6. When all enrollment commands have enabled. Would you like to disable or
been read out, the voice guide will say retrain?” or “Enrollment is disabled.
“Speaker enrollment is complete.” The Would you like to enable or retrain?” Up to 7 Bluetooth® devices can be paired
system will then end the speaker enroll- with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
ment process and return to the main If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are
menu. available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or

music player most recently connected is auto- 2. Press the SPEECH button (except for
NOTE
matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for  Some Bluetooth® devices require a specific
interface.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- pairing code. Please refer to the device man-
nication System). ual for pairing code requirements.
You can also change a Bluetooth® device to
3. Say “Setup.”  The pairing code entered here is only used
be connected.
4. Say “Pairing Options.” for the Bluetooth® connection certification.
5. The voice guide will say “Select one of It is any 4-digit number the user would like
To pair the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”
to select. 5
Remember the pairing code as it needs to be
Say “Pair.”
keyed into the Bluetooth® device later in the
To pair a Bluetooth® device with the Blue-
pairing process.
tooth® 2.0 interface, follow the steps below. NOTE Depending on the connection settings of the
 If 7 devices have already been paired, the
Bluetooth® device, this code may have to be
1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the voice guide will say “Maximum devices
entered each time you connect the Blue-
shift lever (manual transaxle) in the “N” paired” and then the system will end the
pairing process. To register a new device, tooth® device to the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
(Neutral) position, or the selector lever face. For the default connection settings,
{continuously variable transmission delete one device and then repeat the pairing
process. refer to the instructions for the device.
(CVT)} or gearshift lever (Twin Clutch
(Refer to “Deleting a device” on page
SST) in the “P” (PARK) position, and
5-168.) 7. The voice guide will say “Start pairing
then pull the parking brake lever.
procedure on the device. See the device
NOTE 6. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4- manual for instructions.” Enter in the
 You cannot pair any Bluetooth® device with
digit pairing code.” Say a 4-digit number. Bluetooth® device the 4-digit number you
When the confirmation function is on, the have registered in Step 6.
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface unless the vehi-
system will confirm whether the number
cle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth®
said is acceptable. Answer “Yes.” NOTE
device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, Answer “No” to return to pairing code
confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe  Depending on the Bluetooth® device, it may
selection. take a few minutes to pair it with the Blue-
location.
tooth® 2.0 interface.


When the confirmation function is on, the
NOTE Selecting a device
system will ask you again whether the
 If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog-
N00565101064
phone that you want to connect to is cor-
nize the Bluetooth® device, the voice guide If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are rect. Answer “Yes” to continue and con-
will say “Pairing has timed out” and the pair- available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or nect to the cellular phone.
ing process will be cancelled. music player most recently connected is auto- Answer “No,” and the voice guide will
Confirm that the device you are pairing sup-
matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 say “Please say.” Say the number of the
ports Bluetooth®, and try pairing it again. phone that you want to connect to.
5  If you enter the wrong number, the voice
interface.
You can connect to the other cellular phone or
guide will say “Pairing failed” and the pair- NOTE
music player by following setting change pro-
ing process will be cancelled.
Confirm the number is right, and try pairing
cedures.  You can connect to a phone at any time by
pressing the SPEECH button and saying the
it again.
number, even before all of the paired num-
To select a cellular phone
8. The voice guide will say “Please say the bers and device tags of corresponding cellu-
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for lar phones are read out by the system.
name of the device after the beep.” You
can assign a desired name for the Blue- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
tooth® device and register it as a device nication System) or PICK-UP button (for 5. The selected phone will be connected to
tag. Say the name you want to register vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The voice
after the beep. nication System). guide will say “<device tag> selected”
2. Say “Setup.” and then the system will return to the
NOTE 3. Say “Select phone.” main menu.
 When the confirmation function is on, after
4. After the voice guide says “Please say,”
repeating the device tag you have said, the the numbers of the cellular phones and
To select a music player
voice guide will ask “Is this correct?” device tags of corresponding cellular
Answer “Yes.” phones will be read out in order, starting 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
To change the device tag, answer “No” and with the cellular phone that has been most vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
then say the device tag again. recently connected. nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
Say the number of the cellular phone that vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
9. The voice guide will say “Pairing com- you want to connect to. nication System).
plete,” and the pairing process will end. 2. Say “Setup.”
3. Say “Select music player.”


4. After the voice guide says “Please say,” Answer “No,” the system will return to
Deleting a device
the numbers of the music players and Step 4.
device tags of corresponding music play- Use the following procedure to delete a 7. The voice guide will say “Deleted,” and
ers will be read out in order, starting with paired Bluetooth® device from the Blue- then the system will end the device dele-
the music player that has been most tion process.
recently connected. tooth® 2.0 interface.
Say the number of the music player that 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for NOTE
you want to connect to.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-  If the device deletion process fails for some
reason, the voice guide will say “Delete
5
system will ask you again whether the failed” and then the system will cancel delet-
music player that you want to connect to ing the device.
nication System).
is correct. Answer “Yes” to continue and 2. Say “Setup.”
connect to the music player. 3. Say “Pairing Options.”
Answer “No,” and the voice guide will To check a paired Bluetooth®
4. The voice guide will say “Select one of
say “Please say.” Say the number of the the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” device
music player that you want to connect to. Say “Delete.” N00565201023
5. After the voice guide says “Please say,” You can check a paired Bluetooth® device by
NOTE the numbers of the devices and device following the steps below.
 You can connect to a music player at any tags of corresponding devices will be read
time by pressing the SPEECH button and 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
out in order, starting with the device that
saying the number, even before all of the
has been most recently connected. After it vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
paired numbers and device tags of corre-
completes reading all pairs, the voice nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
sponding music players are read out by the
system. guide will say “or all.” vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
Say the number of the device that you nication System).
want to delete from the system. 2. Say “Setup.”
5. The selected music player will be con- If you want to delete all paired phones 3. Say “Pairing Options.”
nected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. from the system, say “All.” 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of
The voice guide will say “<device tag> 6. For confirmation purposes, the voice the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”
selected” and then the system will return guide will say “Deleting <device tag> Say “List.”
to the main menu. <number>. Is this correct?” or “Deleting
all devices. Is this correct?”
Answer “Yes” to delete the phone(s).


5. The voice guide will read out device tags
Changing a device tag NOTE
of corresponding devices in order, starting
N00565301024  You can press and release the SPEECH but-
with the Bluetooth® device that has been ton while the list is being read, and immedi-
You can change the device tag of a paired cel-
most recently connected. ately say the number of the device tag you
lular phone or music player.
6. After the device tags of all paired Blue- want to change.
Follow the steps below to change a device
tooth® devices have been read, the system tag.
will say “End of list, would you like to 6. The voice guide will say “New name,
5 start from the beginning?” 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for please.” Say the name you want to regis-
To hear the list again from the beginning, vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- ter as a new device tag.
answer “Yes.” nication System) or PICK-UP button (for When the confirmation function is on, the
When you are done, answer “No” to vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- voice guide will say “<New device tag>.
return to the main menu. nication System). Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.”
2. Say “Setup.” Answer “No,” you can say the new device
3. Say “Pairing Options.”
NOTE 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of
tag you want to register again.
 If you press and release the SPEECH button 7. The device tag is changed.
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” When the change is complete, the voice
and say “Continue” or “Previous” while the
list is being read, the system will advance or Say “Edit.” guide will say “New name saved” and
rewind the list. 5. The voice guide will say “Please say,” and then the system will return to the main
Say “Continue” to proceed to the device with read out the numbers of the Bluetooth® menu.
the next highest number or “Previous” to devices and device tags of corresponding
return to the phone with the previous num- devices in order, starting with the Blue-
ber. Operating a music player con-
tooth® that has been most recently con-
 You can change the device tag by pressing
nected. nected via Bluetooth®
and releasing the SPEECH button and then
saying “Edit” while the list is being read. After all paired device tags have been N00565401083
 You can change the phone to be connected read, the voice guide will say “Which For the operation of a music player connected
by pressing and releasing the SPEECH but- device, please?” Say the number of the via Bluetooth®, refer to the following sec-
ton and then saying “Select phone” while the device tag you want to change. tions.
list is being read.
 You can change the music player to be con-
nected by pressing and releasing the
SPEECH button and then saying “Select
music player” while the list is being read.


Switching between hands-free mode and pri- 3. After the voice guide says “Number
For vehicles equipped with the AM/FM
vate mode P.5-173 please,” say the telephone number.
radio/CD player
4. The voice guide will say “Dialing <num-
Refer to “Listen to Bluetooth Audio” on page NOTE ber recognized>.”
7-52.  Hands-free calls may not operate correctly The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will then
when you place or receive the call directly make the call.
For vehicles equipped with the DISPLAY from your cellular phone, instead of using When the confirmation function is on, the
AUDIO the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. system will confirm the telephone number
again. To continue with that number,
5
Refer to the separate owner’s manual. answer “Yes.”
To make a call To change the telephone number, answer
For vehicles equipped with the N00565601072 “No.” The system will say “Number
Mitsubishi Multi-Communication Sys- You can make a call in the following 3 ways please” then say the telephone number
tem again.
using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface:
Refer to the separate owner’s manual. Making a call by saying a telephone number,
making a call using the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- NOTE
face’s phonebook, and making a call by redi-  In the case of English, the system will recog-
How to make or receive hands- aling. nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the
free calls number “0.”
N00565500074 Making a call by using the telephone  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface supports num-
number bers (0 to 9) and characters (+, # and *).
You can make or receive hands-free calls
 The maximum supported telephone number
using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone You can make a call by saying the telephone length is as follows:
connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. number. • International telephone number: + and tele-
You can also use the phonebooks in the Blue- phone numbers (to 18 digits).
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
tooth® 2.0 interface to make calls without • Except for international telephone number:
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- telephone numbers (to 19 digits).
dialing telephone numbers.
To make a call P.5-171 vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
Send function P.5-173 nication System).
Receiving calls P.5-173 2. Say “Dial.”
Mute function P.5-173


4. If there is only 1 match, the system will
Making a call using a phonebook
proceed to Step 5.
NOTE
 If the name you selected has matching data
You can make calls using the vehicle phone- If there are 2 or more matches, the voice
in the vehicle phonebook but no telephone
book or mobile phonebook of the Bluetooth® guide will say “More than one match was
number is registered under the selected loca-
2.0 interface. found, would you like to call <returned tion, the voice guide will say
name>.” If that person is the one you want “{home/work/mobile/other} not found for
For details on the phonebooks, refer to to call, answer “Yes.” <name>. Would you like to add location or
Answer “No,” the name of the next
5 “Phonebook function” on page 5-173.
matching person will be uttered by the
try again?”
Say “Try again,” and the system will return
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for voice guide. to Step 3.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- Say “Add location” and you can register an
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for NOTE additional telephone number under the
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- selected location.
 If you say “No” to all names read by the sys-
nication System).  If the name you selected has matching data
tem, the voice guide will say “Name not
in the mobile phonebook but no telephone
2. Say “Call.” found, returning to main menu” and the sys-
tem will return to the main menu. number is registered under the selected loca-
tion, the voice guide will say
NOTE “{home/work/mobile/other} not found for
 If you say “Call” when the vehicle phone- 5. If only 1 telephone number is registered <name>. Would you like to try again?”
book and the mobile phonebook are empty, under the name you just said, the voice Answer “Yes,” and the system will return to
the voice guide will say “The vehicle phone- guide will proceed to Step 6. Step 3.
book is empty. Would you like to add a new If 2 or more telephone numbers are regis- Answer “No,” and the call making will be
entry now?” cancelled. Start over again from Step 1.
tered that match the name you just said,
Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will say
the voice guide will say “Would you like
“Entering the phonebook - new entry menu.”
You can now create data in the vehicle to call <name> at [home], [work], 6. The voice guide will say “Calling <name>
phonebook. [mobile], or [other]?” Select the location <location>” and then the system will dial
Answer “No,” the system will return to the to call. the telephone number.
main menu.
3. After the voice guide says “Name please,”

say the name you want to call, from those
registered in the phonebook.


response to an automated system, press the Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying
NOTE SPEECH button and speak “1 2 3 4 pound “Mute” during a call will turn ON the mute
 When the confirmation function is on, the
send” and the 1234# will be sent via your cel- function and mute the microphone.
system will check if the name and location of
lular phone. Saying “Mute off” in the same way will turn
the receiver are correct. If the name is cor-
rect, answer “Yes.” off the mute function and cancel the mute on
To change the name or location to call, Receiving calls the microphone.
answer “No.” The system will return to Step N00565800019
3.
If an incoming phone call is received while Switching between hands-free 5
the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” mode and private mode
Redialing position, the audio system will be automati- N00566600014
cally turned on and switched to the incoming The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can switch
You can redial the last number called, based call, even when the audio system was origi- between hands-free mode (hands-free calls)
on the history of dialed calls in the paired cel- nally off. and private mode (calls using cellular phone).
lular phone. The voice guide announcement for the If you press the SPEECH button and say
incoming call will be output from the front “Transfer call” during a hands-free call, you
Use the following procedure to redial. passenger’s seat speaker. can stop the hands-free mode and talk in pri-
If the CD player or radio was playing when vate mode.
the incoming call was received, the audio sys- To return to hands-free mode, press the
tem will mute the sound from the CD player SPEECH button again and say “Transfer
or radio and output only the incoming call. call.”
To receive the call, press the PICK-UP button
nication System).
on the steering wheel control switch.
2. Say “Redial.” Phonebook function
When the call is over, the audio system will
return to its previous state. N00566000018
Send function
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface has 2 types of
N00565700018
Mute function unique phonebooks that are different from the
During a call, press the SPEECH button to N00565900010 phonebook stored in the cellular phone. They
enter voice recognition mode, then say are the vehicle phonebook and the mobile
At any time during a call, you can mute the
“<numbers> SEND” to generate DTMF phonebook.
vehicle microphone.
tones.
For example, if during a call you need to sim-
ulate the pressing of a phone button as a


These phonebooks are used to register tele-  To register a telephone number in
phone numbers and make calls to desired
NOTE
the vehicle phonebook  If the maximum number of entries are
numbers via voice recognition function. N00580500020
already registered, the voice guide will say
You can register a telephone number in the “The phonebook is full. Would you like to
NOTE vehicle phonebook in the following 2 ways: delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to
 Disconnecting the battery cable will not Reading out a telephone number, and select- delete a registered name.
delete information registered in the phone- ing and transferring 1 phonebook entry from If you say “No,” the system will return to the
5 book. the phonebook of the cellular phone. main menu.
5. When the name has been registered, the

 To register by reading out a tele-
Vehicle phonebook voice guide will say “home, work,
phone number
N00566101117
N00580600021
mobile, or other?” Say the location for
This phonebook is used when making calls 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for which you want to register a telephone
with the voice recognition function. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- number.
Up to 32 names can be registered in the vehi- nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
cle phonebook per language. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- NOTE
Also, each entry has 4 locations associated nication System).  When the confirmation function is on, the
with: home, work, mobile and other. You can 2. Say “Phonebook.” voice guide will say “<Location>. Is this cor-
register one telephone number for each loca- rect?” Answer “Yes.”
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
Answer “No” to return to location selection
tion. the following: new entry, edit number,
in Step 5.
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or If a telephone number has been registered for
You can register a desired name as a name for import contact.” Say “New entry.” the selected location, the voice guide will say
any phonebook entry registered in the vehicle 4. The voice guide will say “Name please.” “The current number is <telephone number>,
phonebook. Say your preferred name to register it. number please.”
Names and telephone numbers can be If you do not want to change the telephone
changed later on. number, say “cancel” or the original number
to keep it registered.
The vehicle phonebook can be used with all
paired cellular phones.
6. The voice guide will say “Number
please.” Say the telephone number to reg-
ister it.

 To select and transfer one phone- 2. Say “Phonebook.”

NOTE 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
 In the case of English, the system will recog- book entry from the phonebook of
the following: new entry, edit number,
nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the the cellular phone
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
number “0.” N00580700022
import contact.” Say “Import contact.”
You can select 1 phonebook entry from the
4. The voice guide will say “Would you like
7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone phonebook of the cellular phone and register
to import a single entry or all contacts?”
number you have just read, and then reg- it in the vehicle phonebook.
Say “Single entry.”
ister the number. The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will become
5
When the telephone number has been reg- NOTE ready to receive transferred phonebook
istered, the voice guide will say “Number  Transfer is not permitted unless the vehicle is data.
saved. Would you like to add another parked. Before transferring, make sure that
number for this entry?” the vehicle is parked in a safe location.
NOTE
To add another telephone number for a  All or part of data may not be transferred,
 If the maximum number of entries are
new location for the current entry, answer even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
already registered, the voice guide will say
“Yes.” The system will return to location tooth®, depending on the compatibility of “The phonebook is full. Would you like to
selection in Step 5. the device. delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to
Answer “No” to end the registration pro-  The maximum supported telephone number delete a registered name.
cess and return to the main menu. length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of If you say “No,” the system will return to the
20 digits or more will be truncated to the first main menu.
19 digits.
NOTE  If telephone numbers contain characters
 When the confirmation function is on, after other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters 5. After the voice guide says “Ready to
repeating the telephone number you have are deleted before the transfer. receive a contact from the phone. Only a
read, the voice guide will ask “Is this cor-
 For the connection settings on the cellular home, a work, and a mobile number can
rect?” Answer “Yes.”
phone side, refer to the instructions for the be imported,” the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
Answer “No” to return to telephone number
cellular phone.
registration in step 6. face will receive the phonebook data from
the Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone.
nication System).


6. Operate the Bluetooth® compatible cellu- 8. The voice guide will say “Adding  Editing a telephone number
lar phone to set it up so that the phone- <name>.” N00579900024
book entry you want to register in the When the confirmation function is on, the 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
vehicle phonebook can be transferred to system will ask if the name is correct. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
Answer “Yes.” nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
Answer “No,” the voice guide will say vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
“Name please.” Register a different name. nication System).
NOTE
9. The voice guide will say “Numbers 2. Say “Phonebook.”
5  If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog- saved.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
nise the Bluetooth® compatible cellular 10. The voice guide will say “Would you like the following: new entry, edit number,
phone or the connection takes too much to import another contact?” edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
time, the voice guide will say “Import con-
Answer “Yes” if you want to continue import contact”. Say “Edit number.”
tact has timed out” and then the system will
with the registration. You can continue to 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the
cancel the registration. In such case, start
over again from Step 1.
register a new phonebook entry from Step name of the entry you would like to edit,
 Pressing the HANG-UP button or pressing
5. or say list names.” Say the name of the
and holding the SPEECH button will cancel Answer “No,” the system will return to phonebook entry you want to edit.
the registration. the main menu.
NOTE
7. When the reception is complete, the voice  To change the content registered in  Say “List names,” and the names registered
in the phonebook will be read out in order.
guide will say “<Number of telephone the vehicle phonebook
Refer to “Listening to the list of registered
numbers that had been registered in the N00579800023
names” on page 5-177.
import source> numbers have been You can change or delete a name or telephone
imported. What name would you like to number registered in the vehicle phonebook.
use for these numbers?” You can also listen to the list of names regis- 5. The voice guide will say “Home, work,
Say the name you want to register for this tered in the vehicle phonebook. mobile or other?” Select and say the loca-
phonebook entry. tion where the telephone number you
want to change or add is registered.
NOTE
NOTE  The system must have at least one entry.
 If the entered name is already used for other system will check the target name and
phonebook entry or similar to a name used location again. Answer “Yes” if you want
for other phonebook entry, that name cannot to continue with the editing.
be registered.


Answer “No,” the system will return to  Editing a name 6. The voice guide will say “Name please.”
Step 3. N00580100026 Say the new name you want to register.
6. The voice guide will say “Number, 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for 7. The registered name will be changed.
please.” Say the telephone number you vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- When the change is complete, the system
want to register. nication System) or PICK-UP button (for will return to the main menu.
NOTE nication System).  Listening to the list of registered names
2. Say “Phonebook.”
 If the telephone number is already registered
5
N00580200027
in the selected location, the voice guide will 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
say “The current number is <current num- the following: new entry, edit number, vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
ber>. New number, please.” Say a new tele- edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
phone number to change the current number. import contact.” Say “Edit name.” vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
4. The voice guide will say “Please say the nication System).
7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone name of the entry you would like to edit, 2. Say “Phonebook.”
number. or say list names.” Say the name you want 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
When the confirmation function is on, the to edit. the following: new entry, edit number,
system will ask if the number is correct. edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
Answer “Yes.” NOTE import contact.” Say “List names.”
Answer “No,” the system will return to  Say “List names,” and the names registered 4. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will read out the
the Step 3. in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer entries in the phonebook in order.
8. Once the telephone number is registered, to “Listening to the list of registered names” 5. When the voice guide is done reading the
on page 5-177. list, it will say “End of list, would you like
the voice guide will say “Number saved”
and then the system will return to the to start from the beginning?” When you
main menu. 5. The voice guide will say “Changing want to check the list again from the
<name>.” beginning, answer “Yes.”
NOTE When the confirmation function is on, the When you are done, answer “No” to
 If the location where a telephone number system will check if the name is correct. return to the previous or main menu.
was already registered has been overwritten Answer “Yes” if you want to continue
with a new number, the voice guide will say with the editing based on this information.
“Number changed” and then the system will Answer “No,” the system will return to
return to the main menu.
Step 4.


4. The voice guide will say “Please say the 6. The system will ask if you really want to
NOTE name of the entry you would like to delete the selected telephone number(s) to
 You can call, edit or delete a name that is
delete, or say list names.” Say the name of go ahead with the deletion, answer “Yes.”
being read out.
the phonebook entry in which the tele- Answer “No,” the system will cancel
Press the SPEECH button and say “Call” to
call the name, “Edit name” to edit it, or phone number you want to delete is regis- deleting the telephone number(s) and then
“Delete” to delete it. tered. return to Step 4.
The system will beep and then execute your 7. When the telephone number deletion is
NOTE complete, the voice guide will say
5 command.
 If you press the SPEECH button and say  Say “List names,” and the names registered “<name> <location> deleted” and then
“Continue” or “Previous” while the list is in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer the system will return to the main menu.
being read, the system will advance or to “Listening to the list of registered names” If all locations are deleted, the system will
rewind the list. Say “Continue” to proceed to on page 5-177. say “<name> and all locations deleted”
the next entry or “Previous” to return to the and the name will be removed from the
previous entry.
5. If only one telephone number is registered phonebook. If numbers still remain under
in the selected phonebook entry, the voice the entry, the name will retain the other
guide will say “Deleting <name> <loca- associated numbers.
 Deleting a telephone number
N00580300028 tion>.”
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for If multiple telephone numbers are regis-  Erasing the phonebook
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- tered in the selected phonebook entry, the N00580400029
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for voice guide will say “Would you like to You can delete all registered information
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- delete [home], [work], [mobile], [other], from the vehicle phonebook.
nication System). or all?”
2. Say “Phonebook.” Select the location to delete, and the voice 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of guide will say “Deleting <name> <loca- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
the following: new entry, edit number, tion>.” nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
import contact.” Say “Delete.” NOTE nication System).
 To delete the telephone numbers from all 2. Say “Phonebook.”
locations, say “All.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
the following: new entry, edit number,
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
import contact.” Say “Erase all.”


4. For confirmation purposes, the voice The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface automatically
guide will ask “Are you sure you want to
NOTE
converts from text to voice the names regis-  All or part of data may not be transferred,
erase everything from your hands-free tered in the transferred phonebook entries, even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
system phonebook?” Answer “Yes.” and creates names.
Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all tooth®, depending on the compatibility of
the device.
registered information in the phonebook
and return to the main menu.
NOTE  Only a home, a work, and a mobile number
 Only the mobile phonebook transferred from can be imported.
5. The voice guide will say “You are about
to delete everything from your hands-free
the connected cellular phone can be used  The maximum supported telephone number 5
with that cellular phone. length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of
system phonebook. Do you want to con- 20 digits or more will be truncated to the first
 You cannot change the names and telephone
tinue?” Answer “Yes” to continue. numbers in the phonebook entries registered 19 digits.
Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all in the mobile phonebook. You cannot select  If telephone numbers contain characters
registered information in the phonebook and delete specific phonebook entries, either. other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters
and return to the main menu. To change or delete any of the above, change are deleted before the transfer.
6. The voice guide will say “Please wait, the applicable information in the source  For the connection settings on the cellular
erasing the hands-free system phone- phonebook of the cellular phone and then phone side, refer to the instructions for the
book” and then the system will delete all transfer the phonebook again. cellular phone.
data in the phonebook.
To import a devices phonebook 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
When the deletion is complete, the voice
guide will say “Hands-free system phone-
Follow the steps below to transfer to the nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
book erased” and then the system will
mobile phonebook the phonebook stored in vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
return to the main menu.
the cellular phone. nication System).
2. Say “Phonebook.”
Mobile phonebook 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
NOTE
N00566201062 the following: new entry, edit number,
 Transfer should be completed while the vehi-
All entries in the phonebook stored in the cel- cle is parked. Before transferring, make sure edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
lular phone can be transferred in a batch and that the vehicle is parked in a safe location. import contact.” Say “Import contact.”
registered in the mobile phonebook.  The already stored phonebook in the mobile 4. The voice guide will say “Would you like
Up to 7 mobile phonebooks, each containing phonebook is overwritten by the stored to import a single entry or all contacts?”
up to 1,000 names, can be registered. phonebook in the cellular phone. Say “All contacts.”


5. The voice guide will say “Importing the 6. When the transfer is complete, the voice The term “IC:” before the radio certification
contact list from the mobile phonebook. guide will say “Import complete” and number only signifies that Industry Canada
This may take several minutes to com- then the system will return to the main technical specifications were met.
plete. Would you like to continue?” menu. The antenna used for this transmitter must not
Answer “Yes,” transferring to the mobile be co-located or operating in conjunction
phonebook the phonebook stored in the with any other antenna or transmitter. End-
cellular phone will start.
General information users and installers must be provided with
N00566301106
Answer “No,” the system will return to installation instructions and transmitter oper-
5 the main menu. MODEL: MMC FCC ID: CB2MDGMY10 ating conditions for satisfying RF exposure
IC: 279B-MDGMY10 compliance.
NOTE Your Bluetooth® 2.0 interface operates on a FCC Notice: This equipment has been tested
 The transfer may take some time to complete radio frequency subject to Federal Communi- and found to comply with the limits for a
depending on the number of contacts. cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi- Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of
 If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface could not be cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
connected to the Bluetooth® compatible cel- Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This provide reasonable protection against harmful
lular phone, the voice guide will say “Unable device complies with Part 15 of the FCC interference in a residential installation.
to transfer contact list from phone” and then Rules and RSS-210 of the Industry Canada This equipment generates, uses and can radi-
the system will return to the main menu. Rules. Operation is subject to the following ate radio frequency energy and, if not
 If you press the HANG-UP button or press two conditions: installed and used in accordance with the
and hold the SPEECH button during the data instructions, may cause harmful interference
transfer, the transfer will be cancelled and  This device may not cause harmful inter- to radio communications.
the system will return to the main menu. ference. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
 If an error occurs during the data transfer, all  This device must accept any interference ence will not occur in a particular installation.
transfer will be cancelled and the voice guide received, including interference that may If this equipment does cause harmful interfer-
will say “Unable to complete the phonebook cause undesired operation. ence to radio or television reception, which
import” and then the system will return to
the main menu.
can be determined by turning the equipment
 If there are no contacts in the phonebook, the CAUTION off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
voice guide will say “There are no contacts  Changes or modifications made to this correct the interference by one or more of the
on the connected phone.” equipment not expressly approved by the following measures:
manufacturer may void the FCC authoriza-
tion to operate this equipment.  Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
 Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
USB input terminal (if so equipped)

 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a *:“iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple
circuit different from that to which the Inc. in the United States and other coun-
receiver is connected. tries.
 Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
ICES Notice: This Class B digital apparatus How to connect a USB memory
complies with Canadian ICES-003. device
N00566800074
5
Enrollment commands 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn
N00566401093 the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi-
tion. 4. Connect the USB connector cable (C) to
2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A) in the USB input terminal (D).
the glove compartment.
USB input terminal (if so

equipped)
N00566701070 WARNING
3. Connect a commercially available USB  An open glove compartment door can
You can connect your USB memory device or connector cable (C) to the USB memory cause a serious injury or death to the front
iPod* to play music files stored in the USB device (B). passenger in an accident, even if the pas-
memory device or iPod. senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
The following explains how to connect and keep the glove compartment door closed
remove a USB memory device or iPod. when driving.


3. Connect the Dock connector (C) to the
NOTE iPod (B).
WARNING
 Do not connect the USB memory device to  An open glove compartment door can
the USB input terminal directly. cause a serious injury or death to the front
The USB memory device may be damaged. passenger in an accident, even if the pas-
 When closing the glove compartment, be senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
careful not to trap the USB connector cable. keep the glove compartment door closed
when driving.
5 5. To remove the USB connector cable, turn
the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi- NOTE
tion first and perform the installation steps  When closing the glove compartment, be
in reverse. careful not to trap the connector cable.
How to connect an iPod NOTE 5. To remove the Dock connector, turn the
N00566900020
 Use a genuine Dock connector from Apple ignition switch to the “LOCK” position
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn Inc. first and perform the installation steps in
the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi- reverse.
tion. 4. Connect the Dock connector (C) to the
2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A) in USB input terminal (D). Types of connectable devices
the glove compartment.
and supported file specifica-
tions
N00567001054
Except for vehicles equipped with

the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface
N00583200028
For details about the types of connectable

devices and supported file specifications,
refer to the following pages and manuals.

For vehicles equipped with the AM/FM Model name Condition NOTE
radio/CD player Storage capacity of  Depending on the type of the USB memory
USB memory device
256 Mbytes or more device or other device connected, the con-
Refer to “Listen to an iPod” on page 7-47, nected device may not function properly or
“Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device” on Models other than Digital audio player
the available functions may be limited.
page 7-49 and “Audio Files USB memory supporting mass
 It is recommended to use an iPod with firm-
(MP3/WMA/AAC)” on page 7-34. devices and iPods storage class ware updated to the latest version.
For these connectable device types, “iPod*,”

 You can charge your iPod by connecting it to
the USB input terminal when the ignition
5
For vehicles equipped with the DISPLAY
AUDIO “iPod classic*,” “iPod nano*,” “iPod touch*” switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
and “iPhone*,” refer to the following web-  Do not keep your USB memory device or
Refer to the separate owner’s manual. site: iPod in your vehicle.
[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]  It is recommended that you back up the files
You can access the Mitsubishi Motors North in case of data damage.
For vehicles equipped with the
America website.  Do not connect to the USB input terminal
Mitsubishi Multi-Communication Sys-
any device (hard disk, card reader, memory
tem [For vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico]
reader, etc.) other than the connectable
You can access the Mitsubishi Motors web-
devices specified in the previous section.
Refer to the separate owner’s manual. site. Please read and agree to the “Warning The device and/or data may be damaged. If
about Links to the Web Sites of Other Com- any of these devices was connected by mis-
For vehicles equipped with the panies”. The websites mentioned above may take, remove it after turning the ignition
connect you to websites other than the
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface switch to the “LOCK” position.
Mitsubishi Motors website.
N00583300029
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
For details about the types of connectable ucts/index.html  File specifications
devices and supported file specifications, N00583500021
refer to the following section. *: “iPod,” “iPod classic,” “iPod nano,” You can play music files of the following
“iPod touch,” and “iPhone” are regis- specifications that are saved in a USB mem-
 Device types tered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the ory device or other device supporting mass
N00583400020 United States and other countries. storage class. When you connect your iPod,
Devices of the following types can be con- playable file specifications depend on the
nected. connected iPod.

Sun visors
Item Condition Vanity mirror Card holder
MP3, WMA, AAC,
File format Cards can be slipped into the front (A) of the
WAV The vanity mirrors are located on the back of
lid of the vanity mirror.
Maximum number of the sun visors.
levels Level 8
(including the root)
5 Number of folders 700

Number of files 65,535
Sun visors
N00524600308
Fold the sun visor downward (1) to reduce

front glare while driving. To reduce side
glare, turn the visor to the side (2).
12 V power outlet
N00525000556
CAUTION
 Be aware that using electronic equipment
with the engine off may run the battery
down.
 When the 12 V power outlet is not in use, be
sure to put on the plug or close the 12 V
power outlet cover. This will prevent the 12
V power outlet from becoming dirty and pos-
sibly short-circuiting.

Interior lights
12 V power outlets are located in front of the
Type 1
floor console (Type 1, Type 2) and inside of
the floor console box (Type 3).
NOTE
 If your vehicle is equipped with two 12 V
power outlets, both power outlets can be
used simultaneously. 5
CAUTION
 Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory
operating at 12 V and 120 W or less. Type 2
When using two 12 V power outlets or 12 V Interior lights
power outlet and cigarette lighter simultane- N00525300461
ously, make sure that the total power con-

sumption of these does not exceed 120 W at
12 V.
Type 1, Type 2
The accessory can be operated when the igni-

tion switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
To use a “plug-in” type accessory, pull out the Type 3 (if so equipped)
plug, then insert the plug in the socket. 1- Dome light (Rear) (if so equipped)
The accessory can be operated when the igni- P.5-186
tion switch is in any position. 2- Dome light (Front)/Reading lights (if
To use a “plug-in” type accessory, open the so equipped) P.5-186
cover, then insert the plug in the socket.

Interior lights
 The driver’s door is closed after all the Reading lights
Dome light (Front)/Reading other doors are closed while the lock
lights (if so equipped) knob of the driver’s door is in the lock
N00553800067
N00525801261 position. Regardless of the dome light switch position,

 The door is closed and the power door when you press the lens, the light on the side
that is pressed illuminates; when you press
Dome light (Front) lock switch is used to lock the doors.
the lens again, the light goes off.
 In vehicles equipped with the keyless
entry system, the keyless entry system
5 The dome light can be turned on by sliding remote control transmitter is used to
the dome light switch. lock the doors.
 In vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key, the doors are locked
using the F.A.S.T.-key.
NOTE
 When the engine is started using the key
while the doors are closed, if you remove the
key, the dome light will illuminate for about
30 seconds before going off.
 When the engine is started using the
F.A.S.T.-key while the doors are closed, if Dome light (Rear) (if so equipped)
1- (DOOR) the ignition switch is moved to the “LOCK” N00525401485
The dome light comes on when any door position, the dome light will illuminate for
is opened. When all the doors are closed, about 30 seconds before going off. The dome light can be turned on by sliding
the dome light illuminates for about 30  The time until the light goes off can be the dome light switch.
adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi
seconds then goes off. However, the light
Motors dealer for details.
goes off immediately if:
 The door is closed while the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position. 2- (OFF)
The dome light goes off.

Storage spaces
 In vehicles equipped with the The lights come on again if the ignition
F.A.S.T.-key, the doors are locked switch is turned to the “ON” or “ACC” posi-
using the F.A.S.T.-key. tion, any door or the trunk lid is opened and
closed, or the keyless entry system or
NOTE F.A.S.T.-key is operated.
 When the engine is started using the key
while the doors are closed, if you remove the NOTE
key, the dome light will illuminate for about
30 seconds before going off.
 The interior light auto-cutout function can be 5
deactivated. The time until the lights auto-
 When the engine is started using the matically go off can be adjusted. See your
F.A.S.T.-key while the doors are closed, if authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
1- (ON) the ignition switch is moved to the “LOCK” details.
The dome light comes on. position, the dome light will illuminate for
2- () about 30 seconds before going off.
The dome light comes on when any door  The time until the light goes off can be
is opened. When all the doors are closed, adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi Storage spaces
the dome light illuminates for about 30 Motors dealer for details. N00526400485
seconds then goes off. However, the light

goes off immediately if: CAUTION
3- (OFF)  Never leave lighters, carbonated drink cans,
 The door is closed while the ignition
The dome light goes off. or spectacles in the cabin when parking the
switch is in the “ON” position.
vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin will
 The driver’s door is closed after all become extremely hot, so lighters and other
the other doors are closed while the
lock knob of the driver’s door is in Interior light auto-cutout func- flammable items may catch fire and
unopened drink cans (including beer cans)
the lock position. tion (dome light and other may rupture. The heat may also deform or
 The door is closed and the power lights) crack plastic spectacle parts.
door lock switch is used to lock the N00526301465  Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while
doors. driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a
If any of the interior lights are left on with the
 In vehicles equipped with the keyless storage space could otherwise cause injuries
ignition switch in the “LOCK” position, the during a sudden stop.
entry system, the keyless entry sys-
lights go off automatically after about 30
tem remote control transmitter is used
minutes.
to lock the doors.

Storage spaces
[RALLIART]
NOTE
 Do not leave valuables in any storage space
when leaving the vehicle.
[Except for RALLIART]
WARNING
1- Luggage floor boxes P.5-190
 An open glove compartment door can
2- Floor console box P.5-189 cause a serious injury or death to the front
3- Front console tray (if so equipped) passenger in an accident, even if the pas-
P.5-189 senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
1- Floor console box (if so equipped) 4- Front console boxes (if so equipped) keep the glove compartment door closed
P.5-189 P.5-189 when driving.
2- Front console tray (if so equipped) 5- Glove compartment P.5-188
P.5-189
3- Front console boxes (if so equipped) NOTE
P.5-189 Glove compartment  The USB input terminal (if so equipped) is
4- Glove compartment P.5-188 N00551500246 located in the glove compartment. For
details, refer to “USB input terminal” on
To open the glove compartment, pull the
page 5-181.
lever (A).
Card holder
There is a card holder on the inside of the

glove compartment.

Storage spaces
CAUTION Lower box

 Do not use the front console tray as an ash-
tray.
This could cause a fire.
Front console boxes (if so equipped)

N00546401071 5
To open, push the lid.
NOTE Upper box

 Up to 2 cards will fit in the card holder.
CAUTION
 Do not use the front console boxes as an ash-
Front console tray (if so equipped) tray.
N00547800017
This could cause a fire.
The front console tray is on the front console

part. Floor console box with lid (if so
equipped)
N00551600188
To open the floor console box, lift the release

lever (A) and raise the lid.

Cup holder
Luggage floor boxes (if so Type 1

equipped)
N00552400066
The boxes for storing articles are located

inside the luggage compartment.
To use the boxes, remove the floor mat (A)
5 and raise the lids (B).
Tissue holder
The tissue holder (A) is located on the under- Type 2

side of the floor console box lid.
To use the cup holder, open up the lid.
Cup holder
N00527300351
For the front seat
The cup holder is located the middle of the

floor console.
The cup holder is designed for holding cups
or drink-cans securely.

Bottle holder
CAUTION Bottle holder

 Do not drink beverages while driving your N00502800049
vehicle.
This is distracting and could cause an acci- CAUTION
dent.  Do not drink beverages while driving your
vehicle. This is distracting and could cause
an accident.
For the rear seat (if so equipped)  Vibration and shaking while driving may 5
N00537000159
cause beverages to spill. Be very careful, as
spilling hot beverages could cause burns.
This cup holder is located in the rear seat arm
rest (A).
Pull the rear arm rest down to use the cup NOTE
holder.  Make sure all lids are tightly closed when
Assist grip
N00559000029
storing beverages that are in plastic bottles,
etc. These grips are to support the body by hand
 Some beverages may not be stored, depend- while seated in the vehicle.
ing on the size and shape of the plastic bot-
tles, etc.
There are bottle holders located on both sides

of the front seats.

Coat hook (if so equipped)
CAUTION WARNING
 Do not use the assist grips when getting into  Do not put a hanger or any heavy or
or out of the vehicle. pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur-
The assist grips could detach and cause an tain airbag was activated, any such item
accident. could be propelled away with great force
and could prevent the curtain airbag from
inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly
5 Coat hook (if so equipped) on the coat hook (without using a hanger).
Make sure there are no heavy or sharp
N00553600108 objects in the pockets of clothes that you
hang on the coat hook.
There is a coat hook on the rear seat assist
grip of the driver’s side.

Driving safety
Fuel economy ...................................................................................6-2

Driving, alcohol and drugs ..............................................................6-2
Floor mat ..........................................................................................6-2
Vehicle preparation before driving ..................................................6-3
Safe driving techniques ....................................................................6-4 6
Driving during cold weather ............................................................6-4
Braking ............................................................................................6-5
Parking .............................................................................................6-6
Loading information ........................................................................6-6
Cargo loads ....................................................................................6-10
Trailer towing ................................................................................6-11
Fuel economy
retaining clip on the driver’s floorboard to
Fuel economy Driving, alcohol and drugs secure the floor mat. When used, this clip will
N00628800165 N00628900052
help prevent the floor mat from moving for-
Fuel economy is dependent on many factors. Drunk driving is one of the most frequent ward and possibly interfering with the opera-
Your personal driving habits can have a sig- causes of accidents. tion of the pedals. To prevent the floor mat
nificant effect on your fuel use. Several rec- Your driving ability can be seriously impaired from moving forward and possibly interfering
ommendations for achieving the greatest fuel even with blood alcohol levels far below the with the operation of the pedals, Mitsubishi
economy are listed below. legal minimum. If you have been drinking, genuine floor mats are recommended.
don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
 Whenever accelerating from a stop,
6 always accelerate slowly and smoothly.
drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use
public transportation. Drinking coffee or tak-
To install the floor mat
 When parked for even a short period, do ing a cold shower will not make you sober.
N00628700050
not idle the engine. Shut it off. 1. Place the floor mat to fit the shape of the
Similarly, prescription and nonprescription
 Plan your trips to avoid unnecessary floorboard.
drugs affect your alertness, perception and
stops. 2. Align the floor mat with the installation
reaction time. Consult with your doctor or
 Keep your tires inflated to the recom- holes over the retaining clips.
pharmacist before driving while under the
mended pressures. 3. Secure the floor mat with retaining clips.
influence of any of these medications.
 When you drive on highways or dry
improved roads, set the drive mode-selec-
tor “2WD” or “4WD AUTO” position (if
WARNING
 NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.
so equipped).
Your perceptions are less accurate, your
 For freeway driving, maintain a speed of
reflexes are slower and your judgment is
approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when impaired.
traffic, roadway and weather conditions
safely permit.
 Keep your air filter clean and your vehicle
lubricated according to the recommenda- Floor mat
tions in this manual. N00628600017
 Always keep your vehicle well main- The original equipment floor mat provided
tained. A poorly maintained engine with your vehicle was specifically designed NOTE
wastes fuel and costs money. for your vehicle. Always properly position  The shape of the mat and the number of
 Do not overload your vehicle. the floor mat and assure it does not interfere retaining clips may vary depending on the
with operation of the pedals. Always use the vehicle model.
6-2 Driving safety

Vehicle preparation before driving

 Move the driver’s seat as far backward as
WARNING possible, while still keeping good visibil-
 If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not
ity, and good control of the steering
properly installed, it can interfere with the
wheel, brakes, accelerator, and controls.
operation of the pedals. Interference with
the pedals can cause unintended accelera- Check the instrument panel indicators and
tion and/or increased stopping distances multi-information display for any possible
resulting in a crash and injury. Always problem.
make sure the floor mat does not interfere  Move the front passenger seat as far back
with the accelerator or brake pedal. as possible.
 Always use the retaining clip on the
driver’s floorboard to secure the floor
 Make sure that infants and small children 6
are properly restrained in accordance with
mat. all laws and regulations.
 Always install the mat with the correct
side facing down. Vehicle preparation before
 Never install a second mat over or under Defrosters
an existing floor mat.
driving
N00629000337
 Do not use a floor mat designed for Check these by selecting the defroster mode,
another model vehicle even if it is a Mit- For a safer and more enjoyable trip, always and set the blower switch on high. You should
subishi genuine floor mat. observe the following: be able to feel the air blowing against the
 Before driving, be sure to check the fol- windshield.
lowing:
• Periodically check that the floor mat is
Seat belts and seats (Refer to “Defrosting or defogging the wind-
shield and door windows” on page 7-6, 7-12,
properly secured with the retaining clips.
 Before starting the vehicle, make certain 7-17, 7-22, 7-27.)
If you remove the floor mat while clean-
ing the inside of your vehicle or for any
that you and all passengers are seated and
wearing their seat belts properly (with
other reason, always check the condition
children in the rear seat, in appropriate
Tires
of the floor mat after it has been rein-
stalled. restraints), and that all the doors are
• While the vehicle is stopped with the locked. Check all the tires for heavy tread wear or
engine off, check that the floor mat is not uneven wear patterns. Look for stones, nails,
interfering with the pedals by depressing glass, or other objects stuck in the tread. Look
the pedals fully. for any tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check
the wheel nuts for tightness, and the tires
(including spare tire) for proper pressures.
Driving safety 6-3

Safe driving techniques

Replace your tires before they are heavily can avoid an accident or injury. However, if Before driving the vehicle, check to see if
worn out. you give extra attention to the following the engine runs at the proper speed and if
As your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres- areas, you can better protect yourself and the headlights are as bright as normally.
sure monitoring system, there is a risk of your passengers: Charge or replace the battery if necessary.
damage to the tire inflation pressure sensors During extreme cold weather, it is possi-
when the tire is replaced on the rim. Tire  Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic, ble that a very low battery could freeze.
replacement should, therefore, be performed road and weather conditions. Leave plenty
only by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors of stopping distance between your vehicle WARNING
dealer. and the vehicle ahead.  The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
 Before changing lanes, check your mir-
6 rors and use your turn signal light.
gas. Any spark or flame can cause the bat-
tery to explode, which could cause serious
Lights  While driving, watch the behavior of injury or death.
other drivers, bicyclists, and pedestrians. Always wear protective clothes and a face
Have someone watch while you turn all the  Always obey applicable laws and regula- mask when working with your battery, or
exterior lights on and off. Also check the turn tions. Be a polite and alert driver. Always let a skilled mechanic do it.
signal indicators and high-beam indicators on leave room for unexpected events, such as
the instrument panel. sudden braking.  Warm the engine sufficiently. After start-
 If you plan to drive in another country, ing the engine, allow a short warm-up
obey their vehicle registration laws and time to distribute oil to all cylinders and
Fluid leaks
make sure you will be able to get the right turbocharger. Then drive your vehicle
fuel. slowly.
Check the ground under the vehicle after  Stay at low speeds at first so that the
parking overnight, for fuel, water, oil, or transaxle, transfer case and rear axle oil
other leaks. Make sure all the fluid levels are Driving during cold weather have time to spread to all the lubrication
correct. Also, if you can smell fuel, you need N00629400429
points.
to find out why immediately and have it  Check the battery, including terminals and
 Manual transaxle can be harder to shift in
fixed. cables. During extremely cold weather,
cold weather conditions. This is normal
the battery will not be as strong. Also, the
and shifting will get easier as the transaxle
battery power level may drop because
Safe driving techniques more power is used for cold starting and
warms up.
 Check the engine antifreeze.
N00629200111
driving.
Even this vehicle’s safety equipment, and
your safest driving, cannot guarantee that you
6-4 Driving safety

Braking
If there is not enough coolant because of a A film of water can be formed on the brake
leak or from engine overheating, add Mit-
NOTE discs or brake drums and prevent normal
 As your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres-
subishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life braking after driving in heavy rain or through
sure monitoring system, there is a risk of
Coolant Premium or equivalent. large puddles, or after the vehicle is washed.
damage to the tire inflation pressure sensors
Please read this section in conjunction when the tire is replaced on the rim. Tire If this occurs, dry the brakes out by driving
with the “Engine coolant” on page 9-8. replacement should, therefore, be performed slowly while lightly depressing the brake
only by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors pedal.
WARNING dealer.
 Never open the radiator cap when the  If you use new wheels with new tire inflation
When driving in cold weather
radiator is hot. You could be seriously
burned.
pressure sensors, their ID codes must be pro-
grammed into the tire pressure monitoring
6
system. Refer to “Whenever the tires and On snowy roads, ice can form on the braking
wheels are replaced with new ones” on page system, making the brakes less effective.
[For RALLIART vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
5-105. While driving in such conditions, pay close
 Mitsubishi Motors recommends that the attention to preceding and following vehicles
standard equipment tires be replaced with and to the condition of the road surface. From
winter tires when the vehicle is going to Braking time to time, lightly depress the brake pedal
be used in winter. N00629500446 and check how effective the brakes are.
The standard equipment tires provided All the parts of the brake system are critical
with this vehicle are summer tires and use to safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an When driving downhill
a high-grip compound that provides supe- authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
rior grip. repair facility of your choice at regular inter- It is important to take advantage of the engine
The road grip, however, is reduced in win- vals according to the “WARRANTY AND braking by shifting to a lower gear while
ter. MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. driving on steep downhill roads in order to
When replacing the standard equipment
prevent the brakes from overheating.
tires with winter tires, all four tires must
be replaced using radial identicalsize win- When brakes are wet
ter tires.
Check the brake system while driving at a
low speed immediately after starting, espe-
cially when the brakes are wet, to confirm
they work normally.
Driving safety 6-5

Parking
SST) to the “P” (PARK) position. This pre-
Parking vents loading the parking brake against the
WARNING
 Do not park your vehicle in areas where
N00629600287
transaxle gear. When this happens, it is diffi-
combustible materials such as dry grass or
cult to move the selector lever (CVT) or gear-
leaves can come in contact with a hot
Parking on a hill shift lever (Twin Clutch SST) out of the “P” exhaust, since a fire could occur.
(PARK) position.
When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,
and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a Parking with the engine run- When leaving the vehicle
downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.
ning
6 If necessary, apply chocks to wheels.
When leaving the vehicle unattended, always
Never leave the engine running while you carry the key and lock all doors.
For vehicles with manual trans- take a short sleep/rest. Also, never leave the Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit
axle engine running in a closed or poorly venti- area.
lated place.
Place the gearshift lever into the “R” Loading information
(Reverse) position when parking on a down- WARNING N00629900349
hill slope, into the 1st position when parking  Leaving the engine running risks injury or
on an uphill slope. It is very important to know how much
death from accidentally moving the gear- weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is
shift lever (manual transaxle or Twin
called the vehicle capacity weight and
For vehicles with continuously Clutch SST) or the selector lever (CVT) or
includes the weight of all occupants, cargo
from the accumulation of toxic exhaust
variable transmission (CVT) or fumes in the passenger compartment. and non-factory-installed options. The tire
Twin Clutch SST and loading information placard located on
the driver’s door sill of your vehicle will
show how much weight it may properly carry.
Be sure that the parking brake is firmly set Where you park
when parked and that the selector lever
(CVT) or gearshift lever (Twin Clutch SST)
Your front bumper can be damaged if you WARNING
is in the “P” (PARK) position.  Never overload your vehicle. Overloading
scrape it over curbs or parking stop blocks.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set can damage your vehicle, adversely affect
Be careful when traveling up or down steep
the parking brake before moving the selector vehicle performance, including handling
slopes where your bumper can scrape the and braking, cause tire failure, and result
lever (CVT) or gearshift lever (Twin Clutch
road. in an accident.
6-6 Driving safety

Loading information
It is important to familiarize yourself with the  Vehicle capacity weight: the rated cargo
following terms before loading your vehicle: and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg)*
times the vehicle’s designated seating
 Vehicle maximum load on the tire: load capacity.
on an individual tire that is determined by  Production options weight: the combined
distributing to each axle its share of the weight of those installed regular produc-
maximum loaded vehicle weight and tion options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kg)
dividing by two. in excess of those standard items which
 Vehicle normal load on the tire: load on an they replace, not previously considered in
individual tire that is determined by dis-
tributing to each axle its share of the curb
curb weight or accessory weight, includ- 6
ing heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof
weight, accessory weight, and normal rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim. This placard shows the maximum number of
occupant weight and dividing by two.  Normal occupant weight: 150 lbs (68 kg)* occupants permitted to ride in your vehicle as
 Maximum loaded vehicle weight: the sum times the number of specified occupants. well as “the combined weight of occupants
of - (In your vehicle the number is 3) and cargo” (A), which is called the vehicle
(a) Curb weight;  Occupant distribution: distribution of capacity weight. The weight of roof road is
(b) Accessory weight; occupants in a vehicle as specified. (In included in the definition of “cargo” when
(c) Vehicle capacity weight; and your vehicle the distribution is 2 in front, determining the vehicle capacity weight. This
(d) Production options weight. 1 in second row seat) placard also tells you the size and recom-
 Curb weight: the weight of a motor vehi-
*:150 lbs (68 kg) is the weight of one per- mended inflation pressure for the original
cle with standard equipment including the
son as defined by U.S.A. and Canadian equipment tires on your vehicle. For more
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and cool-
regulations. information, refer to “Tires” on page 9-17.
ant.
 Accessory weight: the combined weight
(in excess of those standard items which
may be replaced) of automatic transmis- Tire and loading information
sion, power steering, power brakes, power
windows, power seats, radio, and heater, placard
N00630100309
to the extent that these items are available
as factory- installed equipment (whether The tire and loading information placard is
installed or not). located on the driver’s door sill.
Driving safety 6-7

Loading information
Type 1 5. Determine the combined weight
Steps for Determining Correct
of luggage and cargo being loaded
Load Limit
N00630201235
on the vehicle. That weight may
1. Locate the statement “The com- not safely exceed the available
bined weight of occupants and cargo and luggage load capacity
cargo should never exceed XXX calculated in Step 4.
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
placard. trailer, load from your trailer will
6 2. Determine the combined weight be transferred to your vehicle.
of the driver and passengers that Consult this manual to determine
will be riding in your vehicle. how this reduces the available
Type 2 cargo and luggage load capacity
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from of your vehicle.
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
NOTE
4. The resulting figure equals the
 The above steps for determining
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For exam- correct load limit were written in
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals accordance with U.S.A. regula-
1400 lbs. and there will be five tions.
150 lbs. passengers in your vehi- Your vehicle cannot tow a
cle, the amount of available cargo trailer, so step 6 is irrelevant.
and luggage load capacity is 650
lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =650
lbs.)
6-8 Driving safety

Loading information
NOTE
 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total cargo/load capacity of your vehicle with varying
seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load capacity of your vehicle.
 For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
 Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWR’s, vehicle loading, see the “Specifications” section of
this manual.
Driving safety 6-9

Cargo loads
Cargo loads WARNING WARNING

N00629700464  To reduce the risk of serious injury or  Make sure that the weight of luggage and
death, the combined weights of the driver, the roof carrier do not exceed the maxi-
passengers and cargo and must never mum roof load, 110 lb (50 kg). If the maxi-
Cargo load precautions exceed the vehicle capacity weight. mum roof load is exceeded, this could
 Exceeding the vehicle capacity weight will cause damage to the vehicle or result in an
To determine the cargo load capacity for your adversely affect vehicle performance, accident.
vehicle, subtract the weight of all vehicle including handling and braking, and may  The total weight of all occupants and lug-
occupants from the vehicle capacity weight. cause an accident. gage, including your roof load, must not
6 For added information, if needed, refer to  Do not load cargo or luggage higher than exceed the vehicle capacity weight. For
more information, refer to “Tire and load-
“Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit” the top of the seatback. Be sure that your
cargo or luggage cannot move when your ing information placard” on page 11-3.
on page 6-8.
vehicle is in motion.  Roof load is determined by adding the
DO NOT USE the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
Having either the rear view blocked, or weight of the roof carrier and the weight
ing and Gross Axle Weight Rating numbers your cargo being thrown inside the cabin of the luggage placed on the roof carrier.
listed on the safety certification label (A) if you suddenly have to brake can cause a  For additional information, refer to
located on the inside sill of the driver’s door serious accident or injury or death. “Maximum roof load” on page 11-4.
as the guide for passengers and/or cargo  Put cargo or luggage in the cargo area of
weight. your vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly. CAUTION
 Do not load luggage directly onto the roof.
Use a roof carrier that properly fits your
Loading cargo on the roof vehicle.
N00630400113 For installation, refer to the instruction man-
ual provided with the roof carrier.
WARNING  Place the luggage on the carrier so that its
 Weight placed on the roof of the vehicle weight is distributed evenly with the heaviest
will raise the vehicle’s center of gravity items on the bottom. Do not load items that
and adversely affect its handling charac- are wider than the roof carrier.
teristics. As a result, driving errors or
emergency maneuvers could lead to a loss
of control and result in an accident. Drive
slowly and avoid excessive maneuvers
such as sudden braking or quick turning.
6-10 Driving safety

Trailer towing
CAUTION Refitting the covers

 Before driving and after traveling a short dis-
tance, always check the load to make sure it 1. With each cover, put the tabs (C) on the
is securely fastened to the roof carrier. cover in the holes (D) in the roof.
Stop the vehicle periodically and check that 2. Slide the cover (B) toward the rear of the
the load remains secure. If the load is not vehicle to install it.
secure, it could fall from the vehicle and
damage your vehicle, another vehicle or cre-
ate a road hazard.
6
NOTE
 To prevent wind noise or reduction in gas
mileage, remove the roof carrier when not in Attaching the roof carrier
use.
 Before using an automatic car wash, check Slide each cover (B) toward the front of the
with the attendant to determine if the roof vehicle to remove it.
carrier should be removed.
 Be sure that adequate clearance is main-
tained for raising the sunroof when installing
a roof carrier. (For vehicle with sunroof
only)
Trailer towing
N00629801332
Roof carrier mounting brackets

(if so equipped)
N00630600102
When installing the roof carrier, use the

brackets (A).
The brackets (A) are located under each cover
(B).
Driving safety 6-11

Trailer towing
WARNING
 Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing.
It may not be possible to maintain control
or adequate braking.
6-12 Driving safety

Comfort controls
Vents ................................................................................................7-2 General information about your radio ...........................................7-63

Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped) ...............7-4
Manual air conditioning with MAX A/C mode (if so equipped) .....7-7
Manual air conditioning without MAX A/C mode
(if so equipped) ..........................................................................7-12
Automatic air conditioning with Fahrenheit scale
(if so equipped) ..........................................................................7-17
7
Automatic air conditioning with Celsius scale (if so equipped).....7-22
Important air conditioning operating tips ......................................7-28
Air purifier .....................................................................................7-28
AM/FM radio/CD player (if so equipped).....................................7-29
Handling of Discs ..........................................................................7-32
Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC) ....................................................7-34
Important Points on Safety for the Customer ................................7-38
Operation Keys ..............................................................................7-38
Listen to Radio ...............................................................................7-42
Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped) .......................................7-43
Listen to CDs .................................................................................7-45
Listen to MP3s ...............................................................................7-46
Listen to an iPod ............................................................................7-47
Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device .........................................7-49
Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if so equipped) ....................................7-52
Use AUX (if so equipped) ..............................................................7-53
Display Indicator ...........................................................................7-55
Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment ...........................7-56
System Settings ..............................................................................7-57
Troubleshooting .............................................................................7-60
Antenna ..........................................................................................7-62
Vents
Vents Left Right Left Right

N00729900210
A- Knob A- Knob
7 1- Close 1- Close
2- Open 2- Open
1- Center vents
2- Side vents
Side vents NOTE
 On rare occasions, air from the vents of an
Air flow and direction adjust- Move the knob to make adjustments. air-conditioned vehicle may be foggy. This is
ments To close the vent, move the knob to the out-
only moist air cooling suddenly and does not
indicate a problem.
N00730200301 side as far as possible.
 Do not let drinks or other liquids get into the
vents as they could prevent the air condition-
Center vents ing from operating normally.
Move the knob to make adjustments.

To close the vent, move the knob to the inside Changing the mode selection
as far as possible. N00736400493
To change the position and amount of air

flowing from the vents, turn the mode selec-
tion dial. Refer to “Mode selection dial” on
page 7-5, 7-8, 7-13, 7-19, 7-24.
7-2 Comfort controls

Vents
These symbols are used in the next several
illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air
coming from the vents.
: Small amount of air from the vents
: Medium amount of air from the vents
: Large amount of air from the vents
Face position
Air flows only to the upper part of the passen-

*- if so equipped *- if so equipped
ger compartment. 7
NOTE Foot/Defroster position
 With the mode selection dial between the
“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly Air flows to the leg area, the windshield and
to the upper part of the passenger compart- the door windows.
ment. With the mode selection dial between
the “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows
mainly to the leg area.
Foot position
Air flows mainly to the leg area.

Foot/Face position
Air flows to the upper part of the passenger

compartment, and flows to the leg area.
*- if so equipped
Comfort controls 7-3

Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped)
NOTE Heater without air condi- NOTE

 With the mode selection dial between the
tioning function (if so equipped)  Button (A) is not available for use. The indi-
cator below the button doesn’t come on even
“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly
N00737700031
to the leg area. With the mode selection dial if it is pushed.
between the “ ” and “ ” positions, air The heater can only be used while the engine
flows mainly to the windshield and the door is running.
windows. Blower speed selection dial
N00737900020
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-

Defroster position Control panel tion, select the blower speed by turning the
7
N00737800029
blower speed selection dial.
Air flows mainly to the windshield and the Turning the dial clockwise will increase the
door windows. blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-
wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to
the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow
will stop.
1- Temperature control dial

2- Air selection switch
3- Blower speed selection dial
4- Mode selection dial
5- Electric rear window defogger switch
 P. 5-158

Temperature control dial

N00738000044
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise

to make the air warmer. Turn it counterclock-
wise to make the air cooler.
The air selection indicator light (A) shows the 7

Air selection switch selected position.
N00738200033
If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in
Normally, use the outside air position to keep some way, use the recirculation position.
the windshield and side windows clear and to Switch to the outside air position every now
quickly remove fog or frost from the wind- and then to keep the windows from fogging
shield.
NOTE up.
 While the engine coolant temperature is low, To change the air selection, simply press the
the temperature of the air from the heater
air selection switch. A sound will be made CAUTION
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,  Using recirculated air for a long time may
every time you push the switch.
even if you have selected warm air with the cause the windows to fog up.
dial.
 Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF}
 Recirculation air {Indicator light (A) ON}
Mode selection dial
N00738100058
To change the amount of air flowing from the

vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to
“Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.


to the upper part of the passenger compart-
Operating the system ment.
N00738300034
Heating
Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi-

tion and set the air selection switch (A) to the
outside air position.
or counterclockwise to the desired tempera-
7 ture. Select the best speed to fit your needs.
Combination of unheated air and
heated air
N00738400022 Defrosting or defogging the wind-
Set the mode selection dial to the positions shield and door windows
shown in the illustration and set the air selec- N00738500065
tion switch (A) to the outside air position.
CAUTION
The air flow will be directed to the leg area
 For safety, make sure you have a clear view
and the upper part of the passenger compart- through all the windows.
ment. Set the desired blower speed.
Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated
or slightly warm air (depending upon the Set the mode selection dial (between “ ” or
position of the temperature control dial) flows “ ”) to remove frost or mist from the wind-
NOTE shield and door window.
 For quick heating, set the blower speed
selection dial to the position shown in the For ordinary defrosting
illustration.
Use this setting to keep the windshield and
door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
leg area heated (when driving in rain or
snow).
Manual air conditioning with MAX A/C mode (if so equipped)

2. Set your blower to the maximum speed. 2- Air selection switch
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi- 3- Blower speed selection dial
tion. 4- Air conditioning switch
NOTE 6- Electric rear window defogger switch
P.5-158
 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
side vents toward the door windows.
Blower speed selection dial
N00736500146
Manual air conditioning When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” with MAX A/C mode (if so tion, select the blower speed by turning the
7
position. equipped) Turning the dial clockwise will increase the
2. Select your desired blower speed by turn- N00730300256 blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-
ing the blower speed selection dial. wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to
3. Select your desired temperature by turn- The air conditioning can only be used while the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow
ing the temperature control dial. the engine is running. will stop.
For quick defrosting Control panel

N00730500216
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”

position.
Temperature control dial Mode selection dial

N00736600219 N00736700151
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise To change the amount of air flowing from the
to make the air warmer. Turn it counterclock- vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to
wise to make the air cooler. “Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.
7 When the air conditioning turns on, the air

selection is controlled automatically.
When the air conditioning turns off, the air
selection automatically goes back to the out-
side air position.
The air selection indicator light (A) shows the
selected position.
NOTE
Air selection switch
 While the engine coolant temperature is low, NOTE
the temperature of the air from the heater N00736800367
 When the air conditioning operates with the
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, Normally, use the outside air position to keep air selection switch (A) in the outside air
even if you have selected warm air with the the windshield and side windows clear and to position, the system automatically deter-
dial. quickly remove fog or frost from the wind- mines whether to continue using outside air
 For instructions on how to use the “MAX shield. or to perform recirculation.
A/C” position (A), refer to “For quick cool- If the outside temperature is high, the system
ing” on page 7-11. To change the air selection, simply press the selects recirculation to achieve rapid cooling
air selection switch. A sound will be made and causes the air selection indicator in the
every time you push the switch. switch to illuminate. When the air condition-
ing turns off or the blower speed selection
 Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF} dial is set to the “OFF” position, the air
 Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON} selection automatically goes back to the out-
side position.


If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in the system will beep two times and the
some way, use the recirculation position.
NOTE indicator light will flash three times.
• If outside air was selected:
Switch to the outside air position every now
Outside air is continued
and then to keep the windows from fogging
up.
NOTE
Personalizing the air selection  The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
control”.
CAUTION (Changing the function setting)  While the mode selection dial is set between
N00702100015
 Using recirculated air for a long time may “ ” and “ ” position, the air selection
cause the windows to fog up. You can change the following functions to will automatically change to the outside air
match your preference. position, even if the system is set to “Disable
automatic air control”, in order to prevent
NOTE  Enable automatic air control: windows from fogging up. 7
 While the mode selection dial is set between When the air conditioning operates, the
air selection switch will be automatically
“ ” and “ ” position, the air condition-
ing compressor will run automatically. The controlled. Air conditioning switch
outside air position will also be selected N00731000423
automatically. (In this case, the air condition-

 Disable automatic air control:
Even when the air conditioning operates, Push the switch, and the air conditioning
ing indicator will not change.)
the air selection switch will not be auto- compressor will turn on. The air conditioning
 When the temperature control dial is set to
matically controlled. indicator light (A) will come on.
the “MAX A/C” position, the air selection
A sound will be made every time you push
will be automatically set to the recirculation
position.  Changing the settings the switch.
 When the temperature control dial is in the Press the air selection switch for about 10
“MAX A/C” position, if it is set to a position seconds or longer.
other than “MAX A/C”, the setting for the When the setting has changed, the system
air selection switch is selected as described will beep and the indicator light will flash.
below. The selection of recirculated air or • When the setting has changed from
outside air depends on the setting before enabled to disabled,
“MAX A/C” was used. the system will beep three times and the
• If automatic control was set: indicator will flash three times.
Automatic control is continued
• When the setting has changed from dis-
• If recirculated air was selected:
abled to enabled,
Recirculated air is continued


Push the switch again and the air condition-
ing compressor will stop and the indicator
Operating the air conditioning
light (A) goes off. system
N00731100222
CAUTION
 When using the air conditioning, the idling
Heating
speed may slightly increase as the air condi-
tioning compressor is switched on/off auto- Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi-
matically. Especially for vehicles with a tion and set the air selection switch (A) to the
continuously variable transmission (CVT) or
Twin Clutch SST, while the vehicle is sta-
7 tionary, fully depress the brake pedal to pre-
or counterclockwise to the desired tempera-
vent the vehicle from creeping.
ture. Select the best speed to fit your needs.
NOTE
 If a problem is detected in the air condition-
ing compressor, the air conditioning indica-
tor light (A) blinks. Press the air
conditioning switch once to turn it off, then
once more to turn it back on. If the air condi-
tioning indicator light (A) does not blink,
there is no problem. If it does blink, have it
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
 Sometimes, for example after using a high-
pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet,
and the air conditioning indicator light (A)
blinks temporarily. Wait for a while, press
NOTE
the air conditioning switch once to turn the  For quick heating, set the blower speed
system off, then once more to turn it back on. selection dial to the position shown in the
Once the water evaporates, the blinking will illustration.
stop.

Cooling NOTE NOTE

N00731200278  To cool the leg areas, set the mode selection  When the temperature control dial is set to a
For ordinary cooling dial to the “ ” position. position other than “MAX A/C”, the air
selection will automatically change to out-
For quick cooling side air. The air conditioning will revert to
the previous condition in which the “MAX
A/C” position was not selected.

heated air
N00731300211
Set the mode selection dial to one of the posi-

7
tions shown in the illustration and set the air
selection switch (A) to the outside air posi-
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” tion.
position.
2. Push the air selection switch (A) to set it 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated
to the outside air position. position. or slightly warm air (depending upon the
3. Push the air conditioning switch (B). 2. Set the temperature control dial to the position of the temperature control dial) flows
4. Change the temperature by turning the “MAX A/C” position. to the upper part of the passenger compart-
control dial clockwise or counterclock- 3. Set the blower speed to the highest posi- ment.
wise. tion.
5. Set the desired blower speed.
NOTE
NOTE  When the temperature control dial is set to
 If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in the “MAX A/C” position, the air condition-
some way, push the air selection switch (A) ing compressor will run automatically and
to set it to the recirculation position. Let in the light will come on. The recirculation
some outside air from time to time for good position will be selected automatically. In
ventilation. this case, you cannot turn the air condition-
ing off or select the outside air position.

Manual air conditioning without MAX A/C mode (if so equipped)

2. Select your desired blower speed by turn-
Defrosting or defogging (wind- NOTE
ing the blower speed selection dial.
shield, door windows) 3. Select your desired temperature by turn-  While the between “ ” and “ ” position
N00731400443
ing the temperature control dial. is selected, you cannot turn the air condition-
ing off or select the recirculation position.
CAUTION For quick defrosting This prevents the windows from fogging up.
 For safety, make sure you have a clear view  To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
through all the windows. side vents toward the door windows.
 When defrosting, do not set the temperature
control dial near the “MAX A/C” cool posi-
Set the mode selection dial (between “ ”
tion. This will blow cool air on the window
and “ ”) to remove frost or mist from the glass and fog it up.
7 windshield and door window.
For ordinary defrosting Manual air conditioning

Use this setting to keep the windshield and without MAX A/C mode (if so
door windows clear of mist, and to keep the equipped)
leg area heated (when driving in rain or N00730300269
snow). 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”
position. The air conditioning can only be used while
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed. the engine is running.
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi-
tion.
NOTE
 While the mode selection dial is set between
ing compressor will run automatically. The
outside air position will also be automati-
cally selected. (In this case, the air condition-
ing indicator will not change.)
position.

Control panel NOTE

N00730500229  While the engine coolant temperature is low,
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
even if you have selected warm air with the
dial.
Mode selection dial

N00736700177

vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to
7
Temperature control dial “Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.
N00736600176
3- Blower speed selection dial Turn the temperature control dial clockwise
4- Air conditioning switch to make the air warmer. Turn it counterclock-
5- Mode selection dial wise to make the air cooler.
6- Electric rear window defogger switch
P.5-158
Blower speed selection dial

N00736500133
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-

tion, select the blower speed by turning the
Turning the dial clockwise will increase the
Air selection switch
N00736800279
blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-
wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to Normally, use the outside air position to keep
the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow the windshield and side windows clear and to
will stop.


quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
NOTE Personalizing the air selection
shield.
 When the air conditioning operates with the (Changing the function setting)
To change the air selection, simply press the air selection switch (A) in the outside air N00702100028
air selection switch. A sound will be made position, the system automatically deter-
You can change the following functions to
mines whether to continue using outside air
every time you push the switch. match your preference.
or to perform recirculation.
If the outside temperature is high, the system
 Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF}  Enable automatic air control:
selects recirculation to achieve rapid cooling
 Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON} When the air conditioning operates, the
and causes the air selection indicator in the
switch to illuminate. Press the air selection air selection switch will be automatically
switch to return to outside air. controlled.
7  Disable automatic air control:
If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in Even when the air conditioning operates,
some way, use the recirculation position. the air selection switch will not be auto-
Switch to the outside air position every now matically controlled.
and then to keep the windows from fogging
up.  Changing the settings
Press the air selection switch for about 10
seconds or longer.
CAUTION
When the setting has changed, the system
 Using recirculated air for a long time may
will beep and the indicator light will flash.
When the air conditioning turns on, the air cause the windows to fog up.
• When the setting has changed from
selection is controlled automatically.
enabled to disabled,
The air selection indicator light (A) shows the
NOTE the system will beep three times and the
selected position.
indicator will flash three times.
 While the mode selection dial is set to the
• When the setting has changed from dis-
“ ” position, the air conditioning com-
abled to enabled,
pressor will run automatically. The outside
air position will also be selected automati-
the system will beep two times and the
cally. (In this case, the air conditioning indi- indicator light will flash three times.
cator will not change.)


NOTE ing compressor will stop and the indicator
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
light (A) goes off. system
control”. N00731100219
“ ” and “ ” position, the air selection CAUTION
 When using the air conditioning, the idling
Heating
will automatically change to the outside air
position, even if the system is set to “Disable speed may slightly increase as the air condi-
automatic air control”, in order to prevent tioning compressor is switched on/off auto- Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi-
windows from fogging up. matically. Especially for vehicles with a tion and set the air selection switch (A) to the
continuously variable transmission (CVT) or
Twin Clutch SST, while the vehicle is sta-
Air conditioning switch tionary, fully depress the brake pedal to pre-
or counterclockwise to the desired tempera- 7
N00731000436 ture. Select the best speed to fit your needs.
Push the switch, and the air conditioning
compressor will turn on. The air conditioning NOTE
indicator light (A) will come on.  If a problem is detected in the air condition-
A sound will be made every time you push ing compressor, the air conditioning indica-
the switch. tor light (A) blinks. Press the air
conditioning switch once to turn it off, then
once more to turn it back on. If the air condi-
tioning indicator light (A) does not blink,
there is no problem. If it does blink, have it
 Sometimes, for example after using a high-
pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet,
NOTE
the air conditioning switch once to turn the  For quick heating, set the blower speed
system off, then once more to turn it back on. selection dial to the position shown in the
Once the water evaporates, the blinking will illustration.
stop.

Cooling NOTE
N00731200249  To cool the leg areas, set the mode selection
For ordinary cooling dial to the “ ” position.

heated air
N00731300224
Set the mode selection dial to the positions

shown in the illustration and set the air selec-
tion switch (A) to the outside air position.
7
The air flow will be directed to the leg area
and the upper part of the passenger compart-
ment. Set the desired blower speed.
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated
position. or slightly warm air (depending upon the
2. Push the air selection switch (A) to set it position of the temperature control dial) flows
to the outside air position. to the upper part of the passenger compart-
3. Push the air conditioning switch (B). ment.
4. Change the temperature by turning the
control dial clockwise or counterclock-
wise.
5. Set the desired blower speed.
NOTE
 If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in
some way, push the air selection switch (A)
to set it to the recirculation position. Let in
some outside air from time to time for good
ventilation.

Automatic air conditioning with Fahrenheit scale (if so equipped)

2. Set the air selection switch (A) to the out-
Defrosting or defogging (wind- NOTE
side air position.
shield, door windows) 3. Select your desired blower speed by turn-  To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
N00731400456 side vents toward the door windows.
ing the blower speed selection dial.
 When defrosting, do not set the temperature
4. Select your desired temperature by turn-
CAUTION control dial near the maximum cool position.
ing the temperature control dial. This will blow cool air on the window glass
through all the windows. and fog it up.
For quick defrosting
Set the mode selection dial (between “ ” Automatic air conditioning

and “ ”) to remove frost or mist from the with Fahrenheit scale (if so
windshield and door window.
equipped)
7
For ordinary defrosting N00731500226
Use this setting to keep the windshield and The air conditioning can only be used while
door windows clear of mist, and to keep the the engine is running.
leg area heated (when driving in rain or
snow). Control panel
N00711801565
position.
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed.
tion.
NOTE
“ ” position, the air conditioning com-
air position will also be automatically
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” selected.
position. 2- Air selection switch


3- Blower speed selection dial
4- Air conditioning switch
NOTE
 While the engine coolant temperature is low,
6- Electric rear window defogger switch will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
P.5-158 even if you have selected warm air with the
dial.
NOTE  When the temperature is set to the highest or
 There is an interior air temperature sensor the lowest setting under the AUTO opera-
(A) in the illustrated position. tion, the air selection and the air conditioning
Never place anything over the sensor, since will be automatically changed as follows.
doing so will prevent it from functioning • Quick Heating (When the temperature is set
7 properly. to the highest setting)
Outside air will be introduced and the air
Temperature control dial conditioning will stop. In this case, manual
N00737001350 operation is possible.
Use this dial to adjust the temperature in the • Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set
passenger compartment. Turn the temperature to the lowest setting)
control dial clockwise to make the air Inside air will be recirculated and the air
conditioning will operate. In this case, you
warmer. Turn it counterclockwise to make the
cannot select outside air and turn the air
air cooler. conditioning off.
The above indicates the factory settings. You

Blower speed selection dial can personalize the air selection switch and
N00736900094
air conditioning switch to match your per-
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi- sonal preferences.
tion, select the blower speed by turning the Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
blower speed selection dial. repair facility of your choice for assistance.
Turning the dial clockwise will increase the Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning
blower speed; turning the dial counterclock- switch (Changing the function setting)” on
wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to page 7-20.
the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow Refer to “Personalizing the air selection
will stop. (Changing the function setting)” on page


7-19. Outside air is introduced into the passen-
ger compartment.
NOTE
 If the mode selection dial is set between
Mode selection dial  Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON}
Air is recirculated inside the passenger “ ” and “ ”, you cannot turn the air con-
N00737100093
compartment. ditioning off or select the recirculation posi-
To change the amount of air flowing from the tion.
vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to This prevents the windows from fogging up.
“Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.  When the mode selection dial or the blower
speed selection dial is set to the “AUTO”
position again after manual operation, the air
selection switch will also be automatically
controlled.
7
Personalizing the air selection
(Changing the function setting)
N00760000018
You can change the following functions to

When the air conditioning turns on, the air
match your preference.
selection is controlled automatically. When
the air conditioning turns off, the air selection  Enable automatic air control:
automatically goes back to the outside air When the mode selection dial or the
Air selection switch position. blower speed selection dial is set to the
N00737200238 If high cooling performance is desired, or if “AUTO” position, the air selection switch
Normally, use the outside air position to keep the outside air is dusty or contaminated in will also be automatically controlled.
the windshield and side windows clear and to some way, use the recirculation position.
quickly remove fog or frost from the wind- Switch to the outside air position every now  Disable automatic air control:
shield. and then to keep the windows from fogging Even when the mode selection dial or the
up. blower speed selection dial is set to the
To change the air selection, simply press the “AUTO” position, the air selection switch
air selection switch. A sound will be made will not be automatically controlled.
every time you press the switch.
CAUTION
 Using recirculated air for a long time may
 Changing the settings
 Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF} cause the windows to fog up.


Press the air selection switch for about 10
seconds or longer.
NOTE
 If a problem is detected in the air condition-
ing compressor, the air conditioning indica-
tor light (A) blinks. Press the air
• When the setting has changed from conditioning switch once to turn it off, then
enabled to disabled, once more to turn it back on. If the air condi-
the system will beep three times and the tioning indicator light does not blink there is
indicator will flash three times. no problem. If it does blink, have it checked
• When the setting has changed from dis- at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
abled to enabled, a repair facility of your choice.
the system will beep two times and the  Sometimes, for example after using a high-
7 indicator light will flash three times. Push the switch again and the air condition- pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet,
ing compressor will stop and the indicator
NOTE light (A) goes off. the air conditioning switch once to turn the
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air system off, then once more to turn it back on.
control”. CAUTION Once the water evaporates, the blinking will
 While the mode selection dial is set between  When using the air conditioning, the idling stop.
“ ” and “ ” position, the air selection speed may slightly increase as the air condi-
will automatically change to the outside air tioning compressor is switched on/off auto-
position, even if the system is set to “Disable matically. Especially for vehicles with a Personalizing the air conditioning
automatic air control”, in order to prevent continuously variable transmission (CVT) or switch (Changing the function set-
windows from fogging up. Twin Clutch SST, while the vehicle is sta-
tionary, fully depress the brake pedal to pre-
ting)
N00759800032
Air conditioning switch You can change the following functions to
N00737300297
match your preference.
Push the switch, and the air conditioning  Enable automatic air conditioning control:
compressor will turn on. The air conditioning
indicator light (A) will come on.
A sound will be made every time you push
the switch.


When the mode selection dial or blower 2. Select the temperature control dial to the
speed selection dial has been set to the
NOTE desired temperature. The temperature can
“AUTO” position or when the tempera- be set within a range of around 61 to 89.
ture control dial has been set to the mini- “ ” and “ ” position, the air condition- The temperature will increase as the dial
mum temperature, the air conditioning ing will run automatically, even if the system is turned to the right.
is set to “Disable automatic air conditioning
switch is automatically controlled. 3. Set the mode selection dial to the
control”, in order to prevent windows from
fogging up.
“AUTO” position.
 Disable automatic air conditioning con-
trol: The vents, recirculation/outside air, blower
The air conditioning switch is not auto- Operating the air conditioning speed, and ON/OFF of air conditioning will
matically controlled, unless the air condi- system (automatic mode) be controlled automatically.
tioning switch is used. N00731701414 7
 Changing the settings: NOTE
Press the air conditioning switch for about  Set the temperature at about 75 under normal
10 seconds or longer. conditions.
When the setting has changed, the system  While the engine coolant temperature is low,
• When the setting has changed from even if you have selected warm air with the
enabled to disabled, dial. To prevent the windshield and windows
the system will beep three times and the from fogging up, the vent mode will be
indicator will flash three times. changed to “ ” or “ ” and the blower
• When the setting has changed from dis- speed will be reduced.
abled to enabled,
the system will beep two times and the In normal conditions, use the system in the
indicator light will flash three times. AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
1. Set the blower speed selection dial to the system (manual mode)
NOTE “AUTO” position. N00731800072
Blower speed and vent mode may be con-
conditioning control”.
trolled manually by setting the blower speed
selection dial and the mode selection dial to
the desired positions. To return to automatic

Automatic air conditioning with Celsius scale (if so equipped)

operation, set the dials to the “AUTO” posi- 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”
tion.
NOTE
position.
 If the mode selection dial is set between
2. Select your desired blower speed by turn-
“ ” and “ ” you cannot turn the air con-
Defrosting or defogging (winding the blower speed selection dial.
ditioning off or select the recirculation posi-
shield, door windows) 3. Select your desired temperature by turn- tion. This prevents the windows from
N00732400280
ing the temperature control dial. fogging up.
CAUTION For quick defrosting side vents toward the door windows.
 For safety, make sure you have a clear view  When defrosting, do not set the temperature
through all the windows. control dial to the maximum cool position.
This will blow cool air on the window glass
7 To remove frost or mist from the windshield
and fog it up.
and door windows, use the mode selection
dial (“ ” or “ ”). Automatic air conditioning
For ordinary defrosting
with Celsius scale (if so
equipped)
Use this setting to keep the windshield and N00731500239
door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
leg area heated (when driving in rain or 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” The air conditioning can only be used while
snow). position. the engine is running.
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed.
tion.
NOTE
ing compressor will run automatically. The
outside air position will also be selected
automatically.

Control panel NOTE

N00711801594  There is an interior air temperature sensor
(A) in the illustrated position.
Never place anything over the sensor, since
doing so will prevent it from functioning
properly.
7
Temperature control dial
N00737000281
3- Blower speed selection dial Use this dial to adjust the temperature in the
4- Air conditioning switch passenger compartment. Turn the temperature
Blower speed selection dial control dial clockwise to make the air
5- Mode selection dial N00736900111
6- Electric rear window defogger switch warmer. Turn it counterclockwise to make the
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi- air cooler.
P. 5-158
tion, select the blower speed by turning the
Turning the dial clockwise will increase the
blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-
wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to
the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow
will stop.


7-25. Outside air is introduced into the passen-
NOTE ger compartment.
Mode selection dial  Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON}
Air is recirculated inside the passenger
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, N00737100136
even if you have selected warm air with the compartment.

dial. vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to
 When the temperature is set to the highest or “Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.
the lowest setting under the AUTO opera-
tion, the air selection and the air conditioning
will be automatically changed as follows.
Also, if the air selection is operated manually
7 after an automatic changeover, manual oper-
ation will be selected.
• Quick Heating (When the temperature is set
to the highest setting)
Outside air will be introduced and the air
conditioning will stop.
• Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set
to the lowest setting) When the air conditioning turns on, the air
Inside air will be recirculated and the air selection is controlled automatically. When
conditioning will operate. the air conditioning turns off, the air selection
automatically goes back to the outside air
Air selection switch position.
The above indicates the factory settings. You N00737200241 If high cooling performance is desired, or if
can personalize the air selection switch and
Normally, use the outside air position to keep the outside air is dusty or contaminated in
air conditioning switch to match your per-
the windshield and side windows clear and to some way, use the recirculation position.
sonal preferences.
quickly remove fog or frost from the wind- Switch to the outside air position every now
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
shield. and then to keep the windows from fogging
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
up.
Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning To change the air selection, simply press the
switch (Changing the function setting)” on air selection switch. A sound will be made
page 7-26. every time you press the switch.
CAUTION
Refer to “Personalizing the air selection  Using recirculated air for a long time may
(Changing the function setting)” on page  Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF} cause the windows to fog up.


Personalizing the air selection NOTE ing compressor will stop and the indicator
(Changing the function setting)  The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
light (A) goes off.
N00760000050 control”.
You can change the following functions to  While the mode selection dial is set to the
match your preference. “ ” position, the air selection will auto- CAUTION
matically change to the outside air position,  When using the air conditioning, the idling
 Enable automatic air control: even if the system is set to “Disable auto- speed may slightly increase as the air condi-
matic air control”, in order to prevent win- tioning compressor is switched on/off auto-
When the mode selection dial or the
dows from fogging up. matically. Especially for vehicles with a
blower speed selection dial is set to the continuously variable transmission (CVT) or
“AUTO” position, the air selection switch Twin Clutch SST, while the vehicle is sta-
will also be automatically controlled.
Air conditioning switch tionary, fully depress the brake pedal to pre- 7
 Disable automatic air control: N00737300301
Even when the mode selection dial or the Push the switch, and the air conditioning
blower speed selection dial is set to the compressor will turn on. The air conditioning NOTE
“AUTO” position, the air selection switch indicator light (A) will come on.  If a problem is detected in the air condition-
will not be automatically controlled. A sound will be made every time you push ing compressor, the air conditioning indica-
the switch. tor light (A) blinks. Press the air
 Changing the settings conditioning switch once to turn it off, then
Press the air selection switch for about 10 once more to turn it back on. If the air condi-
seconds or longer. tioning indicator light does not blink there is
When the setting has changed, the system no problem. If it does blink, have it checked
will beep and the indicator light will flash. at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
• When the setting has changed from a repair facility of your choice.
enabled to disabled,  Sometimes, for example after using a high-
the system will beep three times and the pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet,
indicator will flash three times. and the air conditioning indicator light (A)
• When the setting has changed from dis- blinks temporarily. Wait for a while, press
the air conditioning switch once to turn the
abled to enabled,
system off, then once more to turn it back on.
the system will beep two times and the Once the water evaporates, the blinking will
indicator light will flash three times. stop.


the system will beep two times and the 1. Set the blower speed selection dial to the
Personalizing the air conditioning
indicator light will flash three times. “AUTO” position.
switch (Changing the function set- 2. Select the temperature control dial to the
ting) desired temperature. The temperature can
N00759800029
NOTE be set within a range of around 18 to 32.
You can change the following functions to The temperature will increase as the dial
conditioning control”.
match your preference. is turned to the right.
3. Set the mode selection dial to the
 Enable automatic air conditioning control: “ ” position, the air conditioning will run
“AUTO” position.
When the mode selection dial or blower automatically, even if the system is set to
“Disable automatic air conditioning control”,
speed selection dial has been set to the The vents, recirculation/outside air, blower
in order to prevent windows from fogging
7 “AUTO” position or when the tempera- up. speed, and ON/OFF of air conditioning will
ture control dial has been set to the mini- be controlled automatically.
mum temperature, the air conditioning
switch is automatically controlled.
Operating the air conditioning NOTE
 Disable automatic air conditioning con- system (automatic mode)  Set the temperature at about 25 under normal
conditions.
trol: N00731701427
The air conditioning switch is not auto-
matically controlled, unless the air condi-
tioning switch is used. even if you have selected warm air with the
dial. To prevent the windshield and windows
 Changing the settings from fogging up, the vent mode will be
Press the air conditioning switch for about
changed to “ ” or “ ” and the blower
10 seconds or longer.
speed will be reduced.
• When the setting has changed from
enabled to disabled,
the system will beep three times and the system (manual mode)
In normal conditions, use the system in the
indicator will flash three times. N00731800098
AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
• When the setting has changed from dis- Blower speed and vent mode may be con-
abled to enabled, trolled manually by setting the blower speed


selection dial and the mode selection dial to leg area heated (when driving in rain or For quick defrosting
the desired positions. To return to automatic snow).
operation, set the dials to the “AUTO” posi-
tion.
Defrosting or defogging (wind-

shield, door windows)
N00732400440
CAUTION
through all the windows. 7
position.
To remove frost or mist from the windshield 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” 2. Set your blower to the maximum speed.
and door windows, use the mode selection position. 3. Set the temperature to the highest posi-
dial (“ ” or “ ”). 2. Set the air selection switch (A) to the out- tion.
side air position.
For ordinary defrosting 3. Select your desired blower speed by turn-
ing the blower speed selection dial. NOTE
Use this setting to keep the windshield and  While the mode selection dial is set to the
4. Select your desired temperature by turn-
door windows clear of mist, and to keep the “ ” position, the air conditioning com-
ing the temperature control dial.
air position will also be selected automati-
cally.
 While the “ ” position is selected, you
cannot turn the air conditioning off or select
the recirculation position.
This prevents the windows from fogging up.
side vents toward the door windows.

Important air conditioning operating tips
NOTE Air conditioning system refrig- During a long period of disuse

 When defrosting, do not set the temperature erant and lubricant recommen-
control dial to the maximum cool position. The air conditioning should be operated for at
This will blow cool air on the window glass dations
least five minutes each week, even in cold
and fog it up.
weather. This includes the quick defrosting
If the air conditioning seems less effective
mode. Operating the air condition system
than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant
Important air conditioning leak.
weekly maintains lubrication of the compres-
sor internal parts to keep the air conditioning
operating tips Have the system inspected by your authorized
in the best operating condition.
N00733700280 Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
1. Park the vehicle in the shade whenever of your choice.
7 possible. Parking in the hot sun makes the Air purifier
vehicle interior extremely hot which then
CAUTION N00733800151
requires more time to cool. If it is neces- The air conditioning system is equipped with
 The air conditioning system in your vehicle
sary to park in the sun, open the windows must be charged with the refrigerant HFC- an air filter to remove pollen and dust.
for the first few minutes of air condition- 134a and the lubricant SUN-PAG56. The air filter’s ability to collect pollen and
ing to expel the hot air. Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will dirt is reduced as it becomes dirty, so replace
2. Afterwards, keep the windows closed cause severe damage and may require replac- it periodically. For the maintenance interval,
when the air conditioning is in use. The ing your vehicle’s entire air conditioning
refer to the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-
entry of outside air through open windows system.
NANCE MANUAL”.
will reduce cooling efficiency. The release of refrigerant into the atmo-
3. When running the air conditioning, make sphere is not recommended.
sure the air intake, which is located in The new refrigerant HFC-134a in your vehi- NOTE
cle is designed not to harm the earth’s ozone  Operation in certain conditions such as driv-
front of the windshield, is free of obstruc-
layer. However, it may contribute slightly to ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the
tions such as leaves. Leaves collected in global warming. air conditioning can lead to reduction of ser-
the air-intake chamber may reduce air It is recommended that the old refrigerant be vice life of the filter. When you feel that the
flow and plug the water drains. saved and recycled for future use. air flow is lower than normal or when the
windshield or windows start to fog up easily,
replace the air filter.
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.

AM/FM radio/CD player (if so equipped)

 Please be aware that depending on the
AM/FM radio/CD player (if NOTE iPod/iPhone model or version, operation
 If foreign objects or water get into the audio
so equipped) may differ.
equipment, or if smoke or a strange odor
N00734302098
comes from it, immediately turn off the
The audio system can only be used when the
audio system and have it checked at an How to Clean
ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” repair facility of your choice. Never try to
N00715200023
position.  If the product becomes dirty, wipe with a

repair it yourself. Avoid using the audio sys-
soft cloth.
tem until it is inspected by a qualified per-
 If very dirty, use a soft cloth dipped in
NOTE son.
neutral detergent diluted in water, and
 To listen to the audio system while the  If the audio system is damaged by foreign
then wrung out. Do not use benzene, thin-
engine is not running, turn the ignition objects, water, or fire, have the system
ners, or other chemical wipes. This may 7
switch to the “ACC” position. checked by a qualified Mitsubishi Motors
technician. harm the surface.
If the ignition switch is left in the “ACC”
position, the accessory power will automati-  The audio amplifier (if so equipped) is
located under the front left seat.
cally turn off after a certain period of time
Do not subject the amplifier to a strong
Trademarks
and you will no longer be able to use the N00715300066
audio system. The accessory power comes impact.
It could damage the amplifier or malfunc-  Product names and other proper names
on again if the ignition switch is turned from
tioning could result. are the trademarks or registered trade-
the “ACC” position. Refer to “ACC power
auto-cutout function” on page 5-54. marks of their respective owners.
 If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,  Furthermore, even if there is no specific
Important Points on Usage denotation of trademarks or registered
it may create noise in the audio equipment.
This does not mean that anything is wrong
N00715000021
trademarks, these are to be observed in
with your audio equipment. In such a case, their entirety.
use the cellular phone at a place as far away iPod/iPhone Playback Function (if
as possible from the audio equipment. so equipped)
 This product supports audio playback

from iPod/iPhone devices, however dif-
fering versions mean that playback cannot
be guaranteed.


“Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone”
mean that an electronic accessory has
NOTE
been designed to connect specifically to  For vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been the types of devices that can be connected
certified by the developer to meet Apple may vary.
[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
performance standards.
For details, access the Mitsubishi Motors
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and North America website.
iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., [For vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico]
registered in the U.S. and other countries. For details, access the Mitsubishi Motors
Apple is not responsible for the operation website. Please read and agree to the “Warn-
of this device or its compliance with ing about Links to the Web Sites of Other
7 safety and regulatory standards. Companies”. The websites mentioned above
may connect you to websites other than the
Mitsubishi Motors website.
NOTE http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
 iPod and iTunes licensing allows individual ucts/index.html
users to privately reproduce and play back
non- copyrighted material as well as material
that may be legally copied and reproduced.
Infringement of copyright is prohibited.

5th generation 5th generation 160GB (2009) 160GB (2007) 80GB

(video) (video)
60GB 80GB 30GB
7
6th generation 5th generation 4th generation (video)

8GB 16GB (video camera) 8GB 16GB
8GB 16GB
3rd generation 2nd generation 1st generation

(video) (aluminum) 1GB 2GB 4GB
4GB 8GB 2GB 4GB 8GB

Handling of Discs
4th generation 3rd generation 2nd generation 1st generation

8GB 32GB 64GB 32GB 64GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
7
16GB 32GB 64GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 8GB 16GB
N00715400025
handling of discs.
Handling of Discs This explains care that should be taken in the

Handling of Discs
 If discs are not going to be used for a long Maxi-
Important Points on Handling
period of time, remove these from the mum Com-
product. Type Size
 Fingerprints or other marks on the read playback ments
surface of the disc may result in its con- time
tent being more difficult to read. When Disc Playback Environment CD-DA 5 inches 74 minutes —
holding the disc, grip both edges, or one (12 cm)
edge and the center hole, in order that the In cold environments such as in mid-winter
read surface is not touched. when the interior of the vehicle is cold, turn-
 Do not affix paper or stickers, or other- ing the heater on and immediately trying to CD-TEXT 5 inches 74 minutes —
wise damage the disc. use the product may cause condensation (12 cm)
 Do not forcefully insert a disc if another is (water droplets) to form on the disc and inter-
already within the device. This can result nal optical components, and this may prevent 7
in damage to discs, or malfunction. the product from operating correctly. CD-R/RW 5 inches — •Disc
(12 cm) contain-
In these conditions, remove the disc, and wait ing MP3
Cleaning a short time before use. files
 Periodically clean the read surface of the Copyright
disc. When cleaning, do not wipe in a cir-
cular motion. Instead, wipe gently out- Actions such as unauthorized reproduction,
wards from the center of the disc to the broadcast, public performance, or rental of
outer edge. discs that comprise other than personal use Discs That May Not Be Played Back
 New discs may have burring around the are prohibited by law.
outer edge or in the hole in the center.  Playback of discs other than those
Ensure you check for these. If there are described in “Types of Disc That Can Be
burrs, these may lead to faulty operation,
Types of Disc That Can Be Played Back” is not guaranteed.
therefore ensure these are removed. Played Back  3 inches (8 cm) discs may not be used.
N00715500026  Do not insert irregularly-shaped discs (for
The following marks are printed on the disc example, heart-shaped), as these may
Important Points on Storage
label, package, or jacket. result in malfunction. Additionally, discs
 When not using discs, ensure these are that have transparent portions may not be
kept in cases, and stored out of direct sun- played back.
light.

Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)

 Discs that have not been finalized cannot • There may be noise during playback.
be played back. • There may be jumping in the audio.
CAUTION
 CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only
 Even if recorded using the correct format • The disc may not be recognized.
play back MP3 format audio files.
on a recorder or computer, application • The first track may not be played back.
 Actions such as copying audio CDs or files
software settings and environments; disc • It may take longer than usual until start
and either distributing these to others for free
peculiarities, damage, or marking; or dirt of playback of tracks. or for charge, or uploading files via the Inter-
or condensation on the lens inside the • Playback may start from within the net or other means to servers is an infringe-
product may render the disc unplayable. track. ment of the law.
 Depending on the disc, some functions • Some parts may not be played back.  Do not append the file extensions “.mp3”,
may not be used, or the disc may not play • Tracks may freeze during playback. “.wma”, or “.m4a”, to other than
back. • Tracks may be displayed erroneously. MP3/WMA/AAC format files. Playing back
7  Do not use discs with cracks or warps. discs with these types of files recorded upon
 If the disc has stickers affixed, remains them may cause the files to be incorrectly
from removed stickers, or affixed adhe-
Audio Files identified for playback, which may lead to
sive, then do not use the disc. (MP3/WMA/AAC) loud noise, resulting in speaker damage or
accident.
 Discs that have decorative labels or stick- N00715600027
ers may not be used. This product can play back MP3/WMA/AAC
format audio files recorded on CD-ROM, NOTE
Nonstandard CDs CD-R/RW, and USB devices.  Depending on the condition of the disc
recorder or recording software used, correct
This product will play back audio CDs, how- There are limitations on the files and media playback may not be possible. In these cases,
ever please be aware of the following points that can be used, therefore read the following refer to the user manual for your product or
regarding CD standards. prior to recording MP3/WMA/AAC format software.
audio files on discs or USB devices.  Depending on your computer’s operating
 Ensure that you use discs with on the Additionally, ensure you read the user manu- system, version, software, or settings, files
label surface. als for your CD-R/RW drive and the writing may not have a file extension appended. In
 Playback of other than standard CDs is software, and ensure these are used correctly. these cases, append the file extensions
not guaranteed. Even if the audio can be If the MP3/WMA/AAC format audio files “.mp3”, “.wma”, or “.m4a” when copying
includes title information or other data, then the files.
played back, the audio quality cannot be
this can be displayed.  Files larger than 2GB in size cannot be
guaranteed.
played back.
 When playing back other than standard
CDs, the following may occur.

Data Formats That Can Be Speci-

ROOT Name fica- Explanation
Played Back Folder
tion
N00715700028
Audio file
Format ISO96 Level 1 Maximum 8
Data formats that can be played on discs
specifica- 60 character file
(CD-ROM, CD-R/RW) and USB devices dif-
tions name, and 3
fer.
character file
extension.
Data format DISC USB device
(single-byte
MP3 alphanumeric
WMA X
capital letters,
numerals, “_”
7
1 level 2 level 3 level 4 level 5 level
AAC X may be used)
ISO96 Joliet Files names up
60 to a maximum
Folder Structure exten- 64 characters
N00715800029 sion can be used.
Up to 8 folder levels can be recognized. Multises- Not supported (only first session
You can create a folder structure as in Genre - sion supported)
Artist - Album - Track (MP3/WMA/AAC Maxi- 8 levels (if the root is the 1st
format audio files) for management of tracks. mum level)
number
of levels
Maxi- 700 folders (including root)
mum
folder
number


Speci- What Is MP3? Item Details
Name fica- Explanation N00715900020 Specification MPEG-1 AUDIO LAYER3
tion
MP3 is an abbreviation of “MPEG-1 Audio MPEG-2 AUDIO LAYER3
Maxi- 65,535 files (total number on Layer 3”. MPEG is an abbreviation of
mum file media. Other than MP3, WMA, Sampling MPEG-1: 32/44.1/48
“Motion Picture Experts Group”, and this is a
num- and AAC files not included) frequency MPEG-2: 16/22.05/24
video compression standard used in video
[kHz]
ber*1 CDs, etc.
MP3 is one of the audio compression meth- Bit rate MPEG-1: 32 to 320
File Maximum 64 bytes (for Uni-
ods contained in the MPEG audio standard, [kbps] MPEG-2: 8 to 160
name and code, 32 characters), files/ fold-
folder ers with file/ folder names and reduces the quality of sounds that are
VBR (vari- Support
7 name longer than this will not be dis- beyond the auditory resolution of the human
able bit rate)
restric- played or played back. ear and that are hidden by louder sounds, thus
creating high-quality data with a lower data Channel Stereo/ Joint stereo/ Dual
tions
size. mode channel/ Monaural
USB sup- The recommended file system is Because this can compress CD audio to File exten- mp3
ported FAT32. approximately 1/10 its original data size with- sion
formats 1 partition only out perceptible loss, approximately 10 CDs
Supported ID3 tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1,
can be written to a single CD-R/RW disc.
tag informa- Ver. 2.2, Ver. 2.3, Ver. 2.4
*1:Do not include other than
MP3/WMA/AAC files. However, if stor- tion (ISO-8859-1, UTF-16 (Uni-
ing many tracks within the same folder, CAUTION code)), Titles, Artist name,
these may not be recognized even if less  MP3 files different to the standards at right Album name
may not play back correctly, or file/folder
than the maximum number of tracks. In Maximum 64 characters
names may not be displayed correctly.
these cases, divide the tracks up into mul- number of
tiple folders. characters
that can be
Standards for MP3 Files That Can
indicated on
NOTE Be Played Back the display
 The order in which folders and audio files
are displayed on this product may be differ- Specifications for MP3 files that can be
ent to how they are displayed on a computer. played are as below.

What Is WMA? Item Details CAUTION

N00716000028 Specification Windows Media Audio  AAC supports digital rights management
WMA is an abbreviation of Windows Media Version7.0/8.0/9.0 (DRM). This product cannot play back AAC
files protected using this system.
Audio, and this is an audio compression for- Sampling fre- 32/44.1/48
 AAC files different to the standards at right
mat from Microsoft. This is a compression quency [kHz]
may not play back correctly, or file/folder
format that has a higher compression ratio
Bit rate [kbps] 48 to 320 names may not be displayed correctly.
than MP3.
VBR Support
(variable bit rate)
NOTE Standards for AAC Files That Can
 Microsoft, Windows Media, and Windows Channel mode Stereo/Monaural
Be Played Back
are registered trademarks of Microsoft Cor- File extension wma 7
poration (USA) and in other countries.
Supported tag WMA tags Specifications for AAC files that can be
information Title name, Artist name, played are as below.
Album name
CAUTION
 WMA supports digital rights management Maximum num- 64 characters Item Details
(DRM). This product cannot play back ber of characters Specification Advanced Audio
WMA files protected using this system. that can be indi- Coding
 WMA files different to the standards at right cated on the dis- MPEG4/AAC-LC
may not play back correctly, or file/folder play MPEG2/AAC-LC
names may not be displayed correctly.
 “Pro”, “Lossless”, and “Voice” are not sup- Sampling MPEG4 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/
ported. What Is AAC? fre- 24/32/44.1/48
N00716100029
quency MPEG2 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/
[kHz] 24/32/44.1/48
AAC is an abbreviation of Advanced Audio
Standards for WMA Files That Coding, and this is an audio compression Bit rate MPEG4 8 to 320
Can Be Played Back standard used in “MPEG-2” and “MPEG-4”. [kbps] MPEG2 8 to 320
This features 1.4x the compression of MP3,
Specifications for WMA files that can be with comparable audio quality. VBR Support
played are as below. (variable bit rate)
Channel mode Stereo/Monaural

Important Points on Safety for the Customer

Item Details WARNING WARNING
File extension m4a  The driver should not perform compli-  During thunderstorms, do not touch the
cated operations while driving. antenna or the front panel.
Supported tag AAC tags or ID3 tags
Performing complicated operations while This may lead to electrical shock from
information Title, Artist name,
driving may prevent the driver looking lightning.
Album name where they are going, and cause an acci-
Maximum number 64 characters dent.
of characters that Therefore stop the vehicle in a safe loca- CAUTION
can be indicated on tion before performing such operations.  Do not block ventilation holes or heat sinks
the display  Do not use during malfunctions, such as on the product.
when no sound is audible. Blocking ventilation holes or heat sinks may
7 This may lead to accident, fire, or electric prevent heat from escaping from within the
Important Points on Safety shock. product, leading to fire or malfunction.
 Ensure water or other foreign objects do
for the Customer not enter the product.
 Do not turn the volume up to the extent that
you cannot hear sounds from outside the
N00716200020 This may lead to smoking, fire, electric vehicle while driving.
This product features a number of pictorial shock, or malfunction. Driving without being able to hear sounds
indications as well as points concerning han-  Do not insert foreign objects into the disc from outside the vehicle may result in an
dling so that you can use the product cor- slot. accident.
rectly and in a safe manner, as well as prevent This may lead to fire, electric shock, or  Do not insert your hand or fingers into the
malfunction. disc slot.
injury or damage to yourself, other users, or
 In the event of abnormalities occurring This may result in injury.
property.
when foreign objects or water enter the
product, resulting in smoke or a strange
WARNING smell, immediately stop using the product,
 The driver should not pay close attention and consult an authorized Mitsubishi Operation Keys
to the display while driving. Motors dealer or a repair facility of your N00716300021
This may prevent the driver looking choice.

where they are going, and cause an acci- Continuing to use the product may result Turn the Power ON/ OFF
dent. in accident, fire, or electric shock.
N00716400022
 Do not disassemble or modify the product.
1. Press the PWR/VOL key.
This may lead to malfunction, fire, or elec-
tric shock.

Operation Keys
Disc slot
Disc
*Label side
Turn the power on, and resume playback Turn the PWR/VOL key clockwise to Push the disc in a certain amount, and the 7
from the previous status. increase, and counterclockwise to product will pull the disc in, and playback
2. Press the PWR/VOL key. decrease the volume. will start.
Turn the power OFF. 2. Press the key.
NOTE This will eject the disc from the product,
NOTE  The maximum value for volume is 45, and
so remove the disc.
 Hold down the steering MODE key to also
the minimum is 0.
turn the audio function ON/OFF.
 The initial setting for volume is “17”. CAUTION
 When replacing discs, first ensure that the
vehicle is stopped in an area in which stop-
Adjust Volume Insert/Eject Discs ping is permitted.
N00716500023
N00716600024  Do not insert your hand, fingers, or foreign
1. Turn the PWR/VOL key to adjust the vol- objects into the disc slot. This may lead to
1. Insert the disc into the disc slot with the
ume. injury, smoking, or fire.
label surface up.
 3 inches (8 cm) CDs are not supported.

Operation Keys
Explanation of Buttons
N00716700025
This explains names and functions of each part.
1- key 5- RADIO key 9- PTY key

Use to eject a disc. Switch the radio and the band. PTY searches and scans can be per-
6- PWR/VOL key formed while receiving radio RBDS
2- 3 key/4 key
Adjust the volume, and turn the power broadcasts.
For audio, rewind/fast forward.
ON/OFF. Search channels in the satellite radio*1.
For radio, use as preset keys 3 and 4.
7- MEDIA key 10- SCAN key
3- 2RDM key
Switch between CD and other sources. For audio, play scan playback; for
For audio, play random playback; for
Hold down the key to switch to AUX. radio, scan for stations.
radio, use as preset key 2.
8- DISP key 11- Disc slot
4- 1RPT key
Switch the content of the display. 12- PAGE key
For audio, play repeat playback; for
radio, use as preset key 1. Display indicator page advance.

Operation Keys
13- 5 key Steering wheel audio remote 2- CH key, key
Play/Pause Bluetooth Audio*2, and use control switches Select CD and other audio source tracks
as preset key 5 for radio. and radio stations.
N00716800039
14- 6 key Hold down to skip up and down through
Return during audio track search, and Type 1 tracks.
Hold down to switch the satellite radio
stop Bluetooth Audio*2.
band during satellite radio reception.
For radio, use as preset key 6.
3- MODE key
15- key/ key Hold down to turn the audio function
For audio, select audio track/file; for ON/OFF. Additionally, each time this is
radio, perform automatic station selec- pressed, this switches the audio source.
tion. The order of switching is as shown 7
Select channels in the satellite radio*1. below.
16- MENU key If devices are not connected, then these
Switch to Menu mode. are to be skipped, and the next source
17- /SEL key Type 2 selected.
Adjust audio quality and select items.
For radio, manually select stations.
Select channels in the satellite radio*1. CD or MP3
1 1
iPod* or USB device
* : Requires a satellite tuner connection.
*2: Requires a separately-purchased Blue- Bluetooth Audio*2
tooth-capable audio device in equip-
AM
ment by type (vehicles with a
FM1, 2
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
SIR1, 2, 3, 4*3
1- Vol + key, - key
Adjust audio functions and the mobile
phone function volume. *1: An iPod cable (available separately) is
required.

Listen to Radio
*2: Requires a separately-purchased Blue- /SEL key Reduces the frequency Preset Memory
tooth-capable audio device (vehicles (counter- being received.
with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface). clockwise) Register the broadcast station in advance, and
* : Requires a satellite tuner connection.
3
/SEL key Increases the frequency select this at a later time.
(clockwise) being received.
Listen to Radio 1. Tune in to the frequency to register.
key Release the button to start 2. Hold down any of the keys from the 1RPT
(hold down) seek station selection, and
N00716900027
key to the 6 key.
This explains how to listen to AM and FM when a station is received,
radio broadcasts. key scanning stops. A “Beep” sounds, and the preset key is
(hold down)
registered.
7
To Listen to the Radio
Scan Station Selection NOTE
Press the RADIO key to switch the band.  The preset memory can register a maximum
Collective search for stations that can be of 6 stations for each band.
Switch between AM and FM bands. received.  If a preset key that already has a station reg-
The selected band is indicated on the display. istered is selected, then this is overwritten
Press the SCAN key. with the new preset.
NOTE When a station is received, this is played for 5
 Pressing the preset key will select the previ-
ously registered frequency.
 Bands switch in the order AM, FM1, FM2,
seconds, then the product searches for the
SIR1*, SIR2*, SIR3*, and SIR4*.
next station.
 If no signal is received, bands will not be
switched to SIR2, SIR3, or SIR4. PTY Search
NOTE
*: When a satellite tuner is connected  Press this button again while receiving the During RBDS broadcast reception, select
station to return to normal reception. PTY (program content), and automatically
scan for stations.
Manual/Seek Station Selection
1. During FM reception, press the PTY key.
Turn the /SEL key to the frequency to lis- This switches to the PTY selection mode.
ten to. 2. Press the PTY key to select PTY.

Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped)

3. Press the key or key. NOTE NOTE
The PTY (program content) indicator will
 Press this key again while receiving the sta-  Bands switch in the order AM, FM1, FM2,
flash, and station selection will automati- tion to return to normal reception. SIR1, SIR2*, SIR3*, and SIR4*.
cally start.  Switch satellite radio bands by holding down
When a station is received, the frequency
the key or key on the steering remote
is displayed.
Listen to Satellite Radio (if so control switch.
equipped)
NOTE *:If no signal is received, bands will not be
N00717000025
 This receives the station detected first.
switched.
 10 seconds after reception, PTY search mode This section explains how to listen to satellite
will be cancelled. radio. 7
 To receive a different station, press the
Select a Station
key or key again. NOTE
 A subscription is required to listen to satel-
lite radio. Satellite radio cannot be received Press the key or key to select the sta-
PTY Scan after the free trial period has expired. tion.
 If no subscription has been made when the
During RBDS broadcast reception, select free trial period expires, the display will Go down one step from the
alternate between “CALL” and “888-539- key
PTY (program content) to perform a collec- channel being received.
SIRI”.
tive search for stations. Go up one step from the
key channel being received.
1. During FM reception, press the PTY key.
This switches to the PTY selection mode. To listen to Satellite Radio key
While the key is held down,
2. Press the PTY key to select PTY. it will cycle down through
(Hold down)
3. Press the SCAN key. the channels being received.
Press the RADIO key to switch the band.
When a broadcast station is received, this While the key is held down,
is played for 5 seconds, then the product Switches between SIR1, SIR2, SIR3, and key it will cycle up through the
SIR4 bands. (Hold down)
searches for the next station. channels being received.
The selected band is indicated on the display.

Listen to Satellite Radio (if so equipped)
NOTE 2. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- NOTE

gory.
 When cycling up/down through channels, the  Pressing the preset key will select the previ-
channel number display in the upper level of 3. Press the SCAN key. ously registered channel.
the display changes. The channels in the selected category are The preset channels on the display are shown
 When channel number “000” is selected, the scanned. as “P1” though “P6”.
SIRIUS ID (12 digits) is displayed.
NOTE Channel Search
 Press the SCAN key or PTY key again while
Scan Station Selection receiving the channel to return to normal
Other channels can be selected while listen-
reception.
ing to a channel.
7 Channels are received in order and take 10  Turning the /SET key will cancel.
seconds each. 1. Press the PTY key.
Switches to the category search mode,
Scan All Channels Preset Memory and the category name is indicated on the
display.
Press the SCAN key. Register the channel in advance, and select 2. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate-
this at a later time. gory.
All of the channels are scanned. 3. Press the /SEL key.
1. Tune in to the channel to register. Switches to channel search mode.
2. Hold down any of the keys from the 1RPT
NOTE 4. Turn the /SEL key to select the chan-
 Press this key again while receiving the key to the 6 key. nel.
channel to return to normal reception. A “Beep” sounds, and the preset key is
5. Press the /SEL key.
 Selecting a channel will cancel this. registered.
A “Beep” sounds, and the selected chan-
nel is received. (Channel preliminary set-
NOTE ting mode)
Scan Category Channels  The preset memory can register a maximum The channel name shown on the display
of 6 stations per band. flashes.
1. Press the PTY key.  If a preset key that already has a channel reg-
Switches to the category search mode, Press the /SEL key again to cancel the
istered is selected, then this is overwritten search mode and return to normal recep-
and the category name is indicated on the with the new preset.
display. tion.

Listen to CDs
6. To continue the search, turn the /SEL This enables selection of the next or previous
Initialize the CODE (Passcode) track.
key to select the channel.
The selected channel is received.
The CODE required for changing the LOCK
7. Press the /SEL key. settings in the satellite settings is initialized. Fast Forward or Rewind
Cancels the search mode and returns to (The factory setting is “1111”.)
normal reception.
Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
When the power is off, press the PWR/VOL
NOTE key while holding down the /SEL key. Fast forward/rewind is possible.
 After making preliminary settings in the  “Turn the Power ON/OFF” (P7-38)
channel search mode, this will switch to the Switch Playback Mode
channel being received.
Listen to CDs 7
 Channel number “000” is for the SIRUS ID
display, so it cannot be searched. N00717100026 Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
 If the “PTY ALL” category is selected, all This explains how to listen to audio CDs playback are possible.
channels can be searched in the channel (CD-DA/CD-TEXT).
search mode. Repeat Playback (RPT)
 In the category mode, press the PTY key to
cancel search mode. Play CDs
Press the 1RPT key.
 In the channel search mode, press the 6
key to return to the category search mode. Insert the disc. Repeat playback of the track currently being
 In the channel preliminary setting mode, played.
Insert a disc to automatically start playback.
press the 6 key to return to the category
search mode without returning to the previ-
 “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-39)
ous channel search mode. If a disc is already within the product, press NOTE
 If there is no operation for 10 seconds, the the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the  Pressing again will cancel.
search mode will be cancelled. source.  Selecting a track, ejecting, fast forwarding,
or rewinding will cancel.
Select the Track

Random Playback (RDM)
Press the key or key to select the
track. Press the 2RDM key.

Listen to MP3s
Play the tracks on the disc in a random order.
To Listen to MP3s Switch Playback Mode
NOTE Insert the disc. Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
 Pressing again will cancel.
playback are possible.
 Ejecting will cancel this. Insert a disc to automatically start playback.
 “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-39)
If a disc is already within the product, press
Repeat Playback (RPT)
Scan Playback (SCAN) the MEDIA key to switch to CD as the
source. Press the 1RPT key.
Press the SCAN key.
Repeat playback of the track currently being
7 Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks
NOTE played.
 Depending on the file structure, it may take
on the whole disc in order.
some time to read the contents of the disc.
NOTE
NOTE  Pressing again will cancel.
 Selecting a file, ejecting, fast forwarding, or
 Press this button again during playback if Select the Track (File) rewinding will cancel.
you wish to hear that track, and that track
will play normally.
track. Folder Repeat Playback
Listen to MP3s This enables selection of the next or previous
Hold down the 1RPT key.
N00717200027
track.
This explains how to listen to audio files on a Repeat playback of the tracks within the
disc.
Fast Forward or Rewind folder currently being played.
CAUTION NOTE
 CD-ROM and CD-R/RW media can only  Pressing again will cancel.
play back MP3 format audio files.
Fast forward/rewind is possible.  Even if the file is selected, folder repeat
playback will not be cancelled.

Listen to an iPod
Random Playback (RDM) NOTE NOTE

 Press this button again during playback if  While the file is selected, hold down the
Press the 2RDM key. you wish to hear that track, and that track 6 key to cancel track search mode.
will play normally.  If there is no operation for five seconds after
Play the tracks in the folder in a random selecting the file, that file is played back.
order.  Disc operations such as selecting a track will
Search Tracks cancel track search mode.
NOTE
 Pressing again will cancel. Search folders and files, and select a track. Listen to an iPod
N00717300060
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the folder.
By connecting commercially-available 7
Folder Random Playback 2. Press the /SEL key. iPod/iPhone devices to this product, you can
play back tracks on these through the product.
Hold down the 2RDM key. Files within the selected folder are dis-
played.
Play all tracks in folders on the disc in a ran- 3. Turn the /SEL key to select the file. CAUTION
dom order.  Do not leave the iPod/iPhone unattended in
4. Press the /SEL key.
the vehicle.
 Never hold these devices in your hand to
NOTE This plays the selected file (track).
operate while driving, as this is dangerous.
 Pressing again will cancel.  No indemnification for data loss resulting
NOTE when the iPod/iPhone is connected to the
product will be possible.
 While the folder is selected, press the 6
Scan Playback (SCAN) key to cancel track search mode.  Depending on how the devices are handled,
audio files being damaged or lost, therefore
 If there is no operation for 10 seconds after
Press the SCAN key. it is recommended that data be backed up.
selecting the folder, then track search mode
will be cancelled.
Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks  Select the folder, and hold down the /SEL
in the folder currently being played in order. key to start playback from the first track in
that folder.
 While the file is selected, press the 6 key
to return to the previous operation.

Listen to an iPod
NOTE NOTE Play iPod

 Depending on the generation, model, or soft-  Depending on the status of the iPod/iPhone,
ware version of the iPod/iPhone, playback it may take some time until the device is rec- Press the MEDIA key to set the iPod as the
on this product may not be possible. ognized, or playback starts.
source.
(P.7-29) Additionally, playback as  Buttons on the product will not operate while
explained in this document may not be possi- iPod/iPhone is connected. The selected source is indicated on the dis-
ble.  iPod/iPhone specifications and settings may play.
 For vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, mean that connection is not possible, or
the types of devices that can be connected result in differences in operation or display.
may vary.  Depending on audio data in the iPod/iPhone, Select the Track (File)
[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.] track information may not be displayed cor-
7 For details, access the Mitsubishi Motors rectly.
North America website.  Depending on the status of the vehicle and
[For vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico] device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back
track.
For details, access the Mitsubishi Motors after starting the engine.
website. Please read and agree to the “Warn-
This enables selection of the next or previous
 Data containing copyright information may
ing about Links to the Web Sites of Other track.
not play back.
Companies”. The websites mentioned above  It is recommended that the iPod/iPhone
may connect you to websites other than the equalizer settings be set to flat. Fast Forward or Rewind
Mitsubishi Motors website.  Operate the iPod/iPhone while connected to
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod- this product.
ucts/index.html
 If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Bluetooth Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
 Regarding how to connect the iPod/iPhone, as a Bluetooth-capable audio device, then do
refer to “How to connect an iPod” on page not connect the iPod/iPhone using an iPod
Fast forward/rewind is possible.
5-182. cable. Connection using both methods will
 When connecting the iPod/iPhone, use a
commercially-available iPod connection
result in erroneous operation. Switch Playback Mode
 If an iPod/iPhone does not operate correctly,
cable. then remove the iPod/iPhone from the prod-
 Set up the device in order that no unsafe uct, reset, then reconnect. Repeat playback and shuffle playback are
actions, such as plugging in the connection possible.
cable are taken while driving.
 When inserting and removing the
iPod/iPhone, for safety’s sake first stop the
vehicle.

Listen to Audio Files on a USB Device
Repeat Playback (RPT) NOTE NOTE

 Pressing again will cancel.  Select the category, and hold down the
Press the 1RPT key. /SEL key to start playback from the first
track in that category.
Repeat playback of the track currently being Search Tracks  While the track is selected, press the 6
played. key to return to the previous operation.
Search categories or track names, and select a  While the track is selected, hold down the
NOTE track. 6 key to cancel track search mode.
 Pressing again will cancel.  If there is no operation for five seconds after
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- selecting the track, that file is played back.
gory.  iPod operations such as selecting a track will 7
Shuffle Playback (RDM) 2. Press the /SEL key. Categories or
cancel track search mode.
tracks within the selected category are

Press the 2RDM key. displayed. Listen to Audio Files on a
Play tracks in the category currently being
3. Turn the /SEL key to select the cate- USB Device
gory or track.
played in a random order. N00717400074
4. Press the /SEL key. By connecting commercially-available USB

Repeat steps 1 to 4, and search for tracks. devices such as USB memory to this product,
NOTE
Select the track, and press the /SEL you can play back audio files on these
key to play. through the product.
Album Shuffle Playback NOTE CAUTION

 While the category (1st level) is selected,  Do not leave the USB device unattended in
Hold down the 2RDM key. press the 6 key to cancel track search the vehicle.
mode.  Never hold these devices in your hand to
Play back the album in a random order  If there is no operation for 10 seconds after operate while driving, as this is dangerous.
(tracks in any order on the album). selecting the category, then track search
mode will be cancelled.

CAUTION NOTE NOTE

 Do not use hard discs, card readers, or mem-  Set up the device in order that no unsafe  The maximum supported capacity for USB
ory readers, as damage may occur to these or actions, such as plugging in the connection memory is 32GB.
to the data contained therein. If these are cable are taken while driving.  Operate the USB device containing recorded
erroneously connected, then turn the ignition  When inserting and removing the USB audio files while connected to this product.
switch to the “LOCK” position, then remove. device, for safety’s sake first stop the vehi-
 Because of the risk of data loss, it is recom- cle.
mended that files be backed up.  Do not insert other than audio devices into
Play Back of Audio Files on a
 No guarantee is made as regards damage to the USB port. Damage to the device or USB Device
the USB device, nor regarding loss or dam- equipment may result.
age to data contained therein.  Depending on the status of the USB device, Press the MEDIA key to set USB as the
7  Depending on how the devices are handled, it may take some time until the device is rec-
source.
audio files being damaged or lost, therefore ognized, or playback starts.
it is recommended that data be backed up.  Depending on USB devices, buttons on the The selected source is indicated on the dis-
product will not operate while the USB
play.
device is connected.
NOTE  USB device specifications and settings may
 Digital audio players that support the mass mean that connection is not possible, or Select the Track (File)
storage class specifications can be con- result in differences in operation or display.
nected.  Depending on audio data in the USB device,
track information may not be displayed cor- Press the key or key to select the
 For details regarding the types of USB
devices that can be connected and the types rectly. track.
of files that can be played back in vehicles  Depending on the status of the vehicle and
device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back
This enables selection of the next or previous
with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, refer to track.
“Types of connectable devices and supported after starting the engine.
file specifications” on page 5-182.  Data containing copyright information may
 Regarding how to connect USB devices, not play back. Fast Forward or Rewind
refer to “How to connect a USB memory  This product can play back MP3, WMA, and
device” on page 5-181. AAC format audio files.
 When connecting a USB device, use a con-  Depending on the type of USB device, usage Hold down the 3 key or the 4 key.
nection cable. Failure to use a connection may not be possible, or functions that can be
used may be restricted. Fast forward/rewind is possible.
cable when connecting may place undue load
on, or damage the USB connector.  The recommended file system for USB
memory is FAT32.

Switch Playback Mode NOTE NOTE

 Cycling up/down through files will cancel  Selecting a folder will cancel this.
Repeat playback, random playback, and scan this.  Cycling up/down through files will cancel
playback are possible.  Even if the file is selected, folder repeat this.
playback will not be cancelled.  Even if the file is selected, all folder random
Repeat Playback (RPT)
Folder Random Playback (RDM)
Scan Playback (SCAN)
Press the 1RPT key.
Press the 2RDM key.
Repeat playback of the track currently being Press the SCAN key.
played. Play tracks in the folder currently being 7
played in a random order. Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks
on the whole USB device in order.
NOTE
NOTE
 Selecting a file will cancel this.
 Pressing again will cancel. NOTE
However, it will not be cancelled in vehicles  Selecting a folder will cancel this.  Press this button again during playback if
 Cycling up/down through files will cancel you wish to hear that track, and that track
with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
this. will play normally.
 Even if the file is selected, folder random
Folder Repeat Playback Folder Scan Playback
Hold down the 1RPT key. All Folder Random Playback Hold down the SCAN key.
Repeat playback of the tracks within the Play the first 10 seconds of the first track in
folder currently being played. Hold down the 2RDM key.
each folder on the USB device in order.
Play the tracks in all folders in a random
NOTE order. NOTE
 Press this button again during playback if
 Selecting a folder will cancel this. NOTE you wish to hear that track, and that track
 Pressing again will cancel. will play normally.

Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if so equipped)
Search Tracks Listen to Bluetooth Audio (if NOTE

 Depending on the status of the Bluetooth
so equipped)
Search folders and files, and select a track. audio device, it may take some time until the
N00717500020
device is recognized, or playback starts.
1. Turn the /SEL key to select the folder. This product can play back tracks on com-  Bluetooth audio device specifications and
settings may mean that connection is not
2. Press the /SEL key. mercially-available Bluetooth-capable audio
possible, or result in differences in operation
devices. or display.
Files within the selected folder are dis-  Depending on audio data in the Bluetooth
played. CAUTION audio device, track information may not be
3. Turn the /SEL key to select the file.  Never hold these devices in your hand to displayed correctly.
7 4. Press the /SEL key. operate while driving, as this is dangerous.  Depending on the status of the vehicle and
 Do not leave the Bluetooth audio device device, the iPod/iPhone may not play back
This plays the selected file (track). unattended in the vehicle. after starting the engine.
 Depending on how the devices are handled,
audio files being damaged or lost, therefore Connect a Bluetooth-capable
NOTE it is recommended that data be backed up.
 While the folder is selected, press the 6 Audio Device
key to cancel track search mode.
 If there is no operation for 10 seconds after NOTE Regarding how to connect your Bluetooth
selecting the folder, then track search mode  Depending on the type of Bluetooth-capable device, refer to “Connecting the Bluetooth®
will be cancelled. audio devices, usage may not be possible, or 2.0 interface and Bluetooth device” on page
 Select the folder, and hold down the /SEL functions that can be used may be restricted. 5-166.
key to start playback from the first track in  Confirm together with the user manuals for Operation methods below describe situations
that folder. the commercially-available Bluetooth-capa-
once connection has been completed.
 While the file is selected, press the 6 key ble audio devices.
to return to the previous operation.  Depending on the type of Bluetooth-capable
 While the file is selected, hold down the audio devices, volume levels may differ. NOTE
There is the danger of loud volumes, so prior  If the iPod/iPhone is connected via Bluetooth
6 key to cancel track search mode.
to use, it is recommended that you turn the as a Bluetooth-capable audio device, then do
 If there is no operation for five seconds after volume down. not connect the iPod/iPhone using an iPod
selecting the file, that file is played back.  “Adjust Volume” (P.7-39) cable. Connection using both methods will
 Operations such as selecting a track will can- result in erroneous operation.
cel track search mode.

Use AUX (if so equipped)
Play Bluetooth Audio Switch Playback Mode Scan Playback (SCAN)

1. Press the MEDIA key to set Bluetooth Press the SCAN key.
Repeat playback, random playback, and scan
Audio as the source.
playback are possible.
Play the first 10 seconds of each of the tracks
The selected source is indicated on the on the whole Bluetooth Audio device in
display. Repeat Playback (RPT) order.
2. Press the 5 key. Bluetooth Audio play- Press the 1RPT key.
back starts. NOTE
Repeat playback of the track currently being  Press this button again during playback if
NOTE played.
you wish to hear that track, and that track
will play normally.
7
 Hold down the 5 key to pause.
 Press the 6 key to stop.
NOTE
 Each time the 1RPT key is pressed, this
switches in the order Repeat OFF, 1 track
N00717600034
repeat, All track repeat, and Repeat OFF.
Select the Track (File) By connecting external input cables and AUX
devices to this product, you can play back
Press the key or key to select the Random Playback (RDM) tracks on these devices through the product.
track.
Press the 2RDM key. Hold down the MEDIA key.
This enables selection of the next or previous Switch to the AUX mode, and “AUX” is dis-
track. Play the tracks in the Bluetooth Audio device played.
in a random order.
Fast Forward or Rewind
NOTE
Fast forward/rewind is possible.

Auxiliary Audio connector

NOTE
(RCA)  If no audio devices are connected, then do
not select the external sound input mode. If
external sound input mode is selected while
no audio devices are connected, then sound
may be emitted through the speakers.
Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA)

7 A- Left audio input connector (white)
B- Right audio input connector (red)
CAUTION
 Connect an audio device with external sound
input mode canceled, or with the sound
turned down.
 Even if not inserted, the product will switch
to AUX, therefore take care with volume
levels when not inserted.
NOTE
 Depending on the audio device to be con-
nected, noise may be emitted.
 For power, use the battery power source
included in the audio device to be connected.
Using the connected audio device while
charging through the cigarette lighter socket
in the vehicle may lead to noise being emit-
ted through the speakers.

Display Indicator
Display Indicator
N00717700022
This explains content of the display indicator.
Change the Display Mode CAUTION During FM Reception

N00717800023  The operation of changing display contents
You can change the content of the display may impede safe driving, therefore check This switches in the order “Frequency”, “Sta-
safety before operation. tion name”, and “Radio text”.
indicator.
Press the DISP key to switch the display con-
tent.
NOTE NOTE
 Radio text has a maximum display of 64
Each time the DISP key is pressed, the dis-  Up to 11 characters may be displayed at one
characters.
play content changes. time. To display 12 or more characters, press
the PAGE key, and subsequent characters  If there is no text information to display, then
will be displayed. “NO MESSAGE” is displayed.

Audio Quality and Volume Balance Adjustment
During Satellite Radio Reception NOTE NOTE

(if so equipped)  If there is no text information to display, then  If there is no text information to display, then
“NO TITLE” is displayed. “NO TITLE” is displayed.
 Displayed genre name in equipment by type
This switches in the order “Channel name”,
(vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
“Category name”, “Artist name”, “Track
name”, and “Composer name”.
Display the ID3tag  The genre name display may not be possible.
Hold down the DISP key.

NOTE During Bluetooth® 2.0 Audio Play-
 The channel and category have a maximum This switches the ID3tag display.
display of 8 characters. The other items have
back (if so equipped)
7 a maximum display of 36 characters.
[DISP] Each time the key is pressed, this
switches in the order “Album name”, “Track
N00718300025
name”, “Artist name”, “Genre name”*, and Operating details are the same as in “During
“Operating status”. iPod Playback” (P.7-56).
During CD-DA playback
*:Displayed when playing back audio
This switches in the order “Disc title”, “Track files on a USB device (vehicles with a Audio Quality and Volume
title”, and “Operating status”. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface). Balance Adjustment
N00718400026
NOTE Change audio quality settings.

 If there is no text information to display, then NOTE
“NO TITLE” is displayed.  During display of the ID3tag, hold down the
DISP key to switch to the folder title display.
Adjust Audio Quality and Vol-
 The genre name display may not be possible. ume Balance
During MP3/WMA/AAC Play-
1. Press the /SEL key to select settings
back items.
During iPod Playback
N00718200024
This switches in the order “Folder title”, “File Each time the /SEL key is pressed, this
title”, and “Operating status”. This switches in the order “Albums”, “Track
switches in the order BASS, TREBLE,
name”, “Artist name”, “Genre name”, and
FADER, BALANCE, SCV, and Cancel.
“Operating status”.
2. Turn the /SEL key to adjust.
System Settings
Adjust- Each time the /SEL key is pressed, this
Turn counter-
ment Turn clockwise switches in the order Satellite radio set-
clockwise
items tings*1, Gracenote DB*2, PHONE set-
BASS -6 to 0 0 to +6 tings, Adjust time, and Cancel.
(low low-pass (high low-pass 3. Turn the /SEL key to set.
volume) volume) 4. Press the /SEL key to determine.
TRE- -6 to 0 0 to +6
BLE (Low high-pass (High high-pass This completes settings, and displays the
volume) volume) next settings item.
FADER CENTER to FRONT 11 to
REAR 11 CENTER *1: Displayed when a satellite tuner is con-
nected.
7
(emphasize (emphasize
REAR) FRONT) * :Displayed when playing back audio files
2
(vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).

BAL- LEFT 11 to CENTER to
ANCE CENTER RIGHT 11
(emphasize (emphasize
LEFT) RIGHT)
SCV OFF, LOW MID, HIGH
(Low vehicle (High vehicle
compensated compensated
volume effect) volume effect)
System Settings
N00718500030
Change system settings such as product time.
1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the /SEL key to select settings
items.

System Settings
Satellite Radio Settings (if so equipped)
Change each satellite radio setting.
Settings
Settings name Settings item Settings content
value
SIRIUS ID — — This displays the SIRIUS ID.
SKIP SETTING SKIP SETTING ON SKIP can be set for each channel. Channels for which SKIP is set are excluded
SELECT CH*1 OFF from the search during up/down channel selecting and scanning.
7 They can be received when selecting channels using the preset keys or searching
for a station.
SKIP SETTING — When “YES” is selected, the SKIP settings for all channels are turned off.
ALL RESET
LOCK SETTING LOCK SETTING ON LOCK can be set for each channel. Channels for which LOCK is set are
SELECT CH*2 OFF excluded from the search during up/down channel selecting and scanning.
If a channel for which LOCK is set is selected when selecting channels using the
preset keys or searching for a station, “CH LCKED” is displayed within about 2
seconds after the channel text is displayed. The sound is muted.
LOCK SETTING — When “YES” is selected and the CODE for settings is input, the LOCK settings
ALL RESET for all channels are turned off.
LOCK SETTING — The CODE required for the LOCK settings is changed. (The factory setting is
EDIT CODE “1111”.)
If the input code is incorrect, “LOCK SETTING WRG LC” is displayed.
*1:Each time the /SET key is pressed, this switches in the order Settings channel select, Change SKIP settings, and Complete settings.
To return to “each channel SKIP setting”, press the 6 key.

System Settings
*2:Once the CODE (passcode) of your choice is entered, each time the /SET key is pressed, this switches in the order Settings channel select,
Change LOCK settings, and Complete settings.
To return to “each channel LOCK setting”, press the 6 key. Input the CODE from the 1 RPT key to the 6 key.
Depending on the vehicle, PHONE settings

Time Setting may not be possible.
NOTE
 Some models may not be confirmed as con-
Set the time manually. nected, or may not connect.
NOTE
 Cancel functions such as the mobile phone Supported profiles
1. Select “YES” at the “Adjust time” screen,
“dial lock”, and connect while on the Hands-free HFP(v1.5)
and press the /SEL key.
standby screen.
 While connected, mobile phone (receiving
Phonebook
OPP(v1.1), PBAP(v1.0) 7
The hour can be adjusted. Press the transfer
calls, etc.) operations may not function cor-
/SEL key again to adjust the minutes. rectly.
2. Turn the /SEL key to adjust the time.  Depending on the distance between the prod-
Vehicles without a Bluetooth® 2.0 Inter-
3. Press the /SEL key. uct and the mobile phone, the conditions
within the vehicle, and types of screening,
face
This completes the adjustment. connection may not be possible. In these
A hands-free kit (available separately) is
cases, situate the mobile phone as close as
possible to the product.
required.
NOTE  Even though a Bluetooth-capable mobile
(“Set value” bold typeface indicates factory
 In order to finish adjusting the time, hold phone, characteristics and specifications may default settings.)
down the /SEL key until the seconds are mean that correct operation may not be pos-
reset to “00”. sible. Settings
Settings content
 For safety’s sake, do not operate the mobile value
phone while driving. When operating the PHONE Do not use mobile phone voice
mobile phone, first stop the vehicle in a safe
PHONE Settings location.
OFF cut-in.
 Even though a Bluetooth-capable mobile PHONE During mobile phone voice cut-
Change the mobile phone voice cut- in set- phone, phone specifications and settings may MUTE in, mute the audio.
result in differences in display, or prevent
tings and the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface lan- PHONE During mobile phone voice cut-
correct operation.
guage. ATT in, output audio from all speak-
ers.

Troubleshooting
Settings Gracenote DB (Vehicles with a
Settings content Vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 Interface
value
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut- (“Set value” bold typeface indicates factory
IN-L in, output sound from the left default settings.)
The version number can be confirmed.
front speaker.
Settings Settings
PHONE During mobile phone voice cut- Settings content 1. Select “Gracenote DB” and press the
name value
IN-R in, output sound from the right /SEL key.
front speaker. HFM ENG- Change the hands
2. Turn the /SEL key and select “DB Ver-
voice lan- LISH free module voice
During mobile phone voice cut- sion”.
PHONE guage set- FRENCH language.
in, output sound from the left 3. Press the /SEL key.
7 IN-LR
and right front speakers.
tings
SPANISH The DB Version is displayed.
JAPA-
NESE
Troubleshooting
N00718600031
Please check these items if a message appears on the display, or if you think something is not working properly.
If This Message Appears...
A message is displayed on this product according to the situation.

Troubleshooting
Mode Message Cause Response
CD CHECK DISC The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up.
The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting again.
DISC ERROR The disc is damaged. Clean the read surface of the disc.
The disc is dirty.
INTERNAL E The drive has malfunctioned for some reason. Check that there is no problem with the disc, and
insert the disc again. If the problem persists, con-
sult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
HEAT ERROR The temperature inside the product is high. Remove the disc, and wait for the internal tempera- 7
ture to return to normal.
USB FILE ERROR Files that cannot be played are selected. Select files that can be played.
 “Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)” (P.7-34)
USB BUS PWR There is high or low electrical current or voltage. Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the
LSI ERROR There is an internal malfunction for some reason. problem persists, consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
UNSUPPORTED Unsupported audio files have been played. Confirm audio files that can be played.
FORMAT  “Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC)” (P.7-34)
UNSUPPORTED An unsupported USB device has been connected. Please connect a USB memory device.
DEVICE
iPod NO SONG An iPod/iPhone not containing any tracks has been Connect an iPod/iPhone containing tracks.
connected.
VER ERROR This iPod/iPhone software version is not supported. Please change to a supported software version.
Other ERROR DC An abnormal direct voltage has been sent to the Turn the power OFF and wait a short while. If the
speakers. problem persists, consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Antenna
If You Think Something Is Not Working Properly...
Here is a list of symptoms, causes and responses if you think something is not working properly.
Symptoms Cause Response

There is no sound or quiet The volume is turned to its minimum. Adjust the volume.
sound.  “Adjust Volume” (P.7-39)
The balance or fader is turned to one side. Adjust the balance or fader.
 “Adjust Audio Quality and Volume Balance” (P.7-56)
7 The disc cannot be A disc is already in the product. Eject the disc.
inserted.  “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-39)
There is no disc in the product, but the prod- Press the eject button once.
uct says it is loading.  “Insert/Eject Discs” (P.7-39)
The disc cannot be played. The disc is inserted upside down. Insert with the label side up.
The disc has condensation on it. Wait a while before inserting.
The disc is dirty. Clean the read surface of the disc.
The sound skips in the The disc is damaged or dirty. Check the disc.
same place.
There is no sound, even if Damage to or dirt on the disc means that its Check the disc. Additionally, if using CD-R/RW discs, their charac-
the disc is inserted. data cannot be read. teristics may render them unable to be played.
Antenna To remove To install

N00734200426
Turn the pole (A) counterclockwise. Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base
Roof antenna (except for vehi- (B) until it is securely retained.
cles with SIRIUS satellite radio)

General information about your radio
NOTE
 Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the
following cases:
• When entering a place with low clearance
• When using an automatic car wash
• When covering your vehicle with a car
cover
General information about

your radio 7
NOTE
 Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the To remove N00733901478
following cases:
Your vehicle’s radio receives both AM and
FM stations.
• When using an automatic car wash Turn the pole (A) counterclockwise.
• When covering your vehicle with a car
The quality of your reception is affected by
cover distance, obstacles, and signal interference.
To install
• When driving into a structure that has a low
This radio complies with Part 15 of Federal
ceiling
Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
(B) until it is securely retained. (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.). Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
Roof antenna (for vehicles with
SIRIUS satellite radio)  The device may not cause harmful inter-
ference.
For securing the best satellite reception, the  This device must accept any interference
angle of the antenna is fixed. recieved, including interference that may
cause undesirable operation.


reflected signal. This time difference may
CAUTION Weak reception (fading) cause some reception disturbance or flutter.
 Changes or modifications not expressly
This problem occurs primarily in urban areas.
approved by the party meeting the above Because of the limited range of FM signals
conditions could void the user’s authority to
and the way FM waves transmit, you may
operate the equipment.
experience weak or fading FM reception.
When the broadcast is blocked by mountains
or similar obstructions, reception can be dis-
Signal transmission turbed.
FM signals do not follow the earth surface
nor are they reflected by the upper atmo- Reflection
7 sphere. For this reason, FM broadcasts cannot
be received over long distances. AM signals The reason why one can hear FM but not AM
follow the earth’s surface and are reflected by in parking garages, under bridges etc., is that
the upper atmosphere. For this reason, AM FM signals, unlike AM signals, are reflected
broadcasts can be received over longer dis- by solid objects such as buildings, etc.
tances. Because FM signals are easily reflected by Cross modulation
buildings, this can also cause reception dis-
turbances. If one listens to a weak station and is in the
FM AM The direct signal from the broadcast station vicinity of another strong station, both sta-
reaches the antenna slightly before the tions might be received simultaneously.
25 to 40 mile radius 100 mile radius

(40 to 64 km) (160 km)


lines, lightning and other types of similar
FM stereo reception electrical phenomena.
Stereo reception requires a high quality

broadcast signal. This means that types of
disturbances mentioned previously become
more marked and the reception range is
somewhat diminished during stereo recep-
tion.
Causes of disturbances
7
FM reception is affected by the electrical sys-
tems of vehicles in the vicinity, especially
those without an electronic noise suppression
device. The disturbance is even greater if the
station is weak or poorly tuned.
FM reception is not as sensitive to electrical
disturbances as AM. AM reception is sensi-
tive to electrical disturbances such as power

For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down ...............................................................8-2

Jump-starting the engine ..................................................................8-2
Engine overheating ..........................................................................8-4
Tools and jack ..................................................................................8-5
How to change a tire ........................................................................8-6
Towing ...........................................................................................8-12
Operation under adverse driving conditions ..................................8-14
Fuel Pump Shut-off System ...........................................................8-15 8
If the vehicle breaks down
If the vehicle breaks down Jump-starting the engine CAUTION

N00836300161 N00836400713  Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-
volt battery. If the other system isn’t 12-volt,
If your vehicle breaks down on the road, If the engine cannot be started because the
both systems can be damaged.
move to the shoulder and turn on the hazard battery is weak or dead, you can start it with
warning flashers. If there is no shoulder, or the battery from another vehicle using jumper
the shoulder is not safe, drive in the right lane cables. 3. You could be injured if the vehicles move.
slowly, with the hazard lights flashing, until Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-
you come to a safe stopping place. Keep the cle. Put an automatic transaxle, CVT or
WARNING Twin Clutch SST in “P” (PARK) or a
flashers flashing.  When using jumper cables to start a vehi- manual transaxle in “N” (Neutral). Turn
cle, follow the procedures and be very cau-
the ignition key to the “LOCK” position.
If the engine stops/fails tious.
8 WARNING
If the engine stops, there will be no power  Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK” posi-
assist to the steering and brakes, making these
CAUTION tion on both vehicles. Make sure that the
 Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing or
difficult to use. cables or your clothes cannot be caught by
towing. Vehicles with continuously variable
the fan or drive belt. Personal injury
transmission (CVT) or Twin Clutch SST
 The brake booster will not work, so the could result.
cannot be started this way. Pushing or towing
brakes will not grip well. The brake pedal
a vehicle that has a manual transaxle may
will be harder to press than usual. overheat and damage the catalytic converter.
 Since there is no power steering assist, the Also, there is more risk of an accident when NOTE
steering wheel will be hard to turn. a vehicle is being pushed or towed.  Turn off all lights, heater, and other electrical
loads. This will avoid sparks and help save
both batteries.
When the engine fails at the 1. Take off any metal jewelry such as watch
intersection bands or bracelets that might make an
accidental electrical contact. 4. Make sure your battery electrolyte is at
2. Position the vehicles close enough the proper level. (Refer to “Checking bat-
Get help from your passengers, bystanders, together so that the jumper cables can tery electrolyte level” on page 9-15.)
etc. to push the vehicle and move it to a safe reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t
zone. touching each other.
8-2 For emergencies

Jump-starting the engine
WARNING NOTE WARNING

 If the electrolyte fluid is not visible, or  Open the terminal cover before connecting  When connecting the jumper cable, do not
looks frozen, DO NOT ATTEMPT JUMP the jumper cable to the positive terminal of connect the positive (+) cable to the nega-
STARTING!! the battery. tive (-) terminal. Otherwise sparks can
The battery might split open or explode if (Refer to “Disconnection and connection” on make the battery explode.
the temperature is below the freezing page 9-16.)
point or if it is not filled to the proper  Use the proper cables suitable for the battery
level. size. CAUTION
Otherwise heat damage to the cables could  Make sure that the jumper cable will not be
5. For vehicles equipped with turbocharger, result. caught in the cooling fan or other moving
remove the air duct and then the battery  Check the jumper cables for damage and cor- parts in the engine compartment.
rosion before use.
upper cover.
(Refer to “Removing and installing the
battery upper cover” on page 9-14.) 7. Connect one end of the other jumper cable
8. Start the engine in the vehicle providing
the boost. Let the engine idle a few min-
8
6. Connect one end of one jumper cable to to the negative (-) terminal of the booster utes, then start the engine in the vehicle
the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery (B), and the other end to the with the low battery.
battery (A), and the other end to the posi- engine block of the vehicle with the low
tive (+) terminal of the booster battery battery (A) at the point farthest from the NOTE
(B). battery.  If the engine is started with the air duct
removed, the noise produced as air is drawn
WARNING into the engine will be greater than when the
 Be sure to follow the proper order when duct is installed.
connecting the batteries, of:
   . 9. After the engine is started, disconnect the
 Make sure that the connection is made cables in the reverse order from the way
to the engine properly. If the connection is you connected them.
directly made to the negative side of the 10. For vehicles equipped with turbocharger,
battery, the flammable gases from inside install the battery upper cover and then
the battery might catch fire and explode, the air duct.
causing personal injury. (Refer to “Removing and installing the
battery upper cover” on page 9-14.)
For emergencies 8-3

Engine overheating
using jumper cables, the engine may misfire.
WARNING This can cause the anti-lock braking system
WARNING
 Charging your battery while it is still in  To avoid personal injury, keep hands, hair,
warning light to blink on and off. This is only
your vehicle might cause the battery to jewelry and clothes away from the cooling
due to the low battery voltage. It is not a
catch fire and explode. If you have to fan. The cooling fan can start at any time.
charge it while in the vehicle, disconnect problem with the brake system. If this hap-
the negative terminal. pens, fully charge the battery and ensure the
charging system is operating properly. 4. If you see steam or spray coming from
 Keep sparks, cigarettes and flames away
under the hood, turn off the engine.
from the battery because the battery may
explode.
5. If you do not see steam or spray coming
 Keep your work area well vented when
Engine overheating from under the hood, leave the engine on
charging or using the battery in an
N00836500323 until the bar graph for the engine coolant
enclosed space. When the engine has overheated, the infor- temperature warning display on the multi-
 Remove all the caps before charging the mation screen in the multi-information dis- information display goes down. When it
8 battery. play will be interrupted and the engine is in the middle of the normal zone, you
 Electrolyte (battery acid) is corrosive coolant temperature warning display will can start driving again. If the bar graph
diluted sulphuric acid. If electrolyte comes appear. The screen will then change to the stays in the red zone, turn off the engine.
in contact with your hands, eyes, clothes, engine coolant temperature display screen
or the painted surface of your vehicle,
and “ ” will flash. If this happens:
WARNING
thoroughly flush with water. If electrolyte  Before raising the engine hood, check to
gets in your eyes, flush them immediately see if there is steam or spray coming from
and thoroughly with water, and get 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn on
under the hood. Steam or spray coming
prompt medical attention. the hazard warning flashers.
from an overheated engine could seriously
 Always wear protective clothing and gog- 2. With the engine still running, carefully
scald you.
gles when working near the battery. raise the engine hood to vent the engine Do not open the hood until there is no
 Keep the battery out of the reach of chil- compartment. steam or spray.
dren. 3. Check that the cooling fan is running. If
the fan is not turning, stop the engine
6. When you do not see any more steam or
immediately and contact an authorized
spray, open the hood. Look for obvious
As your vehicle has anti-lock Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Be
ity of your choice for assistance.
brakes careful as components will be hot. Any
leak source must be repaired.
If you drive your vehicle with a low battery
charge, after the engine has been started by
8-4 For emergencies
Tools and jack

7. If there is no obvious leak source, check 11. Have your vehicle checked by your autho-
the coolant level in the reserve tank. If rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
Tools
N00832600124
there is none, or if it is too low, slowly add facility of your choice.
coolant.
8. If the reserve tank needs coolant, you will
probably also need to add coolant to the
Tools and jack
N00836600265
radiator. Do not loosen or remove the
radiator cap until the engine has cooled
down. Storage
WARNING The tools and jack are stowed in the trunk.
 Removing the radiator cap could scald
you with escaping hot water or steam.
When checking the radiator level, cover 1- Tool bag 8
the cap with a cloth before trying to 2- Bar
remove it. Turn it slowly counterclock-
3- Wheel nut wrench
wise, without pressing down, to the first
notch. The pressure in the system will then
be let out. When the pressure is COM-
PLETELY LET OUT, press down and Jack
keep turning the cap counterclockwise N00832700255
until it will come off. Before removing the jack, lift up the luggage
1- Tools floor board.
9. Start the engine, and slowly add coolant, 2- Jack For front-wheel drive vehicles, pull the lug-
up to the bottom of the filler neck. Use gage floor board (A) rearward to release the
plain water if you have to (and replace it hooks (B), and then lift it up.
with the right coolant as soon as possible).
10. Replace the radiator cap and tighten it
fully. Check the engine coolant tempera-
ture display on the multi-information dis-
play. You can start driving again when the
bar graph for the engine coolant tempera-
ture display returns to the normal zone.
For emergencies 8-5

How to change a tire

On vehicles with continuously variable
move the selector lever (CVT) or the
gearshift lever (Twin Clutch SST) to the
“P” (PARK) position, and turn the igni-
tion switch to the “LOCK” position.
4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up a
warning triangle, flashing signal light,
etc., at an adequate distance from the
vehicle, and have all your passengers
leave the vehicle.
5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
it is raised on the jack, place chocks or
8 To remove How to change a tire blocks (A) at the tire that is diagonally
N00836900734 opposite from the tire (B) you are chang-
Turn the shaft end (1) so that the jack con- ing.
tracts, then remove it from the storage bracket WARNING
(C).  The jack should not be used for any pur-
pose other than to change a tire.
 Never get under the vehicle or put any
To store portion of your body under the vehicle
while it is supported by the jack.
Turn the shaft end (2) by hand to expand the
jack until it is held firmly in position. Before changing a tire, first stop your vehicle
in a safe, flat location.
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable

ground.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
3. On vehicles with manual transaxle, turn
the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi-
tion, and move the gearshift lever to the
“R” (Reverse) position.
8-6 For emergencies

WARNING WARNING CAUTION

 Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the  Tires, including spare tire, degrade over  Do not go over 50 mph (80 km/h) when driv-
correct tire when jacking up the vehicle. If time with age even when they are not ing with the compact spare tire.
the vehicle moves while jacked up, the being used. It is recommended that tires  Avoid fast starting and braking when driving
jack could slip out of position, leading to over 6 years generally be replaced even if with the compact spare tire.
an accident. damage is not obvious.  Do not drive through automatic car washes
and over obstacles that could possibly dam-
age the underside of your vehicle. Because
NOTE CAUTION the compact spare tire is smaller than the
 The chocks shown in the illustration do not  While the compact spare tire is stowed, the original tire, there is less clearance between
come with your vehicle. It is recommended inflation pressure should be checked at least the ground and your vehicle.
that you purchase chocks or blocks and keep once a month to assure that it remains at the  Because the compact spare tire is designed
them in the vehicle for use if needed. recommended inflation pressure. See the tire only for your vehicle, do not use it on any
 If chocks or blocks are not available, use and loading information placard attached to other vehicle. 8
stones or any other objects that are large the driver’s door sill.  Do not put the compact spare tire on a differ-
enough to hold the wheel in position. Refer to “Tire and loading information plac- ent wheel, and do not put standard tires,
ard” on page 11-3. snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings on the
 Driving with an improperly inflated tire can compact spare wheel. Otherwise, you could
6. Get the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench cause an accident. If you have no choice but damage these parts or other parts on your
ready. to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep vehicle.
Refer to “Tools and jack” on page 8-5. your speed down and avoid sudden steering  Do not use snow chain with your compact
or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the spare tire. Using a chain could cause damage
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to to your vehicle and loss of the chains.
Spare tire information “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-21.
N00849600298
 The compact spare tire should be used only
temporarily. While the compact spare tire is
To remove the compact spare
Compact spare tire being used, the tire pressure monitoring sys- tire
tem will not function properly. Have the tire N00849701300
replaced or repaired at an authorized Mit- 1. Lift up the luggage floor board.
The compact spare tire is designed to save
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of For front-wheel drive vehicles, pull the
space in the trunk. Its lighter weight makes it your choice as soon as possible.
easier to use if a flat tire occurs. luggage floor board (A) rearward to
 If your vehicle has aluminum type wheels, release the hooks (B), and then lift it up.
you can use the same wheel nuts on the com-
pact spare tire wheel.
For emergencies 8-7


2. Place the jack under one of the jacking
points (A) shown in the illustration. Use
the jacking point closest to the tire you
wish to change.
2. To remove the spare tire, remove the

installation clamp (C) by turning it coun-
8 terclockwise.
To change a tire
N00849800388
1. On vehicles with wheel covers, first

remove the covers (refer to “Wheel cov- WARNING
ers” on page 8-11). Then loosen the wheel  Set the jack only at the positions shown
nuts with the wheel nut wrench. Do not here. If the jack is set at a wrong position,
remove the wheel nuts yet. it could dent your vehicle or the jack
might fall over and cause personal injury.
 Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-
face.
Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause
personal injury. Always use the jack on a
flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,
make sure there are no sand or pebbles
NOTE under the jack base.
 The clamp cannot be used for a normal size
tire. Store a normal size tire under the lug- 3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange
gage floor board.
portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the top
 Put the spare tire under the vehicle body near
of the jack.
the jack. This makes it safer if the jack slips
out of position.
8-8 For emergencies


6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub sur-
WARNING face (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installa-
 Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the
tion holes (H) in the wheel, and then
tire is raised off the ground. It is danger-
mount the spare tire.
ous to raise the vehicle any higher.
 Never get under the vehicle or put any
portion of your body under the vehicle
while it is supported by the jack.
 Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it
sitting on the jack for a long time. Both
are very dangerous.
 Do not use a jack except the one that came
4. Insert the bar (D) into the wheel nut with your vehicle.
wrench (E). Then put the end of the bar  The jack should not be used for any pur-
into the shaft’s jack end, as shown in the pose other than to change a tire. 8
illustration.  No one should be in your vehicle when
using the jack.
Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until
the tire is raised slightly off the ground  Do not start or run the engine while your WARNING
vehicle is on the jack.  Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem
surface.
 Do not turn the raised wheel. The tires (I) facing outboard. If you cannot see the
that are still on the ground could turn and valve stem (I), you have installed the
make your vehicle fall off the jack. wheel backwards.
Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel
installed backwards can cause vehicle
5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut
damage and result in an accident.
wrench, then take the wheel off.
CAUTION
 Handle the wheel carefully when changing
the tire, to avoid scratching the wheel sur-
face.
For emergencies 8-9


Temporarily tighten the wheel nuts
(flange nuts) until their flange section
CAUTION
 Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or
comes in contact with the wheel and it is
the nuts or they will tighten too much.
no longer loose.
NOTE
 Flange nuts can be temporarily used on the
compact spare or steel wheel, but return
them to the original wheel and tire as soon as
possible.
 If all four wheels are changed to steel
7. [Vehicle with steel wheels] wheels, use tapered nuts.
• Normal wheels and compact spare wheel
8 Install the wheel nuts (tapered nuts) with 8. Lower the vehicle slowly by rotating the
their tapered ends facing inward, then wheel nut wrench counterclockwise until
tighten by hand until the wheel is no lon- • Compact spare wheel the tire touches the ground.
ger loose. Install the wheel nuts with their tapered
ends facing inward, then tighten by hand
until the wheel is no longer loose.
9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in the

[Vehicle with aluminum wheels] illustration until each nut has been tight-
• Normal wheels ened to the torque listed here.
65 to 80 ft-lb (88 to 108 N•m)
8-10 For emergencies

To store the flat tire or spare

tire, jack, bar and wheel nut
wrench
N00850000120
Reverse the removing procedure when stor-

ing the flat tire or spare tire, jack, bar and
wheel nut wrench.
Refer to “To remove the compact spare tire”
on page 8-7 and “Tools and jack” on page
8-5.
CAUTION CAUTION
 Never use your foot or a pipe extension to  Driving with an improperly inflated tire can Wheel covers (if so equipped) 8
apply added force to the wheel nut wrench cause an accident. If you have no choice but N00849400209
when tightening the wheel nuts. If you do so, to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep
you can over-tighten the wheel nuts and your speed down and avoid sudden steering
damage the wheel, wheel nuts and hub bolts. or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the To remove
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to
“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-21.
10. Lower the jack all the way and remove it. Wrap the tip of the bar with a cloth, insert it
 After changing the tire and driving the vehi-
11. Check the tire inflation pressure. The rec- deeply into the notch provided in the wheel
cle about 620 miles (1,000 km), retighten the
ommended tire pressure for your vehicle cover, and pry the cover away from the
wheel nuts to make sure that they have not
is listed on the tire and loading informa- come loose. wheel.
tion placard attached to the driver’s door  If the steering wheel vibrates when driving Using the same procedure at the other wheel
sill as shown in the illustration. after changing the tire, have the tire checked cover notches, work the wheel cover away
Refer to “Tire inflation pressures” on page for balance at your nearest authorized Mit- from the wheel to remove it completely.
9-21. subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
your choice.
 Do not mix one type of tire with another or
use a different size from the one listed. This
would cause early wear and poor handling.
For emergencies 8-11

Towing
2. Push the bottom (F) of the wheel cover
into the wheel.
3. Gently push in both sides (G) of the wheel
cover and hold them in place with both
knees.
4. Gently tap the top (H) of the wheel cover.
Ensure the wheel cover is securely
installed around its entire outer circumfer-
ence.
1. Align the tire air valve (C) and the wheel

NOTE cover notch (D).
8  The wheel cover is made of plastic. Be care-
ful when prying it off.
CAUTION
 Trying to remove the wheel cover with only
your bare hands can seriously injure your
fingers.
Towing
To install N00837001915
CAUTION NOTE If your vehicle needs to be

 Before installing the wheel cover to the
 Full wheel covers have a symbol mark (E) towed
provided on the reverse side to show the air
wheel, make sure that the tabs (A) on the
valve location.
back of the wheel cover correctly engage the If towing is necessary, we recommend you to
Before installing the wheel cover to the
ring (B) to prevent the wheel cover from have it done by a commercial tow truck ser-
wheel, make sure that the opening with the
coming off. Do not install a wheel cover that
symbol mark is correctly aligned with the air vice.
has broken tabs.
valve.

Towing
When towing is required, transport the vehi-
cle using a tow truck. Type A Towing the vehicle by a tow
Incorrect towing equipment could damage truck
your vehicle.
CAUTION
CAUTION Type B  This vehicle must not be towed by a tow
 Do not attempt to be towed by another vehi- truck using sling lift type equipment (Type
Towing manual transaxle vehicles with rear
cle with a rope. A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will dam-
wheels off the ground.
Do not tow continuously variable transmis- age the bumper and front end.
sion (CVT) vehicles or all-wheel drive  Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with the
NOTE vehicles with this style. front or rear wheels on the ground (Type B or
 Your vehicle cannot tow any other vehicle. Type C) as illustrated. This could result in
the driving system damage or vehicle may
jump at the carriage. 8
There may be local regulations concerning If you tow all-wheel drive vehicles, use Type
Type C
towing in your area. Obey the regulations of D or Type E equipment.
the area where you are driving your vehicle. Towing with front wheels off the ground.
 Do not tow continuously variable transmis-
Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with
sion (CVT) vehicles with the driving wheels
this style.
on the ground (Type B) as illustrated. If the
vehicle is towed like this, the continuously
variable transmission (CVT) fluid may not
reach all parts of the transmission, thus dam-
Type D
aging it.
If you tow CVT vehicles, use Type C, D or E
equipment.
 If the manual transaxle is malfunctioning or
damaged, transport the vehicle with the driv-
Type E ing wheels on a carriage (Type C, D or E) as
illustrated.

Operation under adverse driving conditions

the engine idle for a few minutes to cool the
CAUTION Towing with front wheels off the
transaxle before trying again.
 [For front-wheel drive vehicle equipped with ground (Type C) If your vehicle is still stuck after several rock-
the active stability control (ASC)]
ing attempts, call for a commercial tow truck
If the vehicle is towed with the ignition
Release the parking brake. service.
switch in the “ON” position and only the
front wheels or only the rear wheels raised
Place the gearshift lever in the “Neutral”
position (manual transaxle) or the selector
off the ground, the ASC may operate, result-
lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position
WARNING
ing in an accident. When towing the vehicle  When trying to rock your vehicle out of a
with only the front wheels or only the rear (CVT).
stuck position, make sure that there are no
wheels raised, keep the ignition switch in the people nearby. The rocking motion can
“LOCK” or “ACC” position.
WARNING make your vehicle suddenly lurch forward
 [For vehicle equipped with the Electronically or backward, and injure any bystanders.
 To prevent entry of exhaust gas from the
controlled 4WD system]
towing vehicle, set the selection switch to
8 Even in “2WD” mode, the vehicle cannot be
the recirculation position.
towed with the front or the rear wheels on
the ground. On wet roads
Towing manual transaxle vehicles Operation under adverse

CAUTION
with rear wheels off the ground driving conditions  Avoid flooded roads. Water is often deeper
(Type B) N00837200662
than it looks, and you could be seriously hurt
by driving into flood water.
Place the gearshift lever in the “Neutral” If your vehicle becomes stuck in  When driving in rain, on water-covered
roads, or through a car wash, water could get
position. sand, mud or snow into the brake discs and make them fail tem-
Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” posi- porarily. In such cases, lightly press the
tion and secure the steering wheel in a If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, brake pedal to see if they are working prop-
straight-ahead position with a rope or tie- or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking erly. If they are not, press the pedal lightly
down strap. Never place the ignition switch in motion. Rock your vehicle back and forth to several times while driving to dry the brake
the “LOCK” position when towing. free it. pads or linings, then check them again.
Do not rev the engine or spin the wheels.
Constant efforts to free a stuck vehicle can
cause overheating and transaxle failure. Let

Fuel Pump Shut-off System

 Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock
CAUTION braking system (ABS), hold the brake
CAUTION
 When driving in rain, a layer of water may  The vehicle’s body, bumper, muffler and
pedal down firmly and keep it depressed.
form between the tires and the road surface other parts may be damaged if the vehicle is:
Do not pump the brake pedal which will
(aquaplaning). This loosens your tires’ grip • driven over a step (for example, at the
on the road, making it difficult to steer or result in reduced braking performance.
entrance or exit of a parking lot);
brake properly. When driving on a wet road:  After parking on snowy or icy road, it
• parked too closely against a curb or parking
• Drive your vehicle at a safe speed. may be difficult to move your vehicle due block, or by the side of a road with curb-
• Do not drive on worn tires. to freeze-up of the brake. Depress the stones;
• Always keep the tires at the correct infla- accelerator pedal little by little to move • driven on a steep slope;
tion pressures. the vehicle after confirming safety of the
vehicle.
Fuel Pump Shut-off System
On snowy or icy roads N00860600044
CAUTION 8
 When driving on a road covered with  Do not depress the accelerator pedal rapidly. WARNING
snow or ice, use snow tires. Tire chains The vehicle could start moving when it  Before attempting to restart the engine
cannot be used on your vehicle. There breaks free from the ice, possibly resulting in after a collision, always inspect the ground
may be state or local regulations about an accident. under the vehicle for leaking fuel. If a fuel
using snow tires. Always check the regu- leak is found or a fuel odor is detected, do
lations in your local area before using not restart the engine.
them. Refer to the section entitled “Snow On a bumpy or rutted road  Mitsubishi Motors recommends that your
tires” on page 9-24 and “Tire chains” on vehicle be inspected by an authorized
page 9-24.  Drive as slow as possible when driving on Mitsubishi Motors dealer after any colli-
 Drive slowly. Do not make sudden starts bumpy or rutted roads or over potholes sion.
or stops, sharp turns, or slam on the etc.
brakes. In the event of a collision causing frontal air-
 Allow extra distance between your vehi- CAUTION bag deployment, the fuel pump shut-off sys-
cle and the vehicle in front of you, and tem will activate to stop fuel supply to the
 Driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over pot-
avoid sudden braking. holes can damage the tires and wheels. engine.
 If a skid occurs when the accelerator Wheels with low-profiles tires or under-
pedal is depressed, take your foot off the inflated tires are especially at risk for dam-
pedal. Steer gently in the direction of the age.
skid.

Vehicle care and maintenance
Service precautions ..........................................................................9-2 Fusible links ...................................................................................9-28

Catalytic converter ...........................................................................9-2 Fuses ..............................................................................................9-29
Engine hood .....................................................................................9-3 Replacement of light bulbs ............................................................9-34
View of the engine compartment .....................................................9-5 Vehicle care precautions ................................................................9-48
Engine oil and oil filter ....................................................................9-6 Cleaning the inside of your vehicle ...............................................9-48
Engine coolant .................................................................................9-8 Cleaning the outside of your vehicle .............................................9-49
Air cleaner filter ...............................................................................9-9
Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped) .............................................9-11
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid
(if so equipped) ..........................................................................9-11 9
Twin Clutch Sportronic shift transmission (Twin Clutch SST)
fluid (if so equipped)..................................................................9-12
Transfer oil (All-wheel drive models) ...........................................9-12
Rear axle oil (All-wheel drive models) ........................................9-12
AWC control fluid (if so equipped) ................................................9-12
Washer fluid ...................................................................................9-13
Brake fluid/Clutch fluid (if so equipped)........................................9-13
Power steering fluid (if so equipped)..............................................9-14
Battery ............................................................................................9-14
Tires ...............................................................................................9-17
Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)...........................................9-24
Brake pedal free play .....................................................................9-25
Parking brake lever stroke .............................................................9-25
Parking brake break-in ...................................................................9-25
Wiper blades ..................................................................................9-25
Emission-control system maintenance ..........................................9-25
General maintenance .....................................................................9-27
For cold and snowy weather ..........................................................9-28
Service precautions
Service precautions WARNING

N00937301397  The fan can turn on automatically even if
the engine is not running. Turn the igni-
Taking regular care of your vehicle will pre-
tion switch to the “LOCK” position to be
serve its value and appearance as long as pos- safe while you work in the engine com-
sible. partment.
 Do not smoke or allow open flames around
You can do some of the maintenance work
fuel or the battery. The fumes are flamma-
yourself, and the rest should only be per- ble.
formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors  Be extremely careful when working
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. around the battery. It contains poisonous
If you discover a malfunction or other prob- and corrosive sulfuric acid.
lem, have it corrected by an authorized Mit-  Do not get under your vehicle while it is on Have you purchased the Mitsubishi Motors
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of a jack. Diamond Care Protection Plan? The Plan
your choice. Always use properly rated automotive supplements your new vehicle warranties.
9 This section describes the maintenance jack stands.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
inspections that you can do yourself, if you so  Handling your vehicle’s parts and materi-
for details.
desire. Follow the instructions and precau- als in the wrong way can injure you. Ask
tions for each procedure. an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
or a repair facility of your choice if you Catalytic converter
have questions.
WARNING N00937400131
 When checking or servicing the inside of The catalytic converter requires you to use
the engine compartment, be sure the unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
engine is stopped and has had a chance to destroy the emission-control effectiveness of
cool down. the converter.
 If you need to work in the engine compart-
ment with the engine running, be espe- Normally, the catalytic converter does not
cially careful that your clothing, hair, etc. require maintenance. However, it is important
does not get caught in the fan, drive belts, to keep the engine properly tuned for the con-
or other moving parts. verter to continue to work properly.
9-2 Vehicle care and maintenance

Engine hood
 Do not idle the engine with any spark plug
CAUTION wires disconnected or removed, such as Engine hood
 Damage to the catalytic converter can result
when performing diagnostic tests. N00937500464
if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
 Do not idle the engine for a long time if it
condition. If the engine malfunctions or mis-
is idling roughly or otherwise obviously
CAUTION
fires, or if your vehicle performance suffers,  For vehicles with turbocharger, to avoid the
have it serviced promptly. Running your malfunctioning.
risk of being burned, do not touch the air out-
vehicle when it is overheated may result in  To prevent the catalytic converter from let (A) and air scoop (B) on the engine hood
damage to the converter and vehicle. being damaged from unburned gas, do not when the engine compartment is hot (when
race the engine when turning off the igni- the engine is running or immediately after
tion switch. the vehicle has been driven).
WARNING  Stop driving the vehicle if you think the
 Do not park or run your vehicle in areas performance is less than normal, the
where combustible materials such as dry engine is running oddly or there is any
grass or leaves can come in contact with a other engine trouble, such as with the
hot exhaust, since a fire could occur. ignition, etc. If you are not able to stop
 Do not put undercoat paint on the cata- driving immediately, slow down and drive
9
lytic converter. for only a short time. Have an inspection
made by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
To reduce the possibility of catalytic con- dealer or a repair facility of your choice as
verter damage: soon as possible.
 In unusual situations involving major
 Use UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY of engine problems, a burning odor may
the type of recommended in “Fuel selec- indicate severe and abnormal catalytic
tion”. converter overheating. If this occurs, stop
 Do not drive with an extremely low fuel in a safe place, shut the engine off and let To open
level. Running out of gas could damage the vehicle cool. Once the engine is cool,
the catalytic converter. immediately take your vehicle to a dealer Use the engine hood release lever (located
 Do not try to start the engine by pushing or a repair facility of your choice for ser- under the instrument panel near the driver’s
or towing the vehicle. If the battery is vice. door) to unlock the engine hood.
weak or run down, use jumper cables to
properly start the engine.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-3

Engine hood
Pull the lever toward you to release the Release the safety lever and lift the engine Support the engine hood with the hood prop.
engine hood latch. hood. Insert the hood prop securely in the opening
under the hood marked with an arrow.
9 WARNING NOTE
 Never use the release lever to unlatch the  To prevent damage to the engine hood and CAUTION
engine hood while the vehicle is in motion. wipers, make sure the wipers are at resting  Always insert the support prop into the hole
 Do not drive your vehicle unless the position when you open the engine hood. specially made for it. Propping the engine
engine hood is locked. hood at any other place could cause the prop
to slip out and lead to an accident.
 The hood prop can fall out if the hood is
lifted by a strong wind.

View of the engine compartment
To close NOTE View of the engine compart-

Unlatch the prop from the engine hood and
 Do not push down strongly on the engine
hood. Depending on how strongly or where
ment
put it back in its retainer. you push down, you could create a dent in
N00937600667
the vehicle body. Except for vehicles with turbocharger

 For vehicles equipped with the theft-alarm
system, if you drive with the engine hood left
open, warning display is displayed on the
display.
Type 1
9
Slowly lower the engine hood about 8 inches Vehicles with turbocharger
Type 2
(20 cm), then let it drop from its own weight.
CAUTION
 Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers
when closing the engine hood.
 Make sure the engine hood is firmly closed
before driving.
If you drive without the engine hood com-
pletely closed, it could open up while driv-
ing. 1- Power steering fluid reservoir (if so
equipped)
2- Air cleaner filter
NOTE 3- Brake fluid/Clutch fluid reservoir (if so
 If this does not close the engine hood prop- equipped)
erly, drop it again from a slightly higher 4- Engine coolant reservoir
position. 5- Windshield washer fluid reservoir
Engine oil and oil filter

6- Engine oil level dipstick Except for vehicles with turbocharger Vehicles with turbocharger
7- Radiator cap
Except for vehicles with engine cover
8- Engine oil filler cap
9- Battery
Good
Good

N00937702040
To check and refill engine oil
It is normal for an engine to use oil. You may

need to add oil between the recommended oil
change intervals. Before starting the engine, Vehicles with engine cover CAUTION
 Overfilling the crankcase will cause oil aera-
9 check the engine oil level. Refill if necessary.
tion and loss of oil pressure, which could
Good
To check the oil level, remove the dipstick, damage the engine.
wipe it off, and gently insert it all the way
into the crankcase. Slowly remove it again.
The oil level must not go above the line on WARNING
the dipstick.  Used engine oil is poisonous, and can dam-
age your skin. Prolonged and repeated
If the level does not reach the line, which contact may cause serious skin disorders,
shows the smallest amount of oil required, including dermatitis and cancer. Don’t let
remove the oil filler cap on the engine valve used oil touch your skin. Wash thoroughly
after working with it.
cover, and fill to within the “Good” range.
 Keep used oil out of the reach of children.
NOTE
 Engine oil consumption is greatly influenced
by payload, engine speed, etc.


This mark appears on the top of the oil con-
NOTE Except for vehicles with turbo-
tainer and tells you two important things
 The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the
about the oil. charger
vehicle is subjected to severe conditions (for
example, repeated operation on rough roads, API service symbol
in mountainous regions, on roads with many
uphill and downhill gradients, or over short
distances). Consequently, the oil will require
earlier replacement in accordance with the
schedule in the “WARRANTY AND MAIN-
TENANCE MANUAL”.
Engine oil identification mark

Mitsubishi Motors recommends using only
1- The top portion shows the quality of
engine oils with the ILSAC certification sym-
bol on the front of the container.
the oil. Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic 9
2- The center portion shows the SAE Engine Oil is recommended for optimum fuel
grade of the oil viscosity. economy and cold weather starting.
ILSAC certification symbol If Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Syn-
thetic Engine Oil is not available, 5W-20
Recommended engine oil vis- grade oils displaying the ILSAC certification
cosity can be used. However, Mitsubishi Motors
N00955001136
Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic Engine Oil should
be used at the next oil change to maintain
Use engine oil with the proper thickness for optimum fuel economy and cold weather
the outdoor temperatures where you will be starting.
driving.
If you cannot find oils with the ILSAC certi-

fication symbol, use an API classification SN
or higher oil with the following label.

Engine coolant
except when you check the coolant freeze
Vehicles with turbocharger To replace the oil filter point or replace the antifreeze coolant.
N00955100042
The oil filter should be replaced at the time or Except for vehicles with turbocharger
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
Only use high quality replacement filters on FULL
this vehicle. The manufacturer’s specifica-
tions for Genuine Mitsubishi oil filters
require that the filter can withstand a pressure LOW
of 256 psi (1.8 MPa). A Genuine Mitsubishi
oil filter is the best replacement filter.
Follow the installation instructions printed on
the filter.
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 5W-30 Engine
Vehicles with turbocharger
9 Oil is the recommended oil for optimum
engine performance and protection. Engine coolant
SAE 0W-30 or 0W-40 engine oil is recom- N00937800542
FULL
mended to improve engine starting in cold
weather conditions. Refer to temperature To check the coolant level
chart. LOW
The coolant reserve tank (A) lets you quickly
NOTE see when you need to add coolant. When the
 Select engine oil of the proper SAE viscosity engine is cold, the level in the reserve tank
number according to the atmospheric tem- should be between the “FULL” and “LOW”
*- Front of the vehicle
perature. marks. The radiator usually stays full so there
is no reason to remove the radiator cap (B)
To add coolant
Use “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long

Life Coolant Premium” or an equivalent*.

Air cleaner filter

* : similar high quality ethylene glycol  Your vehicle uses a special radiator cap
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-
CAUTION that stays sealed and lets the coolant flow
 Do not use water to adjust the concentration
nitrate and non-borate coolant with long from the reserve tank back to the radiator
of coolant.
life hybrid organic acid technology when the engine cools down. If you need
 Do not top off the tank with plain water only.
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Coolant provides to change the cap, use the exact same
Water by itself boils at a lower temperature
excellent protection against corrosion and and does not stop rust or freezing. If the kind.
rust formation on all metals, including alumi- water freezes, it will damage your cooling  Check the coolant freeze point in the radi-
num, and prevents blockages in some parts of system. Do not use tapwater. It can cause ator with the proper gauge, and only when
engine. corrosion and rust. it is safe. If you add antifreeze, the con-
If you need to add coolant often, or if the tents of the reserve tank must be protected
level in the reserve tank does not drop when against freezing.
the engine cools, the cooling system should
Radiator cap  Keep the front of the radiator and con-
be pressure-tested for leaks. Take your vehi- denser clean.
cle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer The radiator cap must be tight sealed to pre-  If the temperature of the engine coolant
or a repair facility of your choice for testing. vent losing coolant which may result in does not rise after the engine is warmed-
engine damage. Only use a Genuine Mitsubi- up, take your vehicle to an authorized
9
shi Parts radiator cap, or an approved equiva- Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
CAUTION lent.
 Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or
ity of your choice to have the thermostat
any engine coolants that contain them. Using checked, and replaced if necessary.
the wrong antifreeze can corrode aluminum WARNING
parts.
 The required concentration of anti-freeze dif-
 Wait for the engine to cool down before
opening the radiator cap. Otherwise hot
Air cleaner filter
N00937901481
fers depending on the expected ambient tem- steam or boiling coolant could spray up
perature. from the radiator and scald you. The air cleaner filter will get dirty and dusty
Above -31 °F (-35 °C) : 50 % concentration from use and not filter properly. Replace it
of anti-freeze with a new filter using the schedule in the
Below -31 °F (-35 °C) : 60% concentration
of anti-freeze
Points to remember “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL”.
You can check the concentration level with a
 Do not overfill the reserve tank.
gauge from an automotive supply store, or 1. Remove the clips (A), then remove the
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or duct (B).
service station can check it for you.

Air cleaner filter
Except for vehicles with turbocharger Type 1
4. Unclamp and take out the air cleaner fil-

Vehicles with turbocharger Type 2
ter.
Type 1
9
2. Except for vehicles with turbocharger, 3. On vehicles with Type 2, remove the har-
while holding down the tab (C), pull out ness from the air cleaner hook (E).
the connector (D).

Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped)
Type 2 NOTE Manual transaxle oil (if so

Vehicles with turbocharger equipped)
N00938200165
Whenever the manual transaxle oil level is

checked, add oil to maintain the proper level,
if necessary.
Refill or change the oil according to the table.
 On vehicles with Type 2, after replacing the

air cleaner filter, make sure that harness is
Oil type
5. Install the air cleaner filter and put the
firmly set so that the air cleaner hook (E) and
cover back on in its original position. the marking tape (F) on the harness are Mitsubishi Motors Genuine
located as shown in the illustration. Lubricant NEW MULTI GEAR OIL API
NOTE Classification GL-3 9
 Genuine Mitsubishi Motors Parts are recom-
mended when replacing the air cleaner filter. Viscosity
SAE 75W-80
 After replacing the air cleaner filter, make range
sure that the hinges at the bottom of cover
are firmly set.
Continuously variable
Except for vehicles with turbocharger
transmission (CVT) fluid (if
 Except for vehicles with turbocharger, make so equipped)
sure that the connector is properly recon- N00938101116
nected.
The continuously variable transmission
6. Put the duct back on in its original posi- (CVT) should be maintained and serviced by
tion. an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to obtain the
best performance and longest life. It is impor-
tant that the transmission fluid is kept at the
correct level.

Twin Clutch Sportronic shift transmission (Twin Clutch SST) fluid (if so equipped)
Fluid type Fluid type Rear axle oil (All-wheel

drive models)
Use only “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Use only Mitsubishi Motors Genuine SSTF-I N00915200227
CVTF-J4” transmission fluid to ensure opti- to ensure optimum transmission performance.
Whenever the oil level is checked, add oil as
mum transmission performance.
necessary to maintain the proper level.
CAUTION Fill or change oil according to the table.
CAUTION  Using the improper transmission fluid may
 Using the improper transmission fluid may damage the transaxle.
damage the transaxle. Oil type
Special additives Lubri- Mitsubishi Motors Genuine LSD

Special additives cant gear oil or equivalent
Mitsubishi Motors Corporation does not rec-
9 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation does not recommend the addition of any fluid additives to
ommend the addition of any fluid additives to the transmission. AWC control fluid (if so
the transmission. equipped)
Transfer oil (All-wheel drive N00915300026
Twin Clutch Sportronic shift models)

transmission (Twin Clutch N00938400239 To check the fluid level
SST) fluid (if so equipped) Whenever the transfer oil level is checked,
N00938300036 add oil as necessary to maintain the proper Remove the lid on the trunk room right side
level. Fill or change the oil according to the trim.
The Twin Clutch Sportronic shift transmis- table. Check the fluid level in the reservoir 90 min-
sion (Twin Clutch SST) should be maintained utes or more after turning the ignition switch
and serviced by an authorized Mitsubishi to the “LOCK” position.
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your Oil type Check to make certain that the AWC control
choice to obtain the best performance and fluid level is always between the “MAX” and
longest life. It is important that the transmis- Lubri- Mitsubishi Motors Genuine LSD “MIN” level markings on the fluid reservoir
sion fluid is kept at the correct level. cant gear oil or equivalent and refill the fluid, if necessary.

Washer fluid
Check the washer fluid level at regular inter-
vals and add washer fluid to reservoir if nec- Brake fluid/Clutch fluid (if so
essary. equipped)
Open the reservoir cap and check the fluid N00938700186
level with the dipstick.
The brake fluid and the clutch fluid share the
reservoir tank.
To check the fluid level
The fluid level must be between the “MAX”

and “MIN” marks on the reservoir.
Fluid type
9
Lubricant DIAMOND ATF SP III
MAX
Washer fluid During cold weather
N00938600273
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is in When freezing weather is anticipated, flush MIN
the engine compartment. out the water in the reservoir by operating the
pump. Fill the reservoir with windshield anti-
freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate
the system for a few seconds to flush out the The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the
residual water. brake pads, but this does not indicate any
abnormality.
The fluid in the master cylinder should be

checked when doing other work under the
engine hood. The brake system should also be
checked for leaks at the same time.

Power steering fluid (if so equipped)

If the fluid level falls markedly in a short
length of time, it indicates leaks from the Power steering fluid (if so Battery
brake system. equipped) N00939100783
If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by an N00939000388 The condition of the battery is very important
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a for quick starting and to keep the vehicle’s
repair facility of your choice. electrical system working properly. Check the
To check the fluid level battery regularly.
Fluid type
Check the fluid level in the reservoir while WARNING
the engine is idling.  An SRS airbag sensor is located in the
Use the recommended brake fluid conform- Check to make certain that the power steering front of the engine compartment near the
ing to DOT 3 or DOT 4. The reservoir cap fluid level is always between the “MAX” and battery.
must be tightly sealed to keep dirt and water “MIN” level markings on the fluid reservoir When checking or replacing the battery,
out. and refill the fluid, if necessary. or when working around this area, do not
strike or damage this sensor.
9 CAUTION
 Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch,
mix with, or get into the brake fluid. This Removing and installing the
will damage the seals.
battery upper cover (vehicles
 Be careful when handling brake fluid. It can
damage painted surfaces. with turbocharger)
 Use only the listed brake fluid. Different N00901300012
brands of brake fluid have different addi-

tives, and these can cause a chemical reac- WARNING
tion. Do not mix brands of brake fluid.  Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK” posi-
 Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to keep tion on vehicle. Make sure that your
the brake fluid from evaporating. clothes cannot be caught by the fan or
drive belt. Personal injury could result.
Fluid type
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine

Lubricant
Power Steering Fluid

Battery
To remove NOTE CAUTION

 Be careful not to lose the removed plastic  Be sure to install the battery upper cover.
1. Remove the clips (A), and then remove nuts. Otherwise, the battery electrolyte may spill
the air duct (B). and cause a malfunction.
 When installing the battery upper cover,
To install plastic nuts, and air duct, do not touch the
cooling fan or other moving parts in the
1. Install the battery upper cover (A) onto engine compartment. Be especially careful
the battery, and then push the plastic nuts that the cables, your clothing or hair, etc., do
not get caught in the cooling fan or other
(B) in the direction shown by the arrows
moving parts.
to secure the cover.
Checking battery electrolyte

level 9
2. Turn the plastic nuts (C) counterclock- N00901500014
wise, and then remove the battery upper The electrolyte level must be between the
cover (D). limits shown on the outside of the battery. Fill
it with distilled water as needed. The inside of
the battery is divided into several compart-
ments. Take the cap off of each compartment
and fill to the mark.
Do not fill above the top line because a spill
NOTE during driving could cause damage.
 Be sure to install the plastic nuts in the cor-
rect direction.
 Make sure that the battery upper cover is
installed securely.
2. To install the air duct, perform the

removal steps in reverse.

Battery
Except for vehicles with turbocharger NOTE NOTE

 For vehicles equipped with a turbocharger,  For vehicles equipped with turbocharger,
the battery upper cover does not need to be remove the battery upper cover before dis-
removed to check the battery electrolyte connecting the terminal of battery. Refer to
level. “Removing and installing the battery upper
cover” on page 9-14.
 Open the terminal cover (A) before discon-
During cold weather necting or connecting the positive (+) termi-
nal of the battery.
N00901600015
The battery is weaker in cold temperatures.

This has to do with its chemical and physical
Vehicles with turbocharger properties and is why a very cold battery,
especially one with a low charge, will have a
hard time starting your vehicle.
9 It is recommended that you have your battery
and charging system checked by an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
facility of your choice before the start of cold
weather. If necessary, have it charged. This
WARNING
will guarantee more reliable starting, and lon-
 Never disconnect the battery while the
ger battery life. engine is running, or you could damage
the vehicle’s electrical parts.
WARNING Disconnection and connection  Never short-circuit the battery. This could
 If the battery goes flat, be sure to check N00901701084
cause it to overheat and be damaged.
the battery electrolyte level before con-  Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away
necting booster cables. To disconnect the battery cable, stop the from the battery because the battery could
 After checking the battery electrolyte engine. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal explode.
level, make sure the caps are fitted first, then the positive (+) terminal. To recon-
securely. nect the battery, first connect the positive (+)
 If any of the caps has a loose fit, replace terminal and then the negative (-) terminal,
the battery. before starting the vehicle.

Tires
WARNING WARNING Tires

 Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-  Battery terminals and related accessories N00939201563
sive diluted sulfuric acid. If it spills on contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
nearby parts, it can crack, stain, or dis- hands after handling. WARNING
color them. And if gets on your skin or in  Driving with tires that are worn, damaged
your eyes, it can cause burns or blindness. or improperly inflated is dangerous.
Please observe the following handling NOTE These type tire conditions will adversely
instructions:  Check each battery terminal for corrosion. affect vehicle performance.
• If electrolyte gets on plastic parts or You can stop more corrosion by washing These type tire conditions can also cause a
other nearby parts, wipe it off with a soft with a solution of baking soda and water. tread separation or blowout which may
cloth or chamois soaked in a solution of Grease the posts and clamps after cleaning or result in an accident causing serious
water and neutral detergent then imme- tightening them. injury or death.
diately rinse the affected parts with  Check to see that the battery is securely  Tires, including spare tire, degrade over
plenty of water. installed and cannot be moved. Also check time with age even when they are not
• If electrolyte gets on your hands or each terminal for tightness. being used. It is recommended that tires
clothes, rinse thoroughly with water. If  If you will not be driving your vehicle for a over 6 years generally be replaced even if 9
electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them long period of time, remove the battery and damage is not obvious.
with water immediately and get immedi- store it in a place where the battery fluid will
ate medical attention. not freeze. Memory data for settings made It is important to familiarize yourself with the
 Open doors and windows in any closed by the user may be erased when the battery is
space where you may be charging or following terms:
removed. If this happens, reset the settings
working with the battery. again using the relevant procedures. The bat-  Cold tire pressure:
 Always wear protective clothing and gog- tery only should be stored with a full charge.
gles when working with the battery, or
• The measured pressure after the vehicle
 Before cleaning the battery, tighten all the
have a skilled automobile technician do it. has been parked for at least three hours,
filler port caps to keep dirt and moisture out.
 If you are quick-charging your battery, or
first disconnect the battery cables. • The measured pressure when the vehicle
 In order to prevent a short circuit, be sure is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after
to disconnect the negative (-) terminal having been parked for three hours.
first, and reconnect it last.  Maximum inflation pressure: the maxi-
 If the electrolyte level is very low, have the mum permissible cold tire inflation pres-
battery checked at an authorized Mitsubi- sure for this tire.
shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
your choice.

Tires
 Recommended inflation pressure: the  Sidewall: portion of a tire between the
inflation pressure for optimum tire perfor- tread and bead.
Tire Markings
mance.  Section width: the linear distance between
 Intended outboard sidewall: the exteriors of the sidewalls of an
• The sidewall that contains a whitewall, inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
bears white lettering or bears manufac- labeling, decoration, or protective bands.
turer, brand, and/or model name molding  Bead: the part of the tire that is made of
that is higher or deeper than the same steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply
molding on the other sidewall of the tire, cords and that is shaped to fit the rim.
or  Ply: a layer of rubber-coated parallel
• The outward facing sidewall of an asym- cords.
metrical tire that has a particular side  Cord: the strands forming the plies in the
that must always face outward when tire.
mounted on a vehicle.  Rim: a metal support for a tire or a tire
 Passenger car tire: a tire intended for use and tube assembly upon which the tire
9 on passenger cars, multipurpose passen- beads are seated. Size Designation
ger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross  Rim diameter: nominal diameter of the
vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 bead seat. EXAMPLE:P215/65R15
pounds or less.  Groove: the space between two adjacent
 Light truck (LT) tire: a tire designated by tread ribs. Passenger car tire size based
P
its manufacturer as primarily intended for on U.S.A. design standards
use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose Section width in millimeters
passenger vehicles. 215
 Tread: portion of a tire that comes into
(mm.)
contact with the road. Aspect ratio in percent (%)
 Tread rib: a tread section running circum- 65 Ratio of section height to sec-
ferentially around a tire. tion width of tire.
 Tread separation: pulling away of the
tread from the tire carcass.
 Carcass: the tire structure, except tread
and sidewall rubber which, when inflated,
bears the load.

Tires
Construction code NOTE Speed symbol

•“R” means radial construc-  LT (Light Truck) -metric tire A symbol indicating the range
R tion. sizing is based on U.S.A. design of speeds at which a tire can
•“D” means diagonal or bias standards. The size designation carry a load corresponding to
construction. for LT-metric tires is the same as its load index under certain
15 Rim diameter in inches (in) for P-metric tires except for the operating conditions.
letters “LT” that are molded into H The maximum speed corre-
the sidewall preceding the size sponding to the speed symbol
NOTE
designation. Example: should only be achieved under
 European/Japanese metric tire
LT235/85R16. specified operating condi-
sizing is based on European/Jap-
 Temporary spare tires are high tions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehi-
anese design standards. Tires
pressure compact spares cle loading, road conditions
designed to these standards have
designed for temporary emer- and posted speed limits) 9
the tire size molded into the
sidewall beginning with the sec- gency use only. Tires designed
to this standard have the letter Maximum Load
tion width. The letter “P” is
absent from this tire size desig- “T” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Maximum load indicates the maxi-
nation. Example: 215/65R15
Example: T145/80D18 103M. mum load this tire is designed to
96H.
carry.
Service Description
EXAMPLE: 95H
Load index
A numerical code associated
95
with the maximum load a tire
can carry.

Tires
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD Treadwear, Traction and Temper-
WARNING 1504
 Overloading of your tire is ature Grades
Department of Transporta-
dangerous. Overloading can
tion
cause tire failure, affect vehi- Treadwear
This symbol certifies that
cle handling, and increase
the tire is in compliance The treadwear grade is a comparative
your stopping distance. Use DOT
with the U.S. Department rating based on the wear rate of the
tires of the recommended load
of Transportation tire safety tire when tested under controlled
capacity for your vehicle.
standards, and is approved conditions on a specified government
Never overload them.
for highway use. test course. For example, a tire
Code representing the tire graded 150 would wear one and one-
Maximum Pressure MA manufacturing location. (2 half (11/2) times as well on the gov-
9 digits) ernment course as a tire graded 100.
Maximum Pressure indicates the Code representing the tire The relative performance of tires
maximum permissible cold tire infla- L9 size. (2 digits) depends upon the actual conditions
tion pressure for this tire. ABCD Code used by tire manufac- of their use, however, and may depart
turer. (1 to 4 digits) significantly from the norm due to
Tire Identification Number (TIN) variations in driving habits, service
Number representing the
15 week in which the tire was practices and differences in road
The TIN may be found on one or characteristics and climate.
both sides of the tire but the date manufactured. (2 digits)
code may only be on one side. Look Number representing the
Traction
for the TIN on the outboard side of 04 year in which the tire was
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the manufactured. (2 digits) The traction grades, from highest to
TIN is not found on the outboard side lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
then you will find it on the inboard grades represent the tire’s ability to
side of the tire. stop on wet pavement as measured

Tires
under controlled conditions on speci- Tire inflation pressures
The correct tire pressure for your vehicle is
fied government test surfaces of listed on the placard attached to the sill of the
N00939300844
driver’s door.
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for (Refer to “Tire and loading information plac-
C may have poor traction perfor- the safe and satisfactory operation of your ard” on page 11-3.)
mance. vehicle. The wrong tire pressure will cause The recommended inflation pressures should
problems in three major areas: be used for the tires listed below.
Temperature  Safety
Too little pressure increases flexing in the Except for vehicles with turbo-
The temperature grades are A (the tire and can cause tire failure. Too much charger
highest), B and C, representing the pressure can cause a tire to lose its ability
tire’s resistance to the generation of to cushion shock. Objects on the road and
Item Tire size Front Rear
heat and its ability to dissipate heat potholes could then cause tire damage that
may result in tire failure. P205/60 250 KPA, 250 KPA,
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory  Economy Normal R16 36 PSI 36 PSI 9
The wrong tire pressure can cause uneven tire P215/45 240 KPA, 240 KPA,
test wheel. Sustained high tempera- wear patterns in the tire tread. These R18 35 PSI 35 PSI
ture can cause the material of the tire abnormal wear patterns will reduce the
T125/70
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and tread life, and the tire will have to be
Compact D16
excessive temperature can lead to replaced sooner. 420 KPA, 60 PSI
spare tire T125/90
sudden tire failure. The grade C cor- Too little pressure also makes it harder for
D16
the tire to roll, and this uses up more fuel.
responds to a level of performance  Ride comfort and vehicle stability
which all passenger car tires must The superior riding experience built into Vehicles with turbocharger
meet under the Federal Motor Vehi- your vehicle partly depends on the correct
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades tire pressure. Too much pressure gives an
uncomfortable and jarring ride. Too little Item Tire size Front Rear
B and A represent higher levels of
pressure feels as if your vehicle is slow to P215/45
performance on the laboratory test Normal R18 240 KPA, 240 KPA,
respond.
wheel than the minimum required by Unequal tire pressures can make steering tire 215/45R 35 PSI 35 PSI
law. your vehicle uneven and unpredictable. 18

Tires
Item Tire size Front Rear  Keep your tires inflated to the recom-
mended pressures. (See the tire and load-
CAUTION
Compact T125/90 ing information placard attached to the sill  For All-wheel drive vehicles, always use
420 KPA, 60 PSI
spare tire D16 of the driver’s door.)
tires of the same size, same type, and same
brand, and which have no wear differences.
 Stay within the recommended load limits. Using tires that differ in size, type, brand or
Tire pressures should be checked, and
 Make sure that the weight of any load in the degree of wear, will increase the differen-
adjusted if necessary, at least once a month.
your vehicle is evenly distributed. tial oil temperature, resulting in possible
Pressures should be checked more often
 Drive at safe speeds. damage to the driving system. Further, the
whenever weather temperatures change
 After filling your tires to the correct pres- drive train will be subjected to excessive
severely, because tire pressures change with loading, possibly leading to oil leakage,
sure, check them for damage and air
outdoor temperatures. The pressures listed on component seizure, or other serious prob-
leaks. Be sure to reinstall the caps on the
the placard are always “cold inflation pres- lems.
valve stems.
sure”.  Even if a wheel has the same rim size and
Cold inflation pressure is measured after the offset as the specified type of wheel, its
vehicle has been parked for at least three Replacing tires and wheels shape may prevent it from being fitted cor-
9 hours or is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) N00939600368 rectly. Consult an authorized Mitsubishi
after having been parked for three hours. Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
Cold inflation pressure must not go above the CAUTION choice before using wheels that you have.
maximum values molded into the tire side-  Avoid using different size tires and wheels  Only Mitsubishi Motors genuine wheels
from the ones listed, and avoid the combined should be used, because your vehicle is
wall. After driving several miles, your tire
use of different types of tires and wheels. equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
inflation pressure may increase 14 to 41 KPA,
Using different size or type tires and wheels tem.
2 to 6 PSI from the cold inflation pressure. Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
may affect driving safety.
Do not let air out of the tires to get back to the Refer to “Tires and wheels” on page 11-5. and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
specified cold pressure, or your tire pressure to install the tire pressure sensor properly.
will be too low.
Check your tires each time you refuel. If one
tire looks lower than the others, check the
Tire maintenance
N00939700154
pressure for all of them.
You should also take the following safety pre- The following maintenance steps are recom-
cautions: mended:
 Check tire pressures regularly.

Tires
 Have regular maintenance done on the When the bands appear next to one another in The first tire rotation is the most important
wheel balance and front and rear suspen- two or more places, replace your tires. one. It will allow all your tires to wear evenly.
sion alignment.
 Rotate your tires regularly as described in NOTE Tires that do not have arrows showing rotation
the “Tire rotation” section on page 9-23.  Tire wear indicators can have different marks direction
and locations depending on the tire manufac-
Front
Tread wear indicators turer.
N00939800214
Tire rotation Tires that have arrows showing rotation direction

N00939900390
To even out the wear on your tires and make

them last longer, Mitsubishi Motors Corpora- Front
tion recommends that you rotate your tires at
the mileage listed in the “WARRANTY AND 9
However, the timing for tire rotation may
vary according to your vehicle condition,
road surface conditions, and your own per-
CAUTION
1- Location of the tread wear indicator  A compact spare tire can be installed tempo-
2- Tread wear indicator sonal driving habits. Any time you notice
rarily in place of a tire that has been removed
unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as pos- during the tire rotation. However, it must not
sible. be included in the regular tire rotation
Tread wear indicators are built into the origi-
sequence.
nal equipment tires on your vehicle to help When rotating tires, check for uneven wear,
you know when your tires should be replaced. damage, and wheel alignment. Abnormal
Many states have laws requiring that you wear is usually caused by a wrong tire pres-
replace your tires at this point. sure, wheels that are not aligned properly,
These indicators are molded into the bottom wheels that are out-of-balance, or severe
of the tread grooves and will appear when the braking.
tire tread is worn down to 1/16 inch Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
(1.6 mm). dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
find out the reason for uneven tread wear.

Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)
CAUTION Snow tires Tire chains

 If the tires have arrows (A) indicating the N00940000359 N00940100129
correct direction of rotation, swap the front In some areas of the country, snow tires are
and rear tires on the left-hand side of the
required for winter driving. If snow tires are
CAUTION
vehicle and the front and rear tires on the  Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle.
required in your area, you must choose snow
right-hand side of the vehicle separately. The clearance between the chains and the
Keep each tire on its original side of the tires of the same size and type as the original
body is not sufficient to allow proper clear-
vehicle. When installing the tires, make sure tires provided with your vehicle. Snow tires ance, and the vehicle body might be dam-
the arrows point in the direction in which the should also be installed on all four wheels. aged.
wheels will turn when the vehicle moves for- Otherwise your safety and vehicle handling
ward. Any tire whose arrow points in the can be reduced.
wrong direction will not perform to its full Even where laws may permit it, snow tires
potential. should not be operated at sustained speeds
Clutch pedal free play (if so
over 75 mph (120 km/h). equipped)
9
N00940201097
Front
CAUTION To check the clutch pedal free play (A), turn
 If flange nuts are used on your vehicle, off the engine and press the pedal until you
change to tapered nuts when using snow tires feel resistance.
with steel wheels.
 Only Mitsubishi Motors genuine wheels Clutch pedal free play:
should be used, because your vehicle is .2 to .4 inch (4 to 9 mm)
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem.
Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
to install the tire pressure sensor properly.
CAUTION
 Avoid the combined use of different types of
tires. Using different types of tires can affect
vehicle performance and safety.

Brake pedal free play

slowly and count the number of clicks of the
Brake pedal free play ratchet. Wiper blades
N00940301333 N00940700170
To check the brake pedal free play (A), turn Parking brake lever stroke: Check the wiper blades occasionally. Clean
off the engine and press the brake pedal sev- 3 to 5 notches them regularly to remove deposits of salt and
eral times with your foot. Then press the road film. Use a sponge or cloth and a mild
pedal down with your fingers until you first Also check to see if the lever stays gripped by detergent or non-abrasive cleaner to clean the
feel resistance. the ratchet after pulling. blades and glass areas.
Replace the blades if they continue to streak
Brake pedal free play:
or smear.
.1 to .3 inch (3 to 8 mm)
NOTE
 Do not run the wipers on dry glass for a long
time. This wears out the rubber and can
scratch the glass.
9
During cold weather
If the blades are frozen to the windshield or

Parking brake break-in rear window, do not operate the wipers until
If the free play is not within these limits, take N00936200031 the ice has melted and the blades are freed,
your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Break-in the parking brake linings whenever otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your the brake performance of the parking brake is
choice for adjustment. insufficient or whenever the parking brake Emission-control system
linings and/or discs are replaced, in order to
assure the best brake performance. maintenance
Parking brake lever stroke This procedure is described in the vehicle ser- N00940800201
N00940400180
vice manual and can be carried out by an Your vehicle is equipped with an emission-
Check the parking brake lever travel occa- authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. control system that meets all the requirements
sionally. To check this, pull the lever up of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

Emission-control system maintenance

and Environment Canada. The emission-con-
trol system is made of:
NOTE Fuel hoses
 To meet government regulations and pro- N00941000037
 a positive crankcase ventilation system mote cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped Check the hose surfaces for any heat and
 an evaporative emission-control system with an onboard diagnostic system (OBD).
mechanical damage, hard and brittle rubber,
The engine electronic control module that
 an exhaust emission-control system cracking, tears, cuts and abrasions. Pay spe-
controls OBD functions stores various data
(especially about the exhaust emissions). cial attention to the hoses closest to high heat
The maintenance services listed in the This data will be erased if the battery cable is sources such as the exhaust manifold. Check
“WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE disconnected, which could make a rapid all the hose connections, such as clamps and
MANUAL” must be performed at the times diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect the couplings, to make sure they are secure and
or mileages listed to keep the emission-con- battery cable when the engine malfunction that there are no leaks. If you see any wear or
trol system working properly. These, and all indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or damage, replace the hoses immediately.
the other “general” maintenance services “Check engine light”) is on.
listed in this manual, need to be performed to
keep your vehicle running properly and reli- Intake valve clearance
9 ably. Spark plugs N00950100050
N00940900215
Have the valve clearance checked at an
You may need more frequent maintenance if authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the
you drive your vehicle in harsh conditions Spark plugs must fire properly for good
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND
such as dusty areas or do a lot of start-and- engine performance and emission-control.
stop driving. Do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping.
If the engine sounds abnormally loud, have
Change them at the mileage listed in the
adjustments made by an authorized
To be sure the emission-control system works “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
properly, have your vehicle inspected and MANUAL”.
maintained by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your NOTE Fuel system (tank, pipe line and
choice following the schedule in the “WAR-  Use the spark plugs listed under “Engine connection, and fuel tank filler
RANTY AND MAINTENANCE MAN- specifications” on page 11-5 or plugs that are cap)
UAL”. exactly the same. Other plugs could cause N00941300085
You should also have an inspection and ser- engine damage, performance problems or
vice any time you suspect a malfunction. radio noise. Check these regularly for damage or leaks in
the fuel lines and connections. Check the fuel
tank filler cap for damage or looseness. Pay
special attention to the fuel lines closest to
General maintenance
high heat sources such as the exhaust mani- there are other parts which do not usually  Severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn
fold. need regular maintenance. spots. If the fabric casing of the hose is
But, if any of these parts stops working prop- showing through any cracks or worn spots
WARNING erly, your vehicle performance could suffer. in the rubber hose cover, the hose should
 If you see a fuel leak or if you smell fuel,
Have these items checked if you notice a be replaced. The brakes can fail if the
do not run the engine. Any spark (includ- problem with them. hose wears through.
ing from the ignition), flame or smoking  Improper installation may cause twisting,
material could cause an explosion or fire. See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or wheel, tire or chassis interference.
Call an authorized Mitsubishi Motors for assistance, if you have any questions.
for assistance.
Ball joint, steering linkage seals
Disc brake pads, rear drum and drive shaft boots
brake linings and rear wheel N00941800077
Evaporative emission control cylinders Check the following parts for damage and
system (except evaporative grease leaks:
9
N00941600033
Good brakes are essential to safe driving.

emission canister) Check the brake pads and brake linings for  Ball joint boots of the front suspension
N00941400116
wear and check the rear wheel cylinders for and steering linkage
If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or dam- leaks. For good braking performance, replace  Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft
aged, the fuel-vapor mixture will escape, pol- the brake pads with the same type pads as the
luting the air. originals. Exhaust system
Have the system checked at an authorized
N00942200108
Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage spec-
Brake hoses
ified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE- WARNING
NANCE MANUAL”. N00941700047
 Carbon monoxide gas from your vehicle’s
Brake hoses and tubing should be checked exhaust is poisonous. Breathing these
for: fumes can cause unconsciousness or death.
General maintenance
N00941500159
The best way to keep carbon monoxide gas
The next pages list the maintenance service
from entering inside your vehicle is to have
recommended by Mitsubishi Motors Corpo-
the engine exhaust system properly serviced.
ration. In addition to the general maintenance
that needs to be performed at the times listed,
For cold and snowy weather

Have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and nearby body areas
Hood lock release mechanism Additional equipment (For
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispo- and safety catch regions where snow is encoun-
sitioned parts if you notice any of the follow- N00942500114
tered)
ing: The hood lock release mechanism and hood
safety catch should be checked, cleaned, and It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short-
 A change in the sound of the exhaust sys- oiled when needed for easy movement and to handled spade in the vehicle during the win-
tem stop rust and wear. Use Multipurpose Grease ter so that you can clear away snow if you get
 The smell of exhaust fumes inside the NLGI Grade 2 sparingly for all sliding parts stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping
vehicle of the hood latch and release lever. Work the snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for
 The underside or rear of the vehicle is grease into the hood lock mechanism until all the windshield, side and rear window are also
damaged the movable surfaces are covered. useful.
Also, put a light coat of the same grease on
Also check the exhaust system each time the the safety catch wherever moving parts touch.
vehicle is raised for lubrication, oil changes, Fusible links
9 or required service. Any open seams or loose N00942700259
connections could let dangerous exhaust For cold and snowy weather The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if
fumes seep into the luggage compartment and N00942600102
a large current attempts to flow through cer-
passenger compartments.
tain electrical systems.
Ventilation slots In case of a melted fusible link, see your
Check for any of the following authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
conditions: The ventilation slots in front of the wind- repair facility of your choice for inspection
shield should be brushed clear after a heavy and replacement.
 Check for holes or exhaust gas leaks snowfall so that the operation of the heating For the fusible links, please refer to “Fuse
caused by corrosion or damage. and ventilation systems will not be impaired. load capacities” on page 9-30.
 Check the joints and connections for
looseness or exhaust gas leaks.
 Check the rubber hangers and brackets for Weatherstripping WARNING
 Fusible links must not be replaced by any
damage.
other device. Failing to fit the correct fus-
To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping
ible link may result in fire in the vehicle,
on the doors, engine hood, etc., they should property destruction and serious or fatal
be treated with silicone grease. injuries at any time.

Fuses
1. Open the fuse lid and pull to remove it.
Fuses WARNING
N00942800801  When changing fuses, do not damage the
driver’s knee airbag harness or acciden-
tally strike the airbag area with hard
Fuse block location objects. Improper work methods could
result in an accidental driver’s knee air-
To prevent damage to the electrical system bag deployment or could make the
from short-circuiting or overloading, each driver’s knee airbag inoperable. Either of
individual circuit is equipped with a fuse. The these situations could result in serious
fuse blocks are located in the passenger com- injury or death.
partment and in the engine compartment.
2. For vehicles with the bottom cover, use NOTE

Passenger compartment  When finished, be sure to return the puller to
the puller to loosen the 2 clips (A) and
the fuse block in the engine compartment.
push down the bottom cover. The puller is 9
in the fuse block in the engine compart-
ment. Refer to “Fuse replacement” on 3. To put back the fuse lid, line up the fuse
page 9-33. lid hook (B) with the clamp (C) on the
instrument panel and push the lid back in.
A- Main fuse block

B- Sub fuse block
The fuse blocks in the passenger compart-

ment are located behind the fuse lid on the
driver’s side as shown.

Fuses
Engine compartment Passenger compartment fuse loca- Sym- Capac-

No. Electrical system
tion table bol ity
In the engine compartment, the fuse block is 4 Windshield wiper 30 A
located as shown in the illustration.
Passenger compartment fuse location 5 Optional 10 A
6 Door locks 20 A
Main fuse block Sub fuse block 7 Radio 15 A
8 Control unit relay 7.5 A
Interior lights
9 15 A
(Dome lights)
Hazard warning
10 15 A
flasher
9 11 Rear window wiper 15 A
1. Push the lock lever. 12 Gauges 7.5 A

2. Remove the fuse block cover. Cigarette
13 lighter/Accessory 15 A
Fuse load capacities socket
N00954800231 14 Ignition switch 10 A
This fuse list shows the names of the electri- 15 Sunroof 20 A
cal systems and their fuse capacities.
There are spare fuses in the cover of the fuse Sym- Capac- Outside rearview
No. Electrical system 16 10 A
block in the engine compartment. Always bol ity mirrors
replace a blown fuse with one of the same All-wheel drive sys-
1 Heater 30 A* 17 10 A
capacity as the original. tem
Stop lights
2 15 A 18 Back-up lights 7.5 A
(Brake lights)
3 Rear fog light 10 A 19 Accessory socket 15 A

Fuses
Sym- Capac- Engine compartment fuse location Sym- Capac-
No. Electrical system No. Electrical system
bol ity table bol ity
Power window con- 3 Automatic transaxle 20 A
20 30 A*
trol Engine compartment fuse location
4 Horn 10 A
21 Defogger 30 A*
5 Alternator 7.5 A
Heated
22 outside rearview 7.5 A 6 Headlight washer 20 A
mirrors
7 Air conditioning 10 A
23 115V Power outlet 15 A
ETV/Oil Except
25 (20) * cooler fan for vehi-
24 Power seats /
A (Twin cles with
25 Heated seats 30 A Clutch turbo-
8 15 A
SST) charger 9
*- Fusible link Behind the fuse block cover Vehicles
ETV with tur-
 Some fuses may not be installed on your bocharger
vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
* 9 Security horn 20 A
or specifications.
 The table above shows the main equip- 10 Wiper deicer 15 A
ment corresponding to each fuse.
11 — — —
*- Front of the vehicle 12 Power gate 30 A
Daytime running
13 10 A
Sym- Capac- lights
No. Electrical system
bol ity Headlight
14 10 A
1 Front fog lights 15 A (high beam) (left)
Headlight
2 Engine 7.5 A 15 10 A
(high beam) (right)

Fuses
Sym- Capac- Sym- Capac- Sym- Capac-
No. Electrical system No. Electrical system No. Electrical system
bol ity bol ity bol ity
Head- Vehicles Anti-lock braking
ENG/ 27 30 A*
light with tur- 20 A system
Dis- POWER
16 (low/high 20 A bocharger Air conditioning con-
charge 28 30 A*
beam) ENG/ Except denser fan motor
(left) 22 20 A
POWER for vehi-
29 Radiator fan motor 40 A*
Head- cles with
light Fuel line turbo- 30 IOD IOD 30 A
Dis- 25 A
17 (low/high 20 A heater charger
charge 31 Audio amplifier 30 A
beam) Except
(right) 32 Diesel 30 A
for vehi-
Headlight cles with 15 A 33 — Spare fuse 10 A
9 18
(low
Halogen 10 A 23
Fuel turbo- 34 — Spare fuse 15 A
beam) pump charger
35 — Spare fuse 20 A
(left) Vehicles
Headlight with tur- 20 A *- Fusible link
(low bocharger
19 Halogen 10 A
beam)  Some fuses may not be installed on your
24 Starter 30 A*
(right) vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
Except or specifications.
Except
for vehi-  The table above shows the main equip-
for vehi- Valve lift
ENG/ cles with 40 A* ment corresponding to each fuse.
cles with control
POWER turbo-
turbo- 25
20 10 A charger There are no 7.5 A, 25 A or 30 A spare fuses.
charger
Vehicles If a fuse of one of these capacities blows,
Vehicles replace it temporarily by borrowing one of
I/C — — with tur- —
with tur- the fuses indicated below.
SPRAY bocharger
bocharger 7.5 A: 10 A spare fuse
Anti-lock braking 25 A: 20 A spare fuse
21 Ignition coil 10 A 26 40 A*
system 30 A: 30 A audio amplifier fuse

Fuses
Replace the borrowed fuse with a fuse that 4. Use the fuse location diagrams and the
has the correct capacity as soon as possible. matching tables, to check the fuse that is
related to the problem. If the fuse is not
Identification of fuse blown, something else must be causing
the problem. Contact an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
Capacity Color of your choice to have the problem
7.5 A Brown checked.
10 A Red
15 A Blue
20 A Yellow 3. Clamp it on the fuse you wish to remove,
25 A Natural (White) and pull the fuse straight out from the fuse
block.
Green (fuse type)/Pink (fusible
30 A
link type) 9
40 A Green
B- Fuse is OK
Fuse replacement
C- Blown fuse
N00954900027
1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off

the electrical item connected to the fuse 5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity
and turn the ignition switch to the securely into the appropriate slot.
“LOCK” position.
2. There is a fuse puller (A) in the engine
CAUTION
compartment fuse block.
 Never use a fuse with a capacity greater than
the one listed or any substitute, such as wire,
foil etc. This would cause the circuit wiring
to heat up and could cause a fire.

Replacement of light bulbs

[Except for vehicles with high intensity dis-
CAUTION NOTE charge headlights]
 If the replacement fuse blows again after a  When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
short time, have the electrical system washed, the inside of the lens sometimes
ANSI
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors becomes temporarily foggy. This is the same
dealer or a repair facility of your choice to phenomenon as when window glass mists up Trade No.
Description Wattage
find and correct the cause. on a humid day, and does not indicate a func- or Bulb
tional problem. type
When the light is switched on, the heat will Front turn sig-
Replacement of light bulbs remove the fog. However, if water gathers 1-
nal light
21 W WY21W
N00942900219 inside the light, please have it checked by an
Before replacing a bulb, be sure the light is authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a Head light, 9005
2- 60 W
off. Do not touch the glass part of the new repair facility of your choice. high beam HB3
bulb with your bare fingers; the oil from your Head light, low
skin will stay on the glass and dim or destroy Bulb capacity beam/Daytime
9006
3- running light 51 W
9 the bulb when it gets hot. N00943000099
(if so equipped)
HB4
The bulb should only be replaced with a new
CAUTION bulb with the same rating and type. The type (Halogen bulb)
 Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after and rating are listed on the base of the bulb. Front fog light
4- 55 W H11
being turned off. (if so equipped)
When replacing a bulb, wait for it to cool
sufficiently before touching it. You could
Outside Front side-
N00950301932 5- marker and 5W W5W
otherwise be burned.
parking light
Front
Side turn signal
NOTE light (on out-
 If you are unsure of how to carry out the 6- side rear-view — —
work as required, it is recommended that mirror) (If so
these procedures be carried out by an autho- equipped)
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
Side turn signal
facility of your choice.
light (on
 Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body 7- 5W —
when removing a light and lens.
fender) (If so
equipped)


[For vehicles with high intensity discharge ANSI
headlights]
WARNING
 Check with an authorized Mitsubishi
Trade No.
Description Wattage
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your or Bulb
Wattage ANSI type
choice when it is necessary to repair a dis-
or Can- Trade No. charge headlight or to replace the bulb.
Description High-mounted
dle or Bulb The power circuit, bulb and electrodes 8- — —
stop light
power type generate high voltages that may cause a
severe electrical shock. License plate
Front turn sig- 9- 5W W5W
1- 21 W WY21W light
nal light
10- Back-up light 21 W 7440
Daytime run- 27 W NOTE
2- 1156 11- Tail light 5W W5W
ning light 32 cp  The side turn signal light (on outside rear-
view mirror) uses LEDs rather than bulbs. Tail and stop
Head light, 12- 21/5 W 7443
For repair and replacement, contact an light
low/high beam
3- 35 W — authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
(Discharge
repair facility of your choice. 13-
Rear turn sig-
21 W 7440 9
bulb) nal light
 It is not possible to repair or replace only the
4- Front fog light 55 W H11 bulb for the side turn signal light (on fender). Rear side-
14- 5W W5W
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors marker light
Front side-
5- marker and 5W WY5W when the light needs to be repaired or
parking light replaced. NOTE
Side turn signal  The high-mounted stop light uses LEDs
light (on out- rather than bulbs. For repair and replace-
6- — — Rear
side rear-view ment, contact an authorized Mitsubishi
mirror) Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice.

Inside Headlights (low beam, except

N00950400460
for vehicles with high intensity
discharge headlights)
N00943100872
1. For vehicles equipped with turbocharger,

when replacing the bulb on the driver’s
side, remove the bolt (A) holding down
the relay box and move the relay box
toward the rear of the vehicle.
3. Turn the bulb (C) counterclockwise, and

Description Wattage then remove the headlight bulb with
9 holder.
1- Trunk area light 5W
2- Dome light (rear) (if so
8W
equipped)
Dome light (front)/
3- Reading light (if so 8W
equipped) *- Front of the vehicle

when replacing the bulb on the passen-
ger’s side, lift up the engine coolant reser-
voir (B).
4. While holding down the tab (D), pull out

the bulb (E).


2. Turn the cap (B) counterclockwise to
remove it.
5. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.
Headlights (high beam, except *- Front of the vehicle
for vehicles with high intensity
CAUTION 3. Turn the bulb (C) counterclockwise to 9
 Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas
N00943100885
remove it.
inside a halogen light bulb is highly pressur-
ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a 1. When replacing the bulb on the front pas-
halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter. senger’s side, remove the bolt (A) holding
 Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare down the washer tank spout and move the
hand, dirty glove, etc. The oil from your spout toward the rear of the vehicle.
hand could cause the bulb to break the next
time the headlights are used.
If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with
alcohol and let it dry completely before
installing the bulb.
4. While holding down the tab (D), pull out

the bulb (E).

2. Turn the cap (B) counterclockwise to
remove it.

steps in reverse.
Daytime running lights (for *- Front of the vehicle
vehicles with high intensity dis-
9 CAUTION 3. Turn the socket (C) counterclockwise to
 Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas
charge headlights)
N00900300103
remove it.
inside a halogen light bulb is highly pressur-
ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a 1. When replacing the bulb on the front pas-
halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter. senger’s side, remove the bolt (A) holding
 Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare down the washer tank spout and move the
hand, dirty glove, etc. spout toward the rear of the vehicle.
The oil from your hand could cause the bulb
to break the next time the headlights are
used.
4. Turn the bulb counterclockwise while

pressing it and pull it out of the socket.

Adjustment of headlight aim when replacing the bulb on the passen-
N00943200121
ger’s side, lift up the engine coolant reser-
The alignment of the headlights should be voir (B).
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
Parking and side-marker lights

(except for vehicles with high
intensity discharge headlights)
N00917300512
5. To install a bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse. 1. For vehicles equipped with turbocharger,
when replacing the bulb on the driver’s
side, remove the bolt (A) holding down
Headlights (low/high beam, for the relay box and move the relay box *- Front of the vehicle 9
vehicles with high intensity dis- toward the rear of the vehicle.
charge lights) 3. Turn the socket (C) counterclockwise to
N00943100625
remove it.
Do not attempt to disassemble or repair head-
lights, and do not attempt to replace their
bulbs.
WARNING
 A high voltage is present in the power cir-
cuit and in the bulbs and bulb terminals.
To avoid the risk of an electric shock, con-
tact an authorized Mitsubishi dealer *- Front of the vehicle
whenever repair or replacement is neces-
sary. *- Front of the vehicle
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

Type 1
5. To install the bulb, perform the removal 4. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
steps in reverse.
9 Parking and side-marker lights

Type 2
(for vehicles with high intensity
N00917300538
1. To create enough work space, turn the

steering wheel all the way in the direction
opposite to the side you wish to replace.
2. Remove the clips (A), and screws (B) or
bolts (B) to turn up the cover (C). 5. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse.
Front turn signal lights

N00943400325
1. Remove the clips (A) and clips (B), then

3. Turn the socket (D) counterclockwise to remove the duct (C) and the upper cover
remove it. (D).

Except for vehicles with turbocharger Front fog lights (Type 1) (if so
equipped)
N00943601786
1. Remove the screw (A) and pull the cover

out.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.

9
2. Remove the screws (B) and pull the entire

light unit out.

steps in reverse.
2. Remove the entire socket and bulb assem-

bly (E) by turning it counterclockwise.

NOTE CAUTION
 When unfastening the screws, be careful not  Never hold the halogen lights bulb with a
to mistakenly move the beam position bare hand, dirty glove, etc.
adjustment screw (C). The oil from your hand could cause the bulb
to break the next time the fog lights are used.

steps in reverse.
9 NOTE
 When mounting the cover, align the hooks
3. Push the connector (D) to disconnect and (F) on the cover with the hole in the body.
remove the fog light.
Front fog lights (Type 2) (if so

equipped)
N00943601799
1. Remove the screw (A).
CAUTION
 Handle halogen light bulbs with care. The
4. Remove the bulb assembly (E) by turning gas inside a halogen light bulb is highly pres-
it counterclockwise. surized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching
a halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.

Passenger’s side Driver’s side
2. Pull the cover out in the direction of the 5. Remove the bulb assembly (E) by turning
arrow shown in the illustration.
NOTE it counterclockwise.
 When unfastening the screws, be careful not
to mistakenly move the beam position
adjustment screw (C). 9
3. Remove the screws (B) and pull the entire 6. To install the bulb, perform the removal
light unit out. 4. Push the connector (D) to disconnect and steps in reverse.
remove the fog light.
NOTE
 When mounting the cover, align the hook (F)
on the cover with the hole in the body.


2. Remove the light unit in the rear direc-
NOTE tion.
CAUTION
 Handle halogen light bulbs with care. The Rear combination lights 3. Remove the socket and bulb assemblies
gas inside a halogen light bulb is highly pres- N00943701514
9 surized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching
by turning them counterclockwise.
a halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter. Tail and stop lights, rear turn sig-
 Never hold the halogen lights bulb with a
bare hand, dirty glove, etc.
nal lights and rear side-marker
The oil from your hand could cause the bulb lights
to break the next time the fog lights are used.
If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with 1. Remove the screws (A) from the light
alcohol and let it dry completely before unit.
B- Tail and stop light

C- Rear turn signal light
D- Rear side-marker light


Remove the clips (A) and remove the
Tail and stop light and Rear side-marker Back-up light Tail light
cover (B).
Rear turn signal light light
5. To install the bulb, perform the removal 4. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse. steps in reverse.
2. Remove the socket and bulb assemblies
NOTE by turning them counterclockwise.
License plate light 9
 When mounting the light unit, align the pins
N00944000331
(E) on the light unit with the holes in the
1. Remove the screws (A) from the license
body.
plate light lens (B). Then, remove the lens
and gasket (C), and withdraw the bulb.
C- Tail light
D- Back-up light
Tail lights and back-up lights
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Remove the socket and bulb assembly
together by turning it counterclockwise.

2. While holding down the tab (A), pull out
Dome light (front)/Reading the bulb.
lights (if so equipped)
N00944500206
1. Insert a screwdriver into the notch of the

light assembly. Gently pry to remove the
lens.
NOTE
 Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screw-
driver to keep from scratching the lens.

steps in reverse.


3. To install the bulb, perform the removal 2. While holding down the tab (A), pull out
steps in reverse.
Dome light (rear) (if so equipped)
the bulb.
N00944100260
NOTE 1. Insert a screwdriver into the notch of the

 Before replacing the bulb, put the dome light light assembly and pry gently to remove
(front)/reading lights switch into the “OFF” the lens.
position.
 When mounting the lens, align the tab (B)
with the hole on the vehicle body.

steps in reverse. 9
NOTE
NOTE  Before replacing the bulb, put the dome light
(rear) switch into the “OFF” position.
 Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screw-
driver to keep from scratching the lens.  When mounting the lens, align the tab (B)
with the hole on the vehicle body.

Vehicle care precautions
Trunk area light CAUTION CAUTION

N00944800094  Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some  Do not use organic substances (solvents,
1. Pull both clips (A) away from the center are poisonous. Others are highly flammable. benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or
as shown and remove the light unit. Then Some are dangerous if you breathe their alkaline or acidic solutions.
remove the bulb by pulling out. fumes in a closed space. When you use any- These chemicals can cause discoloring,
thing in a container to clean your vehicle, be staining or cracking of the surface.
sure to follow the instructions. Always open If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make
your vehicle doors or windows when you’re sure their ingredients do not include the sub-
cleaning the inside. Never use the following stances mentioned above.
chemicals to clean your vehicle:
• Gasoline
• Carbon Tetrachloride NOTE
• Benzine  Always read the instructions on the cleaner
• Kerosene label.
• Naphtha
9 • Acetone
• Turpentine Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and
2. To install the bulb, perform the removal • Paint Thinner
steps in reverse. • Lacquer Thinner
flocked parts
N00945300171
• Nail Polish Remover
1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth
Vehicle care precautions soaked in a 3 % solution of gentle soap
N00945100153 These can all be dangerous, and they all can and water.
damage your vehicle. 2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring out
In order to maintain the value of your vehicle,
perform regular maintenance using the proper well. Using this cloth, wipe off the deter-
materials and procedures. Be sure to use only Cleaning the inside of your gent thoroughly.
those materials and procedures that meet your
local environmental pollution control regula-
vehicle
N00945200079
tions. Choose the materials you will use care-
fully, to be sure that they do not contain After washing the inside of your vehicle with
corrosives. If you are not sure, contact an any cleaner, wipe it dry in a shady, well venti-
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for help lated area.
in choosing these materials.

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle
NOTE NOTE NOTE

 Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and pro-  If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat  The genuine leather surface may harden and
tectants containing silicones or wax. upholstery, draw a suitable defuzzing brush shrink if it is exposed to the direct sunlight
Such products, when applied to the instru- over the surface in one direction. for long hours. When your vehicle is parked,
ment panels or other parts, may cause reflec- place it in the shade as much as possible.
tions on the windshield and obscure vision.  When the temperature of the vehicle interior
Also, if such products get on the switches of rises in summer, vinyl products left on the
the electrical accessories, it may lead to fail-
Genuine leather (if so equipped)
genuine leather seat may deteriorate and
N00945600161
ure of these accessories. stick to the seat.
1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a
soft cloth soaked in a 5 % solution of gen-
Upholstery tle soap and water. Cleaning the outside of your
N00945500131
2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, vehicle
1. To maintain the value of your new vehi- wring it out well, and wipe off all the N00945700061
soap.
cle, maintain the upholstery carefully and
keep the interior clean. 3. To preserve and protect, use a leather pro-
To protect your vehicle’s finish, wash it often 9
and thoroughly. If desired, you may wax your
Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean tecting agent on the genuine leather sur-
vehicle using a nonabrasive automobile wax.
the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic face.
leather should be cleaned with an appro-
Foreign material
priate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be NOTE N00945800046
cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a  If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe it
3 % solution of gentle soap in lukewarm with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildew Industrial pollution, road tar, bird droppings,
water. may grow. tree sap, insect remains, sea water and other
2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum  The genuine leather surface can be damaged foreign matters can damage the finish on your
cleaner and remove any stains with carpet if brushed with a nylon or synthetic fiber vehicle.
cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by brush. Generally, the longer any foreign material
lightly dabbing with a clean white cloth  Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene, stays on the finish, the worse the damage.
and spot remover. alcohol, gasoline, acid or alkaline solvents Wash your vehicle as soon as possible when-
can discolor the genuine leather surface and ever the finish gets soiled.
should not be used.
 Genuine leather seats can mildew if not kept
clean. Clean up any oil stains immediately.

Washing CAUTION CAUTION

N00945900526  Never spray or splash water on the electrical • Put down (except for vehicles with SIRIUS
Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust parts in the engine compartment. This may satellite radio antenna) or remove the
damage them. Be careful also when washing antenna.
picked up from air, rain, snow or road sur-
the underbody. Do not spray water into the • If your vehicle is equipped with rear
faces can damage the paint and body of your
engine compartment. spoiler, check with the car wash operator
vehicle if left on.
 Avoid automatic car washers that use rotat- before using the car wash.
Frequent washing and waxing is the best way ing brushes. These brushes may scratch the • If your vehicle has rain sensor wipers, place
to protect your vehicle from this damage. paint surface and make it dull. the wiper switch lever in the “OFF” posi-
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Scratches are more noticeable on darker col- tion to deactivate the rain sensor.
Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with ored vehicles.
water to remove dust. Next, using plenty of  Some hot water washing equipment uses
clean water and a car washing mitt or sponge, high pressure and heat to clean your vehicle.
During cold weather
wash the vehicle from top to bottom. This heated water may damage your vehi-
Use a mild car washing soap if necessary. cle’s resin parts. It can flood the interior of Salt and other chemicals spread on winter
9 Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a cham- the vehicle. Therefore, be sure of the follow- roads in some geographical areas can have a
ing: detrimental effect on the vehicle underbody.
ois or soft cloth. After washing the vehicle,
• Keep the washing nozzle at least 20 inches You should flush the underbody with a high
carefully clean the joints and flanges of the
(50 cm) away from the vehicle body. pressure hose every time you wash the out-
doors, hood, etc., where dirt is likely to
• When washing around the door glass, hold side of your vehicle.
remain.
the nozzle at a distance of more than 20
Take special care to remove mud or other
inches (50 cm) and at right angles to the
debris which could trap and hold salt and
CAUTION glass surface.
moisture.
 When washing the underside of your vehicle  When using high-pressure water to wash a
vehicle equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key sys- After washing your vehicle, wipe off all
or the wheels, wear a pair of gloves to pro-
tect your hands. tem, keep the water from spraying on the waterdrops from the rubber parts around the
 If your vehicle has rain sensor wipers, place open button on the trunk. This could cause doors to prevent the doors from freezing.
the wiper switch lever in the “OFF” position the trunk to open and flood the inside of the
to deactivate the rain sensor before washing trunk.
the vehicle. Otherwise, the wipers will oper-  Make sure to do the following when using an
ate in the presence of water spray on the automatic car wash, with help from either
windshield and may get damaged as a result. this manual or the car wash operator, to
avoid damaging your vehicle:
• Fold the outside mirrors.

NOTE CAUTION Damaged paint

 When the door is frozen, opening it by force  Do not use gasoline, kerosene, benzine or N00946200063
may tear off or crack the rubber gasket paint thinners to remove road tar or other dirt Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat
installed around the door. Pour warm water from the vehicle surface.
should be touched up as soon as possible with
to melt the ice. Be sure to thoroughly wipe  Do not put wax on the areas having black
touch-up paint to prevent corrosion.
off the water after opening the door. To pre- matte coating because it can cause uneven
vent freezing of the weatherstripping on the Check body areas facing the road or the tires
discoloration, patches, blurs, etc. If these get
doors, hood, etc., treat with silicone lubri- wax on them, wipe the wax off right away carefully for damage to the paint caused by
cant. with a soft cloth and warm water. flying stones, etc. The paint code number for
 On vehicles with sunroof, be careful not to your vehicle can be found on the vehicle
apply any wax on the weatherstrip (black information code plate in the engine compart-
Waxing rubber) when waxing the area around the ment.
sunroof opening.
N00946000188
If stained with wax, the weatherstrip cannot
Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, or maintain a weatherproof seal with the sun- Cleaning plastic parts
when water does not bead up on the paint. roof. N00946300178
9
Use a soft cloth to put a small amount of wax Use a sponge or chamois to clean these parts.
on the painted surfaces. After the wax has If a vehicle wax sticks to a gray or black
dried, polish with a dry soft cloth.
Polishing
rough surface of the bumper, molding or
N00946100059
Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight. lights, the surface may appear white in color.
You should wax when the painted surfaces If painted surfaces have been severely dam- In this case, wipe it off using lukewarm water
are cool. aged and lost their original luster and color and a soft cloth or chamois.
tone, polish the surface lightly with a fine
polishing compound. Avoid limiting your
CAUTION polishing to the damaged surface only; polish CAUTION
 Waxes containing high abrasive compounds  Do not use a scrubbing brush or other rough
a somewhat wider area, moving the polishing
should not be used. These waxes remove rust scrubber as these may damage the plastic
and stain effectively from the paintwork, but
cloth in one direction. After polishing, flush
surface.
are harmful to the finish on the paint and the the compound from the surface and apply a
 Do not use wax containing compounds (pol-
plate, because they also remove clearcoat. coat of wax to regain a beautiful luster.
ishing powder) which may damage the plas-
They are also harmful to other glossy sur- tic surface.
faces such as the grille, trim, moldings, etc.

CAUTION CAUTION Cleaning the sunroof (if so

 Do not let the plastic parts get soiled with  Do not use a brush or other hard implement equipped)
gasoline, oil, brake fluids, engine oils, on the wheels.
N00946800072
greases, paint thinner, and sulfuric acid (bat- Doing so could scratch the wheels.
tery electrolyte). These fluids, etc., may  Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra- Clean the inside of the sunroof with a soft
crack, stain or discolor the plastic parts. sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing cloth. Hard deposits should be wiped away
If any of these get on the plastic parts, wipe so could cause the coating on the wheels to with a cloth dipped in warm, neutral deter-
them up with a soft cloth or chamois and a peel or become discolored or stained.
gent solution. Wipe away the solution with a
mild solution of soap and water. Then rinse  Do not directly apply hot water using a steam
them immediately with water. sponge dipped in fresh water.
cleaner or by any other means.
 Contact with seawater or road salt used for
Chrome parts de-icing can cause corrosion. Rinse off such NOTE
substances as soon as possible.  The surface treatment on the inside of the
N00946400065
glass may be removed if a hard cloth or
To prevent spots and corrosion of chrome organic solvent is used.
9 parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and
Window glass
apply a nonabrasive automotive wax. If the
N00946600067
chrome is severely damaged or pitted, use a Engine compartment
commercially available chrome polish. The window glass can usually be cleaned
N00947000042
using only a sponge and water. Glass cleaner
can be used to remove wax, oil, grease, dead Never spray or splash water on the electrical
Aluminum wheels (if so insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it components in the engine compartment, as
equipped) dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth. this may cause damage.
N00946500196 Do not allow any nearby parts (such as plastic
1. Remove dirt using a wet sponge. parts) come into contact with sulphuric acid
Wiper blades (battery electrolyte), which may crack, stain,
2. Use a mild detergent on any dirt that can-
N00946700097
not be removed easily with water. or discolour them.
Rinse off the detergent after washing the Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove If this occurs, wipe the parts with a soft cloth
wheel. grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper saturated with a mild detergent and water
3. Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamois blades. solution.
leather or a soft cloth. Replace the wiper blades when they no longer Then immediately rinse the affected parts
clean the windshield and rear window prop- with plenty of water.
erly.

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) ....................10-2

Reporting Safety Defects ...............................................................10-2
Important facts to know in case of an accident ..............................10-4
10
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

their use, however, and may depart signifi- material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
Consumer information (For cantly from the norm due to variations in tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
vehicles sold in U.S.A.) driving habits, service practices and differ- to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-
N01047100100 ences in road characteristics and climate. sponds to a level of performance which all
This information is provided in compliance passenger car tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
with the requirements of the National High- Traction AA, A, B, C Grades B and A represent higher levels of
way Traffic Safety Administration, Depart-
ment of Transportation. It provides the performance on the laboratory test wheel than
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, the minimum required by law.
purchasers and/or prospective purchasers
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent
with information on reporting safety defects. the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on WARNING
 The temperature grade for this tire is
Uniform tire quality grading specified government test surfaces of asphalt
established for a tire that is properly
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle traction performance. speed, underinflation, or excessive load-
tires must conform to Federal Safety Require- ing, either separately or in combination,
10 ments in addition to these grades. The spe- WARNING can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
cific grade rating in each grade category is  The traction grade assigned to this tire is
shown on the side wall of the tires on your based on straight-ahead braking traction
vehicle. tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction Reporting Safety Defects
characteristics.
Treadwear N01047201485
If you believe that your vehicle has a

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Temperature A, B, C defect which could cause a crash or
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested could cause injury or death, you
under controlled conditions on a specified should immediately inform the
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
government test course. For example, a tire
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the National Highway Traffic Safety
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
(11/2) times as well on the government course heat when tested under controlled conditions
tion to notifying Mitsubishi Motors
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of Sustained high temperature can cause the Corporation.
10-2 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects

If NHTSA receives similar com- For vehicles sold in U.S.A. To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
plaints, it may open an investigation, Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or
and if it finds that a safety defect To contact Mitsubishi Motors North write to:
exists in a group of vehicles, it may America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or
order a recall and remedy campaign. Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Can-
write to: ada, Inc.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems Mitsubishi Motors North Amer- Customer Relations Department
between you, your dealer, or Mit- ica, Inc. P.O. Box 41009
subishi Motors Corporation. Customer Relations Department 4141 Dixie Road
P.O. Box 6400 Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Cypress, CA 90630-0064
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico
9153); go to
For vehicles sold in Canada
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of 10
If you live in Canada, and you Caribbean, Inc.
NHTSA Headquarters
believe that your vehicle has a safety call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE
West Building defect, you should immediately Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
Washington, DC 20590 notify Transport Canada, in addition Caribbean, Inc.
to notifying Mitsubishi Motor Sales Customer Service Department
of Canada, Inc. You may write to: P.O. Box 192216
You can also obtain other informa-
Transport Canada SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
tion about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov. 330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 For vehicles sold in Guam
To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-3
Important facts to know in case of an accident

call (671)649-3673 or write to: Pacific Marketing, Inc. Key information to discuss with
P.O. Box 698 your insurance company
Triple J Enterprises, Inc. PAGO PAGO,
P.O. Box 6066 AMERICAN SAMOA AS,  Understand your repair estimate before
TAMUNING 96799 approving repairs.
GUAM 96931  Choosing the repair shop and the brands
of parts that they use on your vehicle is
your decision.
Important facts to know in  Ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts.
For vehicles sold in Saipan Many times, to save money, your insur-
case of an accident
ance company will recommend imitation
N01047300229
To contact Triple J Motors parts that do not meet the original specifi-
We hope you will never be involved in an cations of fit, finish, corrosion resistance
call (670)234-7133 or write to: accident, but there is always that potential or workmanship.
danger. So, please be sure to buckle up and
Triple J Motors drive safely.
10 P.O. Box 500487 Mitsubishi Motors built-in pro-
SAIPAN, MP96950-0487 In the event of an accident tection
 Remain calm. The strength and integrity built into your Mit-
For vehicles sold in American  Check for injuries. Report all injuries to subishi vehicle is the result of a specific
the police, and, if necessary, call for an design referred to as “Energy Management”.
Samoa ambulance. Individual body parts are designed to act as
 Record all the details of the accident. This one unit in the event of an accident. Shock
To contact Pacific Marketing Inc. will provide you with accurate records of waves are absorbed by protective panels or
call 684(699)9140 or write to: the accident for discussions with your are channeled around the passenger compart-
insurance company and other persons ment. This important feature is possible
who may be acting on your behalf. because high tensile steel is used in Mitsubi-
shi Motors panels and structural parts, some-
thing that cannot be guaranteed by the
manufacturers of imitation parts. All Genuine
Mitsubishi Motors body panels and support
10-4 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Important facts to know in case of an accident

brackets are designed and constructed as you expect. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
important protection features in the event of replacements parts are your guarantee that
an accident. By replacing body parts with your vehicle will have all the technological
imitations, your vehicle may no longer meet advantages and maintain the style and protec-
original equipment specifications. tion of a brand new Mitsubishi Motors.
Remember to ask for genuine Mitsubishi
Motors parts.
Consumer rights (For vehicles
sold in U.S.A.)
As a consumer requesting repair on your

vehicle, you have consumer rights. Across the
country, State Insurance Commissioners have
begun considering rules on the use of non-
OEM parts. This could mean that repair shops
will have to disclose to the consumer, when
they intend to use non-OEM parts. Since reg- 10
ulations are not consistent on this point,
remember you have a choice. So, if you want
genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, you may
have to specifically request them. Make cer-
tain your insurance company understands
imitations are not to be used in the repair of
your vehicle. You deserve the best genuine
Mitsubishi Motors parts.
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors

parts
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts are built

with the high quality and durability standards
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-5

Specifications
Vehicle labeling .............................................................................11-2

Vehicle dimensions ........................................................................11-4
Vehicle weights ..............................................................................11-4
Engine specifications .....................................................................11-5
Battery ............................................................................................11-5
Tires and wheels ............................................................................11-5
Refill capacities .............................................................................11-6
11
Vehicle labeling
Vehicle labeling 1 - Vehicle emission control 4 - Vehicle information code

N01147400696 information label plate
Keep a record of the chassis number and
vehicle identification number. Such informa- The vehicle emission control information The vehicle information code plate is located
tion will assist the police if your vehicle is label is affixed on the inside panel of the on the front passenger door sill.
stolen. engine hood.
Chassis number
Except for vehicles with turbocharger
2 - Vehicle identification num-
ber plate The chassis number is stamped on the floor
under the front passenger seat. It is visible by
The vehicle identification number is stamped pulling back the carpet flap as shown in the
on the plate riveted to the left front corner of illustration.
the vehicle body. It is visible from outside of
the vehicle through the windshield.
11 3 - Air conditioning label

Vehicles with turbocharger The air conditioning label is affixed on the
inside panel of the engine compartment.
Engine serial number
The engine serial number is stamped on the

cylinder block as shown in the illustration.
11-2 Specifications
Vehicle labeling
Type 1
Certification label
N01148200196
The certification label (A) is located on the

driver’s door sill.
Type 2
Tire and loading information
placard
N01148100528
The tire and loading information placard is

located on the driver’s door sill. 11
Specifications 11-3
Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle dimensions
N01147500482
Item Vehicles with 16 inch tire Vehicles with 18 inch tire

Overall length 180.0 in (4,570 mm)
Overall width 69.4 in (1,760 mm)
Overall height 58.3 in (1,480 mm) 58.7 in (1,490 mm)
Wheel base 103.7 in (2,635 mm)
Vehicle weights
N01147600890
2.0 liter 2.4 liter
Item Front-wheel drive vehi- Front-wheel drive vehi- All-wheel drive

All-wheel drive vehicles
cles cles vehicles
11 Gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) 3,969 lb (1,800 kg) 4,388 lb (1,990 kg) 4,079 lb (1,850 kg) 4,190 lb (1,900 kg)
Gross axle weight rating Front 2,227 lb (1,010 kg) 2,381 lb (1,080 kg) 2,227 lb (1,010 kg) 2,227 lb (1,010 kg)
(GAWR) Rear 2,007 lb (910 kg) 2,161 lb (980 kg) 2,007 lb (910 kg) 2,117 lb (960 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight 827 lb (375 kg)
Maximum roof load 110 lb (50 kg)
Seating capacity 5 persons
NOTE
 Roof load is important because it affects the vehicle capacity weight. Refer to “Loading cargo on the roof” on page 6-10.
GVWR: maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle
GAWR: maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle
11-4 Specifications
Engine specifications
Seating capacity: the number of maximum occupants
Engine specifications
N01147700439
2.0 liter
Item Except for vehicles with tur- 2.4 liter
bocharger
Engine model 4B11 4B12
Engine displacement 121.9 CID (1,998 cm³) 144.0 CID (2,360 cm³)
No. of cylinders and cylinder arrange-
4 in-line
ment
Bore 3.39 in (86.0 mm) 3.46 in (88.0 mm)
Stroke 3.39 in (86.0 mm) 3.82 in (97.0 mm)
Compression ratio 10.0 9.0 10.5
Thermostat valve opening temperature 189 °F (87 °C) 180 °F (82 °C) 189 °F (87 °C) 11
Spark plugs NGK DIFR6C11 DILKR7B6 DIFR5C11
.040 to .043 in .020 to .023 in .040 to .043 in
Spark plug gap
(1.0 to 1.1 mm) (0.5 to 0.6 mm) (1.0 to 1.1 mm)
Firing order 1-3-4-2
Battery Tires and wheels 16 x 6 1/2J,

Size 18 x 7J
16 x 6 1/2JJ
N01147800182 N01147901786
Wh PC
75D23L 215/45R18 4.5 in (114.3 mm)
eel D
P205/60R16 89W,
Tire Size Off-
Battery is a 12 volt type. 91H P215/45R18 1.81 in (46 mm)
89V set
Specifications 11-5
Refill capacities
PCD: Pitch Circle Diameter (installation
holes)
NOTE NOTE
 Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors  These tires satisfy vehicle loading conditions
dealer for details on the combination used on described in this owner’s manual.
your vehicle.
Refill capacities
N01148002101
Item Capacity Lubricants

Fuel (approxi- Front-wheel drive vehicles 15.5 gal (59.0 L)
Refer to “Fuel selection” on page 3-2.
mate) All-wheel drive vehicles 14.5 gal (55.0 L)
Except for vehi- Oil pan 4.2 qt (4.0 L)
cles with turbo-
charger Oil filter .32 qt (0.3 L)
2.0 liter Engine oils displaying the ILSAC certification mark
(“starbust” symbol) on the container.
11 Engine oil Vehicles with Oil pan 5.1 qt (4.8 L)
If these oils are not available, an API classification SN
turbocharger Oil filter .32 qt (0.3 L)
or higher can be used.
Oil pan 4.5 qt (4.3 L)
2.4 liter
Oil filter .32 qt (0.3 L)
Power steering As required Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Power Steering Fluid
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine NEW MULTI GEAR OIL
Manual transaxle 2.6 qt (2.5 L)
API classification GL-3 SAE 75W-80
Refer to “Continuously variable transmission (CVT)
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) 7.5 qt (7.1 L)
fluid” on page 9-11.
11-6 Specifications
Refill capacities
Item Capacity Lubricants
8.0 qt (7.6 L)
{includes .53 qt Refer to “Twin Clutch Sportronic shift transmission
Twin Clutch SST
(0.5 L) in oil (Twin Clutch SST) fluid” on page 9-12.
cooler}
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Hypoid Gear Oil API
Except for vehicles with ACD .53 qt (0.5 L)
Transfer oil classification GL-5 SAE 80
Vehicles with ACD .85 qt (0.8 L) Mitsubishi Motors Genuine LSD gear oil
.95 qt (0.9 L)
AWC control fluid {Includes hydrau- DIAMOND ATF SP III
lic piping}
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Hypoid Gear Oil API
Except for vehicles with ACD .42 qt (0.4 L)
Rear differential oil classification GL-5 SAE 80
Vehicles with ACD .58 qt (0.55 L) Mitsubishi Motors Genuine LSD gear oil
Brake/Clutch (if so equipped) As required Conforming to Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch As required Multipurpose type grease NLGI Grade 2 11
Manual trans-
7.4 qt (7.0 L)
axle
Engine coolant Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant
CVT 7.4 qt (7.0 L)
{Includes .63 qt (0.65 L) in reserve tank} Premium or an equivalent*
Twin Clutch
7.9 qt (7.5 L)
SST
Washer fluid 4.3 qt (4.0 L) —
Refer to the “Air
conditioning label”
Refrigerant (air conditioning) HFC-134a
on page
11-2.
Specifications 11-7
Refill capacities
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid tech-
nology
ACD: Active center differential system

LSD: Limited slip differential
11
11-8 Specifications
Alphabetical index
Troubleshooting ............................. 7-60 Service brake.................................. 5-89
A Automatic air conditioning .......... 7-17, 7-22 Brake assist ........................................ 5-90
Accessory (installation) ......................... 3-6 AWC control fluid.............................. 9-12 Break-in recommendations .................... 5-3
ACD (Active center differential system) 5-82 Bulb capacity...................................... 9-34
ACD control mode display .............. 5-83
ACD control mode switch ............... 5-82
B
ACD warning display...................... 5-83 Back-up lights C
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-34 California Perchlorate Materials
Active stability control (ASC) .............. 5-94
Replacement .................................. 9-45 Requirements ..................................... 3-7
ASC OFF display or ASC indicator .. 5-95
ASC operation display .................... 5-95 Ball joint, steering linkage seals and drive Capacities .......................................... 11-6
shaft boots ....................................... 9-27
Air cleaner filter ................................... 9-9 Card holder ............................ 5-184, 5-188
Battery .............................................. 9-14
Air conditioning Cargo loads ........................................ 6-10
Charging system warning light ....... 5-145
Automatic air conditioning ..... 7-17, 7-22 Catalytic converter ................................ 9-2
Checking battery electrolyte level .... 9-15
Important air conditioning operating tips..
Disconnection and connection ......... 9-16 CD player........................................... 7-29
7-28
During cold weather ....................... 9-16 Certification label ............................... 11-3
Manual air conditioning ........... 7-7, 7-12
Removing and installing the battery upper
Air purifier......................................... 7-28 cover (vehicles with turbocharger) . 9-14 Charging system warning light ........... 5-145
All-wheel driving operation ................. 5-86 Specification.................................. 11-5 Chassis number................................... 11-2
Aluminum wheels ............................... 9-52 Bluetooth 2.0 interface....................... 5-159 Child restraint..................................... 4-14 12
AM/FM radio ..................................... 7-29 Bottle holder ..................................... 5-191 Child safety locks for rear door ............ 5-39
Antenna Brake Cleaning
Roof antenna ......................... 7-62, 7-63 Anti-lock braking system ................ 5-91 Inside of your vehicle...................... 9-48
Anti-lock braking system..................... 5-91 Braking ........................................... 6-5 Outside of your vehicle ................... 9-49
Warning light / display .................... 5-92 Fluid ..................................... 9-13, 11-6 Clutch
Hose ............................................. 9-27 Fluid..................................... 9-13, 11-6
Arm rest............................................... 4-6
Parking brake................................. 5-48 Pedal free play................................ 9-24
Assist grip ........................................ 5-191 Parking brake lever stroke ............... 9-25
Coat hooks ....................................... 5-192
Audio Pedal............................................. 5-89
AM/FM radio ................................. 7-29 Pedal free play ............................... 9-25 Combination headlights and dimmer switch .
CD player ...................................... 7-29 Power brakes ................................. 5-89 5-147
12-1
Alphabetical index
Coming home light ........................... 5-151 Dome light/Reading lights Engine coolant temperature display .... 5-117
Consumer information ........................ 10-2 Bulb capacity.................................. 9-36 Exhaust system................................... 9-27
Replacement................................... 9-46
Continuously variable transmission (CVT)....
Switch.......................................... 5-186
5-61
Doors
F
Fluid .................................... 9-11, 11-6
Lock .............................................. 5-35 Filling the fuel tank............................... 3-4
Selector lever operation................... 5-61
Sports mode ................................... 5-66 Power door locks ............................ 5-37 Floor console box ............................. 5-189
Coolant (engine) .......................... 9-8, 11-6 Drive mode indicator ........................... 5-85 Floor mat ............................................. 6-2
Cruise control..................................... 5-97 Drive mode-selector ............................ 5-84 Fluid.................................................. 11-6
Indicator ........................................ 5-98 Driving during cold weather.................. 6-4 AWC control fluid .......................... 9-12
Brake fluid............................ 9-13, 11-6
Cup holder ....................................... 5-190 Driving, alcohol and drugs .................... 6-2
Clutch fluid........................... 9-13, 11-6
Continuously variable transmission (CVT)
D E fluid ................................... 9-11, 11-6
Daytime running lights Electric rear window defogger switch.. 5-158 Engine coolant ........................ 9-8, 11-6
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-34 Power steering fluid ............... 9-14, 11-6
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting
Replacement .................................. 9-38 Twin Clutch Sportronic shift transmission
system) ..................................... 5-4, 5-28
(Twin Clutch SST) fluid....... 9-12, 11-6
Defogger (rear window) .................... 5-158 Electronically controlled 4WD system .. 5-84 Washer fluid .................................. 11-6
12 Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door Drive mode indicator....................... 5-85
Fluid capacities and lubricants ............. 11-6
windows) ............... 7-12, 7-17, 7-22, 7-27 Drive mode-selector ........................ 5-84
Fog lights
Digital clock Emergency key ................................... 5-23
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-34
Time setting ................................... 7-59 Emission-control system maintenance ... 9-25 Indicator ...................................... 5-143
Dimensions ........................................ 11-4 Engine Replacement ......................... 9-41, 9-42
Dimmer (high/low beam change) ....... 5-150 Compartment................................... 9-5 Switch ......................................... 5-153
Disc brake pads .................................. 9-27 Coolant ................................... 9-8, 11-6 Free-hand advanced security transmitter
Hood............................................... 9-3 (F.A.S.T.-key) .................................. 5-12
Dome light
Oil and oil filter ....................... 9-6, 11-6
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-36 Front console boxes .......................... 5-189
Overheating..................................... 8-4
Replacement .................................. 9-47 Front console tray ............................. 5-189
Serial number ................................. 11-2
Switch ......................................... 5-186
Specifications ................................. 11-5 Front seats............................................ 4-3
12-2
Alphabetical index
Front turn signal lights Headlight leveling switch ................... 5-152
Replacement .................................. 9-40 Headlights J
Front turn signal, parking and side-marker Bulb capacity ................................. 9-34 Jack ..................................................... 8-5
lights Dimmer........................................ 5-150 Storage ............................................ 8-5
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-34 Headlight flasher ........................... 5-150 Jump-starting the engine........................ 8-2
Replacement ......................... 9-39, 9-40 Leveling switch............................. 5-152
Fuel Replacement .................................. 9-36
Fuel economy................................... 6-2 Switch.......................................... 5-147 K
Fuel hoses ...................................... 9-26 Heater without air conditioning function. 7-4 Key reminder buzzer ........................... 5-36
Modification/alterations to the electrical or High beam indicator .......................... 5-143 Keyless entry system............................. 5-7
fuel systems ................................... 3-6 Keys .................................................... 5-3
Hill start assist (vehicles with Twin Clutch
Tank capacity .......................... 3-4, 11-6
SST) ............................................... 5-90
Fuel Pump Shut-off System ................. 8-15
Hood lock release mechanism and safety L
Fuel selection ....................................... 3-2 catch ............................................... 9-28 Labeling............................................. 11-2
Fuses ................................................. 9-29 Horn switch ...................................... 5-159 License plate light
Fusible links....................................... 9-28 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-34
I Replacement................................... 9-45
G If the vehicle breaks down..................... 8-2 Limited-slip differential....................... 5-88
12
General maintenance ........................... 9-27 Ignition switch ........................... 5-16, 5-53 Link System ..................................... 5-159
General vehicle data............................ 11-4 Important facts to know in case of an accident Loading information.............................. 6-6
Genuine parts ....................................... 3-6 10-4 Lubricants .......................................... 11-6
Glove compartment........................... 5-188 Indicators ......................................... 5-143 Luggage floor boxes.......................... 5-190
Information screen display ................. 5-145
H Inside day/night rearview mirror .......... 5-50 M
Hazard warning flasher switch ........... 5-153 Inside emergency trunk lid release ....... 5-41 Malfunction indicator ........................ 5-144
Hazard warning lights ....................... 5-143 Interior lights .................................... 5-185 Manual air conditioning....................... 7-12
Head restraints...................................... 4-6 Manual transaxle................................. 5-59
Oil........................................ 9-11, 11-6
12-3
Alphabetical index
Shift points (recommended speed).... 5-60 Fluid ..................................... 9-14, 11-6
Mirror System ........................................... 5-96 S
Inside day/night rearview mirror ...... 5-50 Power windows................................... 5-44 Safe driving techniques ......................... 6-4
Outside rearview mirrors ................. 5-52 Puncture (Tire changing)....................... 8-6 Seat ..................................................... 4-2
Modifications to and racing of your vehicle... Arm rest .......................................... 4-6
3-5 Front seats ....................................... 4-3
R Heated seats ..................................... 4-5
Multi-information display.................. 5-110
Radiator cap ........................................ 9-9 Rear seats ........................................ 4-5
Radio Seats and restraint systems ................ 4-2
O General information about your radio 7-63 Seat belt............................................... 4-8
Octane requirement............................... 3-2 Rain sensor....................................... 5-155 Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor. 4-12
Oil Rear axle oil ....................................... 9-12 Child restraint ................................ 4-14
Engine oil ............................... 9-6, 11-6 Driver’s seat belt reminder/warning.. 4-11
Rear side-marker lights Force limiter .................................. 4-14
Manual transaxle oil .............. 9-11, 11-6
Bulb capacity.................................. 9-34 Front passenger seat belt warning light .....
Rear axle oil................................... 9-12
Replacement................................... 9-44 4-12
Transfer oil .................................... 9-12
Rear turn signal lights Maintenance and inspection............. 4-21
Operation under adverse driving conditions...
Bulb capacity.................................. 9-34 Pre-tensioner .................................. 4-13
8-14
Replacement................................... 9-44 Seat belt extender ........................... 4-12
12 Outside rearview mirrors ..................... 5-52
Rear window defogger switch ............ 5-158 Seat belt instructions ......................... 4-9
Overheating ......................................... 8-4 Seat belt use during pregnancy......... 4-13
Rear-view camera ............................. 5-106
Service brake...................................... 5-89
Rearview mirror
P Inside............................................. 5-50 Service precautions ............................... 9-2
Parking ................................................ 6-6 Outside .......................................... 5-52 Snow tires .......................................... 9-24
Parking brake ................................. 5-48 Refrigerant (air conditioning) ............... 11-6 Spark plugs ........................................ 9-26
Parking brake lever stroke ............... 9-25
Replacement of light bulbs................... 9-34 Steering
Polishing............................................ 9-51 Power steering fluid ............... 9-14, 11-6
Replacing tires and wheels ................... 9-22
Power brakes...................................... 5-89 Tilt lock lever................................. 5-50
Reporting Safety Defects ..................... 10-2
Power door locks ................................ 5-37 Wheel lock............................ 5-20, 5-55
Roof antenna ............................. 7-62, 7-63
Power steering Storage spaces .................................. 5-187
12-4
Alphabetical index
Sun visors ........................................ 5-184 Towing.............................................. 8-12 USB input terminal device
Supplemental Restraint System ............ 4-21 Trailer towing .................................... 6-11 How to connect a USB memory ..... 5-181
How the Supplement Restraint System Transfer oil ........................................ 9-12
works .......................................... 4-24
Trunk area light V
Servicing ....................................... 4-36
Replacement .................................. 9-48 Vanity mirror.................................... 5-184
Warning light/display...................... 4-27
Trunk lid ........................................... 5-39 Vehicle care precautions...................... 9-48
T Turbocharger operation....................... 5-59 Vehicle dimensions ............................. 11-4
Turn signal light Vehicle labeling.................................. 11-2
Tank capacity .............................. 3-4, 11-6
Indicators ..................................... 5-143 Vehicle preparation before driving.......... 6-3
Theft-alarm system
Turn signal lights Vehicle weights .................................. 11-4
System........................................... 5-42
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-34
Time Setting....................................... 7-59 Vents ................................................... 7-2
Lever ........................................... 5-152
Tire pressure monitoring system......... 5-102 Replacement .................................. 9-40
Warning light/display.................... 5-103 Twin Clutch SST (Sportronic Shift W
Tires .................................................. 9-17 Transmission) .................................. 5-70 Warning lights .................................. 5-144
How to change a tire ......................... 8-6 Fluid ..................................... 9-12, 11-6 Washer
Inflation pressure ............................ 9-21 Gearshift lever operation................. 5-70 Fluid..................................... 9-13, 11-6
Maintenance................................... 9-22 Gearshift lever position display........ 5-71
Quality grading............................... 10-2 Manual shift................................... 5-76
Switch ......................................... 5-157 12
Windshield washer........................ 5-157
Replacing tires and wheels............... 9-22 Manual shift display ....................... 5-79
Rotation ......................................... 9-23 Twin Clutch SST control mode display .... Waxing .............................................. 9-51
Size (tire and wheel) ....................... 11-5 5-76 Weights ............................................. 11-4
Snow tires ...................................... 9-24 Twin Clutch SST control mode switch ..... Welcome light .................................. 5-151
Tire and loading information placard . 6-7, 5-75
Wheel
11-3 Warning display ............................. 5-72
Covers ........................................... 8-11
Tire chains ..................................... 9-24
Specification .................................. 11-5
Tread wear indicators ...................... 9-23
U Wiper
Tissue holder .................................... 5-190
USB input terminal............................ 5-181 Rain sensor .................................. 5-155
Tools ................................................... 8-5 How to connect an iPod ................. 5-182 Windshield................................... 5-154
Storage ............................................ 8-5
12-5
Alphabetical index
Wiper blades .................................. 9-25
12
12-6
How to calculate your gasoline mileage

N09348201032
NOTE
Name of Owner Date of Purchase
Address of Owner Model of Vehicle
Name and Address of Dealer Vehicle Identification Number
Maintenance record
Kilometers
Service Performed Date Inspection and Maintenance Item
Miles

2015 Mitsubishi Lancer 104439 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2015 Mitsubishi Lancer 104439 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BK0210300US.

book 1 ページ ２０１４年４月８日 火曜日 午前１０時４６分

Introduction Throughout this manual the words WARNING and CAUTION

©2014 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation Printed in Japan

Instruments and controls (Driver’s area)

1 Instruments and controls (Driver’s area)

Except for RALLIART

Instrument cluster P.5-108 Sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter

Combination headlights and dimmer

Fuses P.9-29 Steering wheel tilt lock lever

Supplemental restraint system - driver’s knee airbag

Instruments and controls (Driver’s area)

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

Cruise control switches

Ignition switch P.5-53

Headlight leveling switch

Fuses P.9-29 Steering wheel tilt lock lever P.5-50

Supplemental restraint system - driver’s knee airbag

Engine hood release lever P.9-3 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface P.5-159

Instruments and controls

1 Instruments and controls

Except for RALLIART Supplemental restraint system - airbag (for front

Fuel tank filler door

Floor console box (if so equipped) P.5-189

Instruments and controls

Parking brake lever

Fuel tank filler door Heated seat switch

Floor console box P.5-189

Audio (if so equipped) P.7-29 DISPLAY AUDIO (if so equipped)

Heater (if so equipped) Air conditioning

Power window switches Power door lock switch

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface microphone (if so equipped) P.5-159

Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor Inside rearview mirror

Sun visors P.5-184

Bottle holder (for front seat) P.5-191

Front seats P.4-3

Supplemental restraint system - side airbag

Coat hook (if so equipped) P.5-192

Assist grip P.5-191

Rear seat P.4-5

Arm rest (if so equipped) P.4-6

Inside emergency trunk lid release lever

AWC control fluid reservoir

Fuel tank filler

Outside rearview mirrors P.5-52

Front fog lights (if so equipped) P.5-153, 9-34, 9-41

Front side-marker and park-

Fuel tank filler P.3-4

Outside rearview mirrors P.5-52

Front side-marker and parking Front side-marker and park-

Except for RALLIART

Antenna P.7-62 Tire inflation pressure P.9-21

Trunk lid P.5-39

Trunk lid OPEN switch

License plate lights

Trunk lid P.5-39

Trunk lid OPEN switch

License plate lights

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

Warning light Do this Ref. page

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Quick index 2-1

book 1 ページ２０１４年４月８日　火曜日　午前１０時４６分